EX-IQ-BOXK04 OperatingManual en 06

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX
Digital Interface Module

R&S®DigIConf Software
User Manual
(>9ÅÔP)
1409.5570.32 ─ 06
Test & Measurement
User Manual
This document describes the R&S®EX-IQ-BOX models:
● R&S®EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 and its options,
● R&S®EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505.02,
and the R&S®DigIConf (Digital Interface Configurator) software.
The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages. For information, see the "Open Source
Acknowledgement" on the user documentation CD-ROM (included in delivery).
Rohde & Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing.
© 2017 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Mhldorfstr. 15, 81671 Mnchen, Germany
Phone: +49 89 41 29 - 0
Fax: +49 89 41 29 12 164
E-mail: [email protected]
Internet: www.rohde-schwarz.com
Subject to change – Data without tolerance limits is not binding.
R&S® is a registered trademark of Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG.
Trade names are trademarks of the owners.
Throughout this manual R&S® is abbreviated as R&S and applies to the following R&S products: R&S®EX-IQ-BOX , R&S®DigIConf,
R&S®AMU200A, R&S®SMU200A, R&S®SMBV100A, R&S®SMJ100A, R&S®FSQ, R&S®FSW, R&S®FSG, R&S®FMU36, R&S®FSV,
R&S®CMW500 and R&S®WinIQSIM2.
Basic Safety Instructions
Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions!
All plants and locations of the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety
standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest possible degree of safety. Our
products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed, built and tested in accordance with the
safety standards that apply in each case. Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by
our quality assurance system. The product described here has been designed, built and tested in
accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer’s plant in a condition fully
complying with safety standards. To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation, you must
observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual. If you have any questions regarding these
safety instructions, the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them.
Furthermore, it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner. This product is designed
for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or, if expressly permitted, also in the field and must
not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage. You are responsible if the
product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer's
instructions. The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product.
The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation
and within its performance limits (see data sheet, documentation, the following safety instructions). Using
the product requires technical skills and, in some cases, a basic knowledge of English. It is therefore
essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be
allowed to use the product. If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde & Schwarz products, this
will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation. Keep the basic safety instructions
and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users.
Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by
dangerous situations. Therefore, carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions
before and when using the product. It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety
instructions on personal safety, for example, that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation. In
these safety instructions, the word "product" refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde &
Schwarz group of companies, including instruments, systems and all accessories. For product-specific
information, see the data sheet and the product documentation.
Safety labels on products

The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers.
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Notice, general danger location ON/OFF Power
Observe product documentation
Caution when handling heavy equipment Standby indication
Danger of electric shock Direct current (DC)
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 1
Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning
Caution ! Hot surface Alternating current (AC)
Protective conductor terminal Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)

To identify any terminal which is intended for
connection to an external conductor for
protection against electric shock in case of a
fault, or the terminal of a protective earth
Earth (Ground) Class II Equipment

to identify equipment meeting the safety
requirements specified for Class II equipment
(device protected by double or reinforced
insulation)
Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators
For additional information, see section "Waste

disposal/Environmental protection", item 1.
Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive EU labeling for separate collection of electrical
devices and electronic devices
For additional information, see section "Waste

disposal/Environmental protection", item 2.
Warning! Laser radiation
For additional information, see section

"Operation", item 7.
Signal words and their meaning

The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks
and dangers.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or
serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates information considered important, but not hazard-related, e.g.
messages relating to property damage.
In the product documentation, the word ATTENTION is used synonymously.
These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European
Economic Area. Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic
areas or military applications. It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here
are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product. The
use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation
and in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 2
Operating states and operating positions

The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the
manufacturer, without the product's ventilation being obstructed. If the manufacturer's specifications are
not observed, this can result in electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or death. Applicable local
or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work
performed.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the following requirements apply to Rohde & Schwarz products:
predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down, IP protection 2X, use only
indoors, max. operating altitude 2000 m above sea level, max. transport altitude 4500 m above sea
level. A tolerance of ±10 % shall apply to the nominal voltage and ±5 % to the nominal frequency,
overvoltage category 2, pollution degree 2.
2. Do not place the product on surfaces, vehicles, cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability
are unsuitable for this purpose. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when
installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures (e.g. walls and shelves). An installation
that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or
even death.
3. Do not place the product on heat-generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters. The ambient
temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in
the data sheet. Product overheating can cause electric shock, fire and/or serious personal injury or
even death.
Electrical safety
If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary, electric shock,
fire and/or serious personal injury or death may occur.
1. Prior to switching on the product, always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product
matches the nominal voltage of the mains-supply network. If a different voltage is to be set, the power
fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly.
2. In the case of products of safety class I with movable power cord and connector, operation is
permitted only on sockets with a protective conductor contact and protective conductor.
3. Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not
permitted. Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product. If extension cords
or connector strips are implemented, they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are
safe to use.
4. If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the mains, or if the power switch is not
suitable for this purpose, use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the
mains. In such cases, always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all
times. For example, if the power plug is the disconnecting device, the length of the connecting cable
must not exceed 3 m. Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection
from the AC supply network. If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems,
the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level.
5. Never use the product if the power cable is damaged. Check the power cables on a regular basis to
ensure that they are in proper operating condition. By taking appropriate safety measures and
carefully laying the power cable, ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be
hurt by, for example, tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 3
6. The product may be operated only from TN/TT supply networks fuse-protected with max. 16 A (higher
fuse only after consulting with the Rohde & Schwarz group of companies).
7. Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty. Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the
socket provided for this purpose. Otherwise, sparks that result in fire and/or injuries may occur.
8. Do not overload any sockets, extension cords or connector strips; doing so can cause fire or electric
shocks.
9. For measurements in circuits with voltages Vrms > 30 V, suitable measures (e.g. appropriate
measuring equipment, fuse protection, current limiting, electrical separation, insulation) should be
taken to avoid any hazards.
10. Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment, e.g. PCs or other industrial
computers, comply with the IEC 60950-1 / EN 60950-1 or IEC 61010-1 / EN 61010-1 standards that
apply in each case.
11. Unless expressly permitted, never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in
operation. Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries, fire or damage to the
product.
12. If a product is to be permanently installed, the connection between the protective conductor terminal
on site and the product's protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is
made. The product may be installed and connected only by a licensed electrician.
13. For permanently installed equipment without built-in fuses, circuit breakers or similar protective
devices, the supply circuit must be fuse-protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the
product, as well as the product itself, is adequately protected from injury or damage.
14. Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage (such as that caused by a bolt of
lightning) can reach the product. Otherwise, the person operating the product will be exposed to the
danger of an electric shock.
15. Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this
purpose. Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and/or electric shocks, fire or injuries.
16. Unless specified otherwise, products are not liquid-proof (see also section "Operating states and
operating positions", item 1). Therefore, the equipment must be protected against penetration by
liquids. If the necessary precautions are not taken, the user may suffer electric shock or the product
itself may be damaged, which can also lead to personal injury.
17. Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the
product, e.g. if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment. Penetration by water
increases the risk of electric shock.
18. Prior to cleaning the product, disconnect it completely from the power supply (e.g. AC supply network
or battery). Use a soft, non-linting cloth to clean the product. Never use chemical cleaning agents such
as alcohol, acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers.
Operation
1. Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration. Make sure that persons
who use the products are physically, mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so; otherwise, injuries
or material damage may occur. It is the responsibility of the employer/operator to select suitable
personnel for operating the products.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 4
2. Before you move or transport the product, read and observe the section titled "Transport".
3. As with all industrially manufactured goods, the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction
(allergens) such as nickel cannot be generally excluded. If you develop an allergic reaction (such as a
skin rash, frequent sneezing, red eyes or respiratory difficulties) when using a Rohde & Schwarz
product, consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or
stress.
4. Before you start processing the product mechanically and/or thermally, or before you take it apart, be
sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled "Waste disposal/Environmental protection",
item 1.
5. Depending on the function, certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated
level of electromagnetic radiation. Considering that unborn babies require increased protection,
pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures. Persons with pacemakers may also be
exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation. The employer/operator must evaluate workplaces
where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and, if necessary, take measures to avert the
potential danger.
6. Should a fire occur, the product may release hazardous substances (gases, fluids, etc.) that can
cause health problems. Therefore, suitable measures must be taken, e.g. protective masks and
protective clothing must be worn.
7. Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class. Lasers
can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely
concentrated electromagnetic power. If a laser product (e.g. a CD/DVD drive) is integrated into a
Rohde & Schwarz product, absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the
product documentation. The objective is to prevent personal injury (e.g. due to laser beams).
8. EMC classes (in line with EN 55011/CISPR 11, and analogously with EN 55022/CISPR 22,
EN 55032/CISPR 32)
 Class A equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments
that are directly connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Note: Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment. This equipment may
cause radio disturbances in residential environments, due to possible conducted as well as
radiated disturbances. In this case, the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to
eliminate these disturbances.
 Class B equipment:
Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly
connected to a low-voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings
Repair and service

1. The product may be opened only by authorized, specially trained personnel. Before any work is
performed on the product or before the product is opened, it must be disconnected from the AC supply
network. Otherwise, personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 5
2. Adjustments, replacement of parts, maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical
experts authorized by Rohde & Schwarz. Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant
to safety (e.g. power switches, power transformers, fuses). A safety test must always be performed
after parts relevant to safety have been replaced (visual inspection, protective conductor test,
insulation resistance measurement, leakage current measurement, functional test). This helps ensure
the continued safety of the product.
Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells

If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells is not observed either at all or to the
extent necessary, product users may be exposed to the risk of explosions, fire and/or serious personal
injury, and, in some cases, death. Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes (e.g.
lithium cells) must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard.
1. Cells must not be taken apart or crushed.
2. Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire. Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided.
Keep cells and batteries clean and dry. Clean soiled connectors using a dry, clean cloth.
3. Cells or batteries must not be short-circuited. Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a
drawer where they can short-circuit each other, or where they can be short-circuited by other
conductive materials. Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they
are ready to be used.
4. Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted.
5. If a cell develops a leak, the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes. If
contact occurs, wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid.
6. Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes (e.g. lithium cells)
can cause explosions. Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde & Schwarz type (see
parts list) in order to ensure the safety of the product.
7. Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste. Rechargeable batteries
and normal batteries that contain lead, mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste. Observe the
national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling.
8. Follow the transport stipulations of the carrier (IATA-DGR, IMDG-Code, ADR, RID) when returning
lithium batteries to Rohde & Schwarz subsidiaries.
Transport
1. The product may be very heavy. Therefore, the product must be handled with care. In some cases,
the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product (e.g. with a lift-truck) to avoid
back or other physical injuries.
2. Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product. It is
therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as
cranes, fork lifts, wagons, etc. The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the
means of transport or lifting. Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of
transport or lifting. Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 6
Instrucciones de seguridad elementales
3. If you use the product in a vehicle, it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely
and properly. The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions. Never use the
product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle. Adequately secure the
product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident.
Waste disposal/Environmental protection

1. Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of with unsorted
municipal waste, but must be collected separately. It may only be disposed of at a suitable collection
point or via a Rohde & Schwarz customer service center.
2. Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste, but
must be collected separately.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for
take-back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU. Contact your
Rohde & Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product.
3. If products or their components are mechanically and/or thermally processed in a manner that goes
beyond their intended use, hazardous substances (heavy-metal dust such as lead, beryllium, nickel)
may be released. For this reason, the product may only be disassembled by specially trained
personnel. Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health. National waste disposal
regulations must be observed.
4. If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special
way, e.g. coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly, the safety instructions of the
manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal
regulations must be observed. Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product
documentation. The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fuels can cause health problems
and lead to environmental damage.
For additional information about environmental protection, visit the Rohde & Schwarz website.

¡Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad!
El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde & Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al día
con los estándares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el máximo grado de seguridad. Nuestros
productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados según las normas de
seguridad vigentes. Nuestro sistema de garantía de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas
estas normas. El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado según el certificado de conformidad
de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable según los estándares técnicos de seguridad.
Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros, el usuario deberá
atenerse a todas las indicaciones, informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta. El grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz está siempre a su disposición en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas
informaciones de seguridad.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 7
Además queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida. Este producto
está destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o, si ha sido expresamente
autorizado, para aplicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deberá ser utilizado de modo que alguna
persona/cosa pueda sufrir daño. El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las
instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario. El fabricante no se hace en ninguna
forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto.
Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las
indicaciones de la correspondiente documentación del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento
definido (ver hoja de datos, documentación, informaciones de seguridad que siguen). El uso del producto
hace necesarios conocimientos técnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma inglés. Por eso se debe tener
en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en
profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes. Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el
uso de productos de Rohde & Schwarz, encontraría la información debida en la documentación del
producto en el capítulo correspondiente. Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales, así
como la documentación del producto, y entréguelas a usuarios posteriores.
Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o daños por
peligros de toda clase. Por eso es imprescindible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las
siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto, y respetarlas durante el uso del
producto. Deberán tenerse en cuenta todas las demás informaciones de seguridad, como p. ej. las
referentes a la protección de personas, que encontrarán en el capítulo correspondiente de la
documentación del producto y que también son de obligado cumplimiento. En las presentes
informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas
Rohde & Schwarz bajo la denominación de "producto", entre ellos también aparatos, instalaciones así
como toda clase de accesorios. Los datos específicos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la
documentación del producto.
Señalización de seguridad de los productos

Las siguientes señales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros.
Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado
Aviso: punto de peligro general Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN

MARCHA / PARADA
Observar la documentación del producto
Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Indicación de estado de espera (standby)

elevado
Peligro de choque eléctrico Corriente continua (DC)
Advertencia: superficie caliente Corriente alterna (AC)
Conexión a conductor de protección Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 8
Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado
Conexión a tierra El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un

aislamiento doble (reforzado)
Conexión a masa Distintivo de la UE para baterías y

acumuladores
Más información en la sección

"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 1.
Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por

sensibles a la electrostática (ESD) separado de dispositivos eléctricos y
electrónicos

"Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente",
punto 2.
Advertencia: rayo láser

"Funcionamiento", punto 7.
Palabras de señal y su significado

En la documentación del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de señal con el fin de advertir contra
riesgos y peligros.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, causa lesiones
graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones graves o incluso la muerte.
Indica una situación de peligro que, si no se evita, puede causar
lesiones leves o moderadas.
Indica información que se considera importante, pero no en relación
con situaciones de peligro; p. ej., avisos sobre posibles daños
materiales.
En la documentación del producto se emplea de forma sinónima el
término CUIDADO.
Las palabras de señal corresponden a la definición habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el área
económica europea. Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definición en otras áreas económicas o
en aplicaciones militares. Por eso se deberá tener en cuenta que las palabras de señal aquí descritas
sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinación con la correspondiente documentación del producto y
solamente en combinación con el producto correspondiente. La utilización de las palabras de señal en
combinación con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones
equivocadas y tener por consecuencia daños en personas u objetos.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 9
Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento

El producto solamente debe ser utilizado según lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados
operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilación. Si no se siguen las
indicaciones del fabricante, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con
posible consecuencia de muerte. En todos los trabajos deberán ser tenidas en cuenta las normas
nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevención de accidentes.
1. Si no se convino de otra manera, es para los productos Rohde & Schwarz válido lo que sigue:
como posición de funcionamiento se define por principio la posición con el suelo de la caja para
abajo, modo de protección IP 2X, uso solamente en estancias interiores, utilización hasta 2000 m
sobre el nivel del mar, transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar. Se aplicará una tolerancia de
±10 % sobre el voltaje nominal y de ±5 % sobre la frecuencia nominal. Categoría de sobrecarga
eléctrica 2, índice de suciedad 2.
2. No sitúe el producto encima de superficies, vehículos, estantes o mesas, que por sus características
de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para él. Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalación del
fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras (p. ej. paredes y estantes). Si
se realiza la instalación de modo distinto al indicado en la documentación del producto, se pueden
causar lesiones o, en determinadas circunstancias, incluso la muerte.
3. No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor (p. ej. radiadores o calefactores). La
temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura máxima especificada en la documentación del
producto o en la hoja de datos. En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto, pueden producirse
choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte.
Seguridad eléctrica
Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad
eléctrica, pueden producirse choques eléctricos, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia
de muerte.
1. Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se deberá comprobar siempre que la tensión
preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentación eléctrica. Si es necesario
modificar el ajuste de tensión, también se deberán cambiar en caso dado los fusibles
correspondientes del producto.
2. Los productos de la clase de protección I con alimentación móvil y enchufe individual solamente
podrán enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protección
conectado.
3. Queda prohibida la interrupción intencionada del conductor de protección, tanto en la toma de
corriente como en el mismo producto. La interrupción puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de
que el producto sea fuente de choques eléctricos. Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de
enchufe, deberá garantizarse la realización de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su
estado técnico de seguridad.
4. Si el producto no está equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red, o bien si el
interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexión de la red, el enchufe del cable de
conexión se deberá considerar como un dispositivo de desconexión.
El dispositivo de desconexión se debe poder alcanzar fácilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible.
Si, p. ej., el enchufe de conexión a la red es el dispositivo de desconexión, la longitud del cable de
conexión no debe superar 3 m).
Los interruptores selectores o electrónicos no son aptos para el corte de la red eléctrica. Si se
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 10
integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el

nivel de la instalación.
5. No utilice nunca el producto si está dañado el cable de conexión a red. Compruebe regularmente el
correcto estado de los cables de conexión a red. Asegúrese, mediante las medidas de protección y
de instalación adecuadas, de que el cable de conexión a red no pueda ser dañado o de que nadie
pueda ser dañado por él, p. ej. al tropezar o por un choque eléctrico.
6. Solamente está permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentación TN/TT aseguradas con fusibles
de 16 A como máximo (utilización de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de
empresas Rohde & Schwarz).
7. Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo. Introduzca el enchufe por
completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente. La no observación de estas medidas puede provocar
chispas, fuego y/o lesiones.
8. No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente, los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto
podría causar fuego o choques eléctricos.
9. En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensión U eff > 30 V se deberán tomar las medidas
apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro (p. ej. medios de medición adecuados, seguros, limitación
de tensión, corte protector, aislamiento etc.).
10. Para la conexión con dispositivos informáticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial, debe
comprobarse que éstos cumplan los estándares IEC60950-1/EN60950-1 o IEC61010-1/EN 61010-1
válidos en cada caso.
11. A menos que esté permitido expresamente, no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa
mientras el producto esté en servicio. Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes eléctricos y
puede causar lesiones, fuego o daños en el producto.
12. Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo, se deberá primero conectar el conductor de protección fijo
con el conductor de protección del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexión. La instalación y
la conexión deberán ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado.
13. En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no estén provistos de fusibles, interruptor automático ni otros
mecanismos de seguridad similares, el circuito de alimentación debe estar protegido de modo que
todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto, así como el producto mismo, estén a salvo de
posibles daños.
14. Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensión (debida p. ej. a una caída del rayo) mediante
los correspondientes sistemas de protección. Si no, el personal que lo utilice quedará expuesto al
peligro de choque eléctrico.
15. No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ningún objeto que no esté destinado a ello.
Esto puede producir cortocircuitos en el producto y/o puede causar choques eléctricos, fuego o
lesiones.
16. Salvo indicación contraria, los productos no están impermeabilizados (ver también el capítulo
"Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento", punto 1). Por eso es necesario tomar las
medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de líquidos. En caso contrario, existe peligro de choque
eléctrico para el usuario o de daños en el producto, que también pueden redundar en peligro para las
personas.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 11
17. No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido
condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de éste, como p. ej. al desplazarlo de un lugar frío a
otro caliente. La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque eléctrico.
18. Antes de la limpieza, desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentación de tensión (p. ej. red de
alimentación o batería). Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un paño suave, que no se deshilache.
No utilice bajo ningún concepto productos de limpieza químicos como alcohol, acetona o diluyentes
para lacas nitrocelulósicas.
Funcionamiento
1. El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentración durante el manejo.
Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto estén a la altura de los requerimientos
necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes físicas, psíquicas y emocionales, ya que de otra manera no se
pueden excluir lesiones o daños de objetos. El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar
el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto.
2. Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto, lea y tenga en cuenta el capítulo "Transporte".
3. Como con todo producto de fabricación industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad
de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados ―los llamados
alérgenos (p. ej. el níquel)―. Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde & Schwarz se producen
reacciones alérgicas, como p. ej. irritaciones cutáneas, estornudos continuos, enrojecimiento de la
conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias, debe avisarse inmediatamente a un médico para investigar las
causas y evitar cualquier molestia o daño a la salud.
4. Antes de la manipulación mecánica y/o térmica o el desmontaje del producto, debe tenerse en cuenta
imprescindiblemente el capítulo "Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente", punto 1.
5. Ciertos productos, como p. ej. las instalaciones de radiocomunicación RF, pueden a causa de su
función natural, emitir una radiación electromagnética aumentada. Deben tomarse todas las medidas
necesarias para la protección de las mujeres embarazadas. También las personas con marcapasos
pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiación electromagnética. El empresario/operador tiene la
obligación de evaluar y señalizar las áreas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
exposición a radiaciones.
6. Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias tóxicas
(gases, líquidos etc.) que pueden generar daños a la salud. Por eso, en caso de incendio deben
usarse medidas adecuadas, como p. ej. máscaras antigás e indumentaria de protección.
7. Los productos con láser están provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en función de la
clase de láser del que se trate. Los rayos láser pueden provocar daños de tipo biológico a causa de
las propiedades de su radiación y debido a su concentración extrema de potencia electromagnética.
En caso de que un producto Rohde & Schwarz contenga un producto láser (p. ej. un lector de
CD/DVD), no debe usarse ninguna otra configuración o función aparte de las descritas en la
documentación del producto, a fin de evitar lesiones (p. ej. debidas a irradiación láser).
8. Clases de compatibilidad electromagnética (conforme a EN 55011 / CISPR 11; y en analogía con EN
55022 / CISPR 22, EN 55032 / CISPR 32)
 Aparato de clase A:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos
conectados directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a
edificios residenciales.
Nota: Los aparatos de clase A están destinados al uso en entornos industriales. Estos aparatos
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 12
pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles

perturbaciones guiadas o radiadas. En este caso, se le podrá solicitar al operador que tome las
medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones.
 Aparato de clase B:
Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales, así como en aquellos conectados
directamente a una red de distribución de baja tensión que suministra corriente a edificios
residenciales.
Reparación y mantenimiento
1. El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorización para ello. Antes
de manipular el producto o abrirlo, es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensión de alimentación, para
evitar toda posibilidad de choque eléctrico.
2. El ajuste, el cambio de partes, el mantenimiento y la reparación deberán ser efectuadas solamente
por electricistas autorizados por Rohde & Schwarz. Si se reponen partes con importancia para los
aspectos de seguridad (p. ej. el enchufe, los transformadores o los fusibles), solamente podrán ser
sustituidos por partes originales. Después de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad
deberá realizarse un control de seguridad (control a primera vista, control del conductor de
protección, medición de resistencia de aislamiento, medición de la corriente de fuga, control de
funcionamiento). Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto.
Baterías y acumuladores o celdas

Si no se siguen (o se siguen de modo insuficiente) las indicaciones en cuanto a las baterías y
acumuladores o celdas, pueden producirse explosiones, incendios y/o lesiones graves con posible
consecuencia de muerte. El manejo de baterías y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos (p. ej. celdas de
litio) debe seguir el estándar EN 62133.
1. No deben desmontarse, abrirse ni triturarse las celdas.
2. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a calor ni fuego. Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz
directa del sol. Las celdas y baterías deben mantenerse limpias y secas. Limpiar las conexiones
sucias con un paño seco y limpio.
3. Las celdas o baterías no deben cortocircuitarse. Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o baterías en
estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto recíproco o por contacto con
otros materiales conductores. No deben extraerse las celdas o baterías de sus embalajes originales
hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse.
4. Las celdas o baterías no deben someterse a impactos mecánicos fuertes indebidos.
5. En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda, el líquido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la
piel ni los ojos. Si se produce contacto, lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un
médico.
6. En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados, las celdas o baterías que contienen electrolitos alcalinos
(p. ej. las celdas de litio) pueden explotar. Para garantizar la seguridad del producto, las celdas o
baterías solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Rohde & Schwarz correspondiente (ver lista de
recambios).
7. Las baterías y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura doméstica. Las baterías o
acumuladores que contienen plomo, mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales.
Respete en esta relación las normas nacionales de eliminación y reciclaje.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 13
8. En caso de devolver baterías de litio a las filiales de Rohde & Schwarz, debe cumplirse las
normativas sobre los modos de transporte (IATA-DGR, código IMDG, ADR, RID).
Transporte
1. El producto puede tener un peso elevado. Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con
precaución y, si es necesario, usando un sistema de elevación adecuado (p. ej. una carretilla
elevadora), a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros daños personales.
2. Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por
personas. Por eso no está permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeción en o sobre medios de transporte
como p. ej. grúas, carretillas elevadoras de horquilla, carros etc. Es responsabilidad suya fijar los
productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevación. Para evitar daños personales o
daños en el producto, siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o
elevación utilizado.
3. Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un vehículo, recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la
responsabilidad de conducir el vehículo de manera segura y adecuada. El fabricante no asumirá
ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones. No utilice nunca el producto dentro de un
vehículo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor. Asegure el producto dentro del vehículo
debidamente para evitar, en caso de un accidente, lesiones u otra clase de daños.
Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente

1. Los dispositivos marcados contienen una batería o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los
residuos domésticos sin clasificar, sino que debe ser recogido por separado. La eliminación se debe
efectuar exclusivamente a través de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atención al
cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
2. Los dispositivos eléctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos domésticos sin clasificar,
sino que deben ser recogidos por separado.
Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co.KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminación de residuos y asume
plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminación para los fabricantes dentro de la UE. Para
desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente, diríjase a su servicio de atención
al cliente de Rohde & Schwarz.
3. Si se trabaja de manera mecánica y/o térmica cualquier producto o componente más allá del
funcionamiento previsto, pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas (polvos con contenido de metales
pesados como p. ej. plomo, berilio o níquel). Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por
personal especializado con formación adecuada. Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar daños
para la salud. Se deben tener en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminación de
residuos.
4. En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que
deban tratarse como residuos especiales (p. ej. refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de
cambio definidos), deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas
sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminación de residuos. Tenga en cuenta también en caso
necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentación del producto. La
eliminación incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar daños a la salud o
daños al medio ambiente.
Se puede encontrar más información sobre la protección del medio ambiente en la página web de
Rohde & Schwarz.
1171.0000.42 - 09 Page 14
Customer Support
Technical support – where and when you need it
For quick, expert help with any Rohde & Schwarz equipment, contact one of our Customer Support
Centers. A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a
solution to your query on any aspect of the operation, programming or applications of Rohde & Schwarz
equipment.
Up-to-date information and upgrades

To keep your instrument up-to-date and to be informed about new application notes related to your
instrument, please send an e-mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish.
We will take care that you will get the right information.
Europe, Africa, Middle East Phone +49 89 4129 12345

[email protected]
North America Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)

[email protected]
Latin America Phone +1-410-910-7988

[email protected]
Asia/Pacific Phone +65 65 13 04 88

[email protected]
China Phone +86-800-810-8228 /

+86-400-650-5896
[email protected]
1171.0200.22-06.00
R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Contents
Contents
1 Preface....................................................................................................5
1.1 Documentation Overview.............................................................................................5
1.2 Typographical Conventions.........................................................................................9
2 Welcome to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX........................................................11
3 System Overview.................................................................................14
3.1 Basic Operating Modes..............................................................................................14
3.2 Components................................................................................................................21
4 Getting Started.....................................................................................26
4.1 Safety Instructions......................................................................................................26
4.2 Unpacking the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.................................................................................29
4.3 Control Elements and Connectors............................................................................29
4.4 Installing R&S DigIConf..............................................................................................34
4.5 Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX................................................................................42
4.6 Installing R&S EX-IQ-BOX Options...........................................................................44
5 Application Examples..........................................................................47
5.1 Baseband Receiver Chip Test....................................................................................47
5.2 CPRI Test Setup..........................................................................................................48
5.3 In-Circuit Emulation for Wireless Designs...............................................................51
6 R&S EX-IQ-BOX Configuration...........................................................53

6.1 R&S DigIConf Configuration Software......................................................................53
6.2 Configuration via R&S Instruments..........................................................................83
7 Protocol Settings.................................................................................95
7.1 User Defined................................................................................................................95
7.2 CPRI............................................................................................................................126
8 Remote Control Basics......................................................................213

8.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols..............................................................213
8.2 SCPI Command Structure........................................................................................222
8.3 Command Sequence and Synchronization............................................................231
8.4 General Programming Recommendations.............................................................234
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 3

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Contents
9 Remote Control Commands..............................................................236

9.1 Common Commands................................................................................................236
9.2 R&S EX-IQ-BOX - Remote Control Commands......................................................239
9.3 User Defined - Remote Control Commands...........................................................257
9.4 CPRI Remote Control Commands...........................................................................286
10 Interfaces............................................................................................355
10.1 User Interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.....................................................................355
10.2 LAN Connector..........................................................................................................357
10.3 Breakout Boards.......................................................................................................358
A Annex..................................................................................................369
A.1 Abbreviations............................................................................................................369
A.2 Extensions for User Files.........................................................................................370
A.3 Preset.........................................................................................................................371
A.4 Drawings....................................................................................................................375
List of Commands..............................................................................376
Index....................................................................................................384
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 4

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Preface
Documentation Overview
1 Preface
1.1 Documentation Overview

The user documentation describes the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and all related components.
It consists of the following parts:
● Quick start guide, printed manual,
● Online help system on the configurator software
● Documentation CD-ROM with:
– Operating manuals for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and options,
– Service manual,
– Online help system (*.chm) as a standalone help,
– Data sheet and specifications,
– Links to useful sites on the R&S internet,
– Configuration software R&S DigIConf,
1.1.1 Quick Start Guide
The Quick Start Guide is delivered with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in printed form and in PDF
format on the user documentation CD-ROM. It provides the information needed to put
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX into operation and get familiar with the device.
The guide gives an overview of the operating modes, available components (options) and
information on how to get started. Some test setting examples provide an insight into
various applications.
The quick start guide is subdivided into the data sheet, and the chapters listed in the
following overview, and an index:
Data Sheet
Informs about specifications and characteristics of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The Data sheet
is in printable form (pdf).
Introduction
Introduces the R&S EX-IQ-BOX with an overview about the functionality, features and
components.
System Overview
Describes the operating modes of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, including R&S instruments com-
municating with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and available hardware and software components.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 5

Getting Started
Describes the control elements and connectors of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the proce-
dures required for putting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX into operation. It encloses the installation
of the configuration software R&S DigIConf, installation of options, and connection of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX to an R&S instrument and the DUT.
Application Examples
Describes several application examples.
Interfaces
Contains a short description and information on the pin assignments of the user interface
and the breakout boards.
This chapter is also a part of the operating manual. Additionally you find the connection
schemes in the appendix of the operating manual.
Index
Contains an index of the quick start guide.
1.1.2 Help System
The online help is embedded in the system components R&S DigIConf and in the R&S
signal generators, offering quick context-sensitive reference to the information needed
for operating. The help contains the complete user documentation for the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX including the contents of the quick start guide.
The help files (*.chm) are also available on the CD-ROM and can be used as a standalone
help.
1.1.3 User Documentation CD-ROM
The CD-ROM provides the complete user documentation for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX,
including quick start guide, operating manual and service manual in printable pdf format,
a *.chm online help file and the configuration software R&S DigIConf. In addition, it pro-
vides links to useful sites of the R&S internet.
Version for pdf and chm

Use the ADOBE® Acrobat® Reader for PDF files and any browser HTML help.
Using the Internet Explorer® version 4.0 or later is required.
Manuals
Quick Start Guidein printable form, and an Operating Manual and Service Manual in
*.pdfformat.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 6

Online Help
The standalone help file eqiqbox.chm.
Data Sheet
Software
● DigIConf_*.exe (Digital Interface Configurator)

R&S DigIConf is a software for configurating the R&S EX-IQ-BOX settings via USB
interface and a PC.
1.1.4 Operating Manual
The operating manual is available in PDF format - in printable form - on the Documen-
tation CD-ROM delivered with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
It contains comprehensive information on the functions and remote control, in addition to
the chapters of the quick start guide. The manual includes information on the interfaces
and related breakout boards and on maintenance.
The operating manual covers the data sheet plus the chapters of the quick start guide
plus the chapters of the operating manual, listed below. An index, a glossary an open
source declaration and attachments are also part of the manual.
Data Sheet
Introduction
Introduces the module with an overview about the functionality, features and compo-
nents.
System Overview
Describes the operating modes of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, including R&S instruments com-
municating with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and available hardware and software components.
Getting Started
Describes the control elements and connectors of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the proce-
dures required for putting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX into operation. It encloses the installation
of the configuration software R&S DigIConf, installation of options, and connecting the
device to an R&S instrument and the DUT.
Application Examples
Describes several application examples.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 7

R&S EX-IQ-BOX Configuration

Describes the configuration software R&S DigIConf. Additionally this section encloses
information on configuration of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX via software or via R&S instruments.
Protocol Settings
This part describes the configuration software R&S DigIConf in general, and the functions
of the transmission protocols in detail. The chapter is divided according to the protocol
types, i.e. user defined and standardized protocols. It provides a brief overview of the
features of the protocol type, and describes all settings in detail.
Remote Control Basics

Provides an introduction to remote control and information needed to set up a remote
control session, including some examples of remote access.
Remote Control Commands

Describes all remote-control commands available including programming examples.
The chapter is divided according to the main functions of the configuration software R&S
DigIConf and the protocol types, i.e. user defined and standardized protocols.
Interfaces
Contains a short description and information on the pin assignments of the user interface
and the breakout boards for user defined applications and specific information on the
breakout boards of the standardized protocols.
Index
Contains an index of the operating manual.
Appendix
The appendix provides a list of common abbreviations used in the documentation and it
contains an overview of the most important default settings. The appendix also includes
an alphabetical list of all remote-control commands that are relevant for the remote control
of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Open Source
Covers information on software licensing.
Attachments
The attachments contain the connection schemes of the user interface and the breakout
boards.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 8

Typographical Conventions
1.1.5 Service Manual
The service manaul describes some service functions provided for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX,
and for the breakout board of the digital standardized protocol CPRI. Additionally, it con-
tains information for customer support and service.
The service manual is subdivided into general safety instructions plus the service and
maintenance chapters:
Service and Repair
These chapters include information on replacement and service tests of the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX and the breakout boards.
Maintenance
Points to maintenance and environmental conditions.
Documents
Contains the spare parts list and mechanical drawings.
Index
Contains an index of the service manual.
1.1.6 Internet Site
The Rohde & Schwarz internet site provides the most up to date information on the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Additonally firmware updates including the associated release notes,
instrument drivers current data sheets and application notes are provided for download
on the internet site.
The current manual is provided in the download area under "Manuals".
In the "Download > Software" tab, the website also offers the latest version of the con-
figuration software R&S DigIConf, including information on changes and on the software
update process.
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/EX-IQ-BOX.html
1.2 Typographical Conventions

The following text markers are used throughout this documentation:
Convention Description
"Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as dia-
ments" log boxes, menus, options, buttons, and softkeys are enclosed by quota-
tion marks.
KEYS Key names are written in capital letters.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 9

Typographical Conventions
Convention Description
File names, commands, File names, commands, coding samples and screen output are distin-
program code guished by their font.
Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics.
Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font.
"References" References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation

marks.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 10

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Welcome to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX...
2 Welcome to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX...

...the Digital Interface Module
While in the past the transmission of the analog I/Q signals had played an important role,
nowadays it is the digital I/Q signals that are significant. The utilization of digital I/Q signals
leads to the employment of different transmission protocols and still involves the devel-
opment of different interface types with a great variety of physical characteristics.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX, as a configurable interface module, is designed to solve this prob-
lem. The main application field of this device is the conversion of signal properties and
transmission protocols of the R&S instruments into User Defined or standardized signal
formats and vice versa.
To digitally transmit I/Q signals, R&S instruments like signal generators, signal analyzers,
communication testers and the R&S EX-IQ-BOX communicate with each other, using an
R&S wide standardized transmission protocol, which is based on LVDS (Low Voltage
Differential Signaling).
For applications with User Defined protocols the R&S EX-IQ-BOX enables either serial
or parallel transmission of I/Q signals to a DUT, including variable clock modes, various
data rates as well as different logical signal levels.
In applications with standardized protocols the R&S EX-IQ-BOX not only provides the
I/Q data, but also the control information of the respective standard. Equipped with the
respective options, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX supports the standardized protocol CPRI
(Common Packet Radio Interface). This protocol defines a combined interface for the
transmission of I/Q and control data between the baseband and RF module of a base
station.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is directly connected to the digital interface of an R&S instrument
by using an LVDS cable. For connection to the DUT, various interchangeable adapters
are available, so called breakout boards. Breakout boards adapt the signals physically.
A breakout board is directly connected to the user interface on the front panel of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
● For User Defined applications, two different breakout boards are provided with the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, supporting single ended and differential signals.
● For CPRI applications, separate options support the respective signal formats.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is controlled via the USB interface. It is operated from a PC by
using the configuration software R&S DigIConf.
Test setups of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505.02 with instruments of the R&S SMU or
R&S FSQ families provide control of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX without using the digital inter-
face configuration software R&S DigIConf. But this constellation applies only to User
Defined applications.
Due to the enhanced capabilities of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04, this model is
exclusively controlled by R&S DigIConf and applies to all applications.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 11

● In User Defined mode R&S DigIConf controls the protocol settings, data format and
multiple clock scenarios as internal or device clocking (external) for data transmis-
sion.
● For standardized protocols R&S DigIConf provides all settings of the respective
standard. Additionally, control functions according to the standard are supported from
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and are set with the aid of R&S DigIConf.
In addition, the R&S DigIConf can be remote controlled, from a PC either directly or via
a network.
Equipped with the respective options, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX has integrated a Waveform
Output Memory (64 Msamples) as well as a Multi Waveform Playback to generate test
signals which were created externally, e.g. by means of R&S WinIQSIM2 or Matlab sim-
ulation software. R&S DigIConf takes the generated data from the control PC, checks the
data and loads it into the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The Multi Waveform Playback provides
simultaneous playback of up to four signals.
Also, for operating in receiver mode a Recording Memory (512 MB) option is available.
The signal data can be recorded over a period of time and then saved in a file.
Waveform Memory, Recording Memory and Multi Waveform Playback can be performed
only with R&S DigIConf and standardized protocols.
Software options for Digital Standards with R&S®WinIQSIM2TM are also available. For
example, GSM / EDGE, 3GPP FDD, EUTRA / LTE, etc., i.e. all those supported by CPRI.
The Digital Standards are described in individual manuals available on the

Rohde & Schwarz internet site or on the user documentation CD-ROM of R&S®WinIQ-
SIM2TM.
The signals that are generated with the aid of the R&S WinIQSIM2 software can be output
by the Waveform Memory or the Multi Waveform Playback of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Sig-
nals calculated by Matlab software can be directly loaded.
For detailed information on all available options refer to chapter 3.2.2, "Options",
on page 22".
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 12

Latest information on extensions and changes

The new R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 offers enlarged functionalities which will not all
be available yet in this release. Refer to the supplementary sheet at the beginning of this
manual which informs you about the planned enlargements within the following releases.
Additionally, firmware and software updates as well as the release notes, describing the
improvements and modifications are provided on the internet at the download site of
Rohde & Schwarz:
http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/EX-IQ-Box.html
This website always offers the latest information about your R&S EX-IQ-BOX, about the
current firmware and the software R&S DigIConf, e.g. also on changes of the software
update procedure.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 13

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX System Overview
Basic Operating Modes
3 System Overview
This section comprises an overview of the instruments communicating with the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX and some basic operating modes. It also describes available hardware and soft-
ware components for operating the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX provides transmission of I/Q data between R&S instruments and
external devices (DUTs). In applications with standardized protocols, the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX operates bidirectional. Data can be sent and received at the same time. In the User
Defined mode only one data direction is possible at the same time.
In the following configurations, signal transmission is shown by means of an R&S instru-
ment operating as transmitter to the DUT via the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Vice versa, the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX works as a receiver, while it receives a test signal from a DUT and
transfers it to an R&S instrument for analyzing. For further configuration examples refer
to chapter 5, "Application Examples", on page 47.
An overview of instruments working with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is given in chapter 3.2.5,
"R&S Instruments Working with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 25. For the available
options and their respective part numbers refer to chapter 3.2.2, "Options",
on page 22.
3.1 Basic Operating Modes

This chapter provides a short overview of the various operating modes to control the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, including waveform memory and recording:
● R&S DigIConf controlling the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
● R&S Instruments controlling the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
● Remote control of R&S DigIConf
● Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory
3.1.1 R&S DigIConf Controlling the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
The previous model R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 provides only User Defined proto-
cols.
Standardized protocols, Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording
Memory require the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 and the configuration software R&S
DigIConf.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 14

R&S DigIConf
USB Host
Control
R&S Instrument
(equipped with digital interface)
USB IN
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
DIG. IQ OUT IQ IN
Data
User
REF OUT Reference REF IN
Interface
Breakout Board
Data
DUT
Fig. 3-1: Configuration example with R&S DigIConf
The example represents a basic configuration of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, operated by the
digital interface configuration software R&S DigIConf via PC.
In this configuration the R&S EX-IQ-BOX operates in transmitter mode from an R&S
instrument to the DUT.
A configuration example of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX working in receiver mode is shown in
the following picture:
R&S DigIConf
USB Host
Control
R&S Instrument
USB IN
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
IQ OUT DIG. IQ IN
Data
User REF IN REF OUT
Interface Reference
Breakout Board
Data
DUT
Fig. 3-2: R&S EX-IQ-BOX and R&S instrument working in receiver mode, controlled by R&S DigIConf
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 15

3.1.2 R&S Instruments Controlling the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
This operating mode applies to the previous model of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
1409.5502.02 and User Defined applications.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX"1409.5505K04" is always controlled by R&S DigIConf.
R&S Instrument
USB Host USB IN

Control R&S EX-IQ-BOX
DIG. IQ OUT IQ IN
Data
User
REF OUT Reference REF IN
Interface
Breakout Board
Data
DUT
Fig. 3-3: Configuration example of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, directly controlled by an R&S instrument
This example shows a basic configuration of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02, working
with an R&S signal generator. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX operates in transmitter mode from
the signal generator to the DUT.
3.1.3 Remote Control of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Remote control functionality provides access to the measurement from a remote com-
puter (external controller). By means of remote commands, settings or data are trans-
mitted to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX via R&S DigIConf. Remote programs automate repeated
settings. The remote control programs can either run on the same computer as the
R&S DigIConf or on any PC in the network.
Remote control of R&S DigIConf is performed via a LAN socket communication protocol,
also referred to as Raw Socket communication.
Socket communication uses the TCP/IP network protocol. A VISA installation on remote
controller side is not mandatory. Connection can also be performed with a Win Socket
communication.
If you use a VISA library, the access is more convenient.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 16

Information on the LAN Connector of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX

Data and settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX are controlled via the USB interface. The LAN
connector is intended for future use and it is not possible to directly remote-control the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX via the LAN interface.
For the control, SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) commands
are used.
An introduction to the structure and to the syntax of SCPI commands is given in the
operating manual of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, see chapter 8, "Remote Control Basics",
on page 213.
3.1.3.1 Remote Control via R&S DigIConf
The remote control program controls R&S DigIConf, which then transmits the settings to
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX via the USB interface. The remote program runs either on the same
PC as the R&S DigIConf software or on any PC in a network.
Examples of the remote controlled R&S DigIConf
● The remote control program and R&S DigIConf run on the same computer.
Remote control program
LAN Adress: Local Host

Port: 5026
Remote
R&S DigIConf
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
USB
Control
Fig. 3-4: Remote control program and R&S DigIConf running on the same PC
The remote connection is looped internally. The computer name, i.e. the IP address
is "Local Host". R&S DigIConf uses port 5026 by default, the port can be set.
● The remote control program and R&S DigIConf run on different computers.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 17

Remote control
program
ipaddr, port
Remote
LAN
ipaddr
port
R&S DigIConf R&S EX-IQ-BOX

USB
Control
Fig. 3-5: Remote control program and R&S DigIConf running on different PCs
The LAN connection is established to the computer with R&S DigIConf with a commercial
RJ-45 network cable. IP address and port are assigned accordingly.
For further information on LAN connection and IP address, see chapter 8, "Remote Con-
trol Basics", on page 213.
3.1.3.2 Remote Control via an R&S Instrument
This operating mode applies to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 and User Defined
protocols.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 is always controlled by R&S DigIConf.
If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 works directly with an R&S instrument, i.e. without
R&S DigIConf, the box is accessed by the instrument via the USB interface. Remote
control is executed via the instrument, i.e. all remote control interfaces of the instrument
can be usesd, as well as all remote-control modes.
R&S instruments usually provide remote control via LAN, GPIB, or USB interface. Refer
to the operating manual of your instrument to receive detailed information on the available
remote control interfaces and their use.
See the operating manual of your R&S instrument for detailed information:
● For setting up a connection, refer to sections "Connecting the Instrument to a Net-
work", and "Manual Remote Control via an External Controller" in chapter "Putting
into Operation".
● Chapter "Remote Control - Basics" describes the basics for setting up the instrument
for remote control, programming syntax, command processing and the status report-
ing system.
● Chapter "Remote Control - Description of Commands" lists all the remote commands
that are defined for the instrument.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 18

The remote control commands for setting the parameters of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX are
described in the operating manual; see chapter 9.3, "User Defined - Remote Control
Commands", on page 257.
R&S Instrument
Remote control
program
GPIB, LAN, ...

Remote
Data
Control
USB
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Fig. 3-6: Example of remote control of an R&S instrument with a connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX
3.1.4 Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Mem-

ory
Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory are performed
with R&S DigIConf and standardized protocols.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX "1409.5505K04" can also be used without an instrument as an I/

Q source, while a signal is generated in the box by means of a Waveform Memory, or
even a Multi Waveform Playback for simultaneous playback of up to four signals.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 19

R&S DigIConf
USB Host Waveform data
Control Waveform
Memory
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Transmitter
mode
Breakout Board
Data
DUT
Fig. 3-7: Configuration example of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX equipped with a Waveform Memory
Equipped with the Recording Memory option, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX records received I/Q
signals. With a suitable program, the data can be displayed on a PC and evaluated.
R&S DigIConf
USB Host Waveform data
Control Recording
Memory
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Receiver
mode
Breakout Board
Data
DUT
Fig. 3-8: Configuration example of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX recording incoming data
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 20

Components
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX can execute signal generation from a Waveform Memory and data
recording simultaneously.
3.2 Components
This chapter provides an overview of the available components for test setups with the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Hardware and software components and the according part numbers
are listed.
Ordering information as well as latest software and firmware versions are also provided
on the internet at the R&S website:
3.2.1 R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Digital Signal Interface module R&S EX-IQ-BOX (part number 1409.5505K04), including:
● power supply
● one USB cable
● one LVDS cable
● two breakout boards for User Defined protocols
– single ended 090002-22x, type II
– differential 090002-23x, type III
● Quick Start Guide
● CD-ROM with configuration software R&S DigIConf, data sheet, online help and user
manual
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 21

Components
3.2.2 Options
The options concept allows you to individually equip the R&S EX-IQ-BOX according to
the requirements of the application. Additionally, note the following information in order
to configure the R&S EX-IQ-BOX correctly:
● Standardized protocols always exist of the option for the hardware (Breakout Board)
and one or several options for the software. To enable a standardized protocol order
the respective software option in addition to the hardware option (EXBOX-Bxx +
EXBOX-Kxx).
● Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory can be per-
formed only with standardized protocols.
● Software options providing digital standards require R&S WinIQSIM2 software and
the Waveform Memory or the Multi Waveform Playback.
● Standardized protocols, Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Record-
ing Memory require the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 and the configuration soft-
ware R&S DigIConf.
3.2.2.1 Standardized Protocols
For applications with standardized protocols the following options are available:
Digital Interface Protocol... Option R&S... R&S part number
CPRI Breakout Board (16x) EXBOX-B85 1409.7208.04
CPRI Breakout Board (5x) EXBOX-B85 1409.7208.02
CPRI RE Test EXBOX-K10 1417.1170.02
CPRI REC Test EXBOX-K11 1417.1186.02
Note: Each option is delivered with a licence key for activation.
Standardized protocols require R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 and the configuration

software R&S DigIConf.
3.2.2.2 User Defined Protocols
In addition to the two breakout boards single ended and differential, which are included
in delivery, the following options are available:
...Breakout board Option R&S... R&S part number
Cadence Palladium ... 090002-24x EXBOX-Z3 1417.3566.02
MDR (Mini Delta Ribbon) ... 090002-25x EXBOX-Z4 1417.3614.02
These options only consist of the breakout boards and are used the same way as the breakout boards types
single ended and differential.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 22

Components
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 provides only User Defined protocols.
3.2.2.3 Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory
Option R&S... R&S part number
Waveform Memory 64 MS EXBOX-K90 1417.1005.02
Multi Waveform Playback EXBOX-K91 1417.1011.02
Recording Memory 512 MByte EXBOX-K94 1417.1028.02
Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory require the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 and the configuration software R&S DigIConf.
3.2.2.4 Digital Standards with R&S WinIQSIM2
The following software options providing digital standards are available. The signals gen-
erated with the aid of the R&S WinIQSIM2 software can be output by the Waveform
Memory or the Multi Waveform Playback of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Digital standards are
provided by the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 and the configuration software
R&S DigIConf.
Digital Standard Option R&S... R&S part number
GSM/EDGE EXBOX-K240 1417.1034.02
EDGE Evolution EXBOX-K241 1417.1040.02
3GPP FDD EXBOX-K242 1417.1057.02
3GPP FDD Enhanced EXBOX-K243 1417.1063.02
3GPP FDD HSUPA EXBOX-K245 1417.1070.02
CDMA 2000® incl. 1xEV-DV EXBOX-K246 1417.1086.02
1xEV-DO REV. A EXBOX-K247 1417.1092.02
IEEE 802.16 (WiMAXTM) EXBOX-K249 1417.1111.02
TD-SCDMA EXBOX-K250 1417.1128.02
TD-SCDMA Enhanced EXBOX-K251 1417.1134.02
IEEE 802.11n (WLAN-N) EXBOX-K254 1417.1105.02
EUTRA/LTE EXBOX-K255 1417.1140.02
HSPA+ EXBOX-K259 1417.1157.02
3.2.3 R&S DigIConf - Digital Interface Configurator
The software R&S DigIConf (Digital Interface Configurator for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX)
controls the protocol, data and clock settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX independently from
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 23

Components
the connected R&S instrument. Besides basic functions of the User Defined protocols,
this software utility supports the settings of the standardized protocol CPRI ; provided
that the appropriate options are available, see chapter 3.2.2, "Options", on page 22.
R&S DigIConf provides:
● the control of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX from a PC, or also from the R&S CMW
● parameter settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 for User Defined protocols
● parameter settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502K04, for
– User Defined protoocols
– Standardized protocols
● data verification and transfer of Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and
Recording Memory
● activation of Digital Standards with R&S WinIQSIM2
The program is designed to be installed on a PC running a Microsoft® Windows 2000
(SP4) / XP (SP1) / Windows 7 (32/64 bit) operating system. A setup file, included in
delivery, covers an installation wizard, the executable program and all necessary program
and data files.
For information on installation of R&S DigIConf refer to chapter 4.4, "Installing R&S Dig-
IConf", on page 34.
Operating R&S DigIConf is described in the operating manual, chapter 6, "R&S EX-IQ-
BOX Configuration", on page 53.
How to proceed for setting up an option refer to chapter 4.6, "Installing R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Options", on page 44.
Simulation mode
If no R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected, R&S DigIConf runs in simulation mode. All options
are active, but real operation cannot be performed.
The latest software versions can be downloaded free of charge from the R&S website:
3.2.4 Accessories
Various accessories support specific test configurations or modifications.

For example, if you want to connect the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to a second R&S instrument,
you need a second LVDS cable.
Or, if your application requires a specific cable, card or an individual pin assignment, the
user interface connector, the Tyco Z-Dok adapter, is separately available as R&S
EXBOX-Z1.
The breakout board R&S EXBOX-Z2 especially supports direct connection of two
R&S EX-IQ-BOXes, used for example for demo purposes.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 24

Components
A conceivable scenario is for example: An R&S signal generator connected to the first
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, and R&S signal analyzer to the second one. The R&S EX-IQ-BOXes
are connected via the R&S EXBOX-Z2 breakout board.
The signal generator sends an I/Q signal to the first R&S EX-IQ-BOX which forwards this
signal to the second R&S EX-IQ-BOX via the breakout board. With the signal analyzer
you can evaluate and display the transmitted signal.
Accessory Option R&S... R&S part number
LVDS cable for connecting SMU-Z6 1415.0201.02

digital baseband interfaces
Tyco Z-Dok connector, EXBOX-Z1 1409.7437.01

168 pin (56 differential pairs)
Demo breakout board EXBOX-Z2 1417.3514.02
3.2.5 R&S Instruments Working with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
This sections provides an overview of the R&S instruments that work with the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX, provided that the instrument is equipped with the respective digital interface
option.
Digital interface options of R&S instruments

For detailed information on the digital input and output options of the instruments refer to
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX data sheet, provided on the CD ROM, or the respective operating
manual of your R&S instrument.
Signal Generation
● R&S AMU200A - Baseband Signal Generator and Fading Simulator
● R&S SMU200A - Vector Signal Generator
● R&S SMBV100A - Vector Signal Generator
● R&S SMJ100A - Vector Signal Generator
Signal Analysis
● R&S FMU36 - Baseband Signal Analyzer
● R&S FSV - Signal and Spectrum Analyzer
● R&S FSW - Signal and Spectrum Analyzer
● R&S FSG - Signal Analyzer
● R&S FSQ - Signal Analyzer
Radio Communication
● R&S CMW500 - Universal Wideband Radio Communication Tester
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 25

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Getting Started
Safety Instructions
4 Getting Started
This section introduces the control elements and connectors of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and
explains how to put the device into operation. It encloses installation of the configuration
software R&S DigIConf, installation of options, and connecting the device to an R&S
instrument and the DUT.
4.1 Safety Instructions
General Precautions
Shock hazard
Do not open the device casing. As a rule, normal operation of the device does not require
opening the casing. Observe the general safety instructions and regulations at the begin-
ning of the manual.
Risk of device damage

Note that the general safety instructions also contain information on operating conditions
that will prevent damage to the device. The device's data sheet may contain additional
operating conditions.
Before putting the device into operation, make sure that the following conditions are met:
● All fan openings are unobstructed and the airflow perforations are unimpeded. The
minimum distance from the wall is 10 cm.
● The device is dry and shows no sign of condensation.
● The interfaces of the device are correctly connected.
● The device is operated in the horizontal position on an even surface.
● The ambient temperature does not exceed the range specified in the data sheet.
● Signal levels at the input and output connectors are all within the specified ranges.
Failure to meet these conditions may cause damage to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or other
devices in the test setup.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 26

Safety Instructions
Risk of injury and instrument damage if stacking instruments

A stack of instruments may tilt over and cause injury and material damage because the
instrument's top surface area is too small.
Never stack instruments on top of each other. If you need to stack instruments, install
them in a rack.
Protection against Connector Overload
Avoid connector overload

The type of the electrical signals are based on various logic types (TTL or CMOS stand-
ard) performing different logic levels. The logic type of the connected DUT must be com-
patible to the set logic type of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Inappropriate logic types may cause
damage to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or to the DUT.
Make sure that the signal level is compatible to the set logic type and does not exceed
the permissible limits.
Follow the allowed maximum values, listed in the data sheet!
As soon as a protocol is activated or the logic type is changed during the operation, the
following warning message appears:
The setting is executed only after confirmation of the warning message.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 27

Safety Instructions
Protection against Electrostatics
Risk of electrostatic discharge

Protect the work area against electrostatic discharge to avoid damage to the electronic
components in the modules. For details, refer to the safety instructions at the beginning
of this manual.
EMI Suppression
Electromagnetic interference (EMI) may affect the measurement results.
To suppress generated electromagnetic interference (EMI):
● Use suitable double shielded LAN (CAT 7), SMA and BNC cables of high quality.
● All connected cables must not exceed 3m in length.
● All unconnected outputs and lines have to be terminated properly with 50 Ohms.
● Use only the USB cable included in delivery.
Note: USB cables are of varying and often poor quality. Therefore, it is recommended
that you use only the supplied USB cable.
● Use only the power supply included in delivery.
● Use the cable R&S SMU-Z6 for connection to the DIG I/Q interfaces of the instrument.
The required cable is available under part number 1415.0201.02.
● Note the EMC classification in the data sheet.
Power supply
Danger of instrument damage when using a power supply other than specified!
Use only with the approved power supply of type:
Vendor: CINCON ELECTRONICS CA., LTD.
Model: TR45A05-11A01
Input: 100-240VAC 1.5A 50-60Hz
Output: 5VDC 6.0A
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX must not be specially switched on or switched off, but is ready for
operation after connection of the power supply and the USB. Also the device is powered
off while the USB connection is disconnected and the net plug is pulled.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 28

Unpacking the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
4.2 Unpacking the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
To remove the device from its packaging and check the equipment for completeness
proceed as follows:
1. Remove the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the various components from their packaging.
2. Check the equipment for completeness using the delivery list.
3. Check the device for any damage. If there is damage, immediately contact the carrier
who delivered the device. Make sure not to discard the box and packing material.
Packing material
Retain the original packing material. If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX needs to be transported or
shipped at a later date, you can use the material to prevent control elements and con-
nectors from being damaged.
Risk of injury and instrument damage if stacking instruments

A stack of instruments may tilt over and cause injury and material damage because the
instrument's top surface area is too small.
Never stack instruments on top of each other. If you need to stack instruments, install
them in a rack.
4.3 Control Elements and Connectors

This section explains the control elements and connectors of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX with
the aid of the front and rear views.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 29

Control Elements and Connectors
4.3.1 Front Panel Tour
This section gives an overview of the control elements and the connectors at the front
panel of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Each element/connector is briefly described and a refer-
ence is given to the chapters containing detailed information.
Fig. 4-1: Front panel view
4.3.1.1 STATUS - LEDs
1 Status LED for DIG I/Q IN/OUT 1

● Green: the interface is active.
● Yellow: the interface is initializing.
● Off: the interface is not connected.
2 Status LED for DIG I/Q IN/OUT 2
● Green: the interface is active.
● Yellow: the interface is initializing.
● Off: the interface is not connected.
3 Status LED for PLL (Phase Locked Loop)
● Green: the PLL is active and locked.
● Yellow: the PLL is active and unlocked.
● Off: the PLL is switched off.
4 Status LED of the breakout board
● Green: the breakout board is active.
● Yellow: the breakout board is connected.
● Off: the breakout board is not connected.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 30

4.3.1.2 User Interface
Fig. 4-2: TYCO Z-Dok adapter board connector, 56 differential pairs
See chapter 10.1.1, "Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector", on page 355.

User interface for serial or parallel transmission of digital I/Q data (up to 20 bit wide data
bus), data clock and control signals, connected by a 168 pin connector, type TYCO Z-
Dok (56 differential pairs).
This interface is used to connect the breakout boards.
4.3.1.3 MODE - LED
The MODE LED indicates current activities of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.

● Green blinking: the configuration file (application specific image) is loading.
● Green continuous: the configuration file (application specific image) is currently
active. Data transmission is possible.
● Yellow blinking: the initialization (initial image) is loading.
● Yellow continuous: the initialization (initial image) is currently active.
● Off: there is no configuration file loaded. Therefore, data transmission is not possible.
4.3.1.4 ERROR - LED
The ERROR LED indicates an error of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.

● Off : no error occurred.
● Red: an error has been detected. R&S DigIConf or the connected R&S instrument
display an error message.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 31

4.3.2 Rear Panel View
This section gives an overview of the control elements and the connectors on the rear
panel of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Each element/connector is briefly described and a refer-
ence is given to the chapters containing detailed information.
Fig. 4-3: Rear panel view
4.3.2.1 REF IN - Reference signal input
BNC connector for input of a reference signal provided by the R&S instrument.
4.3.2.2 IN / OUT - LED
The interface LEDs indicate the operating mode of the digital interfaces.
● Green: the interface is operating in input mode.
● Yellow: the interface is operating in output mode.
4.3.2.3 DIG I/Q IN/OUT2, 1 - Digital interfaces
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 32

Connectors for the input or output of the digital I/Q signal. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX covers
two digital interfaces; both ports can be used for either signal input or output.
One cable for the connection between the digital I/Q interfaces of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
and an R&S instrument is included in delivery. Additional cables are available separately.
Refer to chapter 3.2.4, "Accessories", on page 24 for the R&S part number of the asso-
ciated cable.
4.3.2.4 LAN - Interface
The LEDs at the top indicate activity and status of the interface.
● Green: a link is active.
● Yellow: transmission is active.
The LAN connector is intended for future use and it is not possible to directly remote-
control the R&S EX-IQ-BOX via this interface. Data and settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
are controlled via the USB interface.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected to the LAN with the aid of a commercial RJ-45 CAT7
cable. The interface supports 10/100/1000Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802.3u.
4.3.2.5 USB IN - USB interface type B
Universal Serial Bus interface of type B (device "USB"). This port is used for communi-
cation with the host instrument.
The interface supports two data rates:
● High-speed data rate of 480 Mbit/s.
● Full-speed rate of 12 Mbit/s.
An USB cable for the connection is included in delivery.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 33

Installing R&S DigIConf
4.3.2.6 POWER - Power supply
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is supplied with an external power supply unit and a separate power
cable, see chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 42.
The Power LED indicates the different operating states of the device, depending on the
state of the external voltages.
● OFF: the external power supply unit is not connected ("Power Off state").
● Yellow: the main power of the device is on but the USB power is off (Standby
state).
● Green: the main power and the USB power are on. The device is ready for operation.
4.4 Installing R&S DigIConf

This section describes how to install the software R&S DigIConf (Digital Interface
Configurator), the tool for controlling the protocol settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. It also
encloses the hardware and software requirements which have to be met for installation.
Software and Hardware Requirements

It is recommended that your PC fulfills the following minimum requirements:
Component Minimum requirement
Operating system Windows 2000 SP4 / XP SP1 (32 bit), Windows 7
CPU Pentium 4, 1 GHz or higher
RAM 256 MB
Hard disk 100 MByte free space
Monitor XGA monitor (1024 x 768)
Interfaces USB 2.0

Tip: USB 1.1 is also supported, but due to the lower transmission speed, it is
recommended to operate with USB 2.0.
For some Rohde & Schwarz instruments, e.g. the R&S CMW500, it is possible to install
R&S DigIConf directly on the instrument. The operating manual of the instrument states
if the instrument supports this mode of operation. The installation on the instrument is the
same as on the PC, see below.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 34

Prerequisites
● Uninstall the old software version, as described in chapter 4.4.3, "Uninstalling",

on page 38.
● Close any running applications.
● Disconnect all R&S EX-IQ-BOXes and do not connect any during installation.
4.4.1 Installation
The setup file DigIConf_x.xx.xxx.exe for the installation of the R&S DigIConf is included
in the delivery of your R&S EX-IQ-BOX or can be downloaded from the R&S website:
► Execute DigIConf_x.xx.xxx.exe
in the windows explorer and follow the installation instructions of the R&S DigIConf
setup wizard.
The version number x.xx.xxx in the filename represents the current version. Each
update has a new release number.
During installation the program creates various subdirectories needed by the application.
Additionally, the installation wizard checks the status of the registry entry "DisableCAD"
in order to exclude logon conflicts during later operation. The wizard prompts you to
modify the DisableCAD status accordingly, in order to fix these conflicts.
Fig. 4-4: R&S DigIConf Installation > Modify DisableCAD
● "Yes"
Accept modification.
The installation wizard sets DisableCAD=0 in the registry.
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion
\policies\system]"DisableCAD"=dword:00000000
A connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX does not cause any conflicts at startup and logon.
● "No"
Reject modification.
The parameter DisableCAD remains 1 and you must disconnect the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX before every login and connect it afterwards again.
Backgound: Depending on this registry entry, a connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX may cause
an infinite loop at the Windows logon prompt. It occurs during a logon because Windows
interprets the internal SmartCard of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX as a medium for login. You find
more details also in chapter 4.4.4, "Known Restrictions on SmartCard Related Issues",
on page 39.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 35

It is recommended that you accept modification.

However, it is also possible, to modify the status later on. The installation wizard prepares
the respective entries for a later modification.
In the last installation window the setup wizard provides a shortcut to the desktop and
you can run R&S DigIConf.
4.4.2 Starting
R&S DigIConf can either be started via:

● the menu item "Start > Programs > R&S DigIConf > DigIConf_x.xx.xxx",
● by starting DigIConf.exe in the MS®Windows explorer, located in the prgram files

directory, %Program Files%\Rohde-Schwarz\DigIConf
or via
● the "application icon" on the desktop.
Startup takes several seconds. At runtime a startup window is indicated until the software
is ready for operation. After startup, the R&S DigIConf main application window is dis-
played.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 36

Fig. 4-5: R&S DigIConf main application window
The main application window shows the current configuration and the signal flow in form
of a block diagram.
Depending on the test configuration different elements are indicated. For example, if the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected with an R&S instrument, R&S DigIConf shows a separate
function block with information about the connected instrument. Input/Output symbols in
the block diagram show the currently used inputs and outputs and the lines indicate the
signal flow.
The following pictures show an example of how R&S DigIConf adjusts the display accord-
ing to the test configuration. If several boxes are connected, the respective test configu-
ration is indicated for every R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Fig. 4-6: R&S DigIConf display of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX connected to an R&S AMU200A
Fig. 4-7: R&S DigIConf display of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX connected to an R&S FSQ-26
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 37

Fig. 4-8: R&S DigIConf display of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX operating in bidirectional mode
For a detailed description of the application window and its elements refer to the operating
manual, chapter 6.1, "R&S DigIConf Configuration Software", on page 53.
4.4.3 Uninstalling
Uninstall the software with the aid of R&S DigIConf uninstaller,

1. "Start > Programs > R&S DigIConf > Uninstall"
or the PC's control panel,
2. "Start > Settings > Control Panel" in the Windows task bar and open the "Add or
Remove Programs" dialog. Uninstall the program with "Remove".
The uninstall routine identifies all currently installed R&S DigIConf components,
including the relevant files, such as files with user-specific settings.
Before uninstalling, the program asks whether you want to delete the settings direc-
tory as well.
3. Confirm or reject, and start uninstalling.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 38

The uninstaller removes all currently installed R&S DigIConf software items.
After completion the uninstall process is confirmed and can be finished with OK.
If you have decided to keep the preference files, the respective directories of DigIConf
remain.
4.4.4 Known Restrictions on SmartCard Related Issues
If a R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected while the computer is locked, login can be performed
without any conflicts coming up. But if a R&S EX-IQ-BOX is already connected and you
want to log in, the following "Logon Message" appears:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 39

Fig. 4-9: R&S DigIConf Installation > Logon message
Windows interprets the internal SmartCard of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX as a medium for login
and therefore causes this message.
When trying to confirm, the system reacts in different ways, depending on the status of
the "DisableCAD" registry entry:
1. "Logon Message" remains
The system repeats the SmartCard error message and blocks the login. Disable-
CAD=1, i.e. the Windows security attention sequence (CTR-ALT-Del) for login is
skipped. Windows tries to log in with the smart card and fails.
To terminate:
a) Disconnect the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to enable login.
b) Log in.
c) Connect the R&S EX-IQ-BOX again.
Note: To solve this conflict for later operation, deactivate DisableCAD in the registry.
The DisableCAD parameter determines whether you need to press CTRL+ALT
+DEL keys to log in, or whether the login window directly appears after at startup or
after locked desktop.
2. "Logon Message" disappears
The system forwards to the "Computer Locked" dialog box. In this case, Disable-
CAD=0, Windows requires users to press CTR-ALT-Del (security attention
sequence) for login.
a) Press CTRL+ALT+DEL to unlock the computer and log in as usual.
The connection to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX may remain.
4.4.4.1 How to avoid the SmartCard Conflict
The only way to avoid the conflict reliably, is to set DisableCAD=0. If the setting has not
been modified yet, proceed as follows.
To modify this registry entry, R&S DigIConf provides the file DisableCAD.reg in the
directory:
%APPDATA%\Rohde-Schwarz\DigIConf\Registry
► Execute DisableCAD.reg to deactivate the setting, i.e. to enable the "Press Ctrl-
Alt-Del" security attention sequence.
The entry is automatically set to 0. Login can now be performed with connected
R&S EX-IQ-BOXes without conflicts.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 40

R&S DigIConf also provides the file EnableCAD.reg in the installation directory to dis-
able the sequence accordingly.
4.4.4.2 DisableCAD - Background Information
The DisableCAD parameter determines whether you must press the (CTRL+ALT+DEL)
security attention sequence for windows login, or whether the login window directly
appears after startup or after locked desktop.
● DisableCAD=0
This status requires users first to press CTRL+ALT+DEL, the windows security atten-
tion sequence to access the Windows login dialog box.
Fig. 4-10: Windows security attention sequence check box
The Windows dialog box opens, as shown below.

● DisableCAD=1
The Windows login dialog box appears immediately after booting, or locked desktop.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 41

Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Fig. 4-11: Windows login dialog box
The require users to "Press Ctrl-Alt-Del" check box is skipped.
4.5 Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX

This section describes how to connect the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in principle, i.e. to the power
supply, to a PC, an R&S instrument and to the DUT. Connection and startup require no
particular order, but it is recommended that you follow the procedure as described below.
Connection
It is assumed that all R&S instruments in the test setup are properly power supplied and
switched on.
1. Power supply
Power supply: 30 W switching power supply adapter with an input voltage of
100 to 240 VAC.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is power supplied with an external power supply unit and a separate
power cable. The external power supply unit provides all required voltages of the hard-
ware.
► Connect the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the AC supply.

The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is in ready state, if USB is already connected (POWER LED
= green). Without USB connection the device R&S EX-IQ-BOX is in standby state
(POWER LED = yellow).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 42

Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
The device is still power-supplied while it is in standby mode.
2. USB Connection
To establish a connection between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and a PC or an R&S instrument

(R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02), proceed as follows:
1. Connect the USB cable plug B to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX USB IN
2. Connect the USB cable plug A to the PC or to the instrument
Device driver
If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected for the first time, the Windows Hardware Wizard
requires the installation of the appropriate device driver. The same applies if you install
a new update of R&S DigIConf.
Follow the wizard instructions until windows has finished the driver installation. If the
installation is finished, a message is displayed in the info line.
The software drivers need to be installed only once for a device. Due to the operation
mode of USB, every new R&S EX-IQ-BOX needs a driver installation.
3. Data signal connection
1. Establish the connection for the reference frequency.

a) Connect the coaxial cable to REF IN-BNC connector of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
b) Connect the coaxial cable to REF OUT of the instrument.
2. Establish the digital interface connection.

a) Transmitter Mode
Connect the LVDS cable between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX (DIG I/Q IN/OUT 2) and
the BASEBAND DIGITAL IN of the R&S instrument
b) Receiver Mode
Connect the LVDS cable between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX "DIG I/Q IN/OUT 2" con-
nector and the "BASEBAND DIGITAL IN" of the R&S instrument.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 43

Installing R&S EX-IQ-BOX Options
On connecting the LVDS cable the R&S instruments and the R&S EX-IQ-BOX detect
the connection established between them. Depending on the instrument the indica-
tion for a successful connection differs, it is either a short message in the info line or
a graphical message.
4. Connection to the DUT
1. Connect the respective breakout board (USER INTERFACE).
2. Establish the appropriate connection to the DUT.
4.6 Installing R&S EX-IQ-BOX Options

This section explains how to install an option of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Prerequisites
Before installing an option, make sure that the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is power supplied and
an USB connection is established.
Keep the license key ready that is provided with the software option.
Installation
The software options are installed on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX using R&S DigIConf.
1. Start R&S DigIConf.
2. In the "Tools" menu, select "Tools > EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager".
The "EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager" dialog opens.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 44

The hardware tab indicates various information on a selected device, like part num-
ber, serial number, firmware version, and so on.
3. In the "Options" tab, select the appropriate "EX-IQ-BOX Device".

The list box lists each connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 45

For detailed description on this dialog refer to chapter 6.1.6.1, "EX-IQ-BOX Device
Manager", on page 65 in the operating manual.
4. To enter the license key, perform one of the follwoing:

● in the "Enter License Key" text box, enter the license key code manually.
● Select "Import License Key from File", and proceed accordingly.
5. Enter the license key provided with the option in the "Option-Key" field and confirm
with "Enter".
6. Confirm with "OK".
R&S DigIConf immediately shows the newly enabled option in the table.
Installing several options

Just repeat step 3 to install more options on the same device or steps 2 and 3 to install
options on other devices.
Checking for installed options
To check installed options proceed as follows:

1. Open the "EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager" dialog.
2. Select the R&S EX-IQ-BOX from "EX-IQ-BOX Device".
The installed options are displayed in the "Installed Options" table.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 46

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Application Examples
Baseband Receiver Chip Test
5 Application Examples
This chapter covers some application examples. The test setups show the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX controlled by R&S DigIConf. Applications with User Defined Interface transmission
protocols also support the direct control of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX by R&S Instruments.
Standardized interface protocols always require the configuration by R&S DigIConf.
5.1 Baseband Receiver Chip Test

Example of the generation of a standards-compliant digital baseband signal for checking
the quality of a receiver.
R&S Signal Generator
Digital IQ data
R&S
IQ format R&S DigIConf
Fading
Noise
Impairments
Reference USB control
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Transmitter
mode
Breakout board
Digital IQ Clock
data
BB Chip
specific IQ format
Digital baseband
Fig. 5-1: Application example of a baseband receiver chip test
An R&S signal generator together with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX provides digital baseband
signals for all important mobile radio and wireless digital standards such as EUTRA/LTE,
3GPP, HSPA, GSM/EDGE, WiMAX IEEE 802.16 and WLAN IEEE 802.11n. All signal
generator functions are also available for generating digital baseband signals, plus all
signal processing functions to yield effects such as fading, AWGN or I/Q impairments.
This allows measurements on baseband receiver chips to be performed accurately and
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 47

CPRI Test Setup
reproducibly. With the aid of bit and block error ratio measurements the quality of the
receiver can be tested.
5.2 CPRI Test Setup

The following test setups show two typical CPRI test scenarios with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
First, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX emulates the baseband module, and in the other example, it
acts as the RF part.
5.2.1 Typical CPRI RE Test Setup
Example of a typical CPRI RE (Radio Equipment = RF unit) test scenario, where the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX acts as a baseband module REC (Remote Equipment Control).
The test setup requires the CPRI breakout board, option R&S EXBOX-B85, the CPRI RE
Test, option R&S EXBOX-K10 and the configuration software R&S DigIConf. For details
on available options, see chapter 3.2.2.1, "Standardized Protocols", on page 22.
R&S SMU200A
Reference
Digital IQ data
Transmitter R&S
R&S FSQ
USB control
R&S
IQ format
Receiver
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Bidirectional
mode
Breakout board
Optical or R&S FSQ

electrical link
Downlink
TX
CPRI link Receiver
CPRI RE
(Radio Equipment)
R&S SMU200A
RX
Baseband RF
Uplink
Transmitter
Fig. 5-2: Application example of a RE test setup with the digital interface protocol CPRI
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 48

CPRI Test Setup
The test setup covers the downlink and the uplink. It provides testing both directions either
simultaneously, i.e. full duplex, or uplink and downlink seperately.
The downlink signal flow

The R&S baseband signal generator feeds a baseband signal (e.g. an LTE downlink) in
the R&S specific I/Q format to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX converts the
R&S I/Q format into the CPRI protocol. The CPRI link transmits the I/Q baseband signal
and control & management information from the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the DUT, in this case
the CPRI RE Device.
The CPRI RE device extracts the baseband signal from the CPRI link and executes an
I/Q modulation to a certain carrier frequency RF. The resulting RF signal is sent to the
R&S spectrum-analyzer, to perform various measurements, e.g. ACP (Adjacent Channel
Power) or EVM (Error Vector Magnitude) evaluation.
The uplink signal flow

The R&S vector signal generator feeds an RF signal (e.g. an LTE uplink) via the antenna
input into the CPRI RE device. The DUT converts the signal from RF to baseband and
transmits the baseband signal by using the CPRI link.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX extracts the I/Q baseband signal from the CPRI protocol and sends
the signal in the R&S specific I/Q format to the R&S signal analyzer for demodulation.
All settings regarding the baseband signal (e.g. LTE) are directly controlled by the R&S
signal generator and analyzer, respectively.
CPRI settings like I/Q mapping or link settings are controlled by the configurator software
R&S DigIConf .
In addition to the I/Q data, C&M (Control and Management) information is embedded in
the CPRI protocol. These parameters are also set with the aid of R&S DigIConf.
An Ethernet connector provides fast C&M, and the R&S DigIConf inline text console can
be used for slow C&M.
5.2.2 Typical CPRI REC Test Setup
Example of a typical CPRI REC (Radio Equipment Control = baseband unit) test scenario,
where the R&S EX-IQ-BOX acts as a RF module RE (Remote Equipment).
The test setup requires the CPRI breakout board, option R&S EXBOX-B85, the CPRI
REC Test, option R&S EXBOX-K11 and the configuration software R&S DigIConf. For
details on available options, see chapter 3.2.2.1, "Standardized Protocols", on page 22.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 49

CPRI Test Setup
R&S DigIConf R&S FSQ
USB control R&S Digital IQ data

IQ format Receiver
(downlink)
R&S SMU200A
R&S Digital IQ data
IQ format
Reference
Transmitter
R&S EX-IQ-BOX (uplink)
Bidirectional
mode
Breakout board
Downlink
Optical or
electrical link
CPRI REC
CPRI link
(Radio Equipment Control)
Baseband
Uplink
Fig. 5-3: Application example of a REC test setup with the digital interface protocol CPRI
The test setup covers the downlink and the uplink. It provides testing both directions either
simultaneously, i.e. full duplex, or uplink and downlink separately.
The downlink signal flow

The DUT, in this case the CPRI REC device, generates a digital baseband signal (e.g.
an LTE downlink) and transmits this signal over the CPRI link.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX extracts the I/Q baseband signal from the CPRI protocol and sends
the signal in the R&S specific I/Q format to the R&S signal analyzer for demodulation.
The R&S signal analyzer features various measuring methods, as e.g. ACP (Adjacent
Channel Power) or EVM (Error Vector Magnitude) evaluation. Use this measurement
methods to examine the validity and quality of the digital baseband signal, or to evaluate
the influence of numerical imperfections, e.g. quantization effects depending on the I/Q
resolution.
The uplink signal flow

The R&S signal generator feeds an UE uplink signal (e.g. an LTE uplink) in the R&S
specific I/Q format to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX converts the R&S I/Q format into the CPRI protocol. The CPRI link
transmits the I/Q baseband signal and control & management information from the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the DUT, in this case the CPRI REC device.
The DUT must now be able to demodulate the UE uplink signal. Use the various func-
tionalities of the R&S signal generator, e.g. add Channel Fading, AWGN (Additive White
Gaussian Noise) and I/Q impairments in order to perform a very powerful and realistic
receiver / demodulator measurement with this test scenario.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 50

In-Circuit Emulation for Wireless Designs
All settings regarding the baseband signal (e.g. LTE) are directly controlled by the R&S
signal generator and analyzer, respectively.
CPRI settings like I/Q mapping or link settings are controlled by the configurator software
R&S DigIConf.
In addition to the I/Q data, "C&M" (Control and Management) information is embedded
in the CPRI protocol. These parameters are also set with the aid of R&S DigIConf.
An Ethernet connector provides fast C&M, and a RS-232-C connector provides slow C&M
in real time.
5.3 In-Circuit Emulation for Wireless Designs
The following test setup example requires the Cadence Palladium Breakout Board, option
R&S EXBOX-Z3, and the configuration software R&S DigIConf.
The following example shows a test setup for the emulation of a chip in a software model:
R&S DigIConf
USB control
R&S CMW500 Protocol Tester
Uplink
Frequency reference R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Digital IQ data
R&S IQ format
Breakout Board
Clock IQ data
Digital
IQ data Specific IQ format
USB control
Downlink
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Frequency reference
R&S IQ format
IQ data
Specific IQ format
Breakout Board
Clock
Fig. 5-4: Application example of an in-circuit emulation of wireless designs
This test setup shows an R&S CMW500, equipped for protocol testing which creates an
I/Q signal. The signal is then converted by an R&S EX-IQ-BOX and fed to the emulator.
A second R&S EX-IQ-BOX converts the incoming signal from the emulator and feeds it
into the baseband section of the R&S potocol tester. Both R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices are
controlled by R&S DigIConf. For detailed information on this application refer to the oper-
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 51

In-Circuit Emulation for Wireless Designs
ating manual of the protocol tester, and the to http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/appnote/

1CM75 on the internet.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 52

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX R&S EX-IQ-BOX Configuration
R&S DigIConf Configuration Software
6 R&S EX-IQ-BOX Configuration

The versatile functionality of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and its options provide convenient
adjustment for signal transmission between different digital interfaces and communica-
tion protocols. It supports both user defined protocols or the standardized transmission
protocol CPRI.
The configuration software R&S DigIConf enables you to configure and control the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX via PC. Some R&S instruments, as e.g. the R&S CMW500, also provide
installing R&S DigIConf on the instrument directly. Check in the operating manual to see
if your R&S instrument supports this mode of operation. Refer to chapter 3.1, "Basic
Operating Modes", on page 14 for description in detail.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX, model 1409.5505.02, additionally supports direct control from an
R&S instrument in User Defined mode. Due to the enhanced capabilities of the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04, this model is controlled by R&S DigIConf exclusively, since it
supports all applications.
The following references lead you to the appropriate descriptions for using R&S DigIConf,
and configuring the R&S EX-IQ-BOX for the respective applications:
● R&S DigIConf Configuration Software, comprises the graphical user interface and
basic functionalities of R&S DigIConf, including configuration dialogs and basic infor-
mation on remote control.
Note: The latest software versions can be downloaded free charge from the R&S
website:
● Configuration via R&S Instruments covers all specific characteristics of an R&S
instrument in conjunction with an R&S EX-IQ-BOX1409.5505.02, separately descri-
bed for every instrument family. E.g. the indication of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in an
instrument and access to the parameters of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in an instrument´s
dialog. This constellation applies to User Defined applications.
Separate chapters contain protocol settings of the specific operating modes:
● chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95 covers the parameters and settings for
serial or parallel transmission of I/Q signals, including clock modes, data rates and
logical signal levels.
● chapter 7.2, "CPRI", on page 126 covers explanations and the description to this
standardized protocol.
6.1 R&S DigIConf Configuration Software

This chapter describes the graphical user interface of R&S DigIConf, including the layout
of the application window, the display, controls and how to operate the configuration
software R&S DigIConf. Additionally the chapter contains information on special features
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 53

concerning the connection of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to R&S instruments and the respective
configuration dialogs.
6.1.1 Graphical User Interface - Overview
After starting the R&S DigIConf software the main application window opens.
The appearance of the application window is based on the Microsoft®Windows layout,
covering
● a header with the name of the window and buttons for minimizing and closing
● a menubar with functions to file management, tools and access to the help system
a toolbar with icons for saving ore restoring instrument settings
● a display with a block diagram and the infoline
● a taskbar with softkeys showing open dialogs that are minimized
Fig. 6-1: R&S DigIConf main application window
1 = window header
2 = menu bar
3 = tool bar
4 = remote indicator
5 = block diagram
5a = connector symbol
5b = EX-IQ-BOX functional block
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 54

5c = DUT block
5d = graphical signal display
6 = info line
7 = task bar
The following description mainly refers to R&S DigIConf and to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. For
windows functionalities refer to Microsoft® Windows help system.
6.1.1.1 Menu Bar
The menu bar covers menus with functions for file management, tools for configuration
and access to the help system. Some of the functions are visualized by icons and avail-
able in the toolbar.
For an overview of functions with associated icons, refer to chapter 6.1.1.2, "Toolbar",
on page 55.
The menu functions are executed by a mouse click on the associated menu item. The
following table briefly explains the menus and refers to the detailed description:
Table 6-1: Menu overview
Menu Function Find description under ...
The File menu contains all functions c hapter 6.1.2.1, "File Menu",
that belong to file management, e.g. on page 58
creating, saving or recalling settings
data.
Open dialogs for accessing informa- c hapter 6.1.2.2, "Tools Menu",

tion on R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices and on page 59
to set protection levels for test and
service purposes.
The Help menu provides access to chapter 6.1.2.3, "Help Menu",

the complete description of the on page 60
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, and index for
search and informs about software
version and support.
6.1.1.2 Toolbar
The toolbar of the main application window contains icons for quickly starting the main
functions.
The functions are started by clicking the icon buttons with the left mouse button. Each
icon features a corresponding item in the menu lists. For assignment on the icons to the
corresponding functions see the table below:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 55

Table 6-2: Icons and the corresponding functions
Icon Function Corresponding Menu item
Preset File > New
Load Settings File > Open
Save Settings File > Save
Indicates that ---

R&S DigIConf is
remotely operated.
File handling is described briefly in chapter 6.1.2.1, "File Menu", on page 58
6.1.1.3 Info
The info line reports and indicates the current state with status, error and warning mes-
sages. Detailed information on the messages is shown in the info window, called by the
info button. For description in detail refer to chapter 6.1.3, "Info Line and Window",
on page 60.
6.1.1.4 Block Diagram
The diagram is built up like the display of the R&S Signal Generators. Test system archi-
tecture and signal flow are shown in the block diagram. Each R&S EX-IQ-BOX is
assigned to a block, which is shown always in a line with an instrument block and a DUT.
The DUT is displayed as passive block.
Block Diagram
R&S DigIConf may handle up to four R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices simultaneously. The
number of R&S EX-IQ-BOXes to be configured is set in the entry field "Number of
R&S EX-IQ-BOXes" located in the toolbar.
The block diagram in the figure below represents a configuration with one R&S EX-IQ-
BOX and one R&S instrument, i.e. in this case an R&S AMU200A.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX transfers test signals to a DUT or from a DUT to an R&S instrument:
● in transmitter mode the signals are transferred from an R&S instrument in conjunc-
tion with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to a DUT.
● in receiver mode incoming signals from a DUT are forwarded to an R&S instrument
from the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 56

Input/Output symbols in the block diagram show the currently used inputs and outputs
and the lines indicate the signal flow.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:COUNt on page 250
6.1.1.5 Taskbar
The labeled buttons in the winbar indicate active dialogs. When a button softkey is
pressed, the associated dialog is displayed in the foreground or minimized in the winbar.
The button displayed in a lighter color indicates that the corresponding dialog is currently
open. Up to eight dialogs may be open simultaneously. When the ninth dialog is opened,
the dialog that was opened first is automatically closed.
6.1.1.6 Dialogs
The parameters are set in dialogs, which vary in details depending on their functions.
Dialogs are designed in Microsoft®Windows format, covering the same functional ele-
ments, as e.g. entry fields, selection lists, checkboxes and buttons. A dialog is accessed
either by means of an item in the menu list or via the function block in the diagram.
Each dialog consists of a window header and one or more sections with various fields for
setting parameters. The header line contains the name of the dialog and the buttons for
minimizing and closing the dialog. To operate the buttons, use the mouse. Several fields
of associated but separately set parameters can be organized in an area, framed and
labelled with the function common to all parameters. Also, some parameters can be par-
tially structured in tabs.
R&S DigIConf mainly distinguishes between the settings dialogs for User Defined or
standardized protocol settings and configuration dialogs, which comprise for example
general settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, options, connected instruments, default settings
or setup tests.
● Configuration dialogs are described in chapter 6.1.6, "Configuration Dialogs",
on page 65.
● For settings dialogs of your specific application, comprising signal and interface
parameters refer to the respective section under chapter 7, "Protocol Settings",
on page 95.
6.1.1.7 Context-sensitive Menus
Within the entire screen display, including single parameters, you can access context-
sensitive menus that provide some additional functions.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 57

6.1.2 Menus
6.1.2.1 File Menu
The File menu contains all functions that belong to file management, e.g. creating, saving
or recalling settings data.
Operation of file management is very similar to operation of Windows user interfaces.
Menus and dialogs are made up of known elements, such as selection lists, check boxes
and entry fields.
File > New
Setup a new configuration. The function resets the current configuration.
File > Open...
Open a settings file previously stored with Save or Save as.
The "Choose a file to open" dialog is similar to an MS Windows File dialog. Use this dialog
in the same way to select a previously stored settings file.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 58

R&S instruments or programs generally store settings files with the extension *.savrcl.
Therefore the suffix is preset in the field Files of type and only files with this extension
are listed.
File > Save

Store the current settings in a file. If it is a previously loaded file the settings are stored
in the same file without confirmation. If it is a new configuration the settings are stored
with "Save as".
File > Save as...
Store the current settings in a selected file. Assign a file name and choose the directory
to save the settings file.
The extension of a settings file is *.savrcl and cannot be changed. By default settings files
are stored in the R&S DigIConf application directory, for example %Program Files%
\RohdeSchwarz\DigIConf\... .
File > Exit

Quits the R&S DigIConf.
The current settings of the R&S DigIConf session are saved and loaded by default when
starting R&S DigIConf again.
6.1.2.2 Tools Menu
The Tools menu contains functions for R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices and protection.
Tools > EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager

Displays information about the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices, e.g. serial or part
number and a list of installed options. Fields and parameters of this dialog are described
in chapter 6.1.6.1, "EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager", on page 65.
For installing options refer to Installing chapter 4.6, "Installing R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Options", on page 44.
Tools > Protection...

Opens the protection dialog, which is described under chapter 6.1.6.2, "Protection",
on page 69.
Tools > Preferences...
Opens the preferences dialog, covering the default settings directory and displays the
SCPI server port. See chapter chapter 6.1.6.3, "Preferences", on page 69.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 59

6.1.2.3 Help Menu
The Help menu provides access to the complete description of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, an
index for search and informs about software version and support.
Help > Contents...

Opens the online help start page.
Help > Index...
Open the online help index. Search for specific words or phrases, or choose from a list
of keywords.
Help > About R&S DigIConf ...
Retrieve information about software version and R&S support of R&S DigIConf.
6.1.3 Info Line and Window
6.1.3.1 Info Line
On top of the block diagram the info line reports and indicates the current state with status,
error and warning messages. Status information and messages differ concerning their
importance and display duration. Further information on all messages can be called in
the info window.
Status information
Gives an overview of the main operating states and settings. States are indicated for
information and do not necessiate any action by the user.
Messages
Mesages indicate errors. They are displayed in different colors depending on their impor-
tance. Errors are displayed in red, information and warnings in balack. Warnings indicate
less significant errors.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 60

Volatile messages
Brief messages report automatic settings in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or on illegal entries that
are not accepted by the instrument. They are displayed in the info line on a yellow back-
ground, always on top of status information or permanent messages. Volatile messages
do not normally demand user actions and disappear automatically after a brief period of
time. They are stored in the history, however.
Permanent messages
Permanent messages are displayed if an error occurs that impairs further operation, e.g.
a hardware fault. The error signalled by a permanent message must be eliminated before
correct instrument operation can be ensured.
The message is displayed until the error is eliminated. It covers the status display in the
info line. After error elimination, the message automatically disappears and is also recor-
ded in the history.
6.1.3.2 Info Window
An information window comprising a description of current messages opens with the

"Info" button.
The upper section of the info window contains a list of all current permanent messages
in the order of their occurrence, i.e. the most recent message is displayed first. In the
lower section of the window, additional information on the highlighted message is dis-
played. A history of all messages that have occurred since startup can be called with the
"Show History" softkey. The most recent message is displayed first.
The messages are color-coded according to their level. Device-specific messages are
red, info and remote control error are black.
The level is also indicated in the "Lev" column. Column "SCPI" indicates the SCPI error
code. Column "Text" displays the message in short form.
With the aid of the softkeys, error messages can be cleared and a history of all messages
called.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 61

Delete
Clears the highlighted message.
This button is available only if the history of the messages is displayed.
Delete all
Clears all messages.
Del. volatile
Clears all volatile messages.
Show History /Show Static

Calls the list of all messages that have occurred since instrument switch-on. The most
recent messages are displayed at the top of the list. When the softkey is pressed again,
the list of current messages is displayed.
6.1.4 Blocks
The block diagram shows the current configuration and signal flow and permits interactive
operation via graphical elements. The diagram indicates a separate block for each con-
neced R&S EX-IQ-BOX, and other R&S instruments.
The DUT is displayed as passive block, just representing the device under test.
6.1.4.1 R&S EX-IQ-BOX
An R&S EX-IQ-BOX function block provides access to the settings of the corresponding
standard transmission protocol, determined by the connected breakout board.
R&S DigIConf may handle up to four connected R&S EX-IQ-BOXes, each displayed in
a separate block. Each block automatically displays the essential information on the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the transmission protocol.
Fig. 6-2: R&S DigIConf EX-IQ-BOX in the block diagram
1 = block label
1 = config button
1 = On checkbox
In this block, a R&S EX-IQ-BOX is configured and activated.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 62

The block label (1) represents the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, including the serial number of the
connected instrument.
The label of the configure button (2) shows the used interface protocol, that means either
"User Defined" or "CPRI". To access the settings dialogs, click the button.
To access the settings dialog of a protocol requires that the associated option is installed
and the respective breakout board is connected. Refer to chapter 6.1.6.1, "EX-IQ-BOX
Device Manager", on page 65 for installed options.
The chapters chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95and chapter 7.2, "CPRI",
on page 126 describe the parameters of the specific protocols.
The On checkbox (3) activates signal input or output of the assigned R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
6.1.4.2 Smart Graphic Display
The signal can be graphically displayed in the block diagram, in form of a "smart graphic".
A shown signal is actually recorded by one of the transient recordes. The display is acti-
vated in the settings dialog chapter 6.1.6.5, "Transient Recorder", on page 71, and can
be used for checking purposes. R&S DigIConf provides two transient recorders pro
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, which can both be activated for display.
To access the transient recorder dialog, click the smart graphic.
6.1.4.3 Instrument
In the instrument block a connected R&S instrument is indicated. Click the button to get
access to a dialog for configuring the network connection, described in chapter 6.1.6.4,
"Instrument on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 70.
Displays the name and the instrument ID of the connected instrument.
6.1.5 Help System
R&S DigIConf is equipped with a context-sensitive help function offering quick context-
sensitive reference to the information needed for operating. The comprehensive help
system contains the complete user documentation including the contents of the quick
start guide.
Each parameter offers a context-sensitive help page you can call at any time during the
operation.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 63

► Open a help page with the F1 function key.

F1 opens a browser window with the description of the highlighted parameter. You
can move from this context-sensitive page to any page of the help system.
Note:
The Help (*.chm) file, included on the CD-ROM, also works in stand-alone mode.
Alternatively, you can open the help in the help menu or in the menu tree.
► Select the appropriate item in the help menu, or right-click in the application window.
Click "Menu" and select the appropriate help item.
A browser window opens, tiled into three panels. On top, several navigation are available
scrolling through the help pages. On the left, a contents panel lists all topics, and the text
panel aside describes the selected topic. The contents panel provides additional tabs
with an index and a search function.
Links are highlighted in blue, and can be selected and called up using the mouse.
Fig. 6-3: R&S EX-IQ-BOX Configuration > help window
6.1.5.1 Navigation panel
Navigation softkeys on top of the help window provide browsing through the help pages.
● "Hide" / "Show"
Display or hide the contents panel.
● "Previous" / "Next"
Scroll through the help pages. The sequence of the pages corresponds to their posi-
tion in the dialogs.
● "Back" / "Forward"
Switches to the previously opened help page and back again.
● Home
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 64

Opens the first pge of the online help.

● Print
Enables you to print the selected topic or all the topics in the selected heading.
6.1.5.2 Contents panel
The contents panel is divided into three tabs:

● "Contents"
In the topics list you can select certain help pages individually. It is structured hier-
archically. The highlighted topic indicates the currently displayed page.
● "Index"
The index contains an alphabetical list of all terms which refer to functions of the
application. The index is used to call up all pages which contain the selected entry.
The index has an alphabetical structure. The associated help page can be opened
by double click.
● "Search"
The text search allows you to look for freely selectable terms in all help pages. A list
of the pages containing the entered term is displayed as the search result.
The content of the titles only for the complete help text can be searched for the
entered term.
6.1.5.3 Text panel
Shows the help text and links to subtopics and the corresponding GPIB bus command.
Internal links in the text open pages which directly relate to the described function.
6.1.6 Configuration Dialogs
Select "Tools" > "Menu" and the corresponding menu item to access a configuration
dialog.
6.1.6.1 EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager
This dialog displays instrumet specific information on a connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX and
the installed options. Installing new options is done in this dialog.
The enhanced functionalities like standardized protocols or waveform memories are

supported only by the R&S EX-IQ-BOX variant 1409.5505K04. Hence, the "EX-IQ-BOX
Device Manager" dialog varies in dependence of the variant.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 65

R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505.02
EX-IQ-BOX Device
The selection field "EX-IQ-BOX Device" lists each connected device.
The serial number of the device is used to identify a device. “Undefined” indicates that
there is no R&S EX-IQ-BOX connected. For connection refer to chapter 4.5, "Connecting
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 42.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CATalog? on page 239
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SELect on page 244
Hardware Info
The hardware panel is related to the selectecd R&S EX-IQ-BOX and indicates various
information, like part number, serial number, firmware version etc. and the installed
options.
Hardware component Information Model-specific
"Part Number" The part number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. -
"Serial Number" The serial number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. -
"EZ-USB/ARM Firmware The firmware version installed in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. -

Version"
"PPC Firmware Version" The version of the built-in power PC. R&S EX-IQ-BOX
1409.5505K04
"FPGA (Base) Version" The version of FPGA (Field Programmable Gate -

Array) basic design.
"FPGA DigIO Version" The version of the digital interface standard. R&S EX-IQ-BOX
1409.5505K04
"FPGA BOB Version" The version of the connected breakout board. -
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 66

Hardware component Information Model-specific
"CPLD Version" The version of CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Device). 1409.5505.02
"Board Part Number" The part number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal -
board.
"Board Serial Number" The serial number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal -
board.
"Board Revision" The revision number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal -

board.
"Breakout Board Type" The type of the connected breakout board. -
"Breakout Board Serial Num- The serial number of the connected breakout board. R&S EX-IQ-BOX
ber" 1409.5505K04
"Breakout Board Revision" The revision number of the connected breakout board. -
The breakout board might be unplugged while the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX is running. In this case, the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX is deactivated, i.e. the protocol, if active, is
also deactivated. The breakout board information is no
longer indicated.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PART on page 241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CONTroller? on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SERial on page 244
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PPCVersion? on page 241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BASe? on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:DIGio? on page 241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BOB? on page 241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CPLD? on page 240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:PART? on page 242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:SERial? on page 242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:REVision? on page 242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:TYPE? on page 243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:SERial? on page 243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:REVision? on page 242
Options
Displays the installed hardware and software options of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. In addition,
you can enable options purchased at a later stage.
Note: An option is ready to operate after it is enabled by means of a license key code,
supplied with the option. To obtain the license key code, you must specify the device ID
of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Device ID ← Options
Displays the R&S EX-IQ-BOX specific identification number. The device ID is an unique
string with the following structure:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 67

<part number>-<serial number>-<checksum>

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ID? on page 250
Installed Options ← Options

Lists all options the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with. The first column shows the R&S
option type, and the second contains a short description.
Note: Only the R&S EX-IQ-BOX variant 1409.5505K04 supports the enlarged function-
ality of the additionally available options.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:OPT on page 250
Enter License Key ← Options

Type here the license key provided with the option.
For license key delivered as a file, use
For description on how to install a new option refer to chapter 4.6, "Installing R&S EX-
IQ-BOX Options", on page 44.
Import License Key From File ← Options

Opens a file manager dialog for selecting the file with the license key.
Export Deactivation Response To File ← Options

Exports the generated deactivation response key to a file. A file management dialog
opens for storing the file.
This key is required during the unregistration process.
Note: If you want o register an option at another R&S EX-IQ-BOX, you must request a
new license key code for the instrument, see Device ID.
Status Information ← Options

Displays status information about the license process.
Update EX-IQ-BOX Firmware

This section is displayed in the device manager dialog of an R&S EX-IQ-BOX
1409.5505.02. It indicates the installed as well as the currently available firmware version
and provides an update.
FW versions Information
"This software supports ver- Indicates the firmware available in the current software of the R&S DigIConf.
sion"
"Installed version" Indicates the currently installed firmware version in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FIRMware:SUPPorted? on page 243
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 68

Update
Executes an update of the firmware. R&S DigIConf starts the update and reports when
it is completed.
6.1.6.2 Protection
Protection
"Protection" enables activating or deactivating several protective levels to provide special
functions like self test or specific tests for service purposes.
Protected functions are unlocked, when the correct password for the respective protec-
tion level is entered.
Unlock, for example, some self test routines, while you switch protective level 1 to unpro-
tected. The password is 123456.
Note: Only personnel of R&S Service Departments are authorized to access level 2 and
higher.
After Startup, all protection levels are activated.
Remote command:
n.a.
6.1.6.3 Preferences
The preference dialog indicates the settings directory for default settings, and indicates
the currently used server port.
Default Settings Directory

Select the directory that contains application-specific settings files.
Note:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 69

● During installation, R&S DigIConf creates several directories, including the settings
directory, which is scheduled for storing application settings. With this field you can
individually select a directory with application-specific settings files.
● If you uninstall DigIconf, you can keep these files. The same applies if you update
R&S DigIConf.
SCPI Server Port

Select the port address of the server for remote control.
Info Server Port

Sets the port address of the TCP/IP connection.
Provides information on TCP/IP connection on this port, such as parallel, locked, USB or
LVDS.
Show Taskbar
Activates the display of the taskbar in the block diagram. Changing the setting requires
a restart of R&S DigIConf.
Remote command:
n.a.
6.1.6.4 Instrument on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
This dialog covers information on the connected R&S instrument. In addition, R&S Dig-
IConf provides the remote control of the instrument.
The instruments block and the configuration dialog are available, if an R&S instrument is
connected.
R&S instruments can be remote controlled from an external PC via LAN (TCP/IP), GPIB
or USB. This allows convenient operation of the instruments from R&S DigIConf, too.
Settings are sent by R&S DigIConf into the instruments via SCPI commands, which are
entered in the SCPI Interactive tab or the SCPI Scripting tab.
Refer to the operating manual of your R&S instrument for details to interfaces and pro-
gramming for the remote control.
The dialog is accessed in the block of the connected instrument:

Click on the <instrument> button in the instrument block.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 70

Connected Instrument
Indicates the name and serial number of the connected R&S instrument. These two
parameters also appear as label on the <instrument> button of the instrument block.
The General Information tab, section Hardware Information displays hardware infor-
mation of the connected instrument.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:NAME? on page 251
Instrument Type
Displays the name of the connected instrument. The name is used for instrument iden-
tification within the program and is displayed in the <instrument> button of the instrument
block.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:TYPE? on page 252
Serial Number
The serial number of the connected R&S instrument. The ID is also is displayed in the
<instrument> button of the instrument block.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:SERial? on page 252
Port
The digital interface where the R&S instrument is connected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:PORT? on page 252
6.1.6.5 Transient Recorder
Two independent transient recorders provide monitoring the I/Q data flow through the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX. You can record input signals, output signals and signals of the wave-
form memory. The graphical representation allows to quickly view and check the current
signal characteristics.
The transient recorders are provided in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 71

► To access an "Transient Recorder" settings dialog, click the smart graphic in the block
diagram.
Fig. 6-4: R&S DigIConf transient recorder
This dialog contains all parameters required for recording, as:

● "State" for activating
● "Data Source" to select the signal
● "Display Settings" to determine the type of display
● "Acquisition Settings" for setting the capture length
This section provides setting the length for recording or selecting a specific sample
for recording.
● "Trigger Settings" to configure the triggering mechanism for data acquisition

The section contains the parameters for triggering the signal to be recorded.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 72

● The "Status" line indicates when recording is running.
State
Activates the selected transient recorder.
Note: Note that the R&S EX-IQ-BOX must be switched on for data recording.
After activation, the diagram selected with Display Type is displayed in the "Graphics"
window.
Data Source
Selects the signal source of the I/Q data for recording.
Either signals directly fed in at the digital interfaces of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, or signals
generated from the waveform output memory can be recorded.
"DIG IQ IN 1" Selects the signal fed in at the corresponding digital interface DIG I/Q
IN/OUT 1.
"DIG IQ OUT 2" Selects the signal assigned at the corresponding digital interface DIG
I/Q IN/OUT 2 output.
"ARB 1 ... 4" Records a signal played back from one of the waveform memories.
"USER INTERFACE"
Records the signal transmitted at the USER INTERFACE.
"Sine Testsignal"
Records the internally generated sine test signal.
Smart Graphic
Activates the display of a smart graphic.
Additionally to the graphics window in the dialog, R&S DigIConf shows the graphic in a
smaller scale, i.e. as a Smart graphic in the main application window, directly below the
corresponding "EX-IQ-BOX" block. It serves basic checks.
Note: Double click the smart graphic to open the transient recorder configuration dialog.
Display Type
Select the graphical signal display. Available diagram types to display the recorded data
are I/Q, Vector, CCDF and Power Spectrum diagrams. The individual diagram types
are described in chapter 6.1.6.6, "Graphical Signal Displays ", on page 75.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 73

Acquisition Length
Select the number of samples to be captured by the transient recorder. The sample
memory sizes 512, 1024 and 2048 MSamples are available.
Decimation Factor
Selects a certain sample to be recorded, i.e. only the nth sample is recorded.
Trigger Mode
Select the mode for triggering.
"Continuous" Recording is automatically initiated and continues until the process is
stopped manually. Recording is retriggered every 250ms.
Note: Deactivate the recorder while switching off status.
"Single" Records one signal flow until acquisition length is reached. Initiate a
single trigger event by pressing the "Start Recording" button.
Start Recording
Manually initiate a trigger event to start recording the signal once.
Note: This button applies to "Single Trigger" mode.
Trigger Source
Sets the time for starting the recording. A trigger event can be initiated by the software
itself or by hardware events.
Note: The control signals GP_0 ... GP_5 are part of the I/Q signal and transmitted via
the digital I/Q interface of the R&S instrument.
"Software" R&S DigIConf initiates the trigger event for recording. Recording starts
automatically either within specified intervals, in continuous mode or by
defined user events in single mode.
"Data valid" The external control signal Data Valid initiates the recording of data.
"GP_0" The "(Marker 0)" determines the beginning of recording.
"GP_1 " (Reserve 0) triggers the recording.
"GP_2 " (Trigger 0) triggers the recording.
"GP_3 " (Trigger 1) triggers the recording.
"GP_4 " (Marker 1) triggers the recording.
"GP_5 " (Reserve 1) triggers the recording.
Trigger Type
Set the polarity of the signal to trigger data recording.
Note: "Trigger type" supports all hardware trigger sources like DATA VALID and
GP_0..5. Trigger source "Software" does not use this parameter.
"Rising Edge" The positive slope of the reference signal starts recording the I/Q data
signal.
"Falling Edge" The negative slope of the reference signal triggers recording.
"Low Level" The low reference level of the signal triggers recording. Low level rep-
resents the logical 0.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 74

"High Level" Start recording as long as the reference signal level is high. High level
corresponds to logical 1.
Trigger Position
The trigger position determines the position of the trigger event on the time-scale. The
value is set in samples while a positive number <n> means the trigger event is at sample
number <n>, a negative value means the trigger event was before the first sample.
Status
Indicates the current status of the transient recorder: "Stopped", or "Running".
6.1.6.6 Graphical Signal Displays
Different signal displays assist in evaluating and checking the I/Q data flow through the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
I/Q Diagram
The I/Q diagram displays the inphase component (i[t]) and quadrature component (q[t])
of the I/Q signal over time. The diagram is displayed in a window with two separate coor-
dinate systems. The coordinate systems have identical X and Y axes. The time in number
of samples is plotted on the X axes, and the amplitude scaled to the peak envelope power
(PEP) is plotted on the Y axes (minimum scaled amplitude = -1; maximum scaled ampli-
tude = +1). The recording depth is 1 kSamples.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 75

Fig. 6-5: R&S DigIConf signal graphics > I/Q diagram
Vector Diagram
The Q component is displayed over the I component in the vector diagram. Each point
is determined by a vector. The amplitudes of the signal components scaled to the peak
envelope power (PEP) are plotted on the X and Y axis (minimum scaled amplitude = -1;
maximum scaled amplitude = +1).
This display shows the curves between the various states of modulation mapping. The
recording depth is 1 kSamples.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 76

Fig. 6-6: R&S DigIConf signal graphics > Vector diagram
CCDF Display
The Complementary Cumulative Distribution Function shows the probability with which
the output will exceed the average power. The level over the average power is plotted
from 0 to 20 dB on the X axis; the average power corresponds to the origin. The probability
of exceeding the average power is plotted between and 100% on the Y axis. The record-
ing depth is 8 kSamples.
The point at which the CCDF curve intersects the X axis gives the crest factor of the
signal.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 77

Fig. 6-7: R&S DigIConf signal graphics > CCDF display
Power Spectrum (FFT)

With the spectrum display, the signal spectrum is calculated from the I/Q signal by means
of Fourier Transform (FFT). The power density over frequency is displayed. The power
density is plotted on the Y axis, and frequency is plotted symmetrically on the X axis (-
sampling rate/2 to +sampling rate/2). FFT Points indicates the number of I/Q value pairs
which are used for calculating a (part-)FFT. AVG indicates number of subspectra used
for averaging. The recording depth is 8 kSamples.
The spectrum display of the output signal is particularly suitable for checking multi carrier
signals.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 78

Fig. 6-8: R&S DigIConf signal graphics > Power spectrum
6.1.7 Connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX
This section describes how a connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX is indicated in R&S DigIConf.
6.1.7.1 Connection
For controlling the R&S EX-IQ-BOX with R&S DigIConf, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX must be
connected to the PC via USB. The connection of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the PC and the
instrument is described in detail in chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX",
on page 42.
6.1.7.2 Indicating the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in R&S DigIConf
By the connection of an R&S EX-IQ-BOX, R&S DigIConf recognizes the device auto-
matically and shows the following message in the Info line.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 79

► Select a serial number from the list to assign the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the block.
A device can be assigned only once, i.e. it is then grayed out in the lists of the other
blocks. If no R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected or an assigned R&S EX-IQ-BOX is dis-
connected, "Undefined" is indicated automatically.
R&S DigIConf shows a connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX as follows:

● the "EX-IQ-BOX" function block shows the serial number
Fig. 6-9: R&S DigIConf > serial number of the R&S DigIConf in the function block
R&S DigIConf shows the serial numbers of all connected R&S EX-IQ-BOXes in the
device list of each function block.
● the header of all "settings dialogs" indicates the serial number
Fig. 6-10: R&S EX-IQ-BOX serial number in the header of dialogs
● the "EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager"
Fig. 6-11: R&S EX-IQ-BOX hardware information in the device manager
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 80

This dialog provides detailed information on the hard- and firmware, see chap-
ter 6.1.6.1, "EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager", on page 65
6.1.7.3 Transmitting I/Q Data
The I/Q data transmission between the R&S instruments and DUT via the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX starts by switching on in the protocol settings dialogs or by ticking the checkbox of
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX function block.
Data transmission requires that the respective option is installed and the corresponding
breakout board is connected.
6.1.8 Connected R&S Instruments
A test setup usually operates with one or more R&S instruments for generating signals
or evaluating results. This section explains how R&S DigIConf indicates a connected R&S
instrument.
6.1.8.1 Connection
The connection to an R&S instrument is established via the digital I/Q interface DIG IQ
IN/OUT.
An R&S instrument has to be equipped with an option for digital baseband input or output,
respectively. Refer to the corresponding internet site of your instrument for information
on the available options.
Additionally, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX controlled by R&S DigIConf, i.e. it must be connected
to the controlling PC via USB.
The connection of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the PC and the instrument is described in detail
in chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 42.
6.1.8.2 Indicating the R&S Instrument in R&S DigIConf
By the connection, R&S DigIConf recognizes the R&S instrument automatically and
shows the following message in the Info line.
The button in the instruments block is labeled with the name and the device ID of the
instrument.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 81

Fig. 6-12: R&S DigIConf > R&S instrument function block
R&S DigIConf indicates a connected R&S instrument as follows:

● it shows an "Instrument" function block with a softkey, labeled with product name and
device ID (serial number).
● "Input/Output" symbols show the currently used inputs and outputs
● "Arrows" indicate the signal flow.
► Click "<instrument>" to open the "Instrument on EX-IQ-BOX <n> (<connector>)" dia-

log box.
Fig. 6-13: R&S DigIConf > Instrument on EX-IQ-BOX... dialog box
R&S DigIConf displays the procuct name and device ID of the connected R&S instrument
in the header of this dialog box, described in chapter 6.1.6.4, "Instrument on the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX", on page 70.
Indication of an R&S EX-IQ-BOX in the R&S Instrument

After establishing the data connection, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is also indicated in the R&S
instrument. In R&S signal generators, the ID (serial number) is shown in the "Connected
Device" field of the digital IQ input/output dialogs. Analyzers indicate the respective
R&S EX-IQ-BOX information in the "EXBoxStatus" field.
6.1.9 Automation of R&S DigIConf
In addition to the usual control of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX using the R&S DigIConf interface,
the entire system can be remotely controlled.
It is particularly useful for repeating measurement sequences reproducible, e.g. to ach-
ieve higher configuration speeds or to perform complex test setups.
In remote mode, the software is remotely controlled by a controller. Each PC with the
required remote control software installed can act as a controller. You only need a LAN
connection to the PC with R&S DigIConf.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 82

Configuration via R&S Instruments
Possible remote control configurations are:

● Controller and R&S DigIConf installed on the same PC
Controller localhost R&S DigIConf USB R&S EX-IQ-BOX
PC
● Controller and R&S DigIConf running on separate PCs:
Controller LAN R&S DigIConf USB R&S EX-IQ-BOX
PC#1 PC#2
Refer to chapter 8.1.3, "Starting a Remote Control Session", on page 215 for information
on how to get started and how to establish a remote control connection between the
controller and the software.
The remote control mode controls R&S DigIConf with commands following the SCPI
(Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments) standard.
Find a detailed description of the SCPI commands available for R&S DigIConf in chap-
ter 9, "Remote Control Commands", on page 236. The remote control commands related
to the transmission protocols are described in detail after each functional unit.
For background information on the SCPI command structure and basic information on
operating the R&S DigIConf software via remote control, refer to chapter 8, "Remote
Control Basics", on page 213.
6.2 Configuration via R&S Instruments

This chapter describes how you configure the R&S EX-IQ-BOX directly in a R&S instru-
ment. It explains connection, indication and data transmission separately for each instru-
ment family.
● chapter 6.2.1, "R&S Signal Generators", on page 84 contains general information
on the connection and operation with the R&S signal generators, the block diagram
and the configuration dialogs.
● chapter 6.2.2, "R&S Signal Analyzers", on page 89 contains general information on
connection and operation with R&S signal analyzers and shows the display and con-
figuration dialogs.
● chapter 6.2.3, "R&S Protocol Tester", on page 94 always control the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX via R&S DigIConf. Therefore, this chapter contains references to the relevant
information.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 83

Direct configuration via R&S Instruments applies to the previous model of the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 and User Defined applications.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04 is always controlled by R&S DigIConf.
Some R&S instruments, as e.g. the R&S CMW500 may also directly control the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX, but in this case, operation is only possible with R&S DigIConf. Check in the
operating manual to see if your instrument supports this mode of operation. How to oper-
ate R&S DigIConf in general refer to chapter 6.1, "R&S DigIConf Configuration Soft-
ware", on page 53.
The protocol settings are described in chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95, where
you also find links to the corresponding remote commands, described in chapter 9.3,
"User Defined - Remote Control Commands", on page 257.
6.2.1 R&S Signal Generators
The information in this section applies to R&S SMx and R&S AMU Signal Generators.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02 can be controlled directly by an R&S signal generator
only in a "User Defined" application. Test cases of standardized protocols require
R&S DigIConf.
An R&S instrument must be equipped with the option for digital baseband input or output,
respectively. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is then connected at the digital interface Baseband
Digital IN or Out of the R&S instrument.
You find a short overview on the instruments and the appropriate options in chapter 3.2.5,
"R&S Instruments Working with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 25. Refer to the R&S
website for latest information.
The configuration is performed in the signal generator´s configuration dialogs. Accessing
the dialogs is described in chapter 6.2.1.3, "Dialogs", on page 87 and the settings in
chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 84

Risk of hardware damage

Digital, electrical signals base on various logical technologies, such as TTL or CMOS with
several voltage levels. Therefore, the signal settings in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX must cor-
respond to the signal, in both, the logical standard as well as the voltage value.
Any deviations may damage the DUT or the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
A change of the logic type during the operation is performed only when you confirm the
following warning message:
● Check the voltage values of your test setup.

● Select "OK" if the correct logic type is selected.
● Select "Cancel" if an incompatible logic type is selected. Adjust your setup accord-
ingly and set correct logic type in the main configuration dialog for User Defined pro-
tocols, see "Logic Type" on page 99 .
6.2.1.1 Connection
► Establish the USB and LVDS connection between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the R&S
signal generator, as described in chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX",
on page 42.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX can be connected or disconnected while the R&S instrument
is in operating mode.
6.2.1.2 Indication of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in an R&S Signal Generator
The graphical user interfaces (GUIs) of the signal generators R&S AMU200A, R&S
SMU200A and R&S SMJ100A display the architecture and the signal flow in a block
diagram. If an R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected, the R&S instrument recognizes this device
automatically, and marks the connection in the block diagram accordingly.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 85

Fig. 6-14: Display of the R&S AMU 200A Baseband Signal Generator and Fading Simulator
The shown diagrams represent the block diagram of an R&S AMU200A baseband signal
generator. RS SMx signal generators with RF signal path show the same baseband input
block, but the digital I/Q signal output is assigned to the AWGN/IMP block. They do not
have a separate output block as the AMU.
Once the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected via USB, the generator detects it and displays
the following:
● "Info Line"
The signal generator establishes the connection and reports it in the info line.
Fig. 6-15: R&S signal generator > establish R&S EX-IQ-BOX connection
● "Symbol in the block diagram"

The generator shows a symbol labeled with "EX-IQ-BOX" in the block diagram.
Fig. 6-16: Indication of an R&S EX-IQ-BOX in a generator block diagram at the example of the R&S
AMU200A
● "Baseband Input Settings" or "Digital I/Q Output Settings" dialogs

– The button "EX-I/Q-BOX Settings..." appears, providing access to the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX settings dialogs.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 86

Fig. 6-17: R&S EX-IQ-BOX button in a signal generators digital input / output settings dialogs
– The ID (serial number) of the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX is shown in the "Con-
nected Device" information field.
If you unplug the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, the generator changes its display accordingly:
● Symbol in the block diagram
The instrument automatically closes the associated active R&S EX-IQ-BOX dialogs
and shows the common symbol "DIG I/Q IN" or "DIG I/Q OUT".
Fig. 6-18: R&S signal generator standard symbol of the digital interface.
6.2.1.3 Dialogs
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX settings are accessed via the main settings dialogs "Baseband
Input Settings" or "Digital I/Q Output Settings" of the associated function block.
● The setting parameters for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX are identical for baseband input and
output, but there is a separate dialog for each direction, indicated in the header.
● In the remote control signal direction is determined in the command syntax.
● The parameters are described in chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95 and the
remote control commands in chapter 9.3, "User Defined - Remote Control Com-
mands", on page 257 .
1. To access the settings dialog, click "Config..." of the corresponding block and select
the associated settings entry in the menu list.
Fig. 6-19: Digital input / output menus of signal generators
Either the dialog "Baseband Input Settings" or "Digital I/Q Output Settings" opens.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 87

Fig. 6-20: R&S EX-IQ-BOX button in a signal generators digital input / output settings dialogs
2. Click the "EX-I/Q-Box Settings..." button to open the main settings dialog of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Fig. 6-21: Main settings dialog of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in R&S signal generators
The main configuration dialog provides "Logic Type" and "Protocol" parameters. Cor-
responding to the current settings the I/Q data and clock signals are displayed graph-
ically in the lower section of the dialog.
The buttons "Data Setup" and "Clock Setup" provide access to the respective sub-
dialogs.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 88

Fig. 6-22: R&S EX-IQ-BOX Data Setup and Clock Setup dialogs
The "Data Setup" dialog enables to define the mode for data transmission. The cur-
rently set bits alignment at the user interface is indicated graphically.
The "Clock Setup" dialog contains all clock settings required for User Defined proto-
cols. The lower area indicates clock and data signal direction in a block diagram
6.2.1.4 I/Q Data Transmission
Signal transmission starts when you turn on the "Status" in the Baseband Input / Digital
I/Q Output settings dialogs.
6.2.2 R&S Signal Analyzers
The information in this section applies to R&S FSx and R&S FMU Signal Analyzers.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX "1409.5502.02" can be controlled directly by an R&S signal ana-
lyzer in a "User Defined" application. Test cases of standardized protocols require
R&S DigIConf.
An R&S signal analyzer must be equipped with the digital baseband interface option R&S
FSQ-B17. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is then connected to this digital interface.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected either only to the R&S signal analyzer, or additionally
to a PC.
The configuration is performed in the signal analyzer´s configuration dialogs. Accessing
the dialogs is described in chapter 6.2.2.3, "Dialogs", on page 92 and the settings in
chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 89


6.2.2.1 Connection
► Establish the USB and LVDS connection between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the R&S
signal analyzer, as described in chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX",
on page 42.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX can be connected or disconnected while the R&S signal ana-
lyzer is in operating mode.
6.2.2.2 Indication of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in an R&S Analyzer
The graphical user interfaces (GUIs) of the signal analyzers R&S FSQ, R&S FSG and
R&S FMU36 display measurement results in diagram and several hotkeys located at the
right and lower edges of the display. If an R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected, provided, the
appropriate option R&S FSQ-B17 is installed, the R&S signal analyzer recognizes this
device automatically.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 90

Fig. 6-23: Display of the R&S FSQ Signal Analyzer with R&S FSQ-B17 option
Once the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected via USB, the signal analyzer detects it, estab-
lishes the connection and displays the following:
● "EXIQ" hotkey
The R&S signal analyzer indicates a hotkey labeled "EXIQ".
● "ExBox Status" parameters
The R&S signal analyzer updates the status fields and displays information on the
connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Fig. 6-24: ExBox Status information in an R&S signal analyzer
If you unplug the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, the signal analyzer changes its display accordingly:
● "EXIQ" hotkey
The hotkey dissapears.
● "ExBox Status" parameters
The analyzer clears the ExBox Status information
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 91

Fig. 6-25: ExBox Status > Not connected
Unplugging the I/Q data connector while the digital interface is active, may cause unex-
pected results.
First disable the digital interface before you unplug the I/Q interface connector.
Refer also to the manual of your R&S signal analyzer for description.
6.2.2.3 Dialogs
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX settings are accessed by pressing the "EXIQ" hotkey.
The configuration dialog "ExIQ-Box Settings" opens.
The "ExIQ-Box Settings" dialog is valid for baseband input and output.
The parameters are described in chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95 and the
remote control commands in chapter 9.3, "User Defined - Remote Control Commands",
on page 257 .
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 92

Fig. 6-26: Settings dialog of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in R&S signal analyzers
The "ExIQ-Box Settings" dialog provides all parameters for User Defined protocols,
structured in several sections, as "Select Type" for direction, "Logic Type" and "Base
Settings", "Data Settings", "Clock Settings" and "Strobe Settings". Section ExBox Sta-
tus informs on the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Select Type
Select the direction path, i.e. "Receiver" or "Transmitter" for data transmission.
To toggle between the different types, press the "TX SETTINGS" or "RX SETTINGS"
softkey. This parameter corresponds to "Direction" in R&S DigIConf.
Exit
Press the "EXIT" to leave the configuration dialog.
Store
All parameters of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX are stored and available again after switching the
analyzer off and on.
It is also possible to save the settings with the "Save/Recall" Manager.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 93

The setup of the new data may take up to 15 seconds, especially if you have changed
the logic type. During the configuration the analyzer indicates in the "Setup State" field
that the configuration is in progress. During configuration, you can not perform any set-
tings.
Fig. 6-27: ExBox Status > configuring box ...
It also indicates if the configuration is completed.
Fig. 6-28: ExBox Status > box is configured
6.2.2.4 I/Q Data Transmission
Signal transmission starts by pressing the "SEND TO" hotkey.
Send to
Start signal transmission. The direction path of signal transmissioin is determined in the
"Select Type" field in chapter 6.2.2.3, "Dialogs", on page 92.
Remote command:
[:SOURce]:RECeiver:SENDto on page 260
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SENDto on page 260
6.2.3 R&S Protocol Tester
The parameters are set by using the R&S DigIConf software.

Some R&S instruments, as e.g. the R&S CMW500 may have installed the configuration
software directly. Check in the operating manual to see if your instrument supports this
mode of operation. How to operate R&S DigIConf refer to chapter 6.1, "R&S DigIConf
Configuration Software", on page 53. The parameters are described in chapter 7, "Pro-
tocol Settings", on page 95.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 94

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Protocol Settings
User Defined
7 Protocol Settings
"Protocol Settings" describes the parameters and settings of the respective transmission
protocols. It contains all parameters that you have in the GUI dialogs, and provides the
corresponding remote control command linked to the command description. Depending
on the protocol type, you can find additional information, such as information on the
transmission protocol or on operating elements of the breakout boards, or special fea-
tures to the remote commands.
With the exception of a few specific test setups, the parameters of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
are set by a PC via the configuration software R&S DigIConf.
Important note to the command syntax in User defined applications

The previous version of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, model 1409.5505.02 only supports test
setups with User Defined protocols. As a special feature, it can be controlled directly by
an instrument. In this mode, the remote-control commands differ in the notation, depend-
ing on the device that controls the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The commands listed in the User Defined GUI description always refer to R&S DigI-
Conf, since it is used in almost all applications.
If you run an R&S EX-IQ-BOX, model 1409.5505.02 directly with an R&S instrument, you
can find the appropriate command syntax by following the link of the SCPI command.
See also chapter 9.3.1, "Explanation to the Device Specific SCPI Syntax",
on page 257 for more details.
"Protocol Settings" contains:

● chapter 7.1, "User Defined", on page 95 describes the parameters of user defined
applications, i.e. settings for serial or parallel transmission of I/Q signals to a DUT,
including variable clock modes, various data rates as well as different logical signal
levels. This section applies to applications using the breakout boards included in
delivery.
● chapter 7.2, "CPRI", on page 126 contains a general overview of the standard inter-
face and explains the configuration dialogs and parameters, perforrmed with the
configuration software R&S DigIConf. Besides the "Downlink" / Uplink settings, CPRI
additionally enables you to set "Control&Management" parameters, "Vendor Data"
management, "Waveform Playback" and "Recording" memory.
7.1 User Defined

In modern communication systems it is communicated increasingly via digital baseband
interfaces, so called I/Q links. Therefore some standardized interfaces like CPRI were
developed. These standardized interfaces are covered by special purpose options, which
are additionally available for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
But also without any additional option, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX covers a large number of
different digital I/Q interfaces by using user-specific breakout boards. This general oper-
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 95

User Defined
ating mode is called User Defined and provides a maximum of flexibility and configura-
tion possibilities.
Devices like ADC’s and DAC’s, modulators and demodulators, submodules of mobile
base stations or IC’s of mobile equipment are tested with this operating mode, including
early prototypes like FPGA implementations and also real time tests with mature ASIC
samples.
R&S Signal Generator
Digital IQ data
R&S Digital IQ Interface Settings

IQ format R&S DigIConf e.g. 12 single ended lanes
and clock
CMOS 2.5V
paralllel data
Reference USB control
double data rate
I/Q interleaved
internal clock ( clk out)
clock 38.4 MHz
phase 90 degree
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Transmitter
mode
Breakout Board
Digital IQ Interface Settings

e.g. 12 single ended lanes ... Clock
+ clock
CMOS 2.5V
paralllel data ...
double data rate R&S Signal Analyzer
Device Under Test
I/Q interleaved Analog output
internal clock ( clk out) ...
e.g. digital IQ modulator
clock 38.4 MHz
with IF output
phase 90 degree
Digital IQ
data
Fig. 7-1: Test scenario of a User Defined application
7.1.1 Parameter Overview
Beside the main controls, like switching on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX output, transmission
direction and save/recall of settings, the interface is controlled by parameters, which are
grouped by function:
Parameter Group Purpose Examples
Protocol Fundamental protocol type set- Parallel/serial interface, double data rate, I/Q
tings interleaving
Data Data representation Resolution, alignment, bit order, numeric format
Clock Interface clock settings Clock rate, phase shift, skew, frequency refer-
ence
Trigger Synchronization Trigger source, delay
Test Diagnostics on the interface to the TX Test, RX Test, Test signal sources
DUT
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 96

User Defined
The parameters of these groups provide a large number of possible interface settings.
This way the R&S EX-IQ-BOX can convert the R&S specific I/Q input/output to any digital
I/Q interface of the DUT.
Additionally to the interfaces parameters, R&S DigIConf provides a test function, to check
the signals between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the DUT. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX sends a
known test signal to the DUT, or, vice versa, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives a signal from
the DUT. This way, the I/Q interface to or from the DUT can be verified by performing bit
error rate tests.
7.1.2 Main Configuration Dialog
The main configuration dialog covers main controls and parameters for user-defined
applications. It sets the logical signal type, transmission path, and contains controls for
storing or loading settings and for activation. The main controls are always indicated,
independently fom the active subdialog.
Grouped by function, the subdialogs "Protocol", "Clock", "Data" and "Trigger" contain the
respective parameters.
R&S DigIConf shows the current settings for signal transmission also graphically, and
thus offers a convenient control of the configuration. I/Q data stream and clock signal to
or from the R&S EX-IQ-BOX are shown schematically, and are adjusted by changes
simultaneously. The "Data" tab additionally shows the bit alignment graphically, and the
"Clock" tab the signal flow of the clock signal, corresponding to the currently selected
scenario.
The start window of "User Defined" indicates the "Protocol" tab which, besides of the
protocol parameters, also indicates the "Clock" and "Data" settings.
Device-specific dialog representation as well as command syntax

The dialogs in R&S signal generators are slightly different than in R&S DigIConf, e.g. they
do not need an input field for the transmission direction, since the connection of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX determines the transmisssion path automatically. Clock and data
parameters are also provided in separate tabs.
The commands in the following description relate to R&S DigIConf. If you run an
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, model 1409.5505.02 directly with an R&S instrument, follow the link of
the SCPI command. There you will find a set of remote commands in order to get the
appropriate syntax for your application.
The following figures and description comprise the User Defined configuration dialogs
representative also for applications without R&S DigIConf.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 97

User Defined
Fig. 7-2: R&S DigIConf > User Defined dialog

A change of the logic type during the operation is performed only when you confirm the
following warning message:
Fig. 7-3: User > Logic type warning
● Check the voltage values of your test setup.

● Select "OK" if the correct logic type is selected.
● Select "Cancel" if an incompatible logic type is selected. Adjust your setup accord-
ingly and set correct logic type in Logic Type.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 98

User Defined
State
Activate signal transmission.
This function applies to R&S DigIConf, since R&S signal generators and analyzers start
signal transmission directly in the instrument.
Note: Data transmission requires that the respective breakout board is connected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:STATe on page 261
Logic Type
Selects the digital signaling system used for transmitting the baseband signal from or to
the DUT.
Note: SCPI notation varies
The SCPI notation varies, when you remotely control the R&S EX-IQ-BOX on R&S EX-
IQ-BOX or R&S signal generators and R&S signal analyzers.
Follow the command link below for description of the command and its syntax in detail.
"LVDS" The signal is transmitted by using the signaling system LVDS (Low
Voltage Differential Signaling).
"LVTTL" The signal is transmitted by using LVTTL technology (Low Voltage
Transistor Transistor Logic) with a voltage level of 3.3 V.
"x.x V CMOS" The signal is transmitted by using the CMOS Technology (Comple-
mentary Metal Oxid Semiconductor). x.x represents the voltage level
provided in the list.
"x.x V SSI" The signal is transmitted by using the SSI Technology (Serial Synch-
ronuos Interface). Voltage levels are 1.5 V and 1.8 V.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:LOGic[:TYPE] on page 259
Direction
Selects the direction of signal transmission from the DUT to R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice
versa.
Note:
Setting the transmission path and starting depend on the activating device
● R&S DigIConf
Signal direction is selected in the "Direction" field of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX "User
Defined" settings dialog. Select "Transmitter/Receiver" in the drop down list.
The transmission is activated by switching On the "State" button.
● R&S signal analyzers
Signal direction is selected in the "Select Type" field of the "EXIQ-Box Settings" dia-
log. Select "Transmitter/Receiver" in the drop down list, as described in chap-
ter 6.1.1.6, "Dialogs", on page 57.
To toggle between the different types, press the "TX SETTINGS" or "RX SET-
TINGS" softkey to select the type from the combo box.
● R&S signal generators
The direction of signal transmission is distinguished as input and output settings dia-
logs "EX-IQ-BOX BBIN" and "EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT". Therefore, "Direction" is not
required in control by for R&S signal generators.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 99

User Defined
The transmission is activated by switching on the "State" button.

"Transmitter" The connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives data from an R&S instrument
and transmits this data to the DUT.
In conjunction with analyzers the setup of the box must be initiated by
the user. To do this the user must press "SEND TO" hotkey or send the
following remote command to the analyzer:
"Receiver" The connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives data from the DUT and trans-
mits this data to an R&S instrument.
Remote command:
R&S DigIConf, R&S signal generators:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DIRection on page 258
R&S signal analyzers:
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SENDto on page 260
[:SOURce]:RECeiver:SENDto on page 260
Set To Default
Executes a default application setup.
The function, provided by R&S DigIConf presets all parameters and switching states, also
those of inactive operating modes. The default application settings provide a reproducible
initial basis for all other settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:PRESet on page 260
Save/Recall
Store the current application settings in the specified path, or load the selected file. Save
provides to store the current application settings of R&S DigIConf in a file. Recall opens
previously stored settings files.
Note: A settings file is always stored, or loaded with the extension *.iqbox. This file
type cannot be changed.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:STORe on page 262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:LOAD on page 262
7.1.3 Protocol
The "Protocol" tab contains the interface parameters for signal transmission from the DUT
to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and vice versa. To the overview R&S DigIConf also shows the
"Clock" and "Data" settings and the signal flow in a diagram.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 100

User Defined
Fig. 7-4: User defined > Protocol dialog
Format
Sets the transmission protocol of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX for receiving or sending a base-
band signal from or to an external device (DUT) via the user interface of the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX.
"Serial" Tranmsits each sample serially, i.e. bitwise from the DUT to the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa.
Example:
The following graph shows an incoming serial I/Q signal from the DUT:
Fig. 7-5: User defined > I/Q IN serial signal flow
Direction = Receiver
Format = Serial
In serial mode, I data and Q data are sent via the input and output pins
IO and QO, respectively.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 101

User Defined
"Parallel" Transmits each sample parallel, i.e. wordwise from the DUT to the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa.
Example:
Parallel signal output to the DUT
Fig. 7-6: User defined > I/Q OUT parallel signal flow
Direction = Transmitter
Format = Parallel
The input and output pin assignment depends on the bits alignment and
the bit order settings. The "Data" dialog shows the current assignment.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FORMat on page 264
Data Rate
Sets the data rate mode of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX for receiving/sending a baseband signal
from/to an external device (DUT).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 102

User Defined
"SDR" Tranmsits the baseband signal in single data rate mode from the DUT
to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa. The rising edge of the clock signal
triggers data transmission.
Example:
● Parallel signal output in single data rate
Fig. 7-7: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT parallel, single data rate
Format = Parallel
Data Rate = SDR
● Serial signal input in single data rate:
Fig. 7-8: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT serial, single data rate
Format = Serial
Data Rate = SDR
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 103

User Defined
"DDR" Transmits the baseband signal in double data rate mode from the DUT
to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa. The rising edge and the falling
edge of the clock signal trigger data transmission (double speed trans-
fer).
The signal transmission is also shown in the graph.
Example:
● Parallel signal input in double data rate:
Fig. 7-9: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q IN parallel, double data rate
Format = Parallel
Data Rate = DDR
● Serial signal input in double data rate:
Fig. 7-10: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q IN serial, double data rate
Format = Serial
Data Rate = DDR
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DRATe on page 263
Interleaving
Activates interleaving and selects the interleaving mode.
Depending on the interleaving settings, the baseband signal is either sent simultaneously
or in I/Q or Q/I order from the external device (DUT) to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 104

User Defined
"Not Inter- Transmits the baseband signal on the I and Q data lines as indicated
leaved" in the graph below.
Example:
Fig. 7-11: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT serial, not interleaved
Format = Serial
Data Rate = DDR
Interleaving = Not interleaved
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 105

User Defined
"I/Q Inter- Transmits the baseband signal on the I data line starting with I data.
leaved"
Example:
● Serial signal output in single data rate.
Fig. 7-12: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT serial, single data rate, I/Q inter-
leaved
Format = Serial
Data Rate = SDR
Interleaving = I/Q interleaved
The strobe signal (UI_GP5) takes 2 clock cycles. The first clock
cycle triggers the I data, and the second cycle triggers the Q data.
● Serial signal output in double data rate.
Fig. 7-13: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT serial, double data rate, I/Q inter-
leaved
Format = Serial
Data Rate = DDR
The strobe signal UI_GP5 lasts 1 clock cycle. The rising edge trig-
gers the I data, the falling edge the Q data.
● Parallel signal output in single data rate.
Fig. 7-14: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT parallel, single data rate, I/Q
interleaved
Format = Parallel
Data Rate = SDR
The I marker output at the Reserved1 pin UI_GP5 of the user inter-
face marks the I data.
● Parallel signal output in double data rate.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 106

User Defined
Fig. 7-15: User defined > Signal flow: I/Q OUT parallel, double data rate, I/Q
interleaved
Format = Parallel
Data Rate = DDR
The rising edge of the clock signal triggers the I data, the falling
edge the Q data.
"Q/I Inter- Transmit the baseband signal on the I data line starting with Q data.
leaved" With interchanged order of the I and Q data the I/Q signal is transferred
similarly as described above.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:ILEaving on page 265
Sample / Clock Rate Ratio

Sets the sample to clock rate ratio in parallel signal transmisssion mode. This parameter
characterizes the ratio of the sample rate to the clock rate depending on the parameter
settings for "Word Size", "Interleaving" and "Data Rate". See also "Clock Rate"
on page 115.
Note:
SCPI notation varies
● In the remote control, determine the clock rate ratio value for the R&S DigIConf and
R&S signal generators with SCRxDy. x represents the value, D substitues the decimal
point, and y is the decimal place.
● In contrast, just enter the value x.x when using an R&S signal analyzer.
"SCR" 1, 4/5, 2/5, 1/5, 1/10, 1/20
"SCR < 1:" Dummy samples are added.
The signal output SCR_VALID at the UI_GP_P1 pin of the user inter-
face marks the validity of the data.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SCRatio on page 271
Data Settings
Displays the data parameters "Word Size", "Numeric Format" and "Signal Type". For the
description of these parameters, see chapter 7.1.4, "Data", on page 108, including "Word
Size" on page 109, "Numeric Format" on page 112, and "Signal Type" on page 108.
Clock Settings
Indicates the current values of the Clock Source and the Clock Phase. For the description
of these settings in detail, see "Clock Source" on page 116 and "Clock Phase"
on page 118.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 107

User Defined
Clock Rate / Sample Rate

Displays the clock parameters "Clock Rate" and the calculated "Sample Rate". "Clock
Rate" on page 115 explains these parameters in detail.
7.1.4 Data
The "Data" tab contains the parameters for data transmission. In parallel data transmis-
sion, R&S DigIConf shows the bits alignment at the user interface graphically, corre-
sponding to the settings. If you transmit serially, you can additionally configure the serial
strobe. In the lower pane, the signal flow is displayed as in all views.
Analyzers do not indicate data transmission graphically.
Fig. 7-16: User defined > Data dialog of parallel transmission
Signal Type
Selects the signal mode of the transmission. The digital I and Q signals are either trans-
mitted separately or the I and Q samples are assembled to a carrier signal and shifted to
an intermediate frequency (IF).
Note: Currently the signal type is firmly set to "IQ" and read only. IQ transmits the digital
I and Q signal components separately. Signal type "IF" is intended for future use.
"IQ" Transmits the digital I and Q signals separately.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:STYPe on page 276
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 108

User Defined
Word Size
Sets the word size resolution of a sample. If the word size is set to a value n, the I word
and the Q word use these n bits. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX supports word sizes from 4 to 18
bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SIZE on page 275
Word Alignment
Sets the alignment of the data bits on the data lines. Either the MSB or the LSB is mapped
firmly to one data line. Depending on the word size the equivalent bit moves to the appro-
priate data line.
Note:
● This parameter applies to parallel data transmission.
● Graphics in the dialog of the generators and in R&S DigIConf show the presently set
word alignment in the "User Interface Bits Alignment" section.
"MSB" The MSB (Most Significant Bit) is mapped firmly to the same data line
and the data line of the LSB varies in dependency of the word size.
Example:
●
Fig. 7-17: User defined > Word alignment MSB: I/Q parallel transmission, 5 bit,
bit order MSB
word size =5
word alignment = MSB
bit order = MSB
Fig. 7-18: User defined > Word alignment: I/Q parallel transmission, 9 bit, bit
order MSB
word size =9
bit order = MSB
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 109

User Defined
"LSB" The LSB (Last Significant Bit) is mapped firmly to the same data line
and the data line of the MSB varies in dependency of the word size.
Example:
●
Fig. 7-19: User defined > Word alignment LSB: I/Q parallel transmission, 5 bit,
bit order MSB
word size =5
word alignment = LSB
bit order = MSB
Fig. 7-20: User defined > Word alignment LSB: I/Q parallel transmission, 9 bit,
bit order LSB
word size =9
bit order = LSB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:ALIGnment on page 272
Bit Order
Sets the order of the data bits. In "Parallel mode", either the LSB or the MSB is transmitted
on the first used data line. In "Serial mode" either the LSB or the MSB is transmitted as
first bit.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 110

User Defined
"MSB" Transmits the MSB (Most Significant Bit) first.

Parallel transmission
The MSB is transmitted on the first used data line, depending on the
word size and alignment.
Note: Graphics in the dialog of the generators and in R&S DigIConf
shows the presently set bit sequence.
Example:
●
Fig. 7-21: User defined > Bit order MSB: I/Q parallel transmission, alignment
MSB, 5 bit
word size =5
bit order = MSB
Fig. 7-22: User defined > Bit order MSB: I/Q parallel transmission, alignment
LSB, 9 bit
word size =9
bit order = MSB
Serial transmission:
The MSB is transmitted first.
Example:
Fig. 7-23: User defined > Bit order MSB: I/Q serial transmission, 16 bit
word size = 16 Bit

bit order = MSB
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 111

User Defined
"LSB" Transmits the LSB (Last Significant Bit) first.

Parallel transmission:
The LSB is transmitted on the first data line.
Example:
●
Fig. 7-24: User defined > Bit order LSB: I/Q parallel transmission, alignment
MSB, 5 bit
word size =5
bit order = LSB
Fig. 7-25: User defined > Bit order LSB: I/Q parallel transmission, alignment
LSB, 9 bit
word size =9
bit order = LSB
Serial transmission:
The LSB is transmitted first.
Example:
Fig. 7-26: User defined > Bit order LSB: I/Q serial transmission, 16 bit
word size = 16 Bit

bit order = LSB
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:BORDer on page 273
Numeric Format
Select a numeric representation for data transmission.
Allowed number range for word size n Bit:
-2n-1 ≤ n ≤ +2n+1
Table 7-1: User defined > Numeric format coding
z 2´s Complement Binary Offset
-8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-7 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
-6 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
-5 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 112

User Defined
-4 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
-3 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
-2 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
-1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
"2´s Comple- The value of the transmitted data is formatted in two´s-complement.

ment" The most significant bit has a value of -2n-1, the bits of lesser signifi-
cance follow as:
+2n-2 ... +20
"Binary Offset" The value of the transmitted data is formatted in binary offset.
A binary offset of -2n-1 is added such that the final values are always
positive.
Example:
n = 4 ￫ -8 ≤ z < 8
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:NFORmat on page 273
Strobe Polarity
Determine the polarity of the strobe marker signal. During a serial data transmission every
data sample is marked by the strobe marker signal.
The strobe marker is output at the UI_GP5 of the user interface.
Note: This parameter applies to serial data transmission.
"Clock Phase" or "Clock Skew" settings do not affect the strobe marker signal.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 113

User Defined
"Positive" Example:
Sets the strobe polarity to high level.
Fig. 7-27: User defined > Strobe polarity positive: I/Q OUT serial
word size = 4
bit order = LSB
numeric format = 2's complement
strobe polarity = positive
"Negative" Sets the strobe polarity to low level.
Example:
Fig. 7-28: User defined > Strobe polarity negative: I/Q OUT serial
word size = 4
bit order = LSB
numeric format = 2's complement
strobe polarity = negative
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOLarity on page 275
Strobe Position
Sets the sample position of the strobe marker output.
Note:
● This parameter applies to serial data transmission.
● Value range: 0 to word size -1.
● The graphic in the clock dialog of the generators and in R&S DigIConf shows the
presently set sample position.
● The strobe marker is output at the UI_GP5 of the user interface.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 114

User Defined
Example:
Strobe Position = 2, Strobe Polarity = Positive.
Fig. 7-29: User defined > Strobe position 2: I/Q OUT serial, negative polarity
word size = 16
bit order = LSB
strobe polarity = negative
strobe position = 2
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOSition on page 276
7.1.5 Clock
The "Clock" tab provides the frequency settings for synchronizing the test setup with
either external or internal clock source.
Fig. 7-30: User defined > Clock dialog
The graphic in the clock dialog of the generators and in R&S DigIConf indicates the data
flow, the clock signal and the reference frequency signal. A signal diagram displays
schematically the current type of data transmission.
Clock Rate
Sets the clock rate (frequency) for signal transmission between the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and
the external device (DUT). Depending on the logic type and the clock source the clock
rate range varies, as shown below.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 115

User Defined
f s  WS  INT
fCLK 
DDR  SCR
Fig. 7-31: User defined > Clock rate
fclk = clock rate

fs = sample rate
WS = Word size
INT = Interleaving mode
DDR = double rata rate
SCR = sample/clock rate ratio
Table 7-2: User defined > Value range of fCLK
Value Range
fS 1 kHz ... 100 MHz
fCLK LVTTL: 1 (25) kHz - 100 MHz*) LVDS: 1 (25) kHz - 400 MHz*)
WS 4 ... 18 (serial mode) 1 (parallel mode)
INT 1 (non interleaved) 2 (I/Q and Q/I interleaved)
DDR 1 (SDR) 2 (DDR)
SCR 1, 4/5, 2/5, 1/5, 1/10, 1/20
*)1 kHz applies to the REF IN clock source, i. the reference signal is fed in from the R&S instrument, 25 kHz
applies to the external reference from the user interface.
Note: The value range of the clock rate depends on "Protocol, Logic Type" and "Signal
Type" settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:RATE on page 268
Clock Source
Selects the clock source for data transmission. Either the R&S instrument or the external
device (DUT) can provide the reference, irrespective of the transmission direction.
The following clock scenarios are possible:
● Signal "input" synchronized by an "external" clock source.
Data and data clock are fed by the DUT.
Fig. 7-32: User defined > I/Q IN synchronized by external clock
clock source = External (user interface)
● Signal "input" synchronized by the "internal" reference clock signal.

The R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives the clock signal from the R&S instrument and forwards
it to the DUT in order to synchronize the incoming data from the DUT.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 116

User Defined
Fig. 7-33: User defined > I/Q IN synchronized by internal clock
clock source = Internal (BNC REF IN)
● Signal "output" synchronized by an "external" reference clock signal.

The R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives the I/Q data from the R&S instrument and forwards it
to the DUT, synchronized by the reference frequency of the DUT.
Fig. 7-34: User defined > I/Q OUT synchronized by external clock
clock source = External (User Interface)
● Signal "output" synchronized by the "internal" reference clock signal.

The R&S instrument provides the I/Q data and the reference clock passed to the DUT
by the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Fig. 7-35: User defined > I/Q OUT synchronized by internal clock
clock source = Internal (BNC REF IN)
"REF IN" To synchronize data transmission, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX obtains the
reference frequency from a connected R&S instrument, i.e. a signal
generator or signal analyzer.
The R&S instrument supplies the clock at the REF IN (BNC) connector.
Select the supplied reference frequency in Frequency.
Note: When using the reference frequency of an R&S instrument, the
reference output of the R&S instrument must be connected to the REF
IN of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX (see chapter 4.3.2, "Rear Panel View",
on page 32). The connection can be kept during the entire operation
even if an external clock reference is used.
"Internal" The R&S EX-IQ-BOX synchronizes data transmission with a internally
generated reference frequency of 10 MHz. The frequency is indicated
Frequency.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 117

User Defined
"User Inter- The R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives an external reference signal from the
face" DUT via the user interface.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SOURce on page 270
Clock Phase
Sets a phase shift of the active clock edge in 90° steps related to the data bits.
The phase shift is graphically displayed in main settings dialog.
Adjustable values: 0° | 90° | 180° | 270°
Example:
Fig. 7-36: User defined > Clock phase
Clock source = internal

clock phase = 90°

In the remote control you determine the clock phase value for the R&S signal analyzers
with Pxx. In contrast, just enter the value xx without P when using R&S EX-IQ-BOX or
an R&S signal generator. xx represents the value in degree.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:PHASe on page 267
Clock Skew
Sets a time shift of the active clock edge related to the data bits. This feature is used to
compensate an external clock skew which is caused by differences of the clock and data
line lengths.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT on page 270
Clock In Skew
compensate an internal clock skew which is caused by differences of the clock and data
line lengths.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:IN on page 269
Frequency
Sets / indicates the reference frequency.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX supports different reference frequencies to be input at REF IN. This
value must be set on the frequency currently supplied.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 118

User Defined
The parameter is grayed out, when an external, or the internal reference clock of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX is used.
"5 | 10 | 13" Provided reference frequencies in MHz.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:FREQuency on page 269
Freq. Counter
The function counts and indicates the actually reference frequency, fed by an R&S instru-
ment, or the DUT.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:VALue? on page 269
7.1.6 Trigger
In the "Trigger" tab you can configure and activate a trigger signal, when the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX is working in transmitter mode.
Fig. 7-37: User defined > Trigger dialog
Trigger Source
Select the trigger source. The trigger signal starts the signal output at the user interface.
"Auto" Outputs the signal immediately.
"Sync" Synchronizes signal output with an incoming trigger signal, i.e. the DUT
triggers data output to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The trigger signal is applied
at the SYNC IN pin of the user interface.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:SOURce on page 282
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 119

User Defined
Trigger Delay
Specify a time delay after the trigger event. Trigger delay is defined clock cycles.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:DELay on page 282
Status
Indicates the current trigger status.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:STATe? on page 283
Arm
Stops the current signal output. It continues either automatically or synchronized, accord-
ing to the used trigger source.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:ARM on page 281
7.1.7 Test
The "Test" tab provides functions for testing the user interface between the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX and the DUT.
Prior to any measurement of an I/Q signal, we recommend that you to check the function
of the data interface.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX provides both, a test signal generator and a measurement receiver
that supports BER measurement.
The test dialog changes depending on the transmissioni path. If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is
working as transmitter, the test dialog shows the control elements for the test signal gen-
erator. In receiver mode, the dialog provides the control elements for the test receiver.
Refer for description to chapter 7.1.8, "TX-Test", on page 120, and to chapter 7.1.9, "Rx-
Test", on page 123, respectively.
7.1.8 TX-Test
This section describes the parameters for testing in transmitter mode.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 120

User Defined
Fig. 7-38: User defined > Test dialog of transmitter mode
Tx Test
Switches the test generator on or off.
While the test generator is switched on, the test signal replaces the I/Q data source com-
ing from "DIG IQ IN".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:STATe on page 281
Test Signal
Selects a test signal of the test generator. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX provides three different
signals for testing.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 121

User Defined
"PRBS" Generates a PRBS 16 (Pseudo Random Binary Sequence) sequence.

The output of this sequence complies to the "Protocol", "Data" and
"Clock" settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
E.g. if the word size of the I / Q sample is 7 bits, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
sends the PRBS 16 sequence in 7-bit parts.
The I and Q values always contain the same copy of one test sample.
The PRBS 16 sequence is defined by the generator polynomial G(x) =
1 + x2 + x3 + x5 + x16.
Example:
The functional implementation of this PRBS generator is also defined
by the following linear feedback shift register (LFSR):
Fig. 7-39: User defined > Test PRBS linear feedback shift register (LFSR)
"Counter" Generates a counter test signal. The counter size is based on the word
size, set in the "Data" tab. Each output sample increases the counter
by 1.
"Sine" A complex sine signal is generated, following the formula below,
Fig. 7-40: User defined > sine signal formula
n = discrete time index

f = frequency of the test sine signal
fs = sampling frequency, based on the "protocol", "data" and "clock" settings.
with the real component,
Fig. 7-41: User defined > sine signal I component formula (real)
and the imaginary component:
Fig. 7-42: User defined > sine signal Q component formula (imaginary)
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SIGNal on page 279
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 122

User Defined
Frequency
Sets the frequency of the sine test signal. The frequency is limited to "0.4 fs", and the
sampling frequency "fs" depends on the clock settings, the double data rate setting and
the interleaving mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:FREQuency on page 281
Amplitude
Sets the amplitude of the sine test signal in terms of dBFS. The maximum amplitude is
full scale (0 dBFS).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:AMPLitude on page 280
7.1.9 Rx- Test
This section provides the parameters for testing in receiver mode.
Fig. 7-43: User defined > Test dialog of receiver mode
Rx Test
Activates the test receiver.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX expects a test signal at the user interface. First, the test receiver
synchronizes to the last received data word, and then generates a test sequence and
compares each generated sample with the corresponding received sample.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:STATe on page 278
Test Signal
Selects the incoming test signal to be analyzed. The test receiver analyzes both PRBS
16 or counter test signals.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:SIGNal on page 278
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 123

User Defined
Rx Received Bits
Indicates the number of received bits. This functions consecutively counts the number of
received bits, compares them with the sent data and determines the error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:WORDs? on page 279
Rx BER
Indicates the bit error rate. The function consecutively counts the number of discrepan-
cies that occur during the test. The BER result is the ratio, which is calculated by dividing
the number of error bits by the total number of bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:BER? on page 277
7.1.10 SSI - Serial Synchronous Interface
The "SSI General" panel contains parameters for data transmission of SSI (Serial Syn-
chronuos Interface) signals.
The graphic in the clock dialog of the signal generators and in R&S DigIConf indicates
the frame configuration, data flow and the control signals Clock, Frame Synchronization
and Data.
Settings of the SSI logic types currently provide special applications and should not be
changed. Extensions for future applications are intended.
Word Size
Defines the size in bits of an I or Q data word. The size is defined from 4 up to 24 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SIZE on page 284
C&M Size
Defines the number of the Control & Management Bits which follows the I/Q data word.
The size is defined from 0 up to 32 bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMSize on page 284
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 124

User Defined
C&M Data
Defines the number of the Control & Management bit word as defined in the C&M Size
parameter. This setting can be specified in transmitter mode, in receiver mode it is read-
only.
Note: For this setting, the SCPI notation lightly differs between the command for the R&S
signal generators, R&S DigIConf and the command for the R&S analyzers.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMData:RX|TX on page 283
Late Frame Sync

Defines if the sync signal appears at the first period of a data bit (parameter set to On)
or if the sync signals appears one period before (parameter is Off).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:LFSYnc on page 284
Gain File
Defines a binary file contianing a gain table. For the format of the gain table, refer to the
appropriate generator section.
Note: A gain file can be selected in input / receiver mode and for "C&M" >=8 !
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:FSELect on page 284
Enable Automatic Gain

Activates the automatic gain handling.
Note: A gain file can be used in input / receiver mode and for "C&M" >=8 !
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:STATe on page 284
7.1.11 SPI Setup
The "SPI Setup" panel contains clock parameters for data transmission of SSI (Serial
Synchronuos Interface) signals.
Clock Frequency
Sets a system clock frequency. Available freqencyies are 1 MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz,
8.333 MHz, 12.5 MHz or 25 MHz.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:FREQuency on page 285
Clock Phase
Selects 0 or 180 degree clock phase.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:PHASe on page 285
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 125

CPRI
Chip Select
Activates using the SSI-SPI chip.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CSELect on page 285
Write Byte (hex)

Writes the SSI:SPI byte in hexadecimal format.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:WBYTe on page 286
Read Byte (hex)

Indicatess the SSI:SPI byte in hexadecimal format.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:RBYTe? on page 286
Select File
Selects a SSI:SPI file.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:FSELect on page 285
Send
Send all parameters of the configuration dialog to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
7.2 CPRI
This CPRI documentation contains a general overview of the standard interface. The
main part explains the configuration dialogs and parameters in detail, provided by the
configuration software R&S DigIConf. Find the appropriate information in chapter 7.2.6,
"Main Configuration Dialog", on page 150, chapter 7.2.7, "Hardware", on page 153,
chapter 7.2.8, "L1 Analysis", on page 163, chapter 7.2.9, "Downlink and Uplink",
on page 170, chapter 7.2.10, "Control & Management", on page 193, chapter 7.2.11,
"Vendor Data", on page 200, and chapter 7.2.12, "Diagnostics", on page 203.
You also find a panel chapter 7.2.13, "ARB", on page 205 in the CPRI configuration
dialog. If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with a special option for waveform memory, it
supports playback of waveform signals. I.e. the R&S EX-IQ-BOX can work as a signal
source without any generator connected.
In addition, an application example of a CPRI RE (Radio Equipment) test application
exemplifies the necessary equipment, test construction and essential settings. Refer to
chapter 7.2.5, "Start with CPRI - Setup Example", on page 143 for information on this
application example.
CPRI parameter settings are set by means of the configurator software R&S DigIConf.
See chapter 6.1, "R&S DigIConf Configuration Software", on page 53 for description of
R&S DigIConf in detail.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 126

CPRI
The CPRI transmission protocol option, as well as the options for waveform memory,
multi waveform playback and recording memory require the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
1409.5505K04 and the configuration software R&S DigIConf. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX
1409.5502.02 provides only User Defined protocols.
7.2.1 Introduction
CPRITM (Common Public Radio Interface) is a publicly available digital communication

protocol standardized by an industry cooperation. The CPRI transmission protocol
defines the interface of base stations between the REC (Radio Equipment Control) in the
standard, to local or remote radio units, known as RE (Radio Equipment). For further
information on CPRI Interface Specification refer to http://www.cpri.info/spec.html.
In the figure below, the REC and RE are shown for clarification. When connecting a REC
and a RE with one or several CPRI interfaces, the resulting entity is a Node B in a Radio
Access Network.
Fig. 7-44: CPRI internal interface specification
R&S provides this standardized protocol by the special purpose option R&S EXBOX-B85
for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The associated option is available under R&S part number 1409.7208.02 (supporting line
rates up to 3072 MBit/s) and 1409.7208.04 (supporting line rates up to 9830 MBit/s),
including a breakout board and an option key code for authentification. For information
on how to install the option refer to chapter 4.6, "Installing R&S EX-IQ-BOX Options",
on page 44.
The enclosed CPRI breakout board is directly connected to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX at the
Z-Dok user interface. The connection to the device under test (DUT) is done from the
breakout board, which supports small form factor pluggable (SFP) modules for the optical
CPRI link. The interface is configured by the configuration software R&S DigIConf.
For information on connection of a test setup example, refer to chapter 7.2.5, "Start with
CPRI - Setup Example", on page 143.
With the option R&S EXBOX-B85 you can perform tests directly in the CPRI interface
between the baseband module and the RF module of a base station, i.e. between the
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 127

CPRI
REC and the RE. While one of the modules is simulated, the other, either the REC or the
RE can be tested independently.
All state-of-the-art standards such as 3GPP FDD, incl. HSDPA, HSUPA and HSPA+,
LTE, WiMAX and CDMA2000 are supported. The test solution covers individual uplink
or downlink operation as well as full duplex operation. Depending on the configuration,
up to 24 signal streams with settable sample rates can be processed; line bit rates of up
to 3072.0 Mbps are achieved. Control and management information can be inserted,
even in real-time.
In combination with R&S signal generators and R&S spectrum analyzers, the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX utilizes the enhanced functions of the signal generators, like e.g. generation of
digital communication signals, fading and AWGN simulation, and the signal analysis fea-
tures of the spectrum analyzers, like e.g. EVM measurements for digital standards, or
ACP measurement in the RF section.
The application example shows a CPRI RE test scenario, with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
emulating the baseband module REC.
R&S SMU200A
Reference
Digital IQ data
Transmitter
R&S
R&S FSQ
USB control
R&S
IQ format
Receiver
R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Bidirectional
mode
Breakout Board
Optical or R&S FSQ

electrical link
Downlink
Tx
CPRI link Receiver
CPRI RE
(Radio Equipment)
R&S SMU200A
Rx
Baseband RF
Uplink
Transmitter
Fig. 7-45: CPRI RE test scenario, with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX emulating the baseband module REC
The test setup comprises the downlink and the uplink. Both directions can be tested either
simultaneously, i.e. full duplex, or only uplink or downlink individually.
The following application example shows a CPRI REC test scenario, with the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX emulating the RF module RE.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 128

CPRI
R&S DigIConf R&S FSQ
USB control
R&S Digital IQ data
IQ format Receiver
(Downlink)
R&S SMU200A
R&S Digital IQ data
IQ format
Reference
Transmitter
R&S EX-IQ-BOX (Uplink)
Bidirectional
mode
Breakout Board
Downlink
Optical or
electrical link
CPRI REC
CPRI link
(Radio Equipment Control)
Baseband
Uplink
Fig. 7-46: CPRI REC test scenario, with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX emulating the RF module RE
Also in this test setup, DL and UL either can be tested simultaneously, i.e. full duplex, or
Uplink/Downlink individually.
7.2.2 CPRI Transmission Protocol - Overview
In the digital link, the I/Q baseband data and control information are transmitted together
in one link. The I/Q data and controlling data are embedded in the transmission protocol
with the aid of the multiplex procedure. The overview shows, how the protocol is built up.
Fig. 7-47: CPRI protocol overview
CPRI defines the layer 1 and layer 2 protocols for the transfer of user plane data, control
& management plane data as well as synchronization information between a REC and a
RE as well as between two REs.
The interface supports the following types of information flows:
● I/Q Data
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 129

CPRI
User plane information in the form of in-phase and quadrature modulation data (digital
baseband signals).
● Vendor Specific Information
This information flow is reserved for vendor specific information.
● C&M Data
Control and management information exchanged between the control and manage-
ment entities within the REC and the RE. This information flow is given to the higher
protocol layers. The CPRI protocol offers two sepearate channels for the transmission
of C&M data. A slow C&M channel using HDLC as the transport layer protocol as well
as a fast C&M channel using Ethernet as the high level protocol.
● L1 Inband Protocol
Signalling information that is related to the link and is directly transported by the
physical layer. This information is required for system start-up, layer 1 link mainte-
nance and the transfer of time critical information that has a direct time relationship
to layer 1 user data.
● Synchronization
Synchronization data used for frame and time alignment.
Frame Structure
Fig. 7-48: CPRI hierarchical frame structure
Data is transported via time division multiplex inside, so called Basic Frames consisting
of 16 words of variable length (depending on the CPRI line rate). The Basic Frame rate
is always 3.84 MHz.
The first word of every basic frame is always a control word while the other 15 contain I/
Q data. Inside the control words the other data streams like vendor specific data, C&M
data as well as L1 inband protocol and sync information are transmitted.
256 of these Basic Frames form a Hyper Frame and its 256 control words form a complete
control block.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 130

CPRI
On the highest hierachy level,a Node B Frame (or CPRI 10ms Frame) consists of 150
Hyperframes.
Dependig on the CPRI line rate, the wordlength of the basic frames varies:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 131

CPRI
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 132

CPRI
7.2.2.1 Description of the CPRI Control Data
The 256 control words of a hyperframe are organized into 64 subchannels of 4 control
words each. One subchannel contains 4 control words per hyperframe.
The index Ns of the subchannel ranges from 0 to 63. The index Xs of a control word within
a subchannel has four possible values, namely 0, 1, 2 and 3. The index X of the control
word within a hyperframe is given by:
X = Ns + 64 · Xs.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 133

CPRI
Fig. 7-49: CPRI subchannels
The graph shows that the subchannels can carry various data streams, as explained in
the following sections.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 134

CPRI
Sync. & Timing

The data transmitted inside subchannel 0 is used for synchronization. The first byte marks
the start of a hyperframe while bytes 2, 3 and 4 indicate the actual Node B Frame number
and Hyperframe Number.
Fig. 7-50: CPRI synchronization and timing
L1 Inband Protocol
Subchannel 2 is used for the transmission of link parameters between the devices. The
L1 Inband protocol indicates status flags and defines Slow & Fast C&M link properties.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 135

CPRI
Fig. 7-51: CPRI L1 inband protocol
Slow C&M Link

One option of transmitting C&M plane data is using subchannel 1 which bytes are
reserved for the transmission of management data via HDLC.
Depending on the CPRI line rate the capacity of the slow C&M link varies.
Fast C&M Link

Starting from a subchannel number P defined by the L1 inband parameter "Pointer" till
subchannel index 63 the fast C&M channel can be used for transmitting C&M plane data
using the ethernet protocol.
Depending on the CPRI line rate and the pointer index P, the capacity of the fast C&M
link varies.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 136

CPRI
The following table defines the transmission speed of a CPRI connection for control and
I/Q data:
Table 7-3: Bit Rates
Line Rate R Netto Rate Rn I/Q Rate Riq C&M Rate Rc Slow CM (max) Fast CM (max)
Rscm Rfcm
[Mbit/s] [Mbit/s] [Mbit/s] [Mbit/s]
[Mbit/s] [Mbit/s]
614.4 491.52 460.8 30.72 480.0 21.12
1228.8 983.04 921.6 61.44 960.0 42.24
2457.6 1966.08 1843.2 122.88 1920.0 84.48
3072.0 2457.60 2304.0 153.60 2400.0 105.60
4915.2 3932.16 3686.4 245.76 3840.0 168.96
6144.0 4915.20 4608.0 307.20 4800.0 211.20
9830.4 7864.32 7372.8 491.52 7680.0 337.92
The bit rates are calculated as:
10
Line Rate: R  W  16  3.84 
8
8
Netto Rate: Rn  W  16  3.84  R 
10
3
I/Q Rate: Riq  W  15  3.84  R 
4
1
C&M Rate Rc  W  3.84  R 
20
3.84 Rc R
Slow CM (max): Rscm  W  4   
256 64 1280
3.84 44 44 1
Fast CM (max): R fcm  W  4  44    Rc  R 
256 64 64 20
3.84 64  P 64  P 1
Fast CM (var): Rfcmp  W  4  64  P    Rc  R 
256 64 64 20
Vendor Data
Starting from subchannel index 16 up to the start of the fast C&M channel defined by the
pointer position P, vendor specific data can be transmitted.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 137

CPRI
7.2.3 Parameter Overview
Beside the main controls, like switching on the CPRI signal transmission, mode and save/
recall of settings, the interface is controlled by various parameters, which are grouped by
function:
Parameter Group Purpose Examples
Hardware Hardware information on the Hardware versions, CPRI mode,

R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the CPRI Reference Clock, timing measure-
breakout board, the status of signal ments, line bit rate, input and out-
transmission and hardware link puts, GPIO settings.
settings.
L1 Analysis Link status information L1 inband protocol, status, local

and remote alarms, layer events.
Downlink/Uplink Signal definition for transmitting / Appending signals with copy func-
receiving signals to or from the tion, signal source, digital stand-
DUT, including graphical display of ard, numeric format, allocation and
the CPRI frames. AxC container definition, low level
BER test and start conditions.
Control & Management Settings for slow or fast C&M inter- Slow C&M: Bit rate, HDLC status,
faces, e.g. selecting the interface, source or mode.
Ethernet pointer position, host Fast C&M: Ethernet pointer, bit
address or inserting control com- rate, host, port and login data.
mands directly.
Command editor/edit field.
Vendor Data Vendor-specific information. The data table enables to send

binary raw data to the DUT, e.g., to
test functions like AGC.
Diagnostics Diagnostics on the link interfaces Identifier, vendor, connector type,

and Tx / Rx test possibilities. transceiver type, module tempera-
ture, warnings.
Rx alarms, SFP module alarms.
ARB Table with information on the cur- File name, option, sample rate,
rently loaded waveform files. samples, state and status display.
Recorder Settings for recording an I/Q signal Data source, recording length, trig-
and storing the data in a waveform ger, status display and file man-
file. agement
7.2.4 Control Elements and Connectors
This section explains the control elements and connectors of the breakout board for CPRI
applications, i.e. the R&S EX-IQ-BOX option EXBOX-B85. With the help of the following
schematic view, the control elements and the connectors are briefly described, including
references to the chapters with detailed information.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 138

CPRI
Fig. 7-52: Schematic view of the CPRI breakout board, option R&S EXBOX-B85 (1409.7208.02)
1 = GENERAL PURPOSE I/O - Marker signals input / output

2 = Status LEDs
3 = User Interface
4 = SFP1/SFP2 - Modules
5 = RX/TX P/N - High Speed Serial Connectors
6 = RS-232-C - Slow C&M Interface
7 = ETHERNET- Fast C&M Interface
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 139

CPRI
Fig. 7-53: Schematic view of the CPRI breakout board, option R&S EXBOX-B85 (1409.7208.04)
1 = GENERAL PURPOSE I/O - Marker signals input / output

2 = Status LEDs
3 = User Interface
4 = SFP - Module
5 = RX/TX P/N - High Speed Serial Connectors
6 = RS-232-C - Slow C&M Interface
7 = ETHERNET- Fast C&M Interface
7.2.4.1 Top View
On the top of the case, the CPRI breakout board is equipped with three BNC connectors
for general purpose signals, and four status LEDs which visually indicate the status of
the CPRI communication link.
GENERAL PURPOSE I/O - Marker signals input / output

BNC connectors for GPIO (General Purpose Input/Output) to interface with the DUT, e.g.
the RRH (Remote Radio Head) of a base station.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 140

CPRI
The interfaces act bidirectional, i.e. as input, to read signals from the DUT, or as output,
to control the DUT. The connectors are configurable for user-specific purposes, e.g.
marker or clock signals can be used as trigger signals.
The input and output voltage levels are LVTTL.
Status LEDs
The status LEDs Power, PLL (Phase Locked Loop) and TX / RX visually indicate the
status of the CPRI CL (Communication Link ) as shown in the table.
Power PLL Tx (downlink) / Rx

(uplink)
CL is active locked The CPRI frame is active,

synchronized and DL and
UL are active
- - The CPRI frame is

synchronized
- unlocked not synchronized
CL is not active - -
Note: The TX/RX LEDs refer either to the SFP or to the SMA connection, depending on
the settings of the high speed serial switch in the hardware section.
7.2.4.2 Rear View
The rear panel of the CPRI breakout board contains the user interface for connection with
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Data transmission between the R&S devices is executed via this
interface.
User Interface
TYCO Z-Dok adapter board connector at the rear of the CPRI breakout board. At this
interface, the breakout board is connected directly to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX by a 168 pin
connector, type TYCO Z-Dok (56 differential pairs).
see chapter 10.1.1, "Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector", on page 355
7.2.4.3 Front View
On the front panel, the CPRI breakout board provides the interfaces to the DUT. The
breakout board supports the optical CPRI link with two SFP modules, and contains a
differential electrical interface, realized by four SMA connectors. In addition, the interfa-
ces Ethernet and RS-232-C provide the input or output for C&M (Control and Manage-
ment) data. The connectors are labeled on the top on the case.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 141

CPRI
Fig. 7-54: Front panel view (1409.7208.02)
The CPRI breakout board (1409.7208.02) covers two SFP cages, that means sockets to
insert an SFP module, while the variant (1409.7208.04) has a single SFP cage.
SFP1/SFP2 - Modules (1409.7208.02) / SFP -Module (1409.7208.04)

SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) transceiver that interfaces the CPRI breakout board
with the DUT via a fiber glass cable or a copper cable.
These interfaces can be manually adapted by interchangeable slide-in modules and
therefore provide adjustment to the special demand of the applications.
The CPRI breakout board (1409.7208.02) covers two cages, that means sockets to insert
an SFP module, that are standardized according to MSA (Multi-Source Agreement of
September the 14th, 2000), while the variant (1409.7208.04) has a single SFP cage.
SFP transceivers are available for several communications standards. They support high
data rates in electro optical netwoks and also in fiber optic networks.
RX/TX P/N - High Speed Serial Connectors

Two SMA (SubMiniature version A) connectors for differential data transmission. These
SMA connectors are coaxial connectors with a differential impedance of 100 Ohm, and
the logic type CML (Current Mode Logic), a differential digital logic family for high speed
data transmission. CML follows the to XAUI (X Attachment Unit Interface) standard, while
X stands for 10 Gigabit.
Note: CPRI primarily uses the optical link via the SFP interfaces. Additionally, the break-
out board delivers the signals at these interfaces, e.g., to execute a concurrent monitoring
of the signals. See chapter 7.2.7.5, "SMA Settings", on page 158 to activate the interface
and to set the corresponding parameters.
RS-232-C - Slow C&M Interface

RS-232-C interface for slow transmission of control and management data between the
PC and the CPRI breakout board.
The interface supports bidirectional data transmission of C&M data from a customized
software.
Note: For transmission of control signals by means of R&S DigIConf, use the USB con-
nection between the control PC and the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Set the corresponding data source in the Slow C&M (HDLC) panel of R&S DigIConf
according to your setup.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 142

CPRI
Select the bit rate Slow C&M (HDLC) panel of R&S DigIConf.
See also chapter 7.2.10.1, "Slow C&M (HDLC)", on page 193.
ETHERNET - Fast C&M Interface

Ethernet IEEE 802.3u interface for fast transmission of control and management data
between the controlling PC and the CPRI breakout board. The interface supports bidir-
ectional data transmission of C&M data either from a customized software, or from
R&S DigIConf.
The PC is connected to the CPRI breakout board with the aid of a commercial RJ-45
CAT7 crossover cable.
Note: Depending on the line rate and the position of the Ethernet pointer, the data transfer
rate varies. For information in detail, refer to chapter 7.2.10.2, "Fast C&M (Ethernet)",
on page 197.
7.2.5 Start with CPRI - Setup Example
This section describes a RE (Radio Equipment) test setup for testing RRH (Remote Radio
Head) with the CPRI transmission protocol in downlink mode.
This description refers to an example of a CPRI application and shows the configuration
of this test setup. Therefore it cannot be applied directly to other test setups. For infor-
mation on how to set up your CPRI application refer to the characteristics of your DUT.
For connection in general refer to chapter chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX", on page 42.
Note: You find a detailed explanation of the CPRI parameter settings under chapter 7.2.6,
"Main Configuration Dialog", on page 150, and the following chapters.
7.2.5.1 Overview
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 143

CPRI
The signal generator feeds the baseband signal digitally to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, i.e. in
the R&S specific I/Q format. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX converts the signal format into the
CPRI transmission protocol with the aid of the breakout board. The CPRI link transmits
the I/Q baseband signal and also control & management information to the RRH, i.e. the
CPRI RE Device.
The RRH device extracts the baseband signal from the CPRI link and executes an I/Q
modulation to a certain carrier frequency. The resulting RF signal is sent to the R&S signal
analyzer, to perform various performance measurements.
7.2.5.2 Used Devices and Cables
Devices:
● R&S EX-IQ-BOX V04 including external power supply
● R&S EXBOX-B85 CPRI breakout board
● an SFP module for the SFP1 cage of the CPRI breakout board
● an R&S signal generator, e.g. R&S SMU200A, or R&S AMU200A, equipped with
digital baseband output, option B18
● an R&S signal analyzer, e.g. an R&S FSQ, or an equivalent instrument, which can
demodulate 3GPP W-CDMA, LTE, WiMAX signals
● a DUT, e.g. a Remote Radio Head, with power supply
Cables:
● a LVDS cable SMU-Z7
● 2 BNC cables
● an RF cable
● an optical cable
● an USB cable
7.2.5.3 Setup of the Devices
Cabling
1. Connect the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to the AC supply.

The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is power supplied with an external power supply unit and a
separate power cable.
2. Connect the CPRI breakout board to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, i.e. at the Z-DOK user
interface connector.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX powers the CPRI breakout board via the user interface.
3. Establish the connection between the BBOUT of the R&S signal generator and the
DIG IQ IN/OUT 1 of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Currently, the interface DIG IQ IN/OUT 1 is firmly set to input.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 144

CPRI
4. Connect the analyzer's REF OUT and the generator's REF IN, and connect the gen-
erator's REF OUT with REF IN of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
5. Connect the USB cable plug A to the PC, and plug B to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX (USB
IN)
6. Plug the SFP module into the SFP cage on the breakout board
7. Connect the power supply to the RRH.
8. Establish the optical connection between the breakout board and the Rx/Tx input of
the RRH.
9. Connect the RF output of the RRH, i.e. the RRH antenna with the analyzer's RF input.
Make sure that you use adequate attenuation in order not to damage the analyzer, as
the output power may exceed the analyzer's maximum power. You find the maximum
input level of your analyzer in the data sheet.
Setting the R&S Signal Generator
1. Preset the R&S signal generator.
2. Set reference frequency on externally, as the reference frequency is fed in from the
signal analyzer.
3. Activate the test signal, e.g. 3GPP FDD in the respective baseband block.
4. Set the sample rate of the digital signal output according to the settings in
R&S DigIConf, i.e. 7.68 MHz.
5. Set the sample rate of the digital signal output to 7.68 MHz in "User Defined" mode.
Setting the CPRI Protocol
1. Start the R&S DigIConf software on the PC.

R&S DigIConf recognizes connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices and indicates their
IDs inside the block diagram symbol.
2. Press the CPRI standard button

The main CPRI setting dialog opens.
3. Press the "Preset" button to start in a defined state.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 145

CPRI
4. Select the appropriate output port in the "Hardware" tab, and set the "CPRI Line Bit
Rate", the SFP connection supports.
5. Switch to the "Downlink (Rx)" tab, and select the 3GPP FDD signal.
6. Set "Oversampling" 2.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 146

CPRI
7. The sampling rate and oversampling correspond to the incoming 3GPP FDD signal:
Sample Rate EX-IQ-BOX · Oversampling = Sample Rate Signal Generator

3.84 MHz · 2 = 7.68 MHz
Now the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is configured to communicate with the RRH via the CPRI
transmission protocol in downlink mode.
8. Switch on "Signal State" and "State".
9. Press "Apply Setup" to assign the settings.
Setting the RRH
DUT dependent settings

For the setup of the RRH, refer to the information on your instruments and the respective
tools and utilities.
Setting the R&S Signal Analyzer
1. Preset the R&S signal analyzer.
2. Set it to center frequency 2.5 GHz, corresponding to the carrier frequency of the DUT.
3. Set "Span" 20 MHz, and set "Level" +10 dBm.
7.2.5.4 Measuring process
If the CPRI link is active, and the RRH transmits the signal correctly, all LEDs on the
breakout board are green.
Measuring the I/Q Signal
Check signal output

To see if the signal is properly transmitted, you can record and display the signal with the
transient recorder.
1. To access the settings of an tranisient recorder, double click the smart graphic of the
active R&S EX-IQ-BOX in the block diagram.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 147

CPRI
2. To capture the digital I/Q signal, set:

a) "Data Source": Dig IQ IN 1
b) "Display Type": Power Spectrum
c) "Acquisition Length": 1024
The Recording Memory records the signal data and displays the 3GPP FDD signal
in the graphics window.
Fig. 7-55: Recording the outgoing digital standard signal 3GPP FDD
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 148

CPRI
Measuring the RF Output Signal of the RRH

The RRH sends the RF signal to the R&S spectrum analyzer.
The analyzer displays power spectrum of the 3GPP FDD signal.

Now you can perform measurements that you need, such as, for example, ACP (Adjacent
Channel Power) measurements and EVM (Error Vector Magnitude) evaluation, or addi-
tional measurements provided by the R&S signal analyzer.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 149

CPRI
Example:
Switch to 3GPP FDD BS demodulation.
The analyzer displays the demodulation result of the incoming signal
7.2.6 Main Configuration Dialog
Besides the settings that are relevant for CPRI protocol settings, the CPRI configuration
dialog comprises the common main controls as "State" for activating, "Set to Default" for
preset and "Save/Recall" for storing or loading previously defined settings. The main
controls are fixed and always indicated, independently from the sselected tab, and from
the active transmission protocol. A detailed description of these general functions is given
in chapter 7.2.6.1, "Main Controls", on page 152.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 150

CPRI
Fig. 7-56: CPRI main configuration dialog (1409.7208.04)
Fig. 7-57: CPRI main configuration dialog (1409.7208.02)
Grouped by functionality the configuration dialog also comprises tabs for Hardware set-
tings, for Downlink and Uplink configuration, for Control & Management parameters and
Test & Diagnostics. For the description in detail, refer to chapter 7.2.7, "Hardware",
on page 153, chapter 7.2.8, "L1 Analysis", on page 163, chapter 7.2.10, "Control &
Management", on page 193, chapter 7.2.9, "Downlink and Uplink", on page 170, and
chapter 7.2.12, "Diagnostics", on page 203.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 151

CPRI
Additionally, you find a tab for ARB settings in the dialog, that is used if the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX is equipped with an option for waveform memory. Find the respective information
on ARB functions in chapter 7.2.13, "ARB", on page 205.
Finally, you find the "Recorder" tab, see chapter 7.2.14, "Recorder", on page 207 for
description. If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with the appropriate option for waveform
recording, you can record the I/Q signals.
7.2.6.1 Main Controls
Besides the settings that are relevant for the CPRI transmission protocol, the CPRI con-
figuration dialog contains the common main controls as "State" for activating, "Set to
Default" for preset and "Save/Recall" for storing or loading settings. The main controls
are permanently indicated, independently of the active tab and interface standard.
State
Activate or deactivate the CPRI standard. The corresponding FPGA (Field Programma-
ble Array) is loaded automatically into the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:STATe on page 316
Mode
Select a CPRI test scenario. In RE test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working as a base-
band module (REC) for testing the RE. Vice versa, in REC test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX simulates the RF module (RE) for testing the opposite module REC.
"CPRI RE Test" Select RE (Radio Equipment) test mode.
"CPRI REC Select REC (Radio Equipment Control) test mode.
Test"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:MODE on page 315
Link Status
Indicates whether the CPRI link is established or any transmission error has occurred.
This indicator includes all verified transmission parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:ALARm? on page 298
Set To Default / Preset

Set all parameters to default values. Refer to chapter A.3.2, "CPRI Default Settings",
on page 372, containing an overview of the most important CPRI default settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRESet on page 315
Save / Recall
Accesses the dialogs for storing or loading CPRI settings. The dialogs also provide
access to the file manager.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 152

CPRI
CPRI settings are stored as files with the predefined file extension *.cpri. The file name
and the directory user-selectable.
"Recall CPRI Settings"
Open the file select window for loading a previously saved CPRI con-
figuration. Load the configuration of the selected (highlighted) file by
pressing the "Select" button.
"Save CPRI Settings"
Opens the file select window for storing the CPRI settings. Determine
the file name and save with the "Save" button.
This procedure stores the complete CPRI settings of the current con-
figuration.
"File Manager" Calls the "File Manager". *.cpri is preset in the "File Type" entry field.
The file manager is used to copy, delete, and rename files and to create
new directories.
Remote command:
Settings files catalog: [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:CATalog?
on page 322
Recall file: [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:LOAD on page 323
Save file: [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:STORe on page 323
7.2.7 Hardware
The Hardware tab contains all settings of CPRI hardware parameters, including the
assignment to the connected interfaces, special settings of the link, status information,
reference clock settings, and general information on the CPRI option R&S EXBOX-B85.
Fig. 7-58: CPRI hardware dialog (1409.7208.04)
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 153

CPRI
Fig. 7-59: CPRI hardware dialog (1409.7208.02)
7.2.7.1 General Information
Section "General Information" indicates the board revisions, and the FPGA versions of
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and of the breakout board.
FPGA CPRI Version

Indicates the version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) CPRI design.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FCVersion? on page 300
FPGA Base Version

The version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) basic design.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FBVersion? on page 300
BOB FPGA Version

The version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) design inside the break out
board.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FBVersion? on page 300
R&S EX-IQ-BOX Board Revision

Indicates the revision number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal board.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:EBRevision? on page 300
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 154

CPRI
Breakout Board Revision

Shows the revision number of the connected breakout board.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:BBRevision? on page 298
7.2.7.2 Reference Clock
Section "Reference Clock" provides the selection of the clock source for the CPRI com-
munication link. Depending on the CPRI test mode, the possible sources for the reference
signal differ.
Source
Selects the source of the reference signal. In test mode CPRI RE, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
is synchronized either external or internally. Test mode CPRI REC uses the reference
clock embedded in the CPRI link.
"REF IN" CPRI RE test setup with a connected R&S instrument.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX synchronizes the CPRI communication link with
the reference signal provided by an R&S instrument. The 10 MHz signal
is fed to the BNC connector REF IN on the back of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
"Internal" CPRI RE test setup, if the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working stand-alone.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX uses its internal reference oscillator for synchro-
nization.
"Clock Recovery"
CPRI REC test mode.
The reference clock is extracted from the CPRI link. This selection is
mandatory in a CPRI REC test setup, since the R&S EX-IQ-BOX oper-
ates in CPRI slave mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:SOURce on page 308
Clock Synthesis Locked

Indicates red, if the main PLL of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is unlocked. This state is funda-
mental and must be locked in every operating mode of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CSLocked? on page 307
Clock Recovery Locked

Indicates red, if clock recovery is unlocked. Clock recovery must be locked in CPRI REC
test mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CRLocked? on page 307
10MHz Reference Output Locked

Turns red, if the reference clock output is not available.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 155

CPRI
A second synthesizer generates a 10 MHz reference clock selectable at one of the

GPIO interface connectors. The status LED turns blue, if the clock output is available.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:ROLocked? on page 308
7.2.7.3 Timing Measurements
The graph in the GUI shows the relation between downlink and uplink frame timing for
the single-hop configuration.
Fig. 7-60: CPRI timing measurements > downlink <-> uplink frame timing
T12 = delay of downlink signal from the output point of REC (R1) to the input point of RE (R2)
T34 = delay of uplink signal from the output point of RE (R3) to the input point of REC (R4)
Toffset = frame offset between the input signal at R2 and the output signal at R3
T14 = frame timing difference between the output signal at R1 and the input signal at R4
While TOffset is the internal processing delay inside the RE, T12 and T34 are the prop-
agation delays over the physical media.
Depending on the CPRI mode, CPRI RE test or CPRI REC test, either T14 or TOffset is
calculated, while the other parameter can be input if the internal delay of the DUT is
known.
To calculate the cable delay R21, subtract T14 and TOffset and divide the result by 2.
R21 = (T14-TOffset) / 2
The following graph shows an overview of the different sources of delay.
Fig. 7-61: CPRI timing measurements > delays
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 156

CPRI
T14
Sets (REC Test) or displays (RE Test) the frame timing difference between the output
signal at R1 and the input signal at R4.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:T14T on page 311
TOffset
Sets (RE Test) or displays (REC Test) the frame offset between the input signal at R2
and the output signal at R3.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TOFFset on page 311
R21
Indicates the cable delay, calculated automatically by the given timing parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:R21T? on page 307
7.2.7.4 Link Settings
In section "Link Settings" you can set the line bit rate for the communication link.
CPRI Line Bit Rate

Select the line bit rate for the communication link. The line bit rate defines the total number
of bits transferred per second over the CPRI communication link, including control and I/
Q data, and 8B10B line coding.
Note:
Difference between the R&S EXBOX-B85 breakout board versions
● 1409.7208.02 supports 2x, 4x and 5x line bit rates.
● 1409.7208.04 covers all line speeds.
See the overview in table 7-4.
Table 7-4: Supported line bit rates
Line bit rate R&S EXBOX-B85
1409.7208.04 1409.7208.02
"1x (614.4 Mbit/s)" x -
"2x (1228.8 Mbit/s)" x x
"4x (2457.6 Mbit/s)" x x
"5x (3072.0 Mbit/s)" x x
"8x (4915.2 Mbit/s)" x -
"10x (6144.0 Mbit/s)" x -
"16x 9830.4 Mbit/s)" x -
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBRate on page 305
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 157

CPRI
Protocol Version
Selects the CPRI protocl version.
For the higher line rates the CPRI standard introduces a scrambling functionality to
increase the signals stability. The scrambling functionality is enabled if protocol version
2.0 is selected and a non zero seed is defined.
Available protocol versions are:
● "1.0"
● "2.0"
Line bit rate [Mbit/s] Scrambling support Highest available protocol ver-
sion number
1x (614.4) Not supported 1.0
8x (4915.2) Recommended 1.0: scrambling not supported

2.0: scrambling supported


Note: When working with higher line speeds, it is strongly recommended that you use
the CPRI protocol version which supports scrambling.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:PROTocol on page 306
Scrambling Seed
Defines the scrambling seed.
The initial condition of the side stream scrambler is defined by a 31 bit vector. If protocol
version 2.0 is chosen, a non zero seed has to be defined in order to activate the scram-
bling functionality.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:SCRambling on page 309
Received Seed
Indicates the scrambling seed used by the connected transmitter.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:RECeived? on page 309
7.2.7.5 SMA Settings
This section of the "Hardware" tab contains the electrical parameters of the SMA inter-
face.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 158

CPRI
Differential Output Swing

Determine the differential output voltage swing of the CML (Current Mode Logic) trans-
mitter.
Note:
● 1409.7208.02 supports variable differential output swing.
● 1409.7208.04 has a fixed output level of 0.8 Vpp.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:DOSWing on page 310
Rx Equalizer Gain
Set the input gain of the equalizer. This equalizer is an active high-pass filter, that equal-
izes the low-pass behavior of the transmission medium, such as for example the FR4
backplane. The gain, expressed in dB, relates to the frequency of 2 GHz.
Fig. 7-62: CPRI - equalizer gain over frequency
Note:
● 1409.7208.02 supports a variable equalizer gain.
● 1409.7208.04 implements a dynamic automated adjustment.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:RXEGain on page 310
7.2.7.6 High Speed Serial Switch
In this section, you can assign input or output to the connected interfaces.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 159

CPRI
Note that CPRI recommends to use optical transceivers that follow the High Speed Serial
Link standards. CPRI mainly transfers the signal via the optical connection.
Use the electrical connection at the SMA connectors for debugging routines.
Basically the R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives a CPRI signal via one of the optical interfaces
SFP1, or SFP2. SMA is used, primarily, to the diagnosis.
For test purposes, the signal can be looped back internally. Then all the signal processing,
as well as the CPRI transmitter and receivers operate normally without having an external
device to be connected.

● 1409.7208.02 supports multiple outputs.
● 1409.7208.04 is limited to a corresponding I/O interface.
Input (1409.7208.02) ; Input/Output (1409.7208.04)

Determines the interface for signal input, and for EXBOX-B85 version 1409.7208.04, also
for the signal output.
Note that only one interface can be active at the same time.
If you are working with a CPRI breakout board 1409.7208.02, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX can
receive a signal via one of the optical interfaces SFP1 or SFP2. The EXBOX-B85 break-
out board 1409.7208.04, however, has only one interface.
"SFP1/2 (1409.7208.02)"; "SFP (1409.7208.04)"
Selects the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface for connection
with the DUT.
"SMA" Selects the SMA (SubMiniatur version A) interface.
"Loopback internal"
Assigns the internal loopback.
"None (1409.7208.02)"
Deactivates the input, if no connection is established.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:INPut on page 303
Outputs
Determine the interface for signal output, that means align the transmitter type of the
DUT.
For the signal output, more than one interface can be activated simultaneously, for exam-
ple SFP1 for signal transmission to the DUT, and SMA for the signal monitoring.
"SFP1 / 2" Select the respective SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface, at
which the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected to the DUT for sending the
signal.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 160

CPRI
"SMA" Select the SMA (SubMiniatur version A) interface, if the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX is sending the signal to the DUT on this transmission line.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP1[:STATe] on page 304
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP2[:STATe] on page 304
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SMA[:STATe] on page 305
7.2.7.7 Input/Output
In this section, you can select the physical I/O interface.
Note that CPRI recommends to use optical transceivers that follow the High Speed Serial
Link standards. CPRI mainly transfers the signal via the optical connection.
Use the electrical connection at the SMA connectors for debugging routines.
● 1409.7208.02 supports multiple outputs.
● 1409.7208.04 is limited to a corresponding I/O interface.
Input (1409.7208.02) ; Input/Output (1409.7208.04)

Determines the interface for signal input, and for EXBOX-B85 version 1409.7208.04, also
for the signal output.
Note that only one interface can be active at the same time.
If you are working with a CPRI breakout board 1409.7208.02, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX can
receive a signal via one of the optical interfaces SFP1 or SFP2. The EXBOX-B85 break-
out board 1409.7208.04, however, has only one interface.
"SFP1/2 (1409.7208.02)"; "SFP (1409.7208.04)"
Selects the SFP (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface for connection
with the DUT.
"SMA" Selects the SMA (SubMiniatur version A) interface.
"Loopback internal"
Assigns the internal loopback.
"None (1409.7208.02)"
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:INPut on page 303
7.2.7.8 General Purpose Input Output
Section "General Purpose Input Output" contains settings for control signals to or from
external devices. Use this feature to trigger external devices or to monitor several internal
clocks, as for example the Node B frame tick, or to use external signals to trigger the I/
Q recorder.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 161

CPRI
The BNC connectors for general purpose signals are located on top of the breakout
board.
Direction GPIO 1-3

Determine the transmission direction at the connected GPIO interfaces. You can indi-
vidually activate each of the three interfaces separately. Find additional information on
the connectors in chapter 7.2.4.1, "Top View", on page 140, and chapter 10.3.3.1, "Con-
nector Locations - CPRI Breakout Board", on page 367.
"OFF" Deactivate the GPIO interface.
"Output" Select the respective GPIO interface as output, that means send a con-
trol signal to the external device.
"Input" Select the appropriate GPIO interface as input, which means you
receive a signal from the external device, for example for trigger pur-
poses.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:DIRection on page 301
Signal GPIO 1-3

Determine the type of the control signal. You can define separate signals for each of the
three interfaces.
"Constant Low/High"
GPIO output
Set the control signal to constant level high or low.
"DL/UL Basic Frame"
GPIO output
Take the information in the CPRI basic frame for control. According to
the WCDMA clock rate, the CPRI protocol synchronizes its basic frame
with 3.84 MHz.
"DL/UL Hyper Frame"
GPIO output
Use the CPRI hyper frame clock for control. The hyper frame clock rate
is 15 kHz.
"DL/UL Node B Frame"
GPIO output
Use the information in the CPRI Node B frame for control. CPRI updates
the B node every 10 ms, that means you can control the DUT with a
clock rate of 100 Hz.
"Timing Measurement Clock"
GPIO output
Use the CPRI signal processing clock, for example 61.44 MHz at 2x
line rate. This clock is used for timing measurements like response time,
latency, etc..
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 162

CPRI
"10 MHz Reference Clock"

GPIO output
Use the CPRI signal processing clock, for example 61.44 MHz at 2x
line rate. This clock is used for timing measurements like response time,
latency, etc..
"External Trigger 1/2/3"
GPIO input
In input mode, each of the three GPIO ports provide also an external
trigger signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:SIGnal on page 302
7.2.7.9 Output Marker Frame Width (in Clocks)
Section "Output Marker Frame Width (in Clocks)" contains additional settings for the
frame width of the selected GPIO control signal.
Basic ; Hyper ; Node B

Enables you to increase the frame width of the corresponding output marker signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:BFRame on page 300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:HFRame on page 301
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:NFRame on page 301
7.2.8 L1 Analysis
The L1 Analysis tab contains information on the CPRI link status. By means of an LED
display, R&S DigIConf indicates alarm and error messages as e.g LOF or LOS. The LEDs
are blue, if the transmission is working properly. Red LEDs indicate transmission errors.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 163

CPRI
Fig. 7-63: CPRI L1 Analysis dialog
7.2.8.1 L1 Inband Protocol
The L1 inband protocol is transmitted in subchannel 2 of a hyperframe protocol set. It

uses the control words with index 2, 66, 130 and 194.
The data transmitted is related to the link and is directly transported by the physical layer.
This information is required, for example for system start up, layer 1 link maintenance
and the transfer of time critical information that has a direct time relationship to layer 1
user data.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 164

CPRI
Fig. 7-64: CPRI L1 inband protocol
Protocol Version
Indicates the CPRI protocol version.
According to the protocol version, the link supports data scrambling or descrambling, as
shown below.
Note: It is strongly recommended that you use scrambling at higher line bit rates.
Line rate [Mbit/s] Scrambling support Highest available protocol ver-

sion number
1x (614.4) not supported 1
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 165

CPRI
Line rate [Mbit/s] Scrambling support Highest available protocol ver-

sion number
8x (4915.2) recommended 1: scrambling not supported

2: scrambling supported
10x (6144.0) recommended 1: scrambling not supported

16x(9830.4) recommended 1: scrambling not supported

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:VERSion? on page 315
HDLC Rate
Indicates the Slow C&M HDLC bit rate during link setup.
You can determine this parameter in the C&M tab, which is embedded in the CPRI pro-
tocol. RE and REC then read the value of the other, and agree on the smallest.
Supported values depend on the line speed:
Bit rate [Mbit/s]
1x (614.4) no HDLC 240 480
2x (1228.8) no HDLC 240 480 960
4x (2457.6) no HDL 240 480 960 1920
5x (3072.0) no HDLC 240 480 960 1920 2400
8x (4915.2) no HDLC 240 480 960 1920 2400 3840
10x (6144.0) no HDLC 240 480 960 1920 2400 4800
16x (9830.4) no HDLC 240 480 960 1920 2400 7680
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:HDLC:BRATe? on page 312
Flags
Shows various information about the link status, transmitted in control word 130.
The following flags are defined:
"LOS" The LOS (Loss of Signal) LED indicates a loss of signal.
"LOF" LOF (Loss of Frame) indicates, when the received data lost the syn-
chronization, that is loss of frame.
"RAI" RAI (Remote Alarm Indication) indicates, if any remote part of the end-
to-end link has failed.
"SDI" SDI (Service Access Point Defect Indication) indicates, that the data
communication failed.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 166

CPRI
"Reset" Indicates that the DUT is in reset state.

In the CPRI RE test mode, the LED shows that a reset was performed,
and in CPRI REC test mode, the LED indicates a reset request.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOS? on page 326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOF? on page 325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RAI? on page 326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:SDI? on page 327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RESet? on page 326
Ethernet Pointer
Indicates the resulting Ethernet pointer after the link setup, that means the position after
the handshake between the R&S EXBOX-B85 and the DUT.
Valid entries range from 20..63. Depending on the line speed and the pointer the following
Ethernet bit rates are achievable:
Line rate Length of control word min. Ethernet bit rate max. Ethernet bit rate
[Mbit/s] [bit] [Mbit/s] [Mbit/s]
1x (614.4) 8 0.48 21.12
2x (1228.8) 16 0.96 42.24
4x (2457.6) 32 1.92 84.48
5x (3072.0) 40 2.40 105.60
8x (4915.2) 64 3.84 168.96
10x (6144.0) 80 4.80 211.20
16x (9830.4) 128 7.86 337.92
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PTR? on page 293
7.2.8.2 Link Status
This section indicates the status of the last query on the active link.
By means of an LED display, R&S DigIConf indicates alarm and error messages as e.g
LOF or LOS. In case of malfunction, the respective LEDs change from blue to red.
Once CPRI is turned on, all parameters are updated continuously. If CPRI is off, the
parameters are set to default value.
Link Status
Indicates whether the CPRI link is established or any transmission error has occurred.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 167

CPRI
This indicator includes all verified transmission parameters.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:ALARm? on page 298
Core Mode
Indicates the current state of the CPRI core.
The CPRI core can work in the following states:
CPRI core state Description
"Link is up" normal operating mode
"Reset" at the starting point of establishing the link
"L1 Synchronization" attempt of L1 synchronization
"Setup protocol version" setting up the protocol version
"Setup C&M parameter" setting up the C&M parameter
"Passive mode" only I/Q data are active, C&M is not used
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CORE? on page 299
CPRI Mode
Displays the role of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, that is either master (CPRI RE test) or slave
(CPRI REC test).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CMODe? on page 299
LOF (Loss of Frame)

Indicates whether the CPRI frame delimiter K28.5 is detected.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOF? on page 306
LOS (Loss of Signal)

Indicates whether the data is synchronized.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOS? on page 306
Local Alarms
These LEDs indicate if errors occur on the CPRI breakout board.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 168

CPRI
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOF? on page 312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOS? on page 312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:RAI? on page 313
Remote Alarms
The LEDs in this section show alarms that the DUT returns via the CPRI link.
"SDI" SDI (Service Access Point Defect Indication) indicates, that the data
communication failed.
"Reset" Indicates that the DUT is in reset state.
In the CPRI RE test mode, the LED shows that a reset was performed,
and in CPRI REC test mode, the LED indicates a reset request.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOF? on page 313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOS? on page 313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RAI? on page 314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RESet? on page 314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:SAP? on page 314
7.2.8.3 Events
In CPRI RE test mode the R&S EX-IQ-BOX acts as a CPRI REC (master). As defined in
the CPRI standard specification, the CPRI REC provides the generation of Layer 1 mes-
sages. In this section, you can simulate some events. Use this function to see how the
DUT responds to these events.
SDI
Activate the SDI (Service Access Point Defect Indication) defect indicator. This function
intentionally provokes an SDI event, in order to examine whether the DUT evaluates it.
In realtime applications, the function detects whether an SAP (Service Access Point) is
defective or is not working properly.
Note: This function applies to CPRI RE test mode. In this mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
acts as a CPRI REC (master). As defined in the CPRI standard specification, the CPRI
REC provides the generation of Layer 1 messages. In this section, you can simulate some
events. Use this function to see how the DUT responds to these events.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:SDI on page 329
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 169

CPRI
RE Reset
Set or clear the bit on the downlink connection which requests the RE to reset.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:REReset on page 328
7.2.9 Downlink and Uplink
The Downlink and the Uplink tabs contain the settings for the CPRI basic frame. Down-
link and uplink parameters are similar; they both define the signals I/Q data and its dis-
tribution inside the CPRI basic frame container (AxC allocation).
The CPRI basic frame contains 16 words. The first word, the control word, contains con-
trol information, like synchronization, timing, slow or fast C&M, or vendor specific data.
The remaining words carry the I/Q data.
Terms used in the description and familiar synonyms

UL (Uplink): The UL defines the direction from a mobile device to a base station. A
synonym to UL is RL (Reverse Link).
DL (Downlink): The DL defines the direction from the base station to the mobile device.
A synonym to DL is FL (Forward Link).
Depending on the CPRI test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works either as a transmitter
(Tx) or receiver (Rx), as shown in the following diagrams.
● In CPRI RE test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works in the DL (downlink) as a trans-
mitter (Tx) and in the UL (uplink) as a receiver (Rx).
TX Downlink
EXBOX DUT
EX-IQ-BOX
B85 CPRI RE
RX Uplink
Fig. 7-65: CPRI RE test - schematic representation
● In CPRI REC test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works in the DL as a receiver (Rx) and
in the UL as a transmitter (Tx).
Downlink RX
DUT EXBOX
EX-IQ-BOX
CPRI REC B85
Uplink TX
Fig. 7-66: CPRI REC test - schematic representation
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 170

CPRI
The settings dialogs for the transmitter (Tx) and the receiver (Rx) are identical in both
CPRI test modes (RE / REC).
Accordingly, the DL (downlink) dialog of CPRI RE and the UL (uplink) of CPRI REC are
similar, and vice versa, the UL dialog of the CPRI RE test is identical to the DL dialog of
CPRI REC.
The following description comprises the parameters of both dialogs, the UL and the DL,
since they use the same parameters. Specific settings that relate to a particular link
direction, are separately expressed.
Fig. 7-67: CPRI downlink dialog
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 171

CPRI
Fig. 7-68: CPRI uplink dialog
7.2.9.1 Signal Definition
Section "Signal Definition" contains all information which is important to define the I/Q
signals to be transmitted, or received via the CPRI link. On the left the table lists all defined
signals, and on the right of it input and display fields show the respective settings of the
selected signal. Signals are added, copied or removed by means of buttons and a groups
table indicates the AxCs assigned to a group.
The active AxCs are shown on the top right of this tab graphically. You find the description
to this graphic under chapter 7.2.9.2, "AxC Container Definition", on page 186.
Signal Table
The table lists the all defined signals. Select a signal in the table, to view the current
settings of this signal.
The list can take up at most 24 signals, according to the maximum number of AxCs, since
a signal needs at least one AxC.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 172

CPRI
Note: By default, R&S DigIConf names the signals signal_ with an attached
<index> number. The index number represents the position in the list. In order to assign
a user defined name, enter the name in the field "Signal Name" on the right.
Append
Add a new signal to the list. R&S DigIConf attaches a signal with default parameter val-
ues, a predetermined name and a name index following the last list entry.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:APPend on page 337
Copy + Append
Create a copy of a selected signal. This function copies the parameter values and assigns
the same name with suffix for distinction. The new signal is added at the end of the list.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:COPY on page 342
Delete
Remove the currently selected signal from the list. The function removes the correspond-
ing AxCs from the list of used AxCs.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:DELete on page 343
Signal State
Activate a selected signal.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STATe on page 352
Signal Name
Enter or change the signal name.
By default, R&S DigIConf assigns the name signal_ with an attached <index> num-
ber. The index number represents the position in the list.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NAME on page 346
Physical Source
Select the signal source for signal transmission to the DUT. The signal comes either from
an R&S instrument via the digital interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, or the signal is gen-
erated internally or by means of the waveform memory in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX converts the I/Q format of the signal into the CPRI protocol format.
Embedded with additional control information, the link transfers the data to the DUT.
Note: You can select the signal source if the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works as transmitter, that
means if it sends a signal to the DUT. That is, if you work in the RE Test Downlink or
the REC Test Uplink mode. Hence, the parameter is available only in the corresponding
DL or UL tab.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 173

CPRI
However, when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives a signal, "Signal Output" is available in the
corresponding tabs instead of "Physical Source". See also "Signal Output"
on page 174.
"Sync Pattern" Use the internal pattern generator as signal source.
"DIG IQ IN 1" An R&S instrument applies a digital baseband signal at DIG IQ IN 1
connector of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The green IN/OUT LED of this interface indicates, that it operates in
input mode.
"ARB 1...4" Selects one of the waveform memories with a loaded I/Q signal.
Note:
● This feature requires, that the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with the
appropriate waveform memory option.
● A conflict arises, if no signal is loaded in the memory, or is not acti-
vated. The LED next to "Wave File" and "Sample Rate" tuns red.
The Multi Waveform option supports simultaneous playback of up to
four signals. For information on the available options refer to chap-
ter 3.2.2.3, "Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Record-
ing Memory ", on page 23.
"Static Frame" Enables you to fill the complete CPRI frame with a static pattern for
debugging purposes. This pattern is transmitted as it is, without scaling,
rounding or interleaving.
"PRBS" Generates a PRBS pattern.
If you additionally set Signal Output to "BER Test", you can perform a
bit error test with this pattern, to evaluate the signal transmission in the
Rx path.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGNal<ch>:SOURce on page 332
Signal Output
Select an output interface, to transmit the received baseband signal from the DUT to an
R&S instrument and/or to the built-in I/Q recorder.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX extracts the I/Q baseband signal of the CPRI protocol, and forwards
it to an R&S instrument. Simultaneously, you can also record the signal with the I/Q
recorder, see chapter 7.2.14, "Recorder", on page 207.
Note: You can select "Signal Output" if the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works as receiver, that
means if it receives a signal from the DUT. That is, if you work in the RE Test Uplink or
the REC Test Downlink mode. Hence, the parameter is available only in the corre-
sponding DL or UL tab.
However, when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX transmits a signal, "Physical Source" is available
in the corresponding tabs instead of "Signal Output". See also "Physical Source"
on page 173.
"DIG IQ OUT <n> / Recorder"
Selects the digital output interface DIG IQ IN 2 of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
to send the signal to an R&S instrument.
The yellow IN/OUT LED of this interface indicates, that it operates in
input mode.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 174

CPRI
"Recorder" Selects the built-in I/Q recorder as the destination for the received sig-
nal.
This feature requires, that the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with the
appropriate recording memory option. For information on the available
options refer to chapter 3.2.2.3, "Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform
Playback and Recording Memory ", on page 23.
"Sync Pattern" Enables you to check one AxC inside the CPRI frame against a static
synchronization pattern. If you additionally select "Sync Pattern" as start
condition in the Rx path, Start Condition, the scheduling starts as soon
as the specified pattern is detected.
"BER Test" Enables you to measure the Bit Error Rate of the link, provided the
Physical Source "PRBS " is selected.
Section "LOW Level BER Test" appears with the corresponding param-
eters. You can find the setting parameters described in chapter 7.2.9.3,
"Low Level BER Test", on page 191, including details to the BER Test.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGNal<ch>:OUTPut on page 331
Standard
Select a communication standard. R&S DigIConf provides the selection of a standard
signal with automatically assigned sample rate. Alternatively, select a signal from a
waveform file, the ARB function, or assign user-specific values.
R&S DigIConf supports all current standards and their variants. When selecting a stand-
ard signal, the program automatically sets the relevant parameters and values.
For example, a loaded digital standard automatically adjusts the needed AxCs, assigns
the sample rate, and sets up several other relevant parameters.
Note: The digital standard signals, or user defined signals refer to external signal input
or output, that means the physical signal sources DIG IQ IN or DIG IQ OUT.
"GSM/EDGE" Select a signal that follows te GSM/EDGE standard.
GSM/EDGE (Global System for Mobile Communications/Enhanced
Data Rates for GSM Evolution) covers the 2nd generation mobile radio
technology. Selecting this signal standard, the sample rate is set to
270,833333 kSps. This sample rate does not fit well into the CPRI basic
frame rate. Therefore, the sampling rate of GSM/EDGE is only achieved
by using a rather complicated group setup, the AxC settings over time.
"3GPP FDD" Select the parameters of the W-CDMA standard 3GPP FDD.
W-CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) covers the radio
technology UMTS (Universal Mobile Telecommunications System).
3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is a collaboration between
groups of telecommunication associations, which define a globally
applicable third generation mobile phone system specification. 3GPP
standardization comprises all GSM and W-CDMA specifications.
"CDMA 2000" Select a signal that follows the CDMA standard.
CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access) uses a multiple access
scheme for digital radio, to send voice, data, and signaling data (such
as a dialed telephone number) between mobile phones and cell sites.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 175

CPRI
"LTE" Select an LTE (Long Term Evolution) signal. Based on UMTS, LTE
provides a wireless broadband internet system with voice and other
services built on top, like for example authentication.
LTE bandwidths: 1.4 | 3.0 | 5.0 | 10.0 | 15.0 | 20.0 MHz
"IEEE 802.16 WiMAX"
Select the digital standard IEEE 802.16 WiMAX (Worldwide Inter-oper-
ability for Microwave Access). WiMAX provides wireless transmission
of data using a variety of transmission modes, as for example point-to-
multipoint links or mobile internet access.
WiMAX bandwidths: 3.5 | 5.0 | 7.0 | 8.75 | 10.0 | 20 MHz
"User defined" Specify a user defined signal for transmission, define a signal with arbi-
trary parameters.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STANdard on page 350
Wave file
Indicates the loaded waveform file, if the physical signal source is one of the waveform
memories.
Note: This parameter is relevant when operating with ARB. If you load a file and select
the signal source ARB, R&S DigIConf indicates the file name. For standard communica-
tion signals, the field is hidden.
R&S DigIConf loads waveforms calculated by simulation software such as Matlab or R&S
WinIQSIM2 into the memory of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. With the aid of the CPRI breakout
board, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX then embeds the signal into the CPRI protocol.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:FILE? on page 338
Frame Data
Sets the user defined pattern of the frame.
Note: The parameter applies to the physical source "Static Frame".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SFRame<st>:DATA on page 332
Sample Rate
Shows the sample rate. If you process user defined signals, you can set the value.
Note: Consider that the sampling rate of the R&S signal generator fits to the sampling
rate of R&S DigIConf, as well as to the sampling rate of the R&S signal analyzer.
The table shows the predefined sample rates of the available signals. The sample rate
of a digital standard varies corresponding to the frequency.
Table 7-5: Sample rate values, depending on the signal type
Standard Frequency variant Sample Rate
GSM/EDGE 270.8333 kHz
3GPP FDD 3.84 MHz
CDMA 2000 1.228 MHz
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 176

CPRI
LTE 1.4 MHz 1.92 MHz
3.0 MHz 3.84 MHz
5.0 MHz 7.68 MHz
10.0 MHz 15.36 MHz
15.0 MHz 23.04 MHz
20.0 MHz 30.72 MHz
WiMAX 3.5 MHz 4.0 MHz
5.0 MHz 5.6 MHz
7.0 MHz 8.0 MHz
8.75 MHz 10.0 MHz
10.0 MHz 11.2 MHz
Static Frame 3.84 MHz
Sync Pattern 3.84 MHz
PRBS 3.84 MHz
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:SRATe on page 349
Pattern Length
Define the length of the pattern used by the internal pattern generator.
Note: The parameter applies to the physical source "Sync Pattern" and the PRBS
sequence length.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:PLENgth on page 348
Oversampling
Determine the oversampling factor.
Values: 1 | 2 | 4
Note: Oversampling refers to external signals, like digital standards or to user defined
signals. If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working with an internal signal, that is generated by a
pattern or a waveform file, the parameter is already considered and therefore not relevant.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:OSAMpling on page 348
Show/Hide Signal Details

Shows/hides a section with additional parameters for more detailed signal definition.
Numeric format
Select a numeric representation for data transmission.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 177

CPRI
"2's Complement"
Format the signal in two's-complement.
The most significant bit has a value of -2–1, the bits of lesser significance
follow as:
+2–2...+20
"Binary Offset" Format the data in binary offset.
A binary offset of -2–1 is added such that the final values are always
positive.
Example:
n = 4 → -8 ≤ z < 8
Table 7-6: CPRI > Numeric format coding
-8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-7 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
-6 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
-5 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
-4 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
-3 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
-2 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
-1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 178

CPRI
"2's Complement 9E2"

Format the signal in two's-complement variant 9E2.
9E2 encoding format is used in mobile base stations to extend the
dynamic range of I and Q, while reducing the needed amount of bits.
The coding is 9E2 with 9 bits mantissa and 2 bits exponent, that are
shared from I and Q, as shown in the figure:
I mantissa
I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9
Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9
Common Q mantissa
exponent
Fig. 7-69: 2's complement 9E2
The I and Q samples of the 2's complement 9E2 are calculated with the
formulas:
I sample 10 bits = 9 bits mantissa + 1 bit, bit_0 exponent
 7  
I     2i  I i 1   28  I 9   22Q0 I 0 
  
  i 0  
Q sample 10 bits: 9 bits Q mantissa + 1 bit, bit_1 exponent
 7  
Q     2i Qi 1   28 Q 9   22Q0 I 0 
  
  i 0  
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NFORmat on page 346
I/Q Resolution
Set the I/Q resolution in bits. The resolution is valid for both, the I and the Q values. I.e,
if you set the resolution to 16 bits, the sample rate is 32 bits wide, composed of 16-bit I
and 16-bit Q.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:IQResolution on page 345
Gain
Set a gain value for the I/Q signal. Positive values lead to a digital signal amplification,
and negative values correspond to a digital signal attenuation. A gain value of 0 dB results
in an unchanged level of the I/Q signal. By default, the value is set to 0 dB.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:GAIN on page 343
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 179

CPRI
Crest Factor
This parameter is required for the correct display of the RMS Level value.
The rms level is calculated with the formula:
RMS [dB] = Peak [dB] - Crest Factor [dB] + Gain [dB]
The crest factor must correspond to the input signal. Enter the value, for example a con-
nected baseband generator provides.
Note: Crest factor applies to external signals, like digital standards or to user defined
pattern or a waveform file, the parameter is already known must not be entered manually.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:CRESt on page 342
RMS Level
Indicates the rms level of the signal. The signal level is expressed in terms of an rms
value. It always refers to both signal components:
(SQR(I2+Q2)).
In order to get the RMS value correctly, the Crest Factor of the signal must be entered.
Note: The RMS level refers to external signals, like digital standard or user defined sig-
nals. If the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working with an internal signal, that is generated by a
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:RMS? on page 348
Response: -10 dbFS
AxC Allocation
Define how to allocate the AxCs to the signal. R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the
AxCs to a signal, and this parameter specifies the method.
"Packed" The AxCs allocate a continuous area inside the CPRI basic frame. Word
address and offset address of the first AxC define the starting position.
If possible, the following AxCs are placed successively. The signal
AxCs are automatically laid in a free area of the CPRI frame. If there is
not enough free space, the signal AxCs are placed at the beginning of
the base frame, at the position of word 1.
"Flexible" Manually assign the position of the AxCs by word address and offset
address.
Tip: Use this setting, to embed each sample of a signal individually
within the CPRI basic frame.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:ALLocation
on page 339
AxC(s) / Data Rate

Indicates the needed number of AxCs and the required data rate.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 180

CPRI
Depending on the sample rate, a signal needs one or more AxCs to carry its I/Q data. If
possible, R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the number of needed AxCs to the signal.
Note: The maximum number of AxCs for all signals is 24.
The needed number of AxCs is calculated with the formula:
 Sample Rate  Oversampling 

AxCsneeded  ceil  
 3.84MHz 
The data rate is calculated with the formula:
Data Rateneeded Mbit / s  SampleRate  Oversampling  2  I / Q Re solution
Note: For signal source "Pattern" the needed number of AxCs is 1.

Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:NEEDed?
on page 340
(Assigned)
Displays the assigned number of AxCs and the assigned data rate. The assigned data
rate depends on the signal group settings, that means on the repetition rate and the
number of active AxCs per group.
The assigned data rate is calculated with the formula:
 AssignedAx Cs  OnTime 
Data Rateassigned Mbit / s  3.84MHz  2  I / Q Re solution  
 OnTime  OffTime 
Note: In case of "Sync Pattern" signals, the assigned data rate depends on the pattern
length and the sample rate. It is calculated by the sample rate as shown:
Data Rateassigned  Sample Rate  Pattern Length
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:ASSign?
on page 339
Status LED
In case of mismatch between the assigned data rate and the required data rate, the LED
turns red. Blue indicates that the data rates fit.
Note: Deviations in data rates!. Refer to the example under chapter 7.2.9.2, "AxC Con-
tainer Definition", on page 186, on what to do if the status LED turns red.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:STATus?
on page 341
Show/Hide Group Details

Shows/hides the section with the parameters for group definition.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 181

CPRI
Number of Groups
Determine the number of groups for a signal. The grouping enables to achieve arbitrary
sample rates that are not necessarily integer multiples of the CPRI basic frame rate. Each
group defines an AxC configuration for a certain time (means repetitions). Thus you can
change the AxC assignment over time by using more than one group with different set-
tings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup:COUNt on page 344
Auto
Automatically calculates the recommended scheduling sequences.
According to the standard, the following relations are taken as calculation basis:
LCM  ( fS , fC )
K
fS
 N S 
NC  ceil  A 
 K 
NV  NC  K  N A  S
LCM  ( fS , fC )
S
fC
LCM = Last Common Multiple

NA = 1
NV = Number of stuffing samples to match the CPRI frame rate of 3.84 MHz
S = Number of active samples
fs = sample rate of digital standard
fC = CPRI basic frame rate (3.84 MHz)
The standard recommends the following settings for listed digital standards:
Table 7-7: IEEE 802.16 (WiMAXTM: recommended number NV of stuffing samples for NA=1, NA=2
fs [MHz] NA S K NC NV= NC*K- NA*S
4.0 1 25 24 2 23
5.6 1 35 24 2 13
8.0 1 25 12 3 11
10.0 1 125 48 3 19
11.2 1 35 12 3 1
22.4 1 35 6 6 1
4.0 2 25 24 3 22
5.6 2 35 24 3 2
8.0 2 25 12 5 10
10.0 2 125 48 6 38
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 182

CPRI
11.2 2 35 12 6 2
22.4 2 35 6 12 2
Table 7-8: EUTRA/LTE: recommended number NV of stuffing samples for NA=1, NA=2
1.92 1 1 2 1 1
3.84 1 1 1 1 0
7.68 1 2 1 2 0
15.36 1 4 1 4 0
23.04 1 6 1 6 0
30.72 1 8 1 8 0
1.92 2 1 2 1 0
Table 7-9: GSM/EDGE: recommended number NV of stuffing samples
1625/6 1 325 4608 1 4283
1625/6 8 325 4608 1 2008
1625/6 14 325 4608 1 58
325 1 65 768 1 703
325 6 65 768 1 378
325 11 65 768 1 53
960 1 1 4 1 3
960 4 1 4 1 0
1625 1 325 768 1 443
1625 2 325 768 1 118
3250 1 325 384 1 59
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce:GROup:CALC on page 344
Groups Table
Set the AxC group settings. The displayed columns correspond to the groups, as dis-
played in the table header. The following rows indicate group repetition and state or pat-
tern of the assigned physical source.
Note: The groups settings apply to a single physical source, which can be switched "On"
for a number of basic frames and switched "Off" for another period of frames. If more
than one signal uses the same physical source, the group settings for the fractional "ON/
Off" transmission apply to all signals using this physical source.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 183

CPRI
"G #0 ... G #3" Displays a column for each determined group. The maximum number
of groups is 4. In remote control, the group is addressed in the repetition
command, see below.
"Repetition" Enter the number of repetitions, that means how many CPRI basic
frames follow the current group setting.
"State" Indicates the status of the respective physical source. By default, all
sources are "On". Click the desired field or press the enter key to switch
between On and Off.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 184

CPRI
"Pattern" Shows the binary data pattern of an AxC in hexadecimal format. By

default, all data pattern is set to zero. Click a field or press the
ENTER key to insert the required pattern. You can basically set up to
36 bits, but the currently possible number depends on the signal length
that is specified in Pattern Length.
Note: Pattern is displayed when you are working with "Sync Pattern"
signals.
Example:
The following example explains the need of the CPRI group definition:
Let us assume we want to transmit an I/Q signal over the CPRI link with
a sampling rate of 5.76 MS/s. The CPRI basic frame rate amounts the
defined 3.84 MHz.
This means, if we assign one AxC per basic frame, we have the sample
rate of 3.84 MS/s. If we assign two AxCs, we get a sample rate of
7.68 MS/s.
Note: An AxC is a container for one I/Q sample.
But, for the required sample rate of 5.76 MS/s, we would need 1.5 AxCs
per basic frame.
How can we reach that?
● We allocate 2 AxCs in the AxC container definition which corre-

sponds to: ceiling = 1.5. For example, we use "AxC0" and "AxC1".
● In the "Number of Groups" entry field, we define two groups.
● Then, in the groups table, we define:
– G#0: Repetition = 3, State = On
– G#1: Repetition = 1, State = Off
With these settings, we transmit 2 samples (G#0) for one basic frame,
and only 1 sample (G#1) for the following.
Now we have achieved the required average sample rate of 5.76 MS/
s.
Tip: By changing the repetition in combination with the AxC states, you
can achieve almost any sample rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:REPetition
on page 345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:STATe
on page 345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:GROup<user0>:PATTern on page 344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce:GROup:CALC on page 344
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 185

CPRI
7.2.9.2 AxC Container Definition
The AxC Container Definition section graphically displays the CPRI basic frame and
indicates the I/Q and AxC data rates. The table in the lower part contains the used AxCs
with their assigned signals, and basic signal parameters such as word address, bit
address and word size. LEDs in the last column indicate emerging conflicts between
AxCs.
CPRI Basic Frame Graph

The basic frame graph indicates the 16 words of a CPRI basic frame in a control matrix.
First the control word is shown, then the remaining words follow, carrying the I/Q data.
The data words are structured in AxCs (antenna carriers). A signal needs one or more
AxCs for carrying the I/Q data, depending on the sample rate.
The word length depends on the CPRI line bit rate parameter. This parameter defines
the number of bits transferred per second over the CPRI communication link, including
control and I/Q data.
The following table shows the word length related to the bit rate.
Table 7-10: CPRI Line bit rate vs. Word length
Line bit rate [Mbit/s] Word length [bits] [Bytes]
1x (614.4) 8 1
2x (1228.8) 16 2
4x (2457.6) 32 4
5x (3072.0) 40 5
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 186

CPRI
Line bit rate [Mbit/s] Word length [bits] [Bytes]
8x(4915.2) 64 8
10x (6414.0) 80 10
16x (9830.4) 128 16
Note: When a word consists of more than 1 byte, the graph indicates these bytes and
separates them with a hyphen.
The first word contains control information while the following words carry the AxCs, that
means the I/Q data.
R&S DigIConf shows the signals in different colors, as well as the related AxCs. Active
signals are strongly colored, while the inactive signals are shown in pale colors. If the
signals in the graph overlap, the active signals are always in the foreground. Below the
graph, a legend explains the signals and their assigned colors.
Available Data Rate (I/Q)

Displays the available data rate of the I/Q data, calculated with the formula:
Data RateavaliableMbit / s   DataWord Count  Word Lengthbit  3.84MHz

 15  Word Lengthbit  3.84MHz
Note: The word length depends on the line bit rate, as listed in "CPRI Basic Frame
Graph" on page 186.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:AVAilable? on page 337
Assigned Data Rate (AxC)

Displays the assigned I/Q data rate of all active signals. This parameter depends on the
size of each assigned AxC and is calculated with the formula:
Data Rateassigned Mbit / s   AxC _ sizeaxc  3.84MHz 
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:ASSigned? on page 336
I/Q Data Interleaving

Activates I/Q data interleaving.
The following graphs show the sample arrangement and transmission order for uplink
and downlink:
● I/Q data interleaved
Fig. 7-70: Interleaved I/Q data transmission within a CPRI link
● I/Q data non interleaved.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 187

CPRI
Fig. 7-71: Non Interleaved I/Q data transmission within a CPRI link
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:INTerleaving on page 337
AxC Table
Shows the settings of the assigned AxCs. An AxC is defined by the position inside the
CPRI basic frame and its length.
"Source" Indicates the signal the AxC is assigned to.
"Word Address"
The position of the AxC within the CPRI basic frame is defined by word
address and bit address. The word address specifies, with which word
the AxC begins, while the bit address specifies the bit index inside the
word.
"Bit Address" Specifies the starting bit inside the word.
"Size /bits" Displays the size of the AxC in bits. The size depends on the selected
signal source. With the exception of signals from the signal source Sync
Pattern, the size is calculated using the following formula:
AxC _ sizeaxc bit  I / Q Re solutionsignal  2
For Sync Pattern signals, calculate the source with the formula:
AxC _ sizeaxc bit  Pattern Lengthsignal
"Conflict" A conflict arises, when AxCs overlap. A red LED indicates the overlap-
ping with a previous AxC.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SOURce? on page 335
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:WADDress on page 336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:BADDress on page 334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SIZE? on page 335
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:CONFlict? on page 334
Start Condition
Defines the start condition for the scheduler, for data transmission and analysis.
Note:
To define a fractional scheduling scheme, consider the following:
● align the start of the scheduling scheme either to a Hyper Frame, or a Node B Frame.
● make sure that the total number of repetitions, for example "1 On"; "3 Off" is an integer
multiple of basic frames inside a Hyper Frame (256) or Node B Frame (38400).
Otherwise
● use a Sync Pattern in both, the Tx and Rx path.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 188

CPRI
"Software" Starts scheduling and data transmission/reception after a software trig-

ger.
"Ext. Trigger 1...3"
Starts the scheduling and data transmission/reception with an external
trigger signal. To supply the trigger signal use one of the GPIOs and
configure it accordingly in the "Hardware" tab.
"Basic Frame" Starts scheduling and data transmission/reception with the next Basic
Frame. This corresponds to a free running trigger.
"Hyper Frame" Aligns scheduling and data transmission/reception to the next Hyper
Frame.
"Node B Frame"
Aligns scheduling and data transmission/reception to the next Node B
Frame.
"Sync Pattern" Aligns the timing and data transmission/reception in the Rx path accord-
ing to a received sync pattern defined within a specified AxC. This trig-
ger mode requires that you have assigned "Sync Pattern" to one of the
signals.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:SOURce on page 332
Arm
Stops the data transmission, the scheduler and analysis. A subsequent trigger event
restarts the activities.
To select the trigger signal source, see Start Condition
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:APPLy on page 333
Run
Restarts data transmission, the scheduler and analysis manually.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:ARM on page 332
Apply Setup
Assign the settings in order to become effective.
If you have modified settings, and not yet confirmed, the red arrow next to the "Apply
Setup" button prompts you to confirm your settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:WARNing? on page 352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:APPLy on page 333
Example to CPRI Groups Concept

Note: Since the CPRI protocol is based on the standards of 3G and LTE, the CPRI basic
frame length uses the UTRA FDD Chip period, 1/3.84 MHz, that means the resulting data
rate amounts 3.84 MHz.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 189

CPRI
Therefore, variations in the data rate appear with all signals whose data rate do not fit in
this 3.84 MHz pattern. The reason is that for these signals, the total sampling rate per
AxC group is not an integer multiple of the CPRI basic frame rate.
CPRI has developed a special method for the adjustment. By adjusting the grouping, the
repetitions and variable allocations of the AxCs, each signal can be individually custom-
ized to this pattern. In addition, CPRI adds stuffing samples, for example, vendor specific
bits, in order to adjust the data rate to an integer multiple of the CPRI frame rate.
Example:
By means of a 10 MHz WiMAX signal, with an oversampling factor of 1 and an I/Q res-
olution of 16 Bit, the following settings present a possible solution.
In this example, the WiMAX data rate is 11.2 MHz and requires 3 AxCs for its data. Since
3.84 MHz does not fit into 11.2 MHz, change the following parameters:
● Increase the number of groups to 2.
● Enter 35 repetitions for Group "G #0", and 1 for "G #1".
● Allocate all the AxCs of the first group consecutively, and from the second group only
AxC0 and AxC1.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 190

CPRI
The graph in the AxC Container Definition shows the distribution of the data in the CPRI
frame slots.
Argument
Let us prove that using the formula:
 AssignedAx Cs  OnTime 
Data Rateassigned Mbit / s  3.84MHz  2  I / Q Re solution  
 OnTime  OffTime 
35
DataRate assigned Mbit / s  3.84MHz  2  16bit  3   358 .4Mbit / s 
36
7.2.9.3 Low Level BER Test
In section Low Level BER Test, you can check the data transmission in the Rx path of
the CPRI link, provided "Signal Output > BER Test" is set. The Bit-Error-Rate function
evaluates the bit error ratio with a defined data sequence.
Therefore, the PRBS AxCs of the uplink and downlink must be identical regarding "Pat-
tern Length" and position, defined with "Word Addr." and "Bit Addr.".
► To process the "Low Level BER" test, select "Tx Source > PRBS" , and "Rx Signal
Output > BER Test".
Depending on the Test mode, "Physical Source" on page 173 "(Tx)", and "Signal
Output" on page 174 "(Rx)" are given in the corresponding downlink and uplink tab.
The position and the length of the downlink and uplink AxCs must be identical and the
CPRI line must be looped back, e.g. in the DUT.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 191

CPRI
Example to Low Level BER Test using CPRI RE test mode
PRBS DL
DUT
UL
BER
result
Fig. 7-72: Low Level BER Test
For testing a signal execute the following steps.

1. Define a signal in the downlink tab: Select "Physical Source > PRBS" in the downlink
tab and configure the AxC parameters regarding "Pattern Length" and position by
means of adjusting the "Word and Bit address" inside the CPRI frame.
2. Define a signal in the uplink tab: Select "Signal Output > BER Test"", and set the
same values for AxC "Pattern length" and position as in the downlink tab
Note: For testing the function itself, the signals in the downlink and uplink tab must
be identical.
3. Apply the Tx and Rx settings.
4. Set the connected DUT to CPRI loopback mode.

Note: The integrated loop-back function in the CPRI breakout board provides sending
and receiving signals, without plugging in an SFP module.
5. Reset the PRBS Test, if necessary.

Note: It is recommended that you reset the "PRBS Test", after you have changed the
settings at the DUT, or unplugged external cables.
6. The function extracts received data from the uplink signal and compares it with the
expected PRBS data. The total number of received words and the calculated BER
are displayed.
The bit error rate test function embeds a known PRBS sequence in the CPRI protocol
and synchronizes the analysis on the receiver side with the received (looped) signal.
It synchronizes the data which are returned internally, compares these data with the
data being sent, and counts the bit errors. The ratio of the number of error bits to the
total number of bits is the BER-result.
Use this function to see whether the link is working properly. You can monitor the test
result continuously in the "Test & Diagnostics" tab.
Expected Results:
When you send a signal and the settings for the received signal are identical, the error
must be "0".
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 192

CPRI
Simulate an error:
1. Configure different AxC positions in uplink and downlink while in loopback mode.
2. In the uplink tab, you can see that the error rate is increasing steadily.
This shows that the box detects the shift between the signals, and can thus detect
the errors in real-world signals from the DUT and vice versa.
Rx Received Bits
Indicates the total number of received words. Low Level BER Test consecutively counts
the number of received words in order to compare them with the sent data and to deter-
mine the error rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:WORDs? on page 325
Rx BER
Displays the number of bit errors. This function consecutively counts the number of dis-
crepancies that occur during the test. The BER result is the ratio, which is calculated by
dividing the number of error bits by the total number of bits.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:RATE? on page 324
Reset
Restarts the PRBS test.
Performing a reset is recommended after changes of CPRI link parameters or external
connections, to start from a defined initial state.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRBS:RST on page 325
7.2.10 Control & Management
The Control & Management (C&M) tab comprises all settings related to the process of
exchanging control information between RE (Radio Equipment) and REC (Radio Equip-
ment Control) in base station systems. CPRI supports two different protocols for C&M
data, the slower variation HDLC (High-Level Data Link Control) and the fast Ethernet.
7.2.10.1 Slow C&M (HDLC)
The HDLC Settings section comprises the necessary parameters for activating HDLC
control and management data protocol.
In chapter chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 42, you find infor-
mation on how to connect the interface. For more information on the hardware, see the
data sheet of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, option R&S EXBOX-B85 (CPRI breakout board).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 193

CPRI
Fig. 7-73: CPRI Control & Management dialog - Slow C&M (HDLC)
R&S DigIConf provides two methods for transmitting or receiving Slow C&M Data:
1. Using the internal Terminal, you can enter text commands. With EXECUTE, the
CPRI breakout board either encodes the plain text commands in HDLC format or
transmits the raw data over the CPRI link. Then, it transmits the data over the CPRI
link.
2. Using the RS232 interface, the CPRI breakout board expects already HDLC encoded
data on the RS-232-C input. Then, it transmits the encoded data in direct mode to
the DUT. The internal encoding and decoding are deactivated. This method works
full duplex, that means encoded HDLC frames are received from the DUT and output
at the RS-232-C port. In the other direction, encoded HDLC frames are entered on
the RS-232-C and then transmitted via the slow C&M CPRI link to the DUT.
You can use this method in both test modes, the CPRI RE and the CPRI REC test mode.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 194

CPRI
State
Activate the C&M data exchange by means of HDLC protocol.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:STATe on page 297
Bit Rate
Set the bit rate for transmission of the C&M data.
"<bit rate> kbit/s "
Selects a bit rate from the available values in the list.
Note: The maximum HDLC rate for slow C&M depends on the CPRI
Line Bit Rate. The following table shows the available HDLC bit rates
for the corresponding CPRI bit rates.
Table 7-11: Possible HDLC rates of the respective line bit rates
Bit rate [Mbit/s]
1x (614.4) 240 480
2x (1228.8) 240 480 960
4x (2457.6) 240 480 960 1920
5x (3072.0) 240 480 960 1920 2400
8x (4915.2) 240 480 960 1920 2400 3840
10x (6144.0) 240 480 960 1920 2400 4800
16x (9830.4) 240 480 960 1920 2400 7680
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BRATe on page 294
Source
Select the source of the HDLC C&M data.
"Terminal" Use the integrated terminal of R&S DigIConf for C&M data input or out-
put.
"RS232" Use the RS232 interface for C&M data input or output.
Note: This method applies to both, the CPRI RE and the CPRI REC
test mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SOURce on page 296
Mode
Selects the mode for HDLC C&M data transmission.
While the RS232 interface acts as a Real Time sink and source, the "Terminal" provides
only "Snapshot functionality".
The block diagram shows the internal connections.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 195

CPRI
Fig. 7-74: CPRI Slow C&M internal connections
The "Terminal" sink periodically polls the internal receive buffer for new frames. When a
high bit rate HDLC signal is received over the CPRI link, not every new frame will be
captured and displayed.
On the transmitter side, only single commands can be send using the "Terminal" window.
The RS232 connection however acts as a Real Time interface in its speed limits. Every
received HDLC frame will be output via RS232 using the specified speed. If the received
signal has a higher bit rate than the RS232 interface, frames will be lost.
On the transmitter side the RS232 speed will always be slower than the CPRI slow C&M
bit rate so all frames will be transmitted.
"Direct" The R&S EX-IQ-BOX transmits the data directly to the DUT, that means
without internal encoding or decoding.
"HDLC EN/DE Coding"
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX either encodes the plain text data before trans-
mission to the DUT, or it decodes and then displays the incoming data.
Note: This mode applies to HDLC source "Terminal".
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:MODE on page 295
HDLC Active
The blue LED indicates that the interface is active, red accordingly shows that it is inac-
tive.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:ACTive? on page 293
Frames Sent
Indicates the number of sent HDLC frames.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SFRames? on page 296
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 196

CPRI
Frames Received
Indicates the number of received HDLC frames.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RFRames? on page 295
Terminal
The "Terminal" section contains an entry field for control commands, an EXECUTE but-
ton to process the entered commands or the command sequences, and a CLEAR button
for reset.
Note: You can execute this command only, if the number of symbols is divisible by 2.
Odd values are not accepted.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:COMMand on page 294
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:EXECute on page 295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RX? on page 296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RST on page 296
RS232 Settings
This section contains information on the RS232 interface, as:
"Data Bits" number of information units.
"Stop Bits" number of stop bits.
"Parity" even or odd number of set bits in the binary representation.
"Baudrate" number of bits that are transmitted per second.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BAUDrate on page 291
7.2.10.2 Fast C&M (Ethernet)
The Ethernet Settings section comprises the necessary parameters for activating fast
control and management data exchange via the Ethernet interface.
In chapter chapter 4.5, "Connecting the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 42, you find infor-
mation on how to connect the interface. For more information on the hardware, see the
data sheet of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, option R&S EXBOX-B85 (CPRI breakout board).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 197

CPRI
Fig. 7-75: CPRI Control & Management dialog - Fast C&M (Ethernet)
R&S DigIConf provides the following setup for transmitting or receiving Fast C&M Data:
By using the fast C&M option, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX tunnels the Ethernet protocol over
CPRI. The Ethernet port on the breakout board therefore refers to the Ethernet port of
the DUT. The Ethernet settings of the DUT are forwarded to the connector of the breakout
board. If the DUT uses IP (Internet Protocol), you can access the DUT directly with its IP
address via the Ethernet connector on the breakout board.
In CPRI RE test mode, R&S DigIConf also provides an integrated Telnet console for fast
C&M. However, this console requires that the DUT offers a telnet server on its Fast C&M
port.
State
Activate the C&M data exchange via the Ethernet interface.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:STATe on page 293
Pref. Eth. Pointer

Set the CPRI Ethernet pointer. This setting determines the Fast C&M bit rate, since this
pointer represents the boundary between vendor data and Fast C&M Data in the CPRI
control block. See also chapter 7.2.2, "CPRI Transmission Protocol - Overview",
on page 129.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PPTR on page 292
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 198

CPRI
Ethernet Pointer
1x (614.4) 8 0.48 21.12
2x (1228.8) 16 0.96 42.24
4x (2457.6) 32 1.92 84.48
5x (3072.0) 40 2.40 105.60
8x (4915.2) 64 3.84 168.96
10x (6144.0) 80 4.80 211.20
16x (9830.4) 128 7.86 337.92
Remote command:
Ethernet Active
The LED indicates red, if the interface is inactive. Blue indicates that the Ethernet data
transfer is active.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:ACTive? on page 291
Bit Rate
Displays the resulting bit rate of fast C&M data exchange. This bit rate depends on the
CPRI line bit rate and the Ethernet pointer.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:BRATe? on page 291
Host
Enter the IP Address of the DUT.
Note: This functionality refers to the integrated telnet client and applies only to CPRI RE
test mode.
Port
TCP port address for the access to the Telnet server of the DUT.
test mode.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 199

CPRI
Login / Password
If a specific user name and password are requested for login, enter the user name in this
field, and the password in the field right beside.
test mode.
Connect
Set up the Telnet connection. On the right of the connect button, R&S DigIConf indicates
the current status of the connection.
test mode.
Input Window, Command line, Execute

The lower part of the fast C&M tab provides an entry field to enter control commands
manually. The commands are displayed in the input window above. EXECUTE executes
the command, or the command sequence.
test mode.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:COMMand on page 292
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:EXECute on page 292
Clear
Erases the entries and the input window.
Remote command:
n.a.
Logout
Logs off the session.
Remote command:
n.a.
7.2.11 Vendor Data
The Vendor Data tab provides the input of user-specific information, like for example
additional control data. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX then transmits the data embedded in the
CPRI protocol.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 200

CPRI
Fig. 7-76: CPRI Vendor Data dialog
State
Activate the vendor data exchange.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:STATe on page 353
Direction
Select the transmission path of the data shown in the "Vendor Data Table"
on page 203.
"Downlink" ● CPRI RE test mode (Tx)
User data entered in the table is embedded in the CPRI link for
transmission to the DUT.
● CPRI REC test mode (Rx)
Vendor data is extracted from the CPRI link and displayed in the
table.
"Uplink" ● CPRI RE test mode (Rx)
Vendor data is extracted from the CPRI link and displayed in the
table.
● CPRI REC test mode (Tx)
User data entered in the table is embedded in the CPRI link for
transmission to the DUT.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DIRection on page 353
Line Bit Rate

Indicates the line bit rate. Depending on the line bit rate, the vendor data words can be
2, 4 or 5 bytes wide.
Note: Set the bit rate in the hardware tab, under "CPRI Line Bit Rate" on page 157. The
bit rate and thus the word length is determined by the DUT.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBRate on page 305
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 201

CPRI
Word Width
Indicates the word width. The word width depends on the CPRI line bit rate.
The following table shows the word width related to the line bit rate.
Table 7-12: Word width related to the line bit rate
Line bit rate [Mbit/s] Word width [bits]
1x (614.4) 8
2x (1228.8) 16
4x (2457.6) 32
5x (3072.0) 40
8x (4915.2) 64
10x (6144.0) 80
16x (9830.4) 128
Note: By determining the line bit rate, the DUT also defines the word width. See also
"CPRI Line Bit Rate" on page 157.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:WWIDth? on page 353
Ethernet Pointer
1x (614.4) 8 0.48 21.12
2x (1228.8) 16 0.96 42.24
4x (2457.6) 32 1.92 84.48
5x (3072.0) 40 2.40 105.60
8x (4915.2) 64 3.84 168.96
10x (6144.0) 80 4.80 211.20
16x (9830.4) 128 7.86 337.92
Remote command:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 202

CPRI
Vendor Data Table

For CPRI RE downlink or CPRI REC uplink, you can determine vendor-specific data for
transmission. In receive direction, that means in uplink for CPRI RE and downlink for
CPRI REC test modes, the table shows the received vendor specific data, and switches
into read-only mode.
Find additional information on vendor data exchange in the CPRI specification.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DATA<ch> on page 352
7.2.12 Diagnostics
The "Diagnostics" tab comprises information about the optical transceiver modules.
Fig. 7-77: CPRI Diagnostics dialog (1409.7208.02)
Fig. 7-78: CPRI Diagnostics dialog (1409.7208.04)
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 203

CPRI
7.2.12.1 SFP Diagnostics
Sections SFP1/SFP2 Diagnostics indicate the most important parameters of the SFP
transceiver modules.

● 1409.7208.02 covers two SFP cages.
● 1409.7208.04 has a single SFP cage.
SFP Diagnostics
Contains information on the SFP modules and their characteristics.
Note: The CPRI breakout board (1409.7208.02) covers two SFP cages, while the variant
(1409.7208.04) has a single SFP cage.
"Vendor" Displays the vendor name of the SFP module.
"Part Number" Displays the vendor part number of the SFP module.
"Connector" Displays the connector type of the plugged-in SFP module, like LC for
a typical fiber connection.
"Bit Rate" Displays the maximum supported bitrate of SFP module.
"Wave Length" Displays the wavelength of the plugged-in Laser SFP module for optical
data transmission.
"Vcc" Displays the measured value of the power supply at the SFP interface
in Volts.
"Tx/Rx power" Shows the current values of the transmitted (Tx) and the received (Rx)
optical power.
"Temperature" Displays the current operating temperature of the SFP module.
"Warnings" Displays various warnings in the case of high or low measured values
of Vcc, Tx/Rx power and temperature.
"Alarms" Displays several module alarms, that is if one or more of the Vcc, Tx/
Rx power or temperature values are out of the permitted value range.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:INFO? on page 327
SFP LEDs
The LEDs in sections SFP 1 and 2 indicate the states at the SFP interfaces. The LEDs
must be blue. Red LEDs indicate errors.
"Tx Disabled" Indicates, if the interface of the breakout board and the SFP transmis-
sion line is disabled.
"Tx Fault" Indicates when a transmission error occurs. If the SFP is disconnected,
R&S DigIConf displays "Not Available".
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 204

CPRI
"Loss of Signal" Indicates that data communication failed and the signal is lost.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:DISabled? on page 328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:FAULt? on page 328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:LOS? on page 327
7.2.13 ARB
The "ARB Sources" section displays all fields that are relevant for loading a waveform
file in the waveform memory of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Fig. 7-79: CPRI ARB dialog
Instead of a signal generator as signal source, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX creates the signal
from a waveform file and embeds it in the CPRI protocol. The ARB functionality applies
to the transmission mode, when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is sending to the DUT, that means
in CPRI RE test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX sends in the downlink, and in CPRI REC
test mode in the uplink.
Conversely, for operating in receiver mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX provides a recording
memory. The signal data, coming from the DUT can be recorded over a period of time
and then saved in a file, see chapter 7.2.14, "Recorder", on page 207.
Waveform Memory and Recording Memory require that the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped
with the respective options. For information on available options refer to chapter 3.2.2.3,
"Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory ", on page 23.
File
Open an explorer dialog for loading a waveform file.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 205

CPRI
The recent data sets directory shows the files last used.
Select the directory where waveform files are stored. The available waveform files, iden-
tifiable by the file extension *.wv are shown.
The "Select" button loads the marked file and returns to the "ARB" dialog. The "ARB
Sources" table indicates the file name and its path, that means the directory where the
file is stored.
Note: The FILE MANAGER button leads to a dialog used to copy, delete and rename
files, and to create new directories.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:FILE on page 289
Option(s)
If the wave form file is provided by R&S WinIQSIM2, and is based on a digital standard,
R&S DigIConf indicates the name of the option, like EXBOX-K242, which represents the
3GPP-FDD-Standard. "None" indicates that the loaded waveform file was created with
another software, or does not base on a digital standard signal.
Note: Find the list of supported R&S options in chapter chapter 3.2.2.4, "Digital Standards
with R&S WinIQSIM2", on page 23.
Remote command:
Installed options: [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:OPT on page 250
Sample Rate /MHz

Displays the sample rate of the signal, loaded from the waveform memory. The sample
rate represents the number of samples per second that are used for digitizing.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SRATe? on page 290
Samples
Indicates the number of samples the loaded signal is composed of.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:SAMPles:TOTal? on page 288
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 206

CPRI
Level dBFS
Displays the signal level in terms of an rms value, in dBFS (Full Scale ratio).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RMS? on page 288
PEP dBFS
Displays the signal level in terms of a peak envelope power value (PEP). The unit of the
peak envelope power is dBFS (Full Scale ratio).
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PEAK? on page 287
State
Activate, that the signal from the ARB waveform file can be used in the CPRI link.
In order to activate signal transmission, assign the signal to the signal source of the CPRI
downlink, as described in "Physical Source" on page 173. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX then
embeds the signal into the CPRI protocol.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:STATe on page 290
Options Conflict
A conflict arises, if a waveform requires an option, that is not installed on the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX, or is not enabled. A red LED indicates the conflict.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:CONFlict? on page 289
Reset
Erases the ARB table, that means all loaded waveform files and their settings.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PRESet on page 288
Reload
Update the waveform file in R&S DigIConf, in case waveform data have changed. Reload
updates all currently assigned files.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RELoad on page 288
Total Samples
Indicates the total number of samples, added up from all active ARB files.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:SAMPles:TOTal? on page 288
7.2.14 Recorder
The Recorder dialog covers the parameters relevant for recording an I/Q signal and
storing the data in a waveform file.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 207

CPRI
Fig. 7-80: CPRI Recorder dialog
Two recorders are available for the recording of incoming signals. In all both provide
512 MB memory. As a sample takes up 4 bytes of storage, the available recording length
is up to 128 MS.
In order to use the maximum record length, the 128 MS can be fully used by one recorder.
Alternatively, the two recorders share the memory space, as for example, each uses
64 MS.
The recording memory provides a predefined resolution of 16 bits, each for I and Q. That
means the recorded I/Q data use always 16 bits in memory, regardless of the resolution
of the source.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX extracts the I/Q baseband signal of the CPRI protocol, records it
over a period of time and provides storing the recorded data in a waveform file.
The recorder function applies to receiver mode, when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is receiving
a signal from the DUT. That means, it is possible to record an uplink signal of the CPRI
RE test mode or a downlink signal of the CPRI REC test mode.
Conversely, for operating as transmitter, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX provides a waveform
memory, see chapter 7.2.13, "ARB", on page 205. Stored signal data can be replayed
and then sent to the DUT.
Waveform Memory and Recording Memory are provided, when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is
equipped with the respective options. For information on available options refer to chap-
ter 3.2.2.3, "Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback and Recording Memory ",
on page 23.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 208

CPRI
The I/Q signal data are stored in the R&S waveform format (.wv), the same format as
used in the ARB.
The stored waveforms can be used customer-specific, or replayed in the ARB of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Use this function for post-processing the signals offline.
Data Source
Select the signal source. All Rx signals are available. In order to record a signal, the signal
must be selected and activated in the respective Rx. Either the uplink signal in CPRI RE
test mode, or the downlink signal of the CPRI REC test mode are possible.
Assign a signal and turn it on with Signal State
The LED next to "Data Source" must be blue. It indicates that the selected signal is active.
Otherwise recording cannot be started.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce:CATalog?
on page 317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce on page 317
Recording Length
Set the length of data trace in samples.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RLENgth on page 319
Trigger Source
Select the trigger source for starting the recording. A trigger event can be initiated by the
software itself or by hardware events.
"Software" Starts the recording immediately after the RECORD button is pressed.
No other event is necessary.
"External Trigger 1...3"
Starts recording with an external trigger event.
External trigger events are generated by the hardware and fed via the
CPRI communication link or at the GENERAL PURPOSE IO interface.
"Tx/Rx Hyper Frame"
Starts recording after a Tx/Rx Hyper frame is received.
"Tx/Rx NodeB Frame"
Starts recording after a Tx/Rx NodeB frame is received.
"Sync Pattern" Starts recording after a specific Sync Pattern is received.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:SOURce on page 321
Trigger Position
Determine the position of the trigger event on the waveform. The position provides to
realize a pre-trigger recording, as well as a post-trigger recording. The value is set in
samples from 0 to "Recording Length"-1.
● Post-trigger, that means position 0 at the beginning of the waveform enables you to
evaluate the signal after the trigger event.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 209

CPRI
● Pre-trigger, the trigger position at the end of the waveform provides the evaluation
of the signal before the trigger event.
The trigger position is graphically displayed on the right.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:POSition on page 320
Sample Rate
Indicates the sample rate of the signal to be recorded.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SRATe? on page 317
Recording Time
Indicates the duration of recording. The recording time results from the recording length
and the sample rate.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RTIMe? on page 319
Recorder Status Diagram
Displays graphically the current process step of the recording.

"Idle" The recording process is inactive. Configure the recorder in that state.
The recorder remains in Idle state until you start with the "Record" but-
ton.
"Free Run" The recorder records the signal continuously in a ring memory. These
data are required for pre-trigger analyzes.
"Ready" Recording passed through the ring memory once at least, and thus
described the memory completely. At this point the data is valid and
R&S DigIConf activates the trigger signal automatically.
"Wait for Trigger"
The recorder continues recording until the trigger event occurs. Then
the process switches to the next state.
Note: If trigger source "Software" is used, the trigger event occurs
immediately.
"Triggered" After the trigger event, only the remaining samples after the trigger
position are recorded (post-trigger data).
"Record Done" If all post-trigger data are recorded, the recording is completed and the
recorder stops. All data are available in memory.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATus? on page 320
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 210

CPRI
Record
Starts the recording.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:EXECute on page 318
Abort / Discard
Stops and cancels the recording. You can abort the recording process at any time.
After recording "Record Done", the ABORT button label changes to DISCARD.
Note: Avoid data loss!. Discard erases the recorder memory. In order to keep the data,
save it first by pressing TARGET FILE....
DISCARD changes the recording status from "Record Done" back to "Idle" and is ready
for a new recording.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:ABORt on page 317
Save to File
Save the data in a file.
Note: CPRI stores the recorded data in the R&S WinIQSim2 waveform file format with
the predefined file extension *.wv. By default, waveform files are stored in the directory
%Program Files%/Rohde-Schwarz/DigIConf/Settings, unless another directory is
selected. File name and the directory are user-selectable.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:CREate on page 318
Save
Open a file dialog to select directory and file name for storing the recorded data.
Fig. 7-81: CPRI Recorder > File dialog
The "Recent Files" directory shows the files last used. Select the directory where recorded
files are stored. The available files, identifiable by the file extension *.wv are shown. The
"Select" button loads the marked file and returns to the "Recorder" settings dialog.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 211

CPRI
The "File Manager" button leads to a dialog used to copy, delete and rename files, and
to create new directories.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:SELect on page 318
View
Calls the ARB toolbox, a viewer program to dislay the loaded IQ data stream.
Remote command:
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:VIEW on page 321
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 212

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Remote Control Basics
Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols
8 Remote Control Basics

This chapter provides basic information on operating R&S DigIConf via remote control.
Information on used term for R&S DigIConf

Throughout this description, the term “instrument” is used to indicate R&S DigIConf; the
terms “instrument”, “software” and R&S DigIConf are used interchangeably.
8.1 Remote Control Interfaces and Protocols

R&S DigIConf supports a LAN (Local Area Network) interface for remote control, using
socket communication protocol, i.e. Raw Socket (simple telnet). The interface is based
on TCP/IP with VISA resource string composed of:
TCPIP::<ipaddr>::<port>::SOCKET
No VISA installation is necessary to remote control while using socket communication.
For a description of the protocol refer to chapter 8.1.2, "LAN interface", on page 214.
SCPI (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments)

SCPI commands - messages - are used for remote control. Commands that are not taken
from the SCPI standard follow the SCPI syntax rules. R&S DigIConf supports the SCPI
version 1999. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the
standardization of device-specific commands, error handling and the status registers.
The tutorial "Automatic Measurement Control - A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488.2" from
John M. Pieper (R&S order number 0002.3536.00) offers detailed information on con-
cepts and definitions of SCPI.
Tables provide a fast overview of the bit assignment in the status registers. The tables
are supplemented by a comprehensive description of the status registers.
8.1.1 Messages
There are different types of instrument messages, depending on the direction they are
sent:
● Commands
● Responses
Structure and syntax of messages are described in chapter 8.2, "SCPI Command Struc-
ture", on page 222. A detailed description of all messages available for R&S DigIConf is
provided in chapter 9, "Remote Control Commands", on page 236.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 213

Commands
Commands (program messages) are messages the controller sends to R&S DigIConf.
They operate functions and request information.
The commands are subdivided according to two criteria:
● According to the effect they have on the instrument:
– Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument
or setting the frequency.
– Queries cause data to be provided for remote control, e.g. for identification of the
instrument or polling a parameter value. Queries are formed by directly appending
a question mark to the command header.
● According to their definition in standards:
– Common commands: their function and syntax are precisely defined in standard
IEEE 488.2. They are employed identically on all instruments (if implemented).
They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers,
reset and self test.
– Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of
the instrument such as frequency settings. Many of these commands have also
been standardized by the SCPI committee. These commands are marked as
"SCPI compliant" in the command reference chapters. Commands without this
SCPI label are device-specific, however, their syntax follows SCPI rules as per-
mitted by the standard.
Instrument responses
Instrument responses (response messages and service requests) are messages the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX sends to the controller after a query. They can contain measurement
results, instrument settings and information on the instrument status.
8.1.2 LAN interface
For remote control via a network, the controller and the PC on that the R&S DigIConf is
installed (if not the same) must be connected via the LAN interface to a common network
with TCP/IP network protocol. They are connected using a commercial RJ-45 cable.
Software for remote control must be installed on the controller.
IP address
Only the IP address or the computer name (LAN device name) is required to set up the
connection. The IP address/computer name is part of the "visa resource string" used by
the programs to identify and control the instrument. The visa resource string has the form:
TCPIP::host address::[LAN device name]::[SOCKET], where:
● TCPIP designates the network protoccol
● host address is the IP address
● LAN device name is the computer name of the control device (alternative to IP
address)
● SOCKET indicates that the socket protocol is used
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 214

In case the R&S DigIConf and the controller are installed on the same PC, the IP address
127.0.0.1 or Local Host is used. Hence the valid visa resource string is:
TCPIP::127.0.0.1::INSTR
Identifying instruments in a network

If several instruments are connected in a network, each instrument has its own IP address
and associated resource string. The controller identifies these instruments by means of
the resource string.
Socket communication
An alternative way for remote control of the software is to establish a simple network
communication using sockets. The socket communication, also referred as “Raw Ether-
net communication” or "Raw socket", does not require a VISA installation on the remote
controller side. Connection can also be performed with "Win Socket" communication.
An alternative way to establish a socket communication is to use a build-in telnet program.

The telnet program is part of every operating system and supports a communication with
the software on a command-by-command basis. For better utilization and to enable auto-
mation by means of programs, user defined sockets can be programmed.
Socket connections are established on a specially defined port. The socket address is a
combination of the IP address or the host name of the instrument and the number of the
port configured for remote-control. R&S DigIConf uses port number 5026 for this purpose
by default, but can be set. The port is configured for communication on a command-to-
command basis and for remote control from a program.
8.1.3 Starting a Remote Control Session
The instrument and the controller have to be connected with the suitable cable and
switched on.
A remote control program must open a connection to R&S DigIConf (using Raw socket
or VISA functionality), before it can send commands to and receive device responses
from R&S DigIConf.
Refer to chapter 8.1.5, "Examples", on page 216 for practical examples on setting up of
a remote control link and starting of a remote control session.
8.1.4 Switching to Remote Control
When it is started, the software is always in the manual operating state and can be oper-
ated via the block diagram.
Starting remote control

Send a command from a controller to the signal generation software.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 215

The software is in a remote control state as soon as it receives a command from the
controller.
8.1.5 Examples
These sections provides examples for setting up of remote control connection and start-
ing a remote control session over LAN interface.
This section assumes basic knowledge of programming and operation of the controller.
A description of the interface commands can be obtained from the relevant manuals.
8.1.5.1 Remote Control Over LAN Using Socket Protocol
Through the examples in this section, the program 'Measurement & Automation Explorer'
from National Instruments under Windows operating system is used for setting up a LAN
remote control link and starting a remote control session.
Configuring the controller
To enable the external controller to communicate with the software via TCP/IP protocol,
set up a remote control link as follow:
1. Connect the controller and the instrument to the network (network cable) and switch
them on.
2. Start the 'Measurement & Automation Control' program on the controller.
3. Select "Devices and Interfaces > Create New".
4. Select "VISA TCP/IP Resource" and confirm with "Next".
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 216

5. Choose the type of TCP/IP resource you wish to add and select "Next".
6. Enter the IP address or the host name of R&S DigIConf and select "Next".
7. Enter the alias name if required.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 217

The alias name must not be mistaken for the computer name. It is only used for
instrument identification within the program and displayed in the menu as an option
in case of an Ethernet link.
8. Confirm the settings with "Finish".
The instrument is configured and the settings are displayed in the "TCP/IP Settings"
tab.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 218

9. To test the connection, select "Validate".
A message indicates whether the link to the instrument can be set up or not.
If a connection cannot be set up, check whether the controller and the instrument are
connected to the network (network cable) and switched on. Correct spelling of the IP
address or the computer name can also be checked. For further error location, inform
the network administrator. In large networks, specification of additional addresses
may be required for link setup, e.g. gateway and subnet mask, which are known to
the network administrator.
R&S DigIConf is now registered in the program and can be addressed via the
resource string or alias name.
Starting a remote control over LAN
1. Start the 'Measurement & Automation Explorer' on the controller.
2. In the "Configuration" window, select "Device and Interfaces > VISA TCP/IP Resour-
ces", select the required instrument and select "Open VISA Test Panel".
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 219

3. In the "viWrite" tab, write the command to be send to the instrument and select "Exe-
cute".
Instrument responses are displayed on the "viRead" tab.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 220

For further program operation refer to the online help of the program.
Setting up a Telnet Connection

This chapter provides an example on how to establish a remote control connection over
telnet protocol and a simple sockets-based program example that can be further devel-
oped.
To control the software, only a telnet program is required. The telnet program is part of
every operating system.
1. To establish a Telnet connection with R&S DigIConf, start the telnet program and
enter the socket address.
The socket address is a combination of the IP address or the host name of the R&S
DigIConf and the number of the port configured for remote-control via telnet.
Tip:
R&S DigIConf uses the port number 5026 for remote connection via Telnet.
The connection to the instrument is set up and remote-control commands can be

sent.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 221

SCPI Command Structure
2. Even if the cursor is not visible on the screen, enter blind a remote-control command
and confirm with Enter.
After the first remote-control command had been send, R&S DigIConf is in remote-
controlled state.
Instrument response is displayed after the command has been sent.
8.2 SCPI Command Structure

SCPI commands consist of a so-called header and, in most cases, one or more param-
eters. The header and the parameters are separated by a "white space" (ASCII code 0
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 222

to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank). The headers may consist of several mnemonics (key-
words). Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header.
The commands can be either device-specific or device-independent (common com-
mands). Common and device-specific commands differ in their syntax.
Restrictions in the use of SCPI commands in R&S DigIConf

R&S DigIConf does not support the entire functionality of the SCPI commands. Note the
following restrictions:
● 2 commands entered in a row are not provided (usually divided by a semicolon)
● only a limited subset of Common Commands is available
● no status reporting system
8.2.1 Syntax for Common Commands
Common (=device-independent) commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk

(*) and possibly one or more parameters.
Example:
*RST RESET Resets the instrument.
*IDN? IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification string.
*OPT? OPTION IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the options included in the instru-
ment.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 223

8.2.2 Syntax of Device-Specific Commands
Optional note heading

Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the
instrument.
For demonstration purposes only, assume the existence of the following commands for
this section:
● DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
● FORMat:READings:DATA <type>[,<length>]
● HardCOPy:DEVice:COLor <Boolean>
● HardCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
● HardCOPy[:IMMediate]
● HardCOPy:ITEM:ALL
● HardCOPy:ITEM:LABel <string>
● HardCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
● HardCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
● HardCOPy:PAGE:SCALe <numeric value>
● MMEMory:COPY <file_source>,<file_destination>
● SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
● SENSe:FREQuency:STOP <numeric value>
● SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
Long and short form

The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form. The short form is marked by upper
case letters, the long form corresponds to the complete word. Either the short form or the
long form can be entered; other abbreviations are not permitted.
Example:
HardCOPy:DEVice:COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP:DEV:COL ON
Case sensitivity
Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the man-
ual, the instrument itself is case-insensitive.
Numeric suffixes
If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object, e.g. specific channels or
sources, the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command.
Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets (<1...4>, <n>, <i>) and are replaced
by a single value in the command. Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the
suffix 1.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 224

Example:
Definition: HardCOPy:PAGE:DIMensions:QUADrant[<N>]
Command: HCOP:PAGE:DIM:QUAD2
This command refers to the quadrant 2.
Different numbering in remote control

For remote control, the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection
used in manual operation. SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1. Suffix 1 is
the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified.
Some standards define a fixed numbering, starting with 0. With GSM, for instance, slots
are counted from 0 to 7. In remote control, the slots are selected using the suffixes 1 to
8. If the numbering differs in manual operation and remote control, it is indicated for the
corresponding command.
Optional mnemonics
Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or
omitted. These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description. The instru-
ment must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard. Some com-
mands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics.
Example:
Definition: HardCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes

Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the
effect of the command.
Example:
Definition: DISPlay[:WINDow<1...4>]:MAXimize <Boolean>
Command: DISP:MAX ON refers to window 1.
In order to refer to a window other than 1, you must include the optional WINDow param-
eter with the suffix for the required window.
DISP:WIND2:MAX ON refers to window 2.
Parameters
Parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". If several parameters
are specified in a command, they are separated by a comma (,). For a description of the
parameter types, refer to chapter 8.2.3, "SCPI Parameters", on page 226.
Example:
Definition: HardCOPy:DEVice:CMAP:COLor:RGB <red>,<green>,<blue>
Command: HCOP:DEV:CMAP:COL:RGB 3,32,44
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 225

Special characters
| Parameters
A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of "or". The
effect of the command differs, depending on which parameter is used.
Example:
Definition: HardCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape | PORTrait
Command: HCOP:PAGE:ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation
Command: HCOP:PAGE:ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation
Mnemonics
A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands. These mnemonics
are indicated in the same line; they are separated by a vertical stroke. Only one of these mnemonics
needs to be included in the header of the command. The effect of the command is independent of
which of the mnemonics is used.
Example:
Definition: SENSE:BANDwidth|BWIDth[:RESolution] <numeric_value>
The two following commands with identical meaning can be created:
Command: SENS:BAND:RES 1
Command: SENS:BWID:RES 1
[] mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted.
Example:
Command: HardCOPy[:IMMediate]
Command: HCOP:IMM is equivalent to HCOP
{} Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times, or omitted.
Example:
Definition: SENSe:LIST:FREQuency <numeric_value>{,<numeric_value>}
The following are valid commands:
Command: SENS:LIST:FREQ 10
Command: SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20
Command: SENS:LIST:FREQ 10,20,30,40
8.2.3 SCPI Parameters
Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The param-

eters must be separated from the header by a "white space" (ASCII code 0 to 9, 11 to 32
decimal, e.g. blank).
Allowed parameters are:
● Numeric values
● Special numeric values
● Boolean parameters
● Text
● Character strings
● Block data
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 226

The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are speci-
fied in the command description.
Numeric values
Numeric values can be entered in any form, i.e. with sign, decimal point and exponent.
Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down. The mantissa
may comprise up to 255 characters, the exponent must lie inside the value range -32000
to 32000. The exponent is introduced by an "E" or "e". Entry of the exponent alone is not
allowed. In the case of physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Allowed unit prefixes
are G (giga), MA (mega), MOHM and MHZ are also allowed), K (kilo), M (milli), U (micro)
and N (nano). If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Units
For physical quantities, the unit can be entered. Allowed unit prefixes are:
● G (giga)
● MA (mega), MOHM, MHZ
● K (kilo)
● M (milli)
● U (micro)
● N (nano)
If the unit is missing, the basic unit is used.
Example:
SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5GHz = SENSe:FREQ:STOP 1.5E9
Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent. According to SCPI, this unit
is represented by the PCT string.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:SCAL 90PCT
Special numeric values

The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values. In the case of a query,
the numeric value is provided.
● MIN/MAX
● MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value.
● DEF
● DEFault denotes a preset value which has been stored in the EPROM. This value
conforms to the default setting, as it is called by the *RST command.
● UP/DOWN
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 227

● UP, DOWN increases or reduces the numeric value by one step. The step width can
be specified via an allocated step command for each parameter which can be set via
UP, DOWN.
● INF/NINF
● INFinity, Negative INFinity (NINF) represent the numeric values 9.9E37 or -9.9E37,
respectively. INF and NINF are only sent as instrument responses.
● NAN
● Not A Number (NAN) represents the value 9.91E37. NAN is only sent as a instrument
response. This value is not defined. Possible causes are the division of zero by zero,
the subtraction of infinite from infinite and the representation of missing values.
Example:
Setting command: SENSe:LIST:FREQ MAXimum
Query: SENS:LIST:FREQ?, Response: 3.5E9
Queries for special numeric values

The numeric values associated to MAXimum/MINimum/DEFault can be queried by
adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command. They must be entered following
the quotation mark.
Example:
SENSe:LIST:FREQ? MAXimum
Returns the maximum numeric value as a result.
Boolean Parameters
Boolean parameters represent two states. The "ON" state (logically true) is represented
by "ON" or a numeric value 1. The "OFF" state (logically untrue) is represented by "OFF"
or the numeric value 0. The numeric values are provided as the response for a query.
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
Text parameters
Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics, i.e. they can be entered
using a short or long form. Like any parameter, they have to be separated from the header
by a white space. In the case of a query, the short form of the text is provided.
Example:
Setting command: HardCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 228

Character strings
Strings must always be entered in quotation marks (' or ").
Example:
HCOP:ITEM:LABel "Test1" or HCOP:ITEM:LABel 'Test1'
Block data
Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data. A
command using a block data parameter has the following structure:
Example:
FORMat:READings:DATA #45168xxxxxxxx
The ASCII character # introduces the data block. The next number indicates how many
of the following digits describe the length of the data block. In the example the 4 following
digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes. The data bytes follow. During the transmission
of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted.
#0 specifies a data block of indefinite length. The use of the indefinite format requires a
NL^END message to terminate the data block. This format is useful when the length of
the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation
of the data into blocks of definite length.
8.2.3.1 Overview of Syntax Elements
The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements:
: The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line the separating semicolon
marks the uppermost command level.
; The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path.
, The comma separates several parameters of a command.
? The question mark forms a query.
* The asterisk marks a common command.
" Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it.
# The hash symbol introduces binary, octal, hexadecimal and block data.
● Binary: #B10110
● Octal: #O7612
● Hexa: #HF3A7
● Block: #21312
A "white space" (ASCII-Code 0 to 9, 11 to 32 decimal, e.g. blank) separates the header from the
parameters.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 229

8.2.3.2 Structure of a Command Line
A command line may consist of one or several commands. It is terminated by one of the
following:
● a <New Line>
● a <New Line> with EOI
● an EOI together with the last data byte
Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ";". If the next
command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon.
Example:
MMEM:COPY "Test1","MeasurementXY";:HCOP:ITEM ALL
This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the MMEM
system, the second command belongs to the HCOP system.
If the successive commands belong to the same system, having one or several levels in
common, the command line can be abbreviated. To this end, the second command after
the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels. The colon following
the semicolon must be omitted in this case.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL; HCOP:IMM
This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated
from each other by the semicolon. Both commands are part of the HCOP command sys-
tem, i.e. they have one level in common.
When abbreviating the command line, the second command begins with the level below
HCOP. The colon after the semicolon is omitted. The abbreviated form of the command
line reads as follows:
HCOP:ITEM ALL;IMM
However, a new command line always begins with the complete path.
Example:
HCOP:ITEM ALL
HCOP:IMM
8.2.3.3 Responses to Queries
A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise. It is
formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command. According to
SCPI, the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE
488.2.
● The requested parameter is transmitted without a header.
Example:
HCOP:PAGE:ORI?, Response: LAND
● Maximum values, minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a
special text parameter are returned as numeric values.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 230

Command Sequence and Synchronization
Example:
SENSe:FREQuency:STOP? MAX, Response: 3.5E9
● Numeric values are output without a unit. Physical quantities are referred to the basic
units or to the units set using the Unit command. The response 3.5E9 in the previous
example stands for 3.5 GHz.
● Truth values (Boolean values) are returned as 0 (for OFF) and 1 (for ON).
Example:
Setting command: HCOPy:DEV:COL ON
Query: HCOPy:DEV:COL?
Response: 1
● Text (character data) is returned in a short form.
Example:
Setting command: HardCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation LANDscape
Query: HCOP:PAGE:ORI?
Response: LAND
8.3 Command Sequence and Synchronization

IEEE 488.2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands:
● A sequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command
starts executing. Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as
sequential commands. Sequential commands are not implemented in the instrument,
however the execution time of most commands is so short that they act as sequential
commands when sent in different command lines.
● An overlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before
the next command starts executing. Usually, overlapping commands take longer to
process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed. If overlapping
commands do have to be executed in a defined order, e.g. in order to avoid wrong
measurement results, they must be serviced sequentially. This is called synchroni-
zation between the controller and the instrument.
Setting commands within one command line, even though they may be implemented as
sequential commands, are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been
received. In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order,
each command must be sent in a separate command line.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 231

Example:
Commands and queries in one message
The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the
queried value is not predictable.
The following commands always return the specified result:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR?
Result:
1000000000 (1 GHz)
Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI:
:FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000
The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instru-
ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator
is received. The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they
are received.
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages.
Example:
Overlapping command with *OPC
The instrument implements INITiate[:IMMediate] as an overlapped command.
Assuming that INITiate[:IMMediate] takes longer to execute than *OPC, sending
the following command sequence results in initiating a sweep and, after some time, set-
ting the OPC bit in the ESR:
INIT; *OPC
Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep:
INIT; *OPC; *CLS
However, since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes *CLS, forcing
it into the "Operation Complete Command Idle" State (OCIS), *OPC is effectively skipped.
The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another *OPC command.
Example:
Overlapped command followed by non-conflicting commands
Suppose that the instrument is switched on to provide a real time test signal that requires
some calculation time. At the same time some settings for the configuration of a different
signal are made which do not interact with the generated signal (e.g. the signal may be
used later on). The signal generation and the signal configuration are independent from
each other, so none of the following overlapped commands needs to be synchronized:
SOUR:BB:3GPP:STAT ON
SOUR:BB:GSM:FORM FSK2
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 232

8.3.1 Preventing Overlapping Execution
To prevent an overlapping execution of commands, one of the commands *OPC,

*OPC? or *WAI can be used. All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried
out after the hardware has been set. By suitable programming, the controller can be
forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur.
Command Action Programming the controller
*OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR Setting bit 0 in the ESE
after all previous commands have been exe- Setting bit 5 in the SRE
cuted.
Waiting for service request (SRQ)
*OPC? Stops command processing until 1 is Sending *OPC? directly after the command
returned. This is only the case after the Oper- whose processing should be terminated
ation Complete bit has been set in the ESR. before other commands can be executed.
This bit indicates that the previous setting has
been completed.
*WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending *WAI directly after the command
commands sent before *WAI have been exe- whose processing should be terminated
cuted. before other commands are executed.
Command synchronization using *WAI or *OPC? appended to an overlapped command

is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process. The two
synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command.
For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller
or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution. Use one
of the following methods:
*OPC with a service request
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Set bit no. 5 in the SRE: *SRE 32 to enable ESB service request.
3. Send the overlapped command with *OPC
4. Wait for a service request

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with a service request
1. Set bit no. 4 in the SRE: *SRE 16 to enable MAV service request.
2. Send the overlapped command with *OPC?
3. Wait for a service request

The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 233

General Programming Recommendations
Event Status Register (ESE)
1. Set the OPC mask bit (bit no. 0) in the ESE: *ESE 1
2. Send the overlapped command without *OPC, *OPC? or *WAI
3. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: *OPC; *ESR?
A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished.
*OPC? with short timeout
1. Send the overlapped command without *OPC,*OPC? or *WAI
2. Poll the operation complete state periodically (by means of a timer) using the
sequence: <short timeout>; *OPC?
3. A return value (LSB) of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished. In
case of a timeout, the operation is ongoing.
4. Reset timeout to former value
5. Clear the error queue with SYStem:ERRor? to remove the "-410, Query interrupted"
entries.
Using several threads in the controller application

As an alternative, provided the programming environment of the controller application
supports threads, separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for controlling
the instrument(s) via SCPI.
A thread waiting for a *OPC? thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other
instruments.
8.4 General Programming Recommendations
Initial instrument status before changing settings

Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience. In contrast,
the priority of remote control is the "predictability" of the instrument status. Thus, when a
command attempts to define incompatible settings, the command is ignored and the
instrument status remains unchanged, i.e. other settings are not automatically adapted.
Therefore, control programs should always define an initial instrument status (e.g. using
the *RST command) and then implement the required settings.
Command sequence
As a general rule, send commands and queries in different program messages. Other-
wise, the result of the query may vary depending on which operation is performed first
(see also Preventing Overlapping Execution).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 234

General Programming Recommendations
Reacting to malfunctions
The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own.
Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case
of malfunction. The program should react appropriately to the service request.
Error queues
The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program
as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers.
Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried
regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there
as well.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 235

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Remote Control Commands
Common Commands
9 Remote Control Commands

In the following, all remote-control commands are presented in detail with their parame-
ters and the ranges of numerical values.
Commands to the respective transmission protocols are described in separate chapters:
● User Defined chapter 9.3, "User Defined - Remote Control Commands",
on page 257
● chapter 9.4, "CPRI Remote Control Commands", on page 286
For an introduction to remote control, refer to chapter 8, "Remote Control Basics",
on page 213.
The remote-control commands are structured in subsystems according to the SCPI syn-
tax, and then listed in alphabetical order.
Addditionally, find a list of all commands for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX at the end of the manual,
see "Alphabetical List of Commands".
9.1 Common Commands

Common commands are described in the IEEE 488.2 (IEC 625-2) standard. These com-
mands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devices.
The headers of these commands consist of "*" followed by three letters. Many common
commands are related to the Status Reporting System.
Available common commands:
*CLS.............................................................................................................................236
*IDN?............................................................................................................................237
*OPC............................................................................................................................237
*OPT?...........................................................................................................................237
*RCL.............................................................................................................................238
*RST.............................................................................................................................238
*SAV.............................................................................................................................238
ERR?............................................................................................................................238
*CLS <*cls>
CLear Status
Sets the status byte (STB), the standard event register (ESR) and the EVENt part of the
QUEStionable and the OPERation registers to zero. The command does not alter the
mask and transition parts of the registers. It clears the output buffer.
Setting parameters:
<*cls> string
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 236

Common Commands
*IDN?
IDeNtification query.
Queries the identificaion of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The query returns "Rohde&Schwarz,<device type>,<serial number>,<firmware ver-
sion>". The information is returned at fixed positions in a comma-separated string.
Return values:
<*idn > string
Example: *IDN?
query instrument identification.
Rohde&Schwarz,<EX-IQ-BOX>,<101211>,
<000.00.01-0>
Usage: Query only
*OPC <*opc >

OPeration Complete
Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed.
This bit can be used to initiate a service request. The query form writes a "1" into the
output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed. This is used for
command synchronization.
Parameters:
<*opc > string
*OPT?
OPTion identification query.
Queries the options included in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. For a list of all available options
and their description refer to chapter 3.2.2, "Options", on page 22 or the R&S website of
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX: http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/product/EX-IQ-Box.html.
Return values:
<*opt > string
The query returns a list of options. The options are returned at
fixed positions in a comma-separated string. A zero is returned for
options that are not installed.
Example: *OPT ?
query installed options.
EXBOX-B85,EXBOX-K90,EXBOX-K91,EXBOX-K94,
EXBOX-K240
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 237

Common Commands
*RCL <*rcl>
ReCaLl calls up the instrument settings from an intermediate memory identified by the
specified number. The instrument settings can be stored to this memory using the com-
mand *SAV on page 238 with the associated number.
It also activates the instrument settings which are stored in a file and loaded using the
MMEMory:LOAD <number>, <file_name.extension> command.
Setting parameters:
<*rcl> string
Usage: Setting only
*RST <*rst>
ReSeT
Sets the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to a defined default status. It is equivalent to
SYSTem:PRESet. The default settings are indicated in the description of commands.
Setting parameters:
<*rst> string
Usage: Setting only
*SAV <*sav>
SAVe stores the current instrument settings under the specified number in an intermedi-
ate memory. The settings can be recalled using the command *RCL with the associated
number.
To transfer the stored instrument settings in a file, use the command MMEMory:
STORe:STATe.
Setting parameters:
<*sav> string
Usage: Setting only
ERR?
Return values:
<Err > string
0
No error, i.e the error queue is empty.
positive value
Positive error numbers denote device-specific errors.
negative value
Negative error numbers denote error messages defined by SCPI.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 238

R&S EX-IQ-BOX - Remote Control Commands
Example: ERR?
queries all entries in the error queue.
Response: 0, no error
no errors have occurred since the error queue was last read out.
Usage: Query only
9.2 R&S EX-IQ-BOX - Remote Control Commands

The following subsystems relate to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and R&S instruments, as well
as some general functions. The specific commands are described in the associated sub-
systems.
9.2.1 Device Subsystem
The DEVice subsystem contains remote control commands of the device manager dialog
of R&S DigIConf.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CATalog?........................................................................239
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CONTroller?....................................................................240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CPLD?............................................................................240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BASe?.....................................................................240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BOB?......................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:DIGio?.....................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PART..............................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PPCVersion?...................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:PART?................................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:REVision?...........................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:SERial?...............................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:REVision?...............................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:SERial?...................................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:TYPE?....................................................................243
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:FIRMware:SUPPorted?...........................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:FIRMware:SUPPorted?...........................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FIRMware:SUPPorted?......................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FIRMware:SUPPorted?....................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SELect............................................................................244
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SERial............................................................................244
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CATalog?
The command queries the R&S EX-IQ-BOXes operated by R&S DigIConf. The query
returns the serial numbers in a comma-separated string.
Return values:
<Catalog> string
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 239

Example: SOUR:EBOX:CAT?
list the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOXes.
Response:
900002, 900010
currently the R&S EX-IQ-BOXes 90002 and 90010 are connec-
ted.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "EX-IQ-BOX Device" on page 66
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CONTroller?
The command queries the controller type the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with.
Return values:
<cnt> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:CONT?
shows the controller type of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Hardware Info" on page 66
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CPLD?
Queries the version of CPLD (Complex Programmable Logic Device). This command is
model specific and applies to R&S EX-IQ-BOX1409.5505.02.
Return values:
<cpld> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:CPLD?
query the CPLD of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BASe?
Queries the version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) basic design of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<base> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:FPG:BAS?
query the FPGA version of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 240

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BOB?
Queries the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) version of the breakout board con-
nected to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<bob> string
Example: SOURce:EBOX:DEV:FPG:BOB?
query the FPGA of the breakout board.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:DIGio?
Queries the version of the digital interface standard. This command is model specific and
applies to R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5505K04.
Return values:
<fpga> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:FPG:DIG?
query the digital interface standard.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PART <part>
Queries the part number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Parameters:
<part> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:PART?
query the part number of the selected R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Response:
101211
currently the R&S EX-IQ-BOX with part number 101211 is con-
nected.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PPCVersion?
Queries the R&S EX-IQ-BOX PPC firmware version, i.e. the version of the built-in power
PC.
Return values:
<ver> string
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 241

Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:PPCV?
query version of the PPC.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:PART?
Queries the part number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal board.
Return values:
<pn> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:BOAR:PART?
query the part number.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:REVision?
Queries the revision number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal board.
Return values:
<rev> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:BOAR:REV?
query the board revision number.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:SERial?
Queries the serial number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal board.
Return values:
<serial> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:BOAR:SER?
query the board serial number.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:REVision?
Queries the revision number of the connected breakout baord.
Return values:
<rev> string
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 242

Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:BOB:REV?
query the breakout board revision number.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:SERial?
Queries the serial number of the connected breakout board.
Return values:
<sn> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:BOB:SER?
query the breakout board serial number.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:TYPE?
Queries the type of the connected breakout board.
Return values:
<typ> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:BOB:TYP?
Response: "EXBOX-B85"
a CPRI breakout board is connected.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:FIRMware:SUPPorted?
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:FIRMware:SUPPorted?
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FIRMware:SUPPorted?
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FIRMware:SUPPorted?
Queries the firmware available for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1407.5505.02.
Return values:
<Supported> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:FIRM:SUPP?
check the supported firmware.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Update EX-IQ-BOX Firmware" on page 68
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 243

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SELect <Select>
Select a currently connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX by means of its serial number.
Parameters:
<Select> float
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:SELect 100112
select the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX with serial number
'10112
Manual operation: See "EX-IQ-BOX Device" on page 66
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SERial <serial>
Queries the serial number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Parameters:
<serial> float
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:SER?
query the R&S EX-IQ-BOX serial number.
9.2.2 Diagnostic Subsystem
The DIAGnostic subsystem contains the commands used for instrument diagnosis and
servicing. SCPI does not define any DIAGnostic commands; the commands listed here
are all device-specific. DIAGnostic commands are query commands which are not
influenced by *RST.
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CATalog?..........................................................................................244
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:EXECute..................................................................................245
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:TEST?.....................................................................................245
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:STORe............................................................................245
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:BER?......................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:DCM?......................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:ERRors?..................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:NDATa?..................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:PLL?.......................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RCV?......................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RX|TX:SOURce........................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RX|TX:STATe..........................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:POINt...............................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:POINt:VALue?...................................................................................248
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:SELect..............................................................................................248
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CATalog?
The command queries the R&S EX-IQ-BOX instruments operated by R&S DigIConf. The
query returns the serial numbers in a comma-separated string.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 244

Return values:
<Catalog> string
Example: DIAG:EBOX:CAT?
Response:
900002, 900010
R&S DigIConf currently operates with the R&S EX-IQ-BOXes
90002 and 90010
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:EXECute
The command starts the CPRI test for service purposes, see:DIAGnostic:EBOX:
CPRI:TEST? on page 245 .
Example: DIAG:EBOX:CPRI:EXEC?
executes the CPRI diagnostic test.
Response:
running, finished
Usage: Event
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:TEST?
The command checks the CPRI communication link for service purposes.
Return values:
<Test> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: 1
Example: DIAG:EBOX:CPRI:TEST?
query the test result of the CPRI link.
Response: 0 = passed, 1 = failed
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:STORe <Store>
Saves the test report of the CPRI diagnostic test in a log file. This function is protected
and used for service purposes.
Setting parameters:
<Store> string
Example: MMEM:CDIR "d:/user/diagnostic"
set the default directory to d:/user/diagnostic
DIAG:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:STOR "CPRITest.log"
saves the test report in the default directory with file name
CPRITest.log.
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 245

:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:BER?
The command checks the LVDS interface. This function is protected and used for service
purposes.
Return values:
<ber> float
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:BER?
query the results of the LVDS test.
Response: 0 = passed, 1 = failed
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:DCM?
Checks the LVDS DCM lock state. This function is protected and used for service pur-
poses.
Return values:
<dcm> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:DCM?
query the state DCM.
Response: 0 = locked, 1 = unlocked
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:ERRors?
The queries the number of errors in LVDS test. This function is protected and used for
service purposes.
Return values:
<err> float
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:ERR?
counts the errors occured during LVDS test.
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:NDATa?
Zeroes the received bit for the LVDS test. This function is protected and used for service
purposes.
Return values:
<dat> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:NDAT?
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 246

:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:PLL?
Checks the PLL lock state during LVDS test. This function is protected and used for
service purposes.
Return values:
<pll> ON | OFF
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:PLL?
query the state of the PLL.
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RCV?
The command checks the number of received bits.
Return values:
<received> float
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:RCV?
count the number of received bits.
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RX|TX:SOURce <source>
Selects LVDS test source. This function is protected and used for service purposes.
Parameters:
<source> PRBS | COUNTER
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:TX:SOUR PRBS
test the TX channel with the PRBS signal pattern.
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RX|TX:STATe <state>
Starts the LVDS test. This function is protected and used for service purposes.
Parameters:
<state> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: DIAG:EBOX:LVDS:TX:STAT ON
start the LVDS test in the TX channel.
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:POINt <point>
Selects the diagnostic points. This function is protected and used for service purposes.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 247

Parameters:
<point> UI | U2V5 | AVTT | AVCC_PLL | AVCC_MGT | U1V8 | U24V |
GND | VIN | COM3V3 | AUX2V5 | DIV3V3 | CORE1V0 | VCO |
GND1 | PPC_VCC_INT | PPC_TEMP | PPC_VCC_AUX
Example: DIAG:EBOX:POIN UI
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:POINt:VALue?
Queries the voltage value at the selected diagnostic point of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<val> string
Example: DIAG:EBOX:POIN:VAL?
query the voltage value at the diagnostic point.
Usage: Query only
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:SELect <Select>
Select a currently connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX in the chapter 6.1.6.1, "EX-IQ-BOX Device
Manager", on page 65 dialog by means of its serial number. This function is protected
and used for service purposes.
Parameters:
<Select> float
Example: DIAG:EBOX:SEL 100112
select the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX with serial number '10112'.
9.2.3 EBOX Subsystem
The EBOX subsystem describes all remote-control commands regarding the configuration
of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Configuration parameters are set via the configuration software
R&S DigIConf.
R&S DigIConf may handle up to four R&S EX-IQ-BOX devices simultaneously. There-
fore, all commands regarding to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX start with [:SOURce<hw>:] in
order to select a device.
The numeric suffix <hw> to SOURce distinguishes the selected R&S EX-IQ-BOX
[:SOURce<[1]|2|3|4>:]....
● SOURce[1] = R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1
If only one R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected the keyword SOURce is optional and can
be omitted.
● SOURce2 = R&S EX-IQ-BOX 2 (up to four are possible simultaneously)
If you work with more devices, the keyword is mandatory, i.e. the command must
contain the keyword with suffix.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 248

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:CATalog?............................................................................249
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:DELete................................................................................249
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CATalog?....................................................................................249
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:COUNt........................................................................................250
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ID?.............................................................................................250
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:OPT...........................................................................................250
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:SELect........................................................................................251
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:STATe?......................................................................................251
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:CATalog?
The command queries the available waveform files in the specified default directory. Only
files with the file extension *.wv will be listed.
Return values:
<Catalog> string
Example: MMEM:CDIR "d:/user/waveform"
set the default directory to d:/user/waveform.
SOUR:EBOX:ARB:CAT?
list out all waveform files in the default directory.
Response:
wav1, wav2
the directory contains the configuration files wav1.wv and
wav2.wv.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:DELete <Delete>
The command removes a waveform file from the specified directory. Determine the file
by adding directory, file name and extension of the file.
Setting parameters:
<Delete> <file_name>
String parameter to specify the name and directory of the file to be
removed.
Example: SOUR:EBOX:ARB:DEL "D:/USER/wav1.wv"
delete the file wav1.wv in the USER directory on drive d:/.
Usage: Setting only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CATalog?
Queries the R&S EX-IQ-BOXes operated by R&S DigIConf. The query returns the serial
numbers in a comma-separated string.
Return values:
<Catalog> string
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 249

Example: SOUR:EBOX:CAT?
Response:
Undefined, 900002, 900010
R&S DigIConf currently operates with the R&S EX-IQ-BOXes
90002 and 90010.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:COUNt <Count>
Queris the number of connected R&S EX-IQ-BOXes.
Parameters:
<Count> float
Range: 0 to 4
Example: SOUR:EBOX:COUN?
Response: "2"
Manual operation: See "Block Diagram" on page 56
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ID?
Queries the Id of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The Id is composed of <part_num-
ber>,<serial_number> and <checksum>.
Return values:
<Id> string
Example: EBOX:ID?
Response: "1409.5505K04-100005-Av"
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Options" on page 67
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:OPT <Opt>
The command queries the options installed on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The query returns
a list of options in a comma-separated string.
Parameters:
<Opt> string
Example: SOUR:EBOX:OPT?
check the installed options.
Response: EXBOX-B85, EXBOX-K10, EXBOX-K11,
EXBOX-K90, EXBOX-K242, ...
Manual operation: See "Options" on page 67
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 250

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:SELect <Select>
Select a currently connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX by means of its serial number.
Parameters:
<Select> float
Example: SOUR:EBOX:DEV:SELect 100112
select the connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX with serial number 10112.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:STATe?
Queries the current state of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The state can only be activated with
commands switching on a transmission protocol, e.g. EBOX:USER:STAT ON.
Return values:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:STAT?
check whether a standard is active.
Usage: Query only
9.2.4 INSTrument Subsystem
The INStrument subsystem contains remote control commands to query the interface
and identity of connected R&S instruments.
The numeric suffix INST<ch> distinguishes between the instruments connected to the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX. If only one R&S instrument is connected the suffix INST[1] is optional
and can be omitted.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:NAME?.......................................................................251
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:PORT?........................................................................252
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:SERial?.......................................................................252
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:TYPE?........................................................................252
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:NAME?
Queries type and serial number of an R&S instrument connected to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<Name> string
Example: SOUR2:EBOX:INST1:NAME?
query the symbolic name of the connected instrument.
Response: AMU 200A (100201)
the second connected instrument is an R&S AMU200A with serial
number 100201.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 251

Manual operation: See "Connected Instrument" on page 71
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:PORT?
Queries the instrument's port the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected to. The response differs
depending on the connected instrument type. In a two-path instrument the path is also
given.
Return values:
<Port> string
Example: SOUR2:EBOX:INST2:PORT?
query the digital interface of the instrument to which the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX is connected.
Response: In, Out A
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Port" on page 71
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:SERial?
Queries serial number of the R&S instrument connected to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<Serial> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:INST1:TYPE?
query the serial number of the instrument connected the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX.
Response: 100201
the serial number of the first connected instrument is 100201.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Serial Number" on page 71
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:TYPE?
Queries the type of an R&S instrument connected to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<Type> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:INST1:TYPE?
query the type of the connected instrument.
Response: AMU 200A
the first connected instrument is an R&S AMU200A.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Instrument Type" on page 71
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 252

9.2.5 MMEMory Subsystem
The MMEMory subsystem (Mass Memory) contains the commands for managing files
and directories as well as for loading and storing complete instrument settings in files.
The various drives can be selected using the "mass storage unit specifier " <msus>. The
internal hard disk is selected with D:\, and a memory stick which is inserted at the USB
interface is selected with E:\. The resources of a network can also be selected with
<msus> in the syntax of the respective network, e.g. using the UNC format (Universal
Naming Convention): \\server\share.
The default drive is determined using the command MMEMory:MSIS <msus>.
The C: drive is a protected system drive. This drive should not be accessed. Recon-
struction of the system partition will not be possible without loss of data..
9.2.5.1 File Naming Conventions
To enable files in different file systems to be used, the following file naming conventions
should be observed.
The file name can be of any length and no distinction is made between uppercase and
lowercase letters. The file and the optional file extension are separated by a dot. All letters
and numbers are permitted (numbers are, however, not permitted at the beginning of the
file name). Where possible, special characters should not be used. Use of the slashes
"\" and "/" should be avoided since they are used in file paths. A number of names are
reserved by the operating system, e.g. CLOCK$, CON, AUX, COM1...COM4,
LPT1...LPT3, NUL and PRN.
In the R&S DigIConf all files in which lists and settings are stored are given a characteristic
extension.
The extension is separated from the actual file name by a dot (see chapter 9.2.5.2,
"Extensions for User Files", on page 254 for an overview the file types).
The two characters * and ? function as wildcards, i.e. they are used for selecting several
files. The ? character represents exactly one character, while the * character represents
all characters up to the end of the file name. *.* therefore stands for all the files in a
directory.
When used in conjunction with the commands, the parameter <file_name> is specified
as a string parameter with quotation marks. It can contain either the complete path
including the drive, only the path and file name, or only the file name. The file name must
include the file extension. The same applies for the parameters <directory_name>
and <path>.
Depending on how much information is provided, either the values specified in the
parameter or the values specified with the commands MMEM:MSIS (default drive) and
MMEM:CDIR (default directory) are used for the path and drive setting in the commands.
Before the instrument settings can be stored in a file, they have to be stored in an inter-
mediate memory using common command *SAV <number>. The specified number is
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 253

subsequently used in the MMEM:STOR:STATe<number>, <file> command. Also, sub-

sequently to loading a file with instrument settings with command MMEM:LOAD:STAT
<number>, <file>, these settings have to be activated with the common command
*RCL <number>.
Example:
In this example, the current instrument setting is always stored in the file
test1.savrcl in the directory user on the internal hard disk.
*SAV 4
MMEM:STOR:STAT 4,"d:\user\test1.savrcl"
If the complete path including the drive letter is specified, the file is stored in the specified
path.
MMEM:MSIS 'D:'*SAV 4
MMEM:STOR:STAT 4,"\user\test1.savrcl"
If the parameter only contains the path and file name, the default drive set with the
MMEM:MSIS command is effective.
9.2.5.2 Extensions for User Files
The following table list all available file extensions for user files. The currently available
files on the instrument depend on the installed options.
Table 9-1: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in R&S DigIConf
Function/Digital List type Contents File suffix

Standard
CPRI Settings CPRI configuration, vendor data included *.cpri

Instrument settings
Waveform Waveforms and multi segment waveforms *.wv
User Defined Settings User Defined Protocol configuration *.iqbox
Configuration Soft- Settings R&S DigIConf settings *.savrcl

ware
9.2.5.3 Remote Control Commands
MMEMory:CATalog?......................................................................................................254
MMEMory:CDIRectory....................................................................................................255
MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................255
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe.................................................................................................255
MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................256
MMEMory:RDIRectory....................................................................................................256
MMEMory:STORe:STATe...............................................................................................256
MMEMory:CATalog?
Returns the content of the current or a specified directory.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 254

Return values:
<Catalog> string
String parameter to specify the directory. If the direcory is omitted,
the command queries the content of the current directory, queried
with MMEM:CDIR command.
<path> <used_memory>,<free_memory>,<file_name>,<file_entry>,...
<used_memory>
Total amount of storage currently used in the directory, in bytes.
<free_memory>
Total amount of storage available in the directory, in bytes.
<file_entry>
All files of the directory are listed with their file name, format and
size in bytes.
Example: MMEM:CAT?
Usage: Query only
MMEMory:CDIRectory <Cdirectory>
Changes the default directory for mass memory storage. The directory is used for all
subsequent MMEM commands if no path is specified with them. It is also possible to change
to a higher directory using two dots '..' .
Setting parameters:
<Cdirectory> <directory_name>
Example: MMEM:CDIR 'var/user'*SAV 4
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:DELete <Delete>
Removes a file from the specified directory.
Parameters:
<Delete> <file_name>
String parameter to specify the name and directry of the file to be
removed.
Example: MMEM:DEL "c:/temp/test"
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe <State>
Loads the specified file stored under the specified name in an internal memory.
After the file has been loaded, the instrument setting must be activated using an *RCL
command.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 255

Parameters:
<sav_rcl_state_number>
Determines to the specific <number> to be used with the *RCL
command, e.g. *RCL 4.
<file_name> String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcl.
Setting parameters:
<State> string
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 4,"test.savrcl"
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:MDIRectory <Mdirectory>
Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in the specified directory. If no
directory is specified, a subdirectory is created in the default directory. This command
can also be used to create a directory tree.
Setting parameters:
<Mdirectory> string
Example: MMEM:MDIR "d:/test"
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:RDIRectory <Rdirectory>
Removes an existing directory from the mass memory storage system. If no directory is
specified, the subdirectory with the specified name is deleted in the default directory.
Setting parameters:
<Rdirectory> string
String parameter to specify the directory to be deleted.
Example: MMEM:RDIR "d:/test"
Usage: Setting only
MMEMory:STORe:STATe <State>
Stores the current instrument setting in the specified file.
The instrument setting must first be stored in an internal memory with the same number
using the common command *SAV.
Parameters:
<sav_rcl_state_number>
Corresponds to the specific <number> defined with the *SAV
command, e.g. *SAV 4.
<file_name> String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcl.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 256

User Defined - Remote Control Commands
Setting parameters:
<State> string
String parameter to specify the file name with extension
*.savrcl.
Example: MMEM:STOR:STAT 4,"d:\user\test.savrcl"
Usage: Setting only
9.3 User Defined - Remote Control Commands

This chapter describes all remote-control commands for user defined applications, includ-
ing their parameters and value ranges.
Based on the R&S DigIConf commands, the description is structured according to the
SCPI subsystems. Within each chapter, the order is alphabetical.
As a special feature you can find most of the commands summarized in a set of com-
mands. This is required for test setups of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, modell 1409.5505.02,
when not controlled by R&S DigIConf.
A command set defines first the commands of the R&S instruments. See also chap-
ter 9.3.1, "Explanation to the Device Specific SCPI Syntax", on page 257 for more details.
Specific properties that relate to a particular instrument, are clearly expressed.
The command for R&S DigIConf is always listed as last command, thus directly with the
explanation.
9.3.1 Explanation to the Device Specific SCPI Syntax
This chapter briefly describes the variants in SCPI notation, depending on the controlling
device.
Basically, if you run an R&S EX-IQ-BOX, model 1409.5505.02 directly with an R&S
instrument, you have to set the same parameters as if controlled by R&S DigIConf. Since
the devices communicate directly with each other, however, the transmission direction
must be determined within the command. I.e. there are separate commands defined for
the transmission and the receiver mode.
The following example shows you the notation to use, according to the controlling device.
The <placeholder> represents the variants in notation.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 257

Example:
<placeholder>:LOGic:TYPE
The command in this example selects the digital signaling system used for transmitting
the baseband signal from or to the DUT.
Table 9-2: Command Variants
SCPI used with ... Transmission path
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:LOGic[:TYPE] R&S DigIConf determined by a separate command
[SOURce<[1]|2>:]BBIN:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE] R&S Signal Generators digital IQ IN (BBIN)
[SOURce<[1]|2>:]IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE] R&S Signal Generators digital IQ OUT (IQ OUT)
[SOURce:]RECeiver:LOGic[:TYPE] R&S Signal Analyzer digital IQ IN (receiver)
[SOURce:]TRANsmitter:LOGic[:TYPE] R&S Signal Analyzer digital IQ OUT (transmitter)
9.3.2 User Defined - Main Control Commands
The main controls commands provide the selection of the transmission "Direction", and
commands as "State" for activating, "Set to Default" for preset and "Save/Recall" for
storing or loading previously defined settings.
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DIRection...............................................................................258
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DIRection..............................................................258
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DIRection..........................................................................258
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE].........................................................................259
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE]........................................................259
SOURce:TRANsmitter:LOGictype....................................................................................259
SOURce:RECeiver:LOGictype.........................................................................................259
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:LOGic[:TYPE]....................................................................259
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:PRESet.............................................................................260
[:SOURce]:RECeiver:SENDto.........................................................................................260
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SENDto.......................................................................................260
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:STATe..............................................................................261
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DIRection <Direction>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DIRection <Direction>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DIRection <Direction>
Note: This command applies to R&S Signal Generators and R&S DigIConf. Setting the
direction of transmission for analyzers, refer to [:SOURce]:RECeiver:SENDto
on page 260 or SOURce:TRANsmitter:SENDto on page 260.
The command determines the direction of signal transmission from the DUT to the
R&S EX-IQ-BOXor vice versa.
Setting direction and activating transmission depends on the R&S Device:
● R&S DigIConf
Signal direction is selected in the "Direction" field of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX "User
Defined" settings dialog. Select "Transmitter/Receiver" in the list.
The transmission is activated by switching On the "State" button.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 258

● R&S signal analyzers

Signal direction is selected in the "Select Type" field of the "EXIQ-Box Settings" dia-
log. Select "Transmitter/Receiver" in the drop down list, as described in chap-
ter 6.1.1.6, "Dialogs", on page 57
● R&S signal generators
The direction of signal transmission is determined by the connection at the interface,
either DIGITAL IQ IN or OUT. The parameters are provided respectively in the "EX-
IQ-BOX BBIN" and "EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT" dialogs. Therefore, the "Direction" field is
not needed.
Signal transmission is activated with "State".
Parameters:
<Direction> RECeiver | TRANsmitter
RECeiver
The connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives the signal from the DUT
and forwards it to an R&S instrument.
TRANsmitter (Output)
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives data from an R&S instrument and
sends it to the DUT.
The baseband signal is transmitted in Single Data Rate (SDR)
mode from the DUT to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa. The
data transmission is triggered by the rising edge of the data clock.
Example: EBOX:USER:DIR TRAN
set the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to transmit the data to the DUT.
Manual operation: See "Direction" on page 99
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE] <Type>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE] <Type>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:LOGictype <Type>
SOURce:RECeiver:LOGictype <Type>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:LOGic[:TYPE] <Type>
Selects the signaling system used from the DUT for the baseband signal.
Note:
Avoid connector overload
The type of the electrical signals are based on various logic types (TTL or CMOS stand-
ard) performing different logic levels. The logic type of the DUT connected must be com-
patible to the logic type of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Inappropriate logic types may cause
damage to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and/or to the DUT.
The SCPI notation varies, when you remotely control the R&S EX-IQ-BOX on R&S EX-
IQ-BOX or R&S signal generators and R&S signal analyzers, as described below.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 259

Parameters:
<Type> LVDS | LVTTL | CMOS33 | CMOS25 | CMOS18 | CMOS15 |
CMOS12, or LVDS | LVTTL | CM33 | CM25 | CM18 | CM15 |
CM12, respectively | SSI12 | SI18
*RST: CMOS33
CMOS33... Enter the respective string, if you run R&S DigIConf or R&S signal
generators.
CM33... Select the logic type as shown, when you remotely control R&S
signal analyzers.
LVDS
The signal is transmitted by using the signaling system LVDS (Low
Voltage Differential Signaling).
LVTTL
The signal is transmitted in LVTTL technology (Low Voltage Tran-
sistor Transistor Logic) with 3.3 V voltage level.
CMOSxx / CMxx
The signal is transmitted by using the CMOS technology (Comple-
mentary Metal Oxide Semiconductor technology).
xx represents the according voltage values.
Available level values: 3.3 V, 2.5 V, 1.8 V, 1.5 V, 1.2 V.
SSIxx (R&S instruments only)
The signal is transmitted by using the SSI technology (Serial
Synchronuos Interface).
Note:
SSI signal are only supported by R&S signal generators and R&S
signal analyzers. Due to the very specific application, it is listed
here for completeness, but not described explicitly.
Voltage levels are 1.5 V and 1.8 V.
Manual operation: See "Logic Type" on page 99
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:PRESet
Set all parameters to default values. Refer to table Preset - User defined default settings
which contains an overview of the most important default settings.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:PRES
setup all User Defined parameters to the default value.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Set To Default" on page 100
[:SOURce]:RECeiver:SENDto
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SENDto
The command determines the direction of signal transmission from the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
to the DUT.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 260

Example: SOUR:TRAN:SEND
The connected R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives data from an R&S signal
analyzer and transmits this data to the DUT.
Manual operation: See "Send to" on page 94
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:STATe <State>
Activates signal transmission.
This function applies to R&S DigIConf, since R&S signal generators and analyzers start
signal transmission directly in the instrument.
Note: Data transmission requires that the respective breakout board is connected.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: EBOX:USER:STAT ON
switch on signal data transmission.
Manual operation: See "State" on page 99
9.3.3 Settings Subsystem
The USER:SETTings subsystem contains the commands for loading and storing appli-
cation settings in files.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:CATalog?............................................................261
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:DELete................................................................262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:LOAD..................................................................262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:STORe................................................................262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:CATalog?
Queries the available settings files in the specified directory. Settings files are used to
store current application settings. Only files with the file extension *.iqbox will be listed.
Access to the files via remote is possible using the commands of the MEMM subsystem.
Return values:
<Catalog> string
String parameter to select the directory where settings files are
stored.
Example: MEMM:CDIR "d:\DigIConf\Settings\User"
Set the default directory and path to
d:\DigIConf\Settings\User.
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:SETT:CAT?
read out all settings files of the DigIConf\Settings\User
directory on drive d:
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 261

Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:DELete <Delete>
The command removes a settings file from the specified directory. Determine the file by
adding directory, file name and extension of the file.
Setting parameters:
<Delete> <directory>, <file_name>, <ext>
Determine the file to be deleted by adding directory, file name and
the file extension (*.iqbox).
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:SETT:DEL "d:
\DigIConf\Settings\User\converter_test.iqbox"
delete the file converter_test.iqbox.
Usage: Setting only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:LOAD <Load>
The command loads a previously saved user defined configuration. Define directory and
file name, R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the file extension *.iqbox.
Setting parameters:
<Load> <directory>, <file_name>
String parameter to determine the target directory and the file-
name for loading the settings file.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:SETT:LOAD "d:
\DigIConf\Settings\User\converter_test"
load the settings file converter_test.iqbox from the directory
d:\DigIConf\Settings\User.
Usage: Setting only
Manual operation: See "Save/Recall" on page 100
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:STORe <Store>
Saves the current signal configuration of user defined mode. Specify the directory and
file name. R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the file extension *.iqbox to user
defined configuration files.
Setting parameters:
<Store> <directory>, <file_name>
name for storing the settings file.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:SETT:STOR "d:
\DigIConf\Settings\User\converter_test"
save the settings in the file converter_test.iqbox in the
directory d:\DigIConf\Settings\User.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 262

Usage: Setting only

Manual operation: See "Save/Recall" on page 100
9.3.4 Protocol Commands
This section contains the commands for setting the parameters of user defined trans-
mission protocols.
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DRATe..................................................................................263
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DRATe..................................................................263
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DRATe.........................................................................................263
SOURce:RECeiver:DRATe.............................................................................................263
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DRATe..............................................................................263
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:FORMat.................................................................................264
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:FORMat................................................................264
SOURce:TRANsmitter:FORMat.......................................................................................264
SOURce:RECeiver:FORMat............................................................................................264
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FORMat............................................................................264
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:ILEaving................................................................................264
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:ILEaving................................................................264
SOURce:TRANsmitter:ILEaving.......................................................................................264
SOURce:RECeiver:ILEaving...........................................................................................265
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:ILEaving............................................................................265
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:SRATe?.................................................................................265
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:SRATe?................................................................265
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SRATe.........................................................................................265
SOURce:RECeiver:SRATe.............................................................................................265
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SRATe?............................................................................265
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DRATe <Drate>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DRATe <Drate>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DRATe <Drate>
SOURce:RECeiver:DRATe <Drate>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DRATe <Drate>
Sets the data rate mode of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX for receiving/sending a baseband signal
from/to an external device (DUT).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 263

Parameters:
<Drate> SDR | DDR
SDR
Transmits the baseband signal in Single Data Rate (SDR) mode
from the DUT to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa. The rising
eddge of the clock signal triggers data transmisison.
DDR
Transmits the baseband signal in Double Data Rate (SDR) mode
from the DUT to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa. The rising and
the falling edge of the clock signal trigger data transmission (dou-
ble speed transfer).
*RST: SDR
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DRAT SDR
sets the data rate mode to "Single".
Manual operation: See "Data Rate" on page 102
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:FORMat <Format>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:FORMat <Format>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:FORMat <Format>
SOURce:RECeiver:FORMat <Format>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FORMat <Format>
Sets the signal transmission protocol of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX for receiving/sending a
baseband signal from/to an external device (DUT) via the user interface of the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX.
Parameters:
<Format> SERial | PARallel
SERial
Transmits each sample serially, i.e. "bitwise" from the DUT to the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice vera. In sereial mode, I and Q data are
sent via the input and output pins IO and QO, respectively.
PARallel
Transmits parallel, i.e. "wordwise" from the DUT to the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX or vice versa. The input and output pin assignment
depends on the bits alignment and the bit order settings.
*RST: PARallel
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:FORM SER
sets the transmission protocol of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to "serial".
Manual operation: See "Format" on page 101
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:ILEaving <Ileaving>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:ILEaving <Ileaving>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:ILEaving
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 264

SOURce:RECeiver:ILEaving
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:ILEaving <Ileaving>
Switches on interleaving and selects the interleaving mode.
Depending on the interleaving settings, the baseband signal is either sent simultaneously
or in I/Q or Q/I order from the DUT to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX or vice versa.
Parameters:
<Ileaving> OFF | IQ | QI
OFF
Transmits the baseband signal without not Interleaved on the I and
Q data lines.
IQ
Transtmits the baseband signal on the I data line starting with I
data, i.e. "I/Q Interleaved".
Serial transmission, SDR: The strobe signal UI_RES1 lasts for
2 clock cycles. The first clock cycle triggers the I data, the second
the Q data.
Serial transmission, DDR: The strobe signal (UI_Res1) lasts for
1 clock cycle. The rising edge triggers the I data, the falling edge
triggers the Q data.
Parallel transmission, SDR: The I marker output at the
Reserved1 pin UI_RES1 of the user interface marks the I data.
Parallel transmission, DDR: The rising edge of the clock signal
triggers the I data, the falling edge the Q data.
QI
Transmits the baseband signal on the I data line starting with Q
data, i.e. "Q/I Interleaved". With interchanged order of the I and Q
data the I/Q signal is transferred similarly as described under I/Q
Interleaved.
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:ILE IQ
sets the interleaving mode to "IQ".
Manual operation: See " Interleaving" on page 104
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:SRATe?
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:SRATe?
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SRATe
SOURce:RECeiver:SRATe
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SRATe?
Note: This command refers to R&S DigIConf and R&S Signal Generators.
This command queries the current sample rate of the external digital baseband signal.
Return values:
<Srate> float
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 265

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:SRAT?
queries the "sample rate" of the externally applied baseband sig-
nal.
Usage: Query only
9.3.5 Clock Subsystem
The USER:CLOCk subsystem contains the commands for configuration of the clock sig-
nal, and the corresponding output and input connectors.
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:PHASe.......................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:PHASe......................................................267
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:PHASe.............................................................................267
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:PHASe..................................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:PHASe..................................................................267
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:POLarity.....................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:POLarity.....................................................267
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:POLarity...........................................................................267
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:POLarity................................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:POLarity................................................................267
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:RATE.........................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:RATE........................................................267
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:RATE...............................................................................267
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:RATE....................................................................................268
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:RATE....................................................................268
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:FREQuency..........................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:VALue?................................................269
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:IN....................................................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:IN...................................................269
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SKEW:IN..........................................................................269
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SKEW:IN...............................................................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:IN...............................................................269
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT................................................270
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT......................................................................270
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT...........................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT...........................................................270
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SOURce.....................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SOURce....................................................270
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SOURce...........................................................................270
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SOURce................................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SOURce................................................................270
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:SCRatio.................................................................................271
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:SCRatio.................................................................271
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SCRatio.......................................................................................271
SOURce:RECeiver:SCRatio............................................................................................271
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SCRatio............................................................................271
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 266

[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:PHASe <Phase>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:PHASe <Phase>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:PHASe <Phase>
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:PHASe <Phase>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:PHASe <Phase>
Sets a phase shift of the active clock edge in 90° steps related to the data bits.
The SCPI notation differs between the commands of R&S generators, R&S DigIConf and
the R&S analyzers, as described below.
Parameters:
<Phase> 0 | 90 | 180 | 270, or P0 | P90 | P180 | P270, respectively
*RST: 0
0 | 90 | 180 | 270 Enter the value for the phase shift of the clock signal, if you
remotely control R&S DigIConf or R&S signal generators.
P0 | P90 | P180 | Enter the value with P, when you remotely control R&S signal
P270 analyzers.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:PHAS 180
define a phase shift of 180 degree for the clock edge.
Manual operation: See "Clock Phase" on page 118
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:POLarity <Polarity>
Sets the clock polarity of the active clock edge for triggering the signal transmission.
Note: Setting the clock polarity negative is equivalent to setting the clock phase to 180°.
Parameters:
<Polarity> POSitive | NEGative
Positive
Activates the rising edge of the clock signal.
Negative
Activates the falling edge of the clock signal.
*RST: POSitive
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:POL NEG
sets negative polarity.
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:RATE <Rate>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:RATE <Rate>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:RATE <Rate>
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 267

SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:RATE <Rate>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:RATE <Rate>
Sets/queries the clock rate (frequency) for signal transmission between the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX and the external device (DUT). Depending on the logic type and the clock source
the clock rate range varies).
f s  WS  INT
fCLK 
DDR  SCR
Fig. 9-1: User defined > Clock rate
fclk = clock rate

fs = sample rate
WS = Word size
INT = Interleaving mode
DDR = double rata rate
SCR = sample/clock rate ratio
Value range
fs = Sample rate 1 kHz ... 100 MHz
fclk == Clock rate LVTTL: 1 (25) kHz - 100 MHz*) LVDS: 1 (25) kHz - 400
MHz*)
WS == Word size 4 ... 18 (serial mode) 1 (parallel mode)
Int == Interleaving mode 1 (non interleaved) 2 (I/Q and Q/I interleaved)
DDR == Double data rate 1 (SDR) 2 (DDR)
SCR == Sample/Clock rate 1, 4/5, 2/5, 1/5, 1/10, 1/20

ratio
*)
1 kHz represents the internal clock source, fed in from the R&S Instrument, 25 kHz are given from the
external reference at the user interface.
Note: The value range of the clock rate depends on Protocol, Logic Type and Signal
Type settings.
Parameters:
<Rate> float
Range: 1 kHz to 400 MHz
*RST: 10 MHz
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:RATE?
query the current frequency of the clock signal of the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX.
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:RATE 10MHZ
set the clock rate of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX to 10 MHz.
Manual operation: See "Clock Rate" on page 115
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 268

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:FREQuency <Frequency>
Note: This command applies to R&S DigIConf and is relevant for the internal clock
source.
Defines the frequency value of the reference clock.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX supports different reference frequencies to be input at REF IN. This
value must be set on the frequency currently supplied.
Parameters:
<Frequency> 5MHZ | 10MHZ | 13MHZ
*RST: 10 MHz
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:RATE 13MHZ
set the reference frequency to "13 MHz":
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 118
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:VALue?
Queries the value of the clock signal at REF IN.
Return values:
<RefVal> float
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:REF:VAL?
query the clock value.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Freq. Counter" on page 119
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:IN <SkewIn>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:IN <SkewIn>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SKEW:IN <SkewIn>
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SKEW:IN <SkewIn>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:IN <SkewIn>
compensate an internal clock skew which is caused by differences of the clock and data
line lengths.
Parameters:
<SkewIn> float
Range: -100.0 ns to 100.0 ns
*RST: 0 ns
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:SKEW:IN 2ns
sets a time shift of 2 ns.
Manual operation: See "Clock In Skew" on page 118
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 269

[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT <Skew>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT <Skew>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT <Skew>
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT <Skew>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT <Skew>
compensate an external clock skew which is caused by differences of the clock and data
line lengths.
Parameters:
<Skew> float
Range: -5 ns to 5 ns
*RST: 0 ns
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:SKEW:OUT 2ns
sets a time shift of 2 ns.
Manual operation: See "Clock Skew" on page 118
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SOURce <Source>
Selects the clock source for data transmission. Either the R&S instrument or the external
device (DUT) can deliver the reference, irrespective of the transmission path.
Parameters:
<Source> INTernal | EXTernal | REF
INTernal
The BNC reference of the frequency input is used. The R&S EX-
IQ-BOX synthesizes the clock and forwards it to the external
device.
Note: When using the internal clock frequency, the reference out-
put of the R&S instrument must be connected to the REF IN of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX at the rear panel. The connection can be kept
during the entire operation even if an external clock reference is
used.
EXTernal
The clock reference is fed in from the external device (DUT) to the
user interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
*RST: REF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:CLOC:SOUR EXT
select the "EXTernal" clock source.
Manual operation: See "Clock Source" on page 116
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 270

[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:SCRatio <Scratio>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:SCRatio <Scratio>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SCRatio <Source>
SOURce:RECeiver:SCRatio <Source>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SCRatio <Scratio>
Sets the sample to clock rate ratio in parallel data transmission mode. The parameter
characterizes the ratio of the sample rate to the clock rate.
The SCPI notation differs between the commands of R&S generators, R&S DigIConf and
the R&S analyzers, as described below.
Parameters:
<Scratio> SCR1 | SCR4D5 | SCR2D5 | SCR1D5 | SCR1D10 |
SCR1D20, or 1 | 0.8 | 0.4 | 0.2 | 0.1 | 0.05, respectively
*RST: SCR1
SCR1 | SCR4D5... Enter the respective string, if you run R&S DigIConf or R&S signal
generators.
SCR = Sample Clock rate Ratio, and D represents the decimal
point, according to the following values: SCR = 1, 4/5, 2/5, 1/5,
1/10, 1/20
1 | 0.8... Enter the value numerically, when you remotely control R&S signal
analyzers.
1, 4/5, 2/5, 1/5, 1/10, 1/20
Set a sample clock rate ratio.
For SCR < 1:
Dummy samples are added.
The signal output SCR_VALID at the Reserved0 pin
(UI_RESERVE_P0) of the user interface marks the validity of the
data.
Note: The values of the sample/clock rate depend on the param-
eter settings of "Word Size", "Interleaving" and "Data Rate" (see
also [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:RATE on page 268.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:SCR SCR4D5
set the sample clock rate ratio to "4/5".
Manual operation: See "Sample / Clock Rate Ratio" on page 107
9.3.6 Data Subsystem
The USER:DATA subsystem contains the commands for configuration of the digital I/Q
baseband signal.
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:ALIGnment...................................................................272
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:ALIGnment...................................................272
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:ALIGnment.........................................................................272
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:ALIGnment..............................................................................272
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 271

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:ALIGnment..............................................................272
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:BORDer.......................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:BORDer.......................................................273
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:BORDer.............................................................................273
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:BORDer..................................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:BORDer..................................................................273
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:NFORmat.....................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:NFORmat.....................................................273
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:NFORmat...........................................................................273
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:NFORmat................................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:NFORmat................................................................273
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:POLarity:IQ...................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:POLarity:IQ..................................................275
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:POLarity:IQ.........................................................................275
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:POLarity:IQ.............................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:POLarity:IQ..............................................................275
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SIZE............................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SIZE............................................................275
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SIZE..................................................................................275
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SIZE.......................................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SIZE.......................................................................275
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SPOLarity.....................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SPOLarity....................................................275
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SPOLarity...........................................................................275
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SPOLarity................................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOLarity................................................................275
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SPOSition.....................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SPOSition....................................................276
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SPOSition...........................................................................276
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SPOSition...............................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOSition................................................................276
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:STYPe.........................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:STYPe.........................................................276
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:STYPe...............................................................................276
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:STYPe....................................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:STYPe....................................................................276
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:TYPE...........................................................................277
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:TYPE...........................................................277
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:TYPe.................................................................................277
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:TYPe......................................................................................277
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:TYPE......................................................................277
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:ALIGnment <Alignment>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:ALIGnment <Alignment>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:ALIGnment <Alignment>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:ALIGnment <Alignment>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:ALIGnment <Alignment>
Note: This command refers to parallel transmission mode.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 272

Sets the alignment of the data bits on the data lines. Either the MSB or the LSB is mapped
firmly to one data line. Depending on the word size the equivalent bit moves to the appro-
priate data line.
Parameters:
<Alignment> MSB | LSB
MSB
The MSB (Most Significant Bit) is mapped firmly to the same data
line and the data line of the LSB varies in dependency of the word
size.
LSB
The LSB (Last Significant Bit) is mapped firmly to the same data
line and the data line of the MSB varies in dependency of the word
size.
*RST: LSB
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:ALIG LSB
sets the word alignment to "LSB".
Manual operation: See "Word Alignment" on page 109
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:BORDer <Border>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:BORDer <Border>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:BORDer <Border>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:BORDer <Border>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:BORDer <Border>
Sets the order of the data bits. In "Parallel mode", either the LSB or the MSB is transmitted
on the first used data line. In "Serial mode" either the LSB or the MSB is transmitted as
first bit.
Parameters:
<Border> MSB | LSB
MSB
Transmits the MSB (Most Significant Bit) first.
LSB
Transmits the LSB (Last Significant Bit) first.
*RST: LSB
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:BORD MSB
sets the data bit order to MSB.
Manual operation: See "Bit Order" on page 110
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:NFORmat <Nformat>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:NFORmat <Nformat>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:NFORmat <Nformat>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:NFORmat <Nformat>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:NFORmat <Nformat>
Selects the format of the transmitted data.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 273


-2n-1 ≤ n ≤ +2n+1
-8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-7 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
-6 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
-5 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
-4 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
-3 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
-2 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
-1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Parameters:
<Nformat> TCOMplement | OBINary
TCOMplement
Formats the value of the transmitted data in 2´s complement.
The most significant bit has a value of -2n-1, the bits of lesser sig-
nificance follow as:
+2n-2 ... +20
OBINary
Formats the value of the transmitted data in binary offset.
Example
Adds a binary offset of -2n-1 such that the final values are always
positive.
n = 4 ￫ -8 ≤ z < 8
*RST: TCOMplement
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:NFOR TCOM
sets the numeric format to two´s-complement.
Manual operation: See "Numeric Format" on page 112
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 274

[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:POLarity:IQ <Iq>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:POLarity:IQ <Iq>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:POLarity:IQ <Iq>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:POLarity:IQ <Iq>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:POLarity:IQ <Iq>
The command sets the polarity of the I and Q data lines of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Parameters:
<Iq> POSitive | NEGative
POSitive
High level stands for a logic 1, low level for a logic 0.
NEGative
High level stands for a logic 0, low level for a logic 1.
*RST: POSitive
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:POL:IQ NEG
set the inversion of the I and Q data signal.
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SIZE <Size>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SIZE <Size>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SIZE <Size>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SIZE <Size>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SIZE <Size>
Sets the word size resolution of a sample. If the word size is set to a value n, the I word
uses these n bits and the Q word uses n bits. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX supports word sizes
from 4 to 18 bits.
Parameters:
<Size> float
Range: 4 to 18
*RST: 16
Default unit: Bit
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:SIZE 8
sets the word size resolution to 8 bit.
Manual operation: See "Word Size" on page 109
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SPOLarity <Spolarity>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SPOLarity <Spolarity>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SPOLarity <Spolarity>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SPOLarity <Spolarity>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOLarity <Spolarity>
Determines the polarity of the strobe marker signal. During a serial data transmission
every data sample is marked by the strobe marker signal. The strobe marker is output at
the UI_GP5 of the user interface..
Note: Clock Phase or Clock Skew settings do not affect the strobe marker signal.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 275

Parameters:
<Spolarity> POSitive | NEGative
POSitive
Sets the strobe polarity to high level.
NEGative
Sets the strobe polarity to low level.
*RST: POSitive
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOL NEG
inverts of the strobe marker signal.
Manual operation: See "Strobe Polarity" on page 113
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SPOSition <Sposition>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SPOSition <Sposition>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SPOSition <Sposition>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SPOSition <Sposition>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOSition <Sposition>
Note: This command refers to serial data transmission.
Sets the sample position of the strobe marker output. The strobe marker is output at the
UI_GP5 of the user interface.
Parameters:
<Sposition> float
Range: 0 to word size-1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOS 10
sets the strobe marker output to sample position 10.
Manual operation: See "Strobe Position" on page 114
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:STYPe <Stype>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:STYPe <Stype>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:STYPe <Stype>
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:STYPe <Stype>
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:STYPe <Stype>
Selects the signal mode of the transmission. The digital I and Q signals are either trans-
mitted separately or the I and Q samples are assembled to a carrier signal and shifted to
an intermediate frequency (IF).
Note: Currently the signal type is firmly set to "IQ" and read only. IQ transmits the digital
I and Q signal components separately.
Signal type "IF" is intended for future use.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 276

Parameters:
<Stype> IQ | IF
IQ
Transmits the digital I and Q signals separately.
*RST: IQ
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DATA:STYP?
queries the set signal type.
Manual operation: See "Signal Type" on page 108
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:TYPE <Type>
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:TYPE <Type>
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:TYPe
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:TYPe
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:TYPE <Type>
Selects the signal data type.
Data type "PFSamples" is intended for future use.
Parameters:
<Type> SAMPles | PFSamples
SAMPles
Sets signal type to samples.
*RST: SAMPles
Example: EBOX:USER:DATA:TYPE?
queries the set data type.
9.3.7 Test Subsystem
The USER:TEST subsystem provides commands for testing the user interface between
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the DUT.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:BER?.................................................................277
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:SIGNal...............................................................278
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:STATe...............................................................278
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:WORDs?............................................................279
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SIGNal...............................................................279
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:AMPLitude..................................................280
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:FREQuency................................................281
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:STATe................................................................281
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:BER?
Queries the bit error rate. The function consecutively counts the number of discrepancies
that occur during the test. The BER result is the ratio, which is calculated by dividing the
number of error bits by the total number of bits.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 277

Return values:
<Ber> float
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DIR REC
sets "Receiver" mode.
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:STAT ON
activates Rx test.
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:BER?
checks the bit error rate.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Rx BER" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:SIGNal <Signal>
Selects the incoming test signal for testing. The test receiver analyzes both PRBS 16 or
counter test signals.
Parameters:
<Signal> PRBS | COUNter
PRBS
Selects a PRBS 16 (Pseudo Random Binary Sequence)
sequence for testing.
COUNTer
Selects a counter test signal.
Range: PRBS to COUN
*RST: PRBS
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DIR REIC
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:SIGN COUN
sets to "Receiver" and selects a counter signal for testing.
Manual operation: See "Test Signal" on page 123
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:STATe <State>
Activates the test receiver.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX expects a test signal at the user interface. First, the test receiver
synchronizes to the last received data word, and then generates a test sequence and
compares each generated sample with the corresponding received sample.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
.
sets the "Receiver" mode and activates Rx test.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 278

Manual operation: See "Rx Test" on page 123
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:WORDs?
Queries the total number of received bits. This functions consecutively counts the number
of received bits, compares them with the sent data and determines the error rate.
Return values:
<Words> float
sets to "Receiver" mode.
activates Rx test.
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:WORD?
checks the number of received bits.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See " Rx Received Bits" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SIGNal <Signal>
Selects a test signal of the test generator.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX internally generates either a sine, PRBS or counter signal for test-
ing, defined as follows:
● PRBS
The PRBS 16 sequence is defined by the generator polynomial G(x) = 1 + x2 + x3 +
x5 + x16.
The functional implementation of the PRBS generation defined by the following linear
feedback shift register (LFSR):
Fig. 9-2: User defined > Test PRBS linear feadback shift register (LFSR)
● Sine
The sine signal follows the formula,
Fig. 9-3: User defined > sine signal formula
n = discrete time index

f = frequency of the test sine signal
fs = sampling frequency, based on the "protocol", "data" and "clock" settings.
with the real component :
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 279

and the imaginary component:
Parameters:
<Signal> PRBS | COUNter | SINE
PRBS
Generates a PRBS 16 (Pseudo Random Binary Sequence)
sequence. The output of this sequence complies to the "Proto-
col", "Data" and "Clock" settings of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
E.g. if the word size of the I / Q sample is 7 bits, the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX sends the PRBS 16 sequence in 7-bit parts.
The I and Q values always contain the same copy of one test
sample.
COUNTer
Generates a counter test signal. The counter size is based on the
word size, set in the "Data" tab. Each output sample increases the
counter by 1.
SINE
Provides a sine signal for testing, determined as shown by the
formula above.
Range: PRBS to SINE
*RST: PRBS
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:USER:DIR TRAN
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SIGN COUN
sets to "Transmitter" and selects a counter signal for testing.
Manual operation: See "Test Signal" on page 121
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:AMPLitude <Amplitude>
Sets the amplitude of the sine test signal in terms of dBFS. The maximum amplitude is
full scale (0 dBFS).
Parameters:
<Amplitude> float
Range: -100 to 0
Increment: 1 dBFS
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:AMPL -50DBFS
sets to "Transmitter" and "-50 dBFS" amplitude of the sine test
signal.
Manual operation: See " Amplitude" on page 123
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 280

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:FREQuency <Frequency>
Sets the frequency of the sine test signal. The frequency is limited to "0.4 fs", and the
sampling frequency "fs" depends on the clock, data rate and the interleaving mode set-
tings.
Parameters:
<Frequency> float
Range: -4 MHz to 4 MHz
Increment: 1 kHZ
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:FREQ 100KHZ
sets to "Transmitter" and the signal frequency "100 kHz".
Manual operation: See "Frequency" on page 123
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:STATe <State>
Switches the test generator on or off. While the test generator is switched on, the test
signal replaces the I/Q data source coming from "DIG IQ IN".
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
SOUR1:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:STAT ON
sets "Transmitter" and switches on the test generator.
Manual operation: See "Tx Test" on page 121
9.3.8 Trigger Subsystem
The USER:TRIGger subsystem contains the commands for configuring a trigger signal
when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working in transmitter mode.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:ARM....................................................................281
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:CSTat?................................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:DELay.................................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:RESTart..............................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:SOURce..............................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:STATe?...............................................................283
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:ARM
Stops the current signal output. It continues either automatically or synchronized, accord-
ing to the used trigger source.
Example: EBOX:USER:TRIG:ARM
stops signal output.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 281

Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Arm" on page 120
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:CSTat?
Queries the current trigger status.
Return values:
<Status> string
Example: EBOX:USER:TRIG:CSTAT?
Response: Idle, i.e. triggering is waiting for a trigger event.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:DELay <Delay>
Specifies a time delay after the trigger event. Trigger delay is defined in clock cycles
Parameters:
<Delay> float
Example: EBOX:USER:TRIG:DEL 5
Signal output starts 5 clock cycles after the trigger event.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Delay" on page 120
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:RESTart
Starts triggering again.
Example: EBOX:USER:TRIG:REST
restarts triggering.
Usage: Event
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Selects the trigger source. The trigger signal starts the signal output at the user interface.
Parameters:
<Source> AUTO | SYNC
AUTO
Outputs the signal immediately.
SYNC
Synchronizes signal output with an incoming trigger signal, i.e. the
DUT triggers data output to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The trigger sig-
nal is applied at the SYNC IN pin of the user interface.
*RST: AUTO
Example: EBOX:USER:TRIG:SOUR SYNC
uses a trigger signal from the DUT to synchronize signal output.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 282

Manual operation: See "Trigger Source" on page 119
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:STATe?
Queries the trigger status.
Return values:
<State> STOP | RUN
Example: EBOX:USER:TRIG:STAT?
Response: STOP, i.e. triggering is stopped.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Status" on page 120
9.3.9 SSI Subsystem
The USER:SSI subsystem contains the commands for configuring the signal transmis-
sion for SSI (serial synchronous interface) signals.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMData:RX|TX............................................................283
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMSize.......................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:FSELect.............................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:STATe...............................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:LFSYnc.......................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SIZE...........................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:FREQuency...............................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:PHASe......................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CSELect...............................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:FSELect...............................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:RBYTe?................................................................286
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:WBYTe.................................................................286
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMData:RX|TX <CMData>
In transmitter mode, the command defines the number of the C&M bit word as defined in
the size parameter, see [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMSize. In receiver
mode, you can query the number.
Parameters:
<CMData> string
Range: 0 to 32
Increment: 1
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:CMSIZE "8"
sets the word size to eight bit.
EBOX:USER:SSI:CMD:TX "#HA5,8"
EBOX:USER:SSI:CMD:RX?
Manual operation: See "C&M Data" on page 125
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 283

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMSize <CMSize>
Defines the number of the Control & Management bits, following the I/Q data word. The
size is defined from 0 up to 32 bits.
Parameters:
<CMSize> float
Range: 0 to 32
Increment: 1
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:CM:SIZE 8
sets 12 bit for control information.
Manual operation: See "C&M Size" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:FSELect <FSelect>
Defines a binary file contianing a gain table.
Parameters:
<FSelect> string
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:FSEL "gainFile.hex"
Manual operation: See "Gain File" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:STATe <State>
Activates the automatic gain handling.
Parameters:
<State> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: 0
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:STAT ON
Manual operation: See "Enable Automatic Gain" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:LFSYnc <Lfsync>
Parameters:
<Lfsync> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: 0
Manual operation: See "Late Frame Sync" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SIZE <Size>
Defines the word size an I or Q data word in bits.
Parameters:
<Size> float
Range: 4 to 24
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 284

Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:SIZE 12
sets the word size resolution to 12 bit.
Manual operation: See "Word Size" on page 124
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:FREQuency <Frequency>
Selects the system clock frequency.
Parameters:
<Frequency> 1MHZ | 2.5MHZ | 5MHZ | 8.333MHZ | 12.5MHZ | 25MHZ
*RST: 1MHZ
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOC:FREQ 12.5MHz
Manual operation: See "Clock Frequency" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:PHASe <Phase>
Selects the phase of the clock signal. Either 0 or 180 degree are possible.
Parameters:
<Phase> 0 | 180
*RST: 0
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOC:PHAS 180
shifts the phase of the clock signal by 180 degree.
Manual operation: See "Clock Phase" on page 125
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CSELect <CSelect>
Selects the SSI-SPI chip.
Parameters:
<CSelect> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: 0
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CSEL ON
Manual operation: See "Chip Select" on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:FSELect <FSelect>
Selects a SSI:SPI file.
Parameters:
<FSelect> string
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:FSEL "spidata"
Manual operation: See "Select File" on page 126
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 285

CPRI Remote Control Commands
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:RBYTe?
Queries the SSI:SPI byte.
Return values:
<RByte> integer
Example: EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:RBYT?
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Read Byte (hex)" on page 126
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:WBYTe <WByte>
Parameters:
<WByte> integer
Manual operation: See "Write Byte (hex)" on page 126
9.4 CPRI Remote Control Commands

This chapter describes all remote-control commands for the standardized protocol CPRI,
including their parameters and value ranges. The parameters are set in the configuration
software R&S DigIConf.
In remote control operation, R&S DigIConf itself is operated remotely by means of
remote-control commands. For background information about the SCPI command struc-
ture and basic information on operating R&S DigIConf via remote control, refer to chap-
ter 8, "Remote Control Basics", on page 213.
Beside the main controls like activating, CPRI test mode and save/recall settings, the
interface is controlled by various parameters, grouped by the following functions:
● Multiwaveform Playback (ARB) settings
● Control & Managment settings
● Hardware information
● L1 analysis information
● Main settings
● Recorder settings
● Diagnostics
● Downlink/Uplink settings (Tx/Rx)
● Vendor Data
Find a list of all commands for the R&S EX-IQ-BOX at the end of the manual.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 286

The following description lists the remote-control commands in alphabetical order, struc-
tured by function.
9.4.1 CPRI ARB Subsystem
The ARB subsystem contains all remote control commands that are relevant for loading
a waveform file in the waveform memory of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.To get a list of available
waveform files, see [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:CATalog? on page 249.
The numeric suffix to ARB<ch> distinguishes the channel of the waveform memory
(ARB1...4).
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:OPTion?.....................................................................287
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PEAK?.......................................................................287
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PRESet......................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RELoad......................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RMS?.........................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:SAMPles:TOTal?.........................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:CONFlict?............................................................289
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:FILE....................................................................289
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SAMPles?............................................................289
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SRATe?..............................................................290
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:STATe.................................................................290
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:OPTion?
Queries the options installed on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. The query returns a list of options
in a comma-separated string.
Return values:
<opt> string
Example: EBOX:CPRI:ARB:OPT?
check the installed options.
Response: EXBOX-B85, EXBOX-K10, EXBOX-K11,
EXBOX-K90, EXBOX-K242, ...
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PEAK?
Queries the signal level in terms of a peak envelope power value (PEP). The unit of the
peak envelope power is dBFS (Full Scale ratio).
Return values:
<peak> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PEAK?
queries the peak envelope power of the signal.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "PEP dBFS" on page 207
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 287

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PRESet
The command sets the wavefom memory to default, i.e. it erases the ARB table (all loaded
waveform files and settings).
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PRES
clears the ARB table.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reset" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RELoad
Refreshes all currently loaded waveform files.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:REL
update assigned files in the waveform memory.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reload" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RMS?
Queries the signal level in terms of an rms value. The unit of the power is dBFS (Full
Scale ratio).
Return values:
<rms> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RMS?
queries the rms value of the signal.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Level dBFS" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:SAMPles:TOTal?
Queries the number of samples including all active waveform files.
Return values:
<Total> float
Increment: 1.0e-6
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:SAMP:TOT?
check the entire number of samples.
Response: 0.154 MSamples
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Samples" on page 206
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 288

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:CONFlict?
The command queries whether an option conflict has occurred. A conflict arises, if a
waveform requires an option, that is not installed on the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, or is not
enabled.
Return values:
<Oconflict> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:CONF?
check if there is an option conflict.
Response: 0 if OK, 1 if not OK
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Options Conflict" on page 207
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:FILE <File>
The command selects a stored waveform file. Enter directory and file name with the file
extension *.wv for waveform files.
Parameters:
<File> <path>, <file_name>.<ext>
String parameter containing the directory, where the waveform file
is located, the file name, and the file extension *.wv for waveform
files.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB2:FILE
"..\\DigIConf\Waveforms\p4DQPSK7.wv"
load the file "waveform" into the second ARB waveform memory.
Manual operation: See "File" on page 205
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SAMPles?
The command queries the number of samples the loaded signal is composed of.
Return values:
<Samples> integer
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB1:SAMPl?
query the samples of the signal loaded in ARB1 waveform mem-
ory.
Response: 122.88
the current sample rate is 122.88 Mbit/s
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 289

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SRATe?
The command queries the sample rate of the signal, loaded from the waveform memory.
The sample rate represents the number of samples per second that are used for digitizing.
Return values:
<Srate> integer
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB1:SRAT?
query the sample rate of the signal loaded in ARB1 wavefiorm
memory.
Response: 122.88
the current sample rate is 122.88 Mbit/s
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Sample Rate /MHz" on page 206
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:STATe <State>
The command switches on the transmission of the test data.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:ARB1:STAT ON
activate waveform loaded in ARB1.
9.4.2 CPRI Control & Management Subsystem
The CPRI Control & Management (C&M) command subsystem comprises all remote-
control commands related to the process of exchanging control information between RE
(Radio Equipment) and REC (Radio Equipment Control) in base station systems. CPRI
supports two different protocols for C&M data, the slower variation HDLC (High-Level
Data Link Control) and the fast Ethernet.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:ACTive?................................................................291
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BAUDrate...........................................................291
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:BRATe?................................................................291
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:COMMand............................................................292
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:EXECute...............................................................292
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PPTR...................................................................292
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PTR?....................................................................293
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:STATe..................................................................293
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:ACTive?.............................................................293
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BRATe...............................................................294
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:COMMand..........................................................294
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 290

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:EXECute............................................................295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:MODE................................................................295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RFRames?.........................................................295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RST...................................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RX?...................................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SFRames?..........................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SOURce.............................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:STATe................................................................297
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:ACTive?
The command queries whether the interface is active.
Return values:
<Active> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:ACT?
check the activity of the Ethernet interface.
Response: 0
the interface is not active.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Ethernet Active" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BAUDrate <Baudrate>
Determines the number of bits to be transferred per second via the serial interface RS232.
Avvailable baudrates are: 300 | 600 | 1200 | 2400 | 4800 | 9600 | 14400 | 19200 | 28800
| 38400 | 56000 | 57600 | 115200 | 128000 | 256000 bps.
Parameters:
<Baudrate> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BAUD 2400
sets 2400 bits per second transmissioni rate.
Manual operation: See "RS232 Settings" on page 197
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:BRATe?
The command queries the resulting bit rate of fast C&M data exchange. This bit rate
depends on the CPRI line bit rate and the Ethernet pointer.
Return values:
<Rate> float
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 42240000
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 291

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:BRAT?
query the current bit rate of fast C&M.
Response: 122.88
the current bit rate is 122.88 Mbit/s.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Bit Rate" on page 199
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:COMMand <Command>
This command enters a control command in fast C&M interactive mode.
Parameters:
<Command> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:COMM "test cmd"
transmit the test command for fast C&M control to the control
panel.
SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:EXEC
execute the test command.
Manual operation: See "Input Window, Command line, Execute" on page 200
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:EXECute
The command sends the C&M data in fast C&M mode.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:EXEC
executes the control command, or command sequence of fast
C&M data.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Input Window, Command line, Execute" on page 200
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PPTR <Ptr>
This command sets the CPRI Ethernet pointer. This setting determines the Fast C&M bit
rate, since this pointer represents the boundary between vendor data and Fast C&M Data
in the CPRI control block.
Parameters:
<Ptr> 20...63
Range: 20 to 63
Increment: 1
*RST: 20
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PPTR 25
set the ethernet pointer to 25.
Manual operation: See "Pref. Eth. Pointer" on page 198
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 292

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PTR?
The command queries the resulting Ethernet pointer after the link setup, i.e. the position
after the handshake between the R&S EXBOX-B85 and the DUT.
Return values:
<Pptr> float
Range: 20 to 63
Increment: 1
*RST: 20
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PTR?
check the position of the ethernet pointer after link setup.
Response: 45
the resulting pointer is at position 45.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Ethernet Pointer" on page 167
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:STATe <State>
The command activates the C&M data exchange via the Ethernet interface.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:STAT ON
switches on fast C&M.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:ACTive?
The command queries whether the interface is active.
Return values:
<Active> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:ACT?
checks the activity of the HDLC interface.
Response: 0
the interface is not active.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "HDLC Active" on page 196
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 293

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BRATe <Rate>
The command sets the bit rate for transmission of the control data in slow C&M mode
(HDLC).
Note: The maximum HDLC rate for slow C&M depends on the CPRI Line Bit Rate. The
following table shows the available HDLC bit rates for the corresponding CPRI bit rates.
CPRI Line Bit Rate 2x (1228.8 Mbit/s) 4x(2457.6 Mbit/s) 5x (3072.0 Mbit/s)
Possible HDLC Bit Rates 240 240 240

in kbit/s 480 480 480
960 960 960
1920 1920
2400
Parameters:
<Rate> 240 | 480 | 960 | 1920 | 2400
Range: 240000 to 2400000
Increment: 1
*RST: 240000
Default unit: kbit/s
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BRAT 480
select a bit rate of 480 kbit/s for slow C&M transmission.
Manual operation: See "Bit Rate" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:COMMand <Command>
Enters a control command in slow C&M interactive mode.
Note that the command may perform a number of symbols that is divisible by 2. Odd
values are not accepted.
This command applies to HDLC C&M data source "Terminal", see [:SOURce<hw>]:
EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SOURce. In direct mode, that is control data received via the
RS-232-C interface, this command is not effective (CPRI REC Test mode).
Parameters:
<Command> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:COMM "test cmd"
transmits the test command for slow C&M control to the control
panel.
SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:EXEC
executes the test command.
Manual operation: See "Terminal" on page 197
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 294

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:EXECute
The command sends the entered slow C&M data.
This command applies to slow C&M source "Terminal". In direct mode, i.e. with data
coming via the RS-232 interface, the controls are not active (CPRI REC Test mode).
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:EXEC
executes the control command of slow C&M data.
Usage: Event
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:MODE <Mode>
The command selects the mode for HDLC C&M data transmission.
Parameters:
<Mode> DIRect | ECODing
DIRect
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX transmits the data directly to the DUT, i.e.
without internal encoding or decoding.
This mode applies to HDLC source "RS-232-C Connector".
ECODing
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX either encodes the plain text data before
transmission to the DUT, or it decodes and then displays the
incoming data.
This mode applies to HDLC source "Terminal".
*RST: ECODing
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:MODE DIR
send the data without internal encodin/decoding.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RFRames?
The command queries the number of received HDLC frames.
Return values:
<Rframes> float
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RFR?
query the number of received HDLC frames.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Frames Received" on page 197
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 295

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RST
Resets the Rx/Tx data.
Example: EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RST
Usage: Event
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RX?
Queries the received control & management data (HDLC).
Return values:
<Rx> string
Example: EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RX?
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SFRames?
The command queries the number of sent HDLC frames.
Return values:
<Sframes> float
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SFR?
query the number of sent HDLC frames.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Frames Sent" on page 196
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SOURce <Source>
The command selects the source of the HDLC C&M data.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 296

Parameters:
<Source> TERMinal
TERMinal|RS232
Use the integrated terminal of R&S DigIConf for C&M data input
or output.
This method applies to the CPRI RE test mode.
RS232
Use the RS-232-C connector for C&M data input or output.
You can use the RS-232-C interface in the CPRI RE and the CPRI
REC test mode.
*RST: TERMinal
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SOUR TERM
Enter the C&M data via the the terminal of R&S DigIConf.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 195
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:STATe <State>
The command activates and deactivates the C&M data exchange by means of HDLC
protocol (slow C&M).
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:STAT ON
switch on slow C&M.
9.4.3 CPRI Hardware Subsystem
The hardware (HW:) command subsystem encloses remote-control commands for setting
hardware parameters, including the assignment to the interfaces, special settings of the
link, status information and reference clock settings.
The numeric suffix to GPIO<dir> distinguishes the transmission direction of the con-
nected GPIO Interfaces.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:ALARm?......................................................................298
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:BBRevision?.................................................................298
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CMODe?......................................................................299
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CORE?........................................................................299
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:EBRevision?.................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FBVersion?..................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FCVersion?..................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:BFRame...............................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:HFRame...............................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:NFRame...............................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:DIRection.....................................................301
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 297

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:SIGnal.........................................................302
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:INPut.................................................................303
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP1[:STATe]........................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP2[:STATe]........................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SMA[:STATe].........................................305
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBRate........................................................................305
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOF?...........................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOS?...........................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:PROTocol....................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:R21T?.........................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CRLocked?......................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CSLocked?......................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:ROLocked?......................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:SOURce..........................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:RECeived?.........................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:SCRambling.......................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:DOSWing.............................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:RXEGain..............................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:T14T............................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TIMing?.......................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TOFFset......................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:ALARm?
This command queries, if any alarm is detected on the CPRI communication link, i.e. it
acts on behalf of all warnings.
Return values:
<Alarm> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:ALAR?
check if any link alarm is detected.
Response: 0
no error occured.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Link Status" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:BBRevision?
This command queries the revision number of the connected CPRI breakout board.
Return values:
<Bbrevision> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:BBR?
query the revision number of the connected breakout board.
Response: 4
the internal CPRI breakout board has revision 4.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 298

Manual operation: See "Breakout Board Revision" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CMODe?
Queries the role of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, i.e. either master (CPRI RE test) or slave (CPRI
REC test).
Return values:
<Cmode> string
Master
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working in CPRI RE Test mode.
Slave
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working in CPRI REC Test mode.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CMOD?
query the role of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX in the CPRI communication
link.
Response: Slave
the R&S EX-IQ-BOX operates as slave, i.e. in CPRI REC Test
mode.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "CPRI Mode" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CORE?
Queries the current state of the CPRI core.
Return values:
<Cstatus> string
Link is up
The CPRI core works in normal operating mode.
Reset
It is at the starting point of establishing the link.
L1 Synchronization
Attempt of L1 synchronization.
Setup protocol version
Protocol version setup.
Setup C&M parameter
C&M parameter setup.
Passive mode
Only I/Q data are active, C&M is not used.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CORE?
check the current mode of the CPRI core.
Response: Link is up
the CPRI conmmunication link operates in normal mode.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 299

Manual operation: See "Core Mode" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:EBRevision?
Queries the revision number of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX´s internal board.
Return values:
<Ebrevision> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:EBR?
query the revision number of the internal EX-IQ-BOX board.
Response: 123
the internal R&S EX-IQ-BOX board has revision 123.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "R&S EX-IQ-BOX Board Revision" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FBVersion?
Queries the version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) basic design.
Return values:
<Fbversion> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FBV?
check the version of the FPGA basic design.
Response: 02.01.123
the CPRI FPGA has revision 02.01.123.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "FPGA Base Version" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FCVersion?
Queries the version of the FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array) CPRI design.
Return values:
<Fcversion> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FCV?
query the version of the CPRI FPGA.
Response: CPRI 01.01.001
the CPRI FPGA has revision 01.01.001.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "FPGA CPRI Version" on page 154
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:BFRame <Width>
Sets the frame width of the basic frame marker output signal in clock periods.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 300

Parameters:
<Width> float
Range: 1 to 65535
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFW:BFR 5
increases the basic frame marker output signal to 5 clock periods.
Manual operation: See "Basic ; Hyper ; Node B" on page 163
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:HFRame <Width>
Sets the frame width of the hyper frame marker output signal in clock periods.
Parameters:
<Width> float
Range: 1 to 65535
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:NFRame <Width>
Sets the frame width of the node B frame marker output signal in clock periods.
Parameters:
<Width> float
Range: 1 to 65535
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:DIRection <Direction>
Determines the transmission direction at the connected GPIO interfaces. You can indi-
vidually activate each of the three interfaces separately.
The numeric suffix to GPIO<ch> distinguishes between the available GPIO interfaces.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 301

Parameters:
<Direction> OFF | OUTPut | INPut
Deactivate the GPIO interface.
OFF
Deactivates the GPIO interface.
OUTPut
Selects the respective GPIO interface as output, i.e. send a control
signal to the external device.
INPut
Selects the appropriate GPIO interface as input, which means you
receive a signal from the external device, e.g. for trigger purpose.
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO1:DIR OUTP
outputs the control signal at GPIO port 1.
Manual operation: See "Direction GPIO 1-3" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:SIGnal <Signal>
The command determines the type of the control signal. You can define separate signals
for each of the three interfaces.
The numeric suffix GPIO<ch> distinguishes between the GPIO interfaces 1, 2, 3 and 4.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 302

Parameters:
<Signal> CLOW | CHIGh | DLBFrame | DLHFrame | DLNFrame |
ULBFrame | ULHFrame | ULNFrame | TMCLock | RCLock | EXT1 |
EXT2 | EXT3 | NONe
GPIO output settings
In output mode, you can assign the following signals to the GPIO
interface.
CLOW|CHIGh
Sets the control signal to constant level high or low.
DLBFrame|ULBFrame
Takes the information in the CPRI basic frame for control. Accord-
ing to the WCDMA clock rate, the CPRI protocol synchronizes its
basic frame with 3.84 MHz.
DLHFrame|ULHFrame
Uses the CPRI hyper frame clock for control. The hyper frame
clock rate is 15 kHz.
DLNFrame|ULNFrame
Uses the information in the CPRI Node B frame for control. CPRI
updates the B node every 10 ms, i.e. you can control the DUT with
a clock rate of 100 Hz.
TMCLock
Uses the CPRI signal processing clock, e.g. 61.44 MHz at 2x line
rate. This clock is used for timing measurements like response
time, latency, etc..
RCLock
Uses the CPRI signal processing clock, e.g. 61.44 MHz at 2x line
rate. This clock is used for timing measurements like response
time, latency, etc..
EXT1|EXT2|EXT3
In input mode, each of the three GPIO ports provide also an exter-
nal trigger signal.
NONe
Deactivates the GPIO interface.
*RST: NONe
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO1:SIG DLNBF
use the information in the CPRI Node B frame for control.
Manual operation: See "Signal GPIO 1-3" on page 162
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:INPut <Input>
The command determines the interface for signal input. Only one interface can be active
at the same time.
Basically the R&S EX-IQ-BOX receives a CPRI signal via one of the optical interfaces
SFP1, or SFP2.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 303

Parameters:
<Input> SFP1 | SFP2 | SMA | LOOPback | NONE
SFP1
Selects the SFP1 (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface, at
which the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected to the DUT to receive the
signal.
SFP2
Selects the SFP1 (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface, at
which the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is connected to the DUT to receive the
signal.
SMA
Select the SMA (SubMiniatur version A) interface, if the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX receives the signal from the DUT on this transmission line.
LOOPback
Assigns the internal loopback, if the signal is routed back inter-
nally.
NONE
*RST: SFP1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:INP SFP1
assigns SFP1 for signal input.
Manual operation: See "Input (1409.7208.02) ; Input/Output (1409.7208.04)"
on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP1[:STATe] <State>
Determines the SFP1 (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface for signal output, i.e. aligns
the transmitter type of the DUT. You can activate more than one interface for the signal
output simultaneously, e.g. set SFP1 for signal transmission to the DUT, and SMA for
signal monitoring.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTP:SFP1 ON
activates the SFP1 interface for signal output.
Manual operation: See "Outputs" on page 160
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP2[:STATe] <State>
Determines the SFP2 (Small Form-factor Pluggable) interface for signal output, i.e. aligns
the transmitter type of the DUT. You can activate more than one interface for the signal
output simultaneously, e.g. set SFP2 for signal transmission to the DUT, and SMA for
signal monitoring.
The numeric suffix to SFP distinguishes between the available SFP interfaces.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 304

Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTP:SFP2 ON
activates the SFP2 interface for signal output.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SMA[:STATe] <State>
Determines the SMA (SubMiniatur version A) interface for signal output, i.e. aligns the
transmitter type of the DUT. You can activate more than one interface for the signal output
simultaneously, e.g. set SFP1 for signal transmission to the DUT, and SMA for signal
monitoring.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTP:SMA ON
activates the interface for signal output.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBRate <Lbrate>
Selects the line bit rate for the communication link.
The available line speed depends on the CPRIbreakout board version, see "CPRI Line
Bit Rate" on page 157
Parameters:
<Lbrate> LR2X | LR4X | LR5X | LRAuto | LR1X | LR8X | LR10X | LR16X
LR1X
1x614.4 Mbit/s
LR2X
2x1228.8 Mbit/s
LR4X
4x2457.6 Mbit/s
LR5X
5x3072.0 Mbit/s
LR8X
5x4915.2 Mbit/s
LR10X
5x6144.0 Mbit/s
LR16X
5x9830.4 Mbit/s
*RST: LR2X
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 305

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBR LR2X

sets the line bit rate 2x1228.8 Mbit/s.
Manual operation: See "CPRI Line Bit Rate" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOF?
Queries the CPRI frame delimiter K28.5.
Return values:
<Lof> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOF?
check if the frame delimiter K28.5 is detected.
Response: 1 (0 = no error)
the K28.5 frame delimiter is not found.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "LOF (Loss of Frame)" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOS?
The command queries data synchronization.
Return values:
<Los> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOS?
check if data is synchronized.
data lost their synchronization.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "LOS (Loss of Signal)" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:PROTocol <Protocol>
Determines the CPRI protocol version. The protocol version depends on the selected line
bit rate. See "Protocol Version" on page 158 for an overview.
Parameters:
<Protocol> V1 | V2
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:PROT V2
Selects CPRI version 2.0.
Manual operation: See "Protocol Version" on page 158
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 306

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:R21T?
Displays the cable delay.
Return values:
<r21> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:R21T?
Response: '-117 ns'
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "R21" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CRLocked?
This command queries, if clock recovery is unlocked. Clock recovery must be locked in
CPRI REC test mode.
Return values:
<Reclocked> 0|1
ON
The clock recovery is locked.
OFF
The clock recovery is unlocked.
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCL:CRL?
check if clock recovery is locked.
Response: 1
clock recovery is locked.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Clock Recovery Locked" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CSLocked?
This command queries, if the main PLL of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is unlocked. This state
is fundamental and must be locked in every operating mode of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Return values:
<Slocked> OFF | ON
ON
The PLL is locked.
OFF
The PLL is unlocked.
*RST: 1
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 307

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCL:CSL?
check if the PLL of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is locked.
Response: 0
the PLL is unlocked.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Clock Synthesis Locked" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:ROLocked?
This command checks, if the reference clock output is available.
A second synthesizer generates a 10 MHz reference clock selectable at one of the
GPIO interface connectors. The status LED turns blue, if the clock output is available.
Return values:
<Reflocked> 0|1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCL:ROL?
check if the reference clock output is available.
Response: 1
clock output is not available.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "10MHz Reference Output Locked" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:SOURce <Source>
Selects the reference signal source. In test mode CPRI RE, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is
synchronized either external or internally. Test mode CPRI REC uses the reference clock
embedded in the CPRI link.
The reference clock is extracted from the CPRI link. This selection is mandatory in a CPRI
REC test setup, since the R&S EX-IQ-BOX operates in CPRI slave mode.
Applies to a CPRI REC test mode.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 308

Parameters:
<Source> RIN | INTernal | CRECovery
RIN
CPRI RE test setup with a connected R&S instrument.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX synchronizes the CPRI communication link
with the reference signal provided by an R&S instrument. The 10
MHz signal is fed to the BNC connector REF IN on the back of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
INTernal
CPRI RE test setup, if the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is working stand-
alone.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX uses its internal reference oscillator for syn-
chronization.
CRECovery
CPRI REC test mode.
The reference clock is extracted from the CPRI link. This selection
is mandatory in a CPRI REC test setup, since the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
operates in CPRI slave mode.
*RST: RIN
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCL:SOUR RIN
set the internal clock source for reference.
Manual operation: See "Source" on page 155
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:RECeived?
Queries the scrambling seed used by the connected transmitter.
Return values:
<Received> string
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:REC?
Response: '3fffffff'
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Received Seed" on page 158
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:SCRambling <Scrambling>
Specifies the scrambling seed. This parameter applies to CPRI protocol versoin 2.0
Parameters:
<Scrambling> integer
Range: depends on other settings to depends on other set-
tings
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:SCR #H3FFFFFFF
Manual operation: See "Scrambling Seed" on page 158
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 309

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:DOSWing <Doswing>
Determines the differential output voltage swing of the CML (Current Mode Logic) trans-
mitter.
Parameters:
<Doswing> float
Range: 0.1 to 1.6
Increment: 0.1
*RST: 0.8
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:DOSW 1.0
sets 1.0 Vpp differential output voltage of the CML.
Manual operation: See "Differential Output Swing" on page 159
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:RXEGain <Rxegain>
The command sets the input gain of the equalizer. This equalizer is an active high-pass
filter, that equalizes the low-pass behaviour of the transmission medium, such as e.g. the
FR4 backplane. The gain, expressed in dB, relates to the freqeuncy of 2 GHz.
Fig. 9-4: CPRI - equalizer gain over frequency
Parameters:
<Rxegain> float
Range: 0 to 15
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 310

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:RXEG 10
sets the equalizer gain to 10 dB.
Manual operation: See "Rx Equalizer Gain" on page 159
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:T14T <time>
Sets the frame timing difference between the output signal at R1 and the input signal at
R4.
Depending on the CPRI test mode you can specify either T14 or TOffset. The other
parameter is calculated accordingly.
Parameters:
<time> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:T14T 180
sets T14=180 ns
Manual operation: See "T14" on page 157
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TIMing?
The command queris, if the R21 timing calculation is invalid (CPRI requirement 21).
Return values:
<Timing> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TIM?
check if timing calculation is correct.
the R21 timing calculation is invalid.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TOFFset <offset>
Sets the frame timing offset between the input signal at R2 and the output signal at R3.
Depending on the CPRI test mode you can specify either T14 or TOffset. The other
parameter is calculated accordingly.
Parameters:
<offset> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:HW:TOFF 10
sets 10 ns timing offset
Manual operation: See "TOffset" on page 157
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 311

9.4.4 CPRI L1 Analysis Subsystem
The L1 analysis (L1:) command subsystem contains the remote-control commands for
queryinng the link status.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:HDLC:BRATe?...............................................................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOF?.............................................................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOS?.............................................................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:RAI?..............................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOF?...........................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOS?...........................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RAI?............................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RESet?........................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:SAP?...........................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:VERSion?......................................................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:HDLC:BRATe?
Queries the HDLC bit rate value during link setup.
Return values:
<rate> float
Example: EBOX:CPRI:L1:HDLC:BRAT?
Response: 4800
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "HDLC Rate" on page 166
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOF?
Queries whether the received signal is synchronized correctly at the CPRI breakout
board, i.e. LOF (Loss of Frame).
Return values:
<lof> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOC:LOF?
queris if received data is synchronized.
Response: 1 (error), data lost synchronization.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Local Alarms" on page 168
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOS?
Queries whether LOS (Loss of Signal) has occurred in the received signal at the CPRI
breakout board.
Return values:
<lo> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 312

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOC:LOS?
check if loss of signal happened.
Response: 0 (no error)
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:RAI?
Queries the RAI (Remote Arm Indication) state at the CPRI breakout board, i.e. if any
remote part of the end-to-end link has failed.
Return values:
<rai> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOC:RAI?
check if a remote part of the end-to-end link has failed.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOF?
Queries whether the received signal is synchronized correctly at the DUT, that means
without LOF (Loss of Frame).
Return values:
<lof> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REM:LOF?
queries if the received data is synchronized.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Remote Alarms" on page 169
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOS?
Queries whether LOS (Loss of Signal) has occurred in the received signal at the DUT.
Return values:
<los> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REM:LOS?
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 313

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RAI?
Queries the RAI (Remote Arm Indication) state at the DUT, i.e. if any remote part of the
end-to-end link has failed.
Return values:
<rai> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REM:RAI?
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RESet?
Queries whether the DUT is in reset state.
Return values:
<reset> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
1
CPRI RE test mode: Confirms that a reset was performed.
CPRI REC test mode: Confirms a reset request.
0
CPRI RE test mode: No reset was performed.
CPRI REC test mode: No reset is requested.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REM:RES?
check the reset state of the DUT.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:SAP?
Queries whether the data communication failed (SDI Service Access Point Defect Indi-
cation).
Return values:
<sap> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REM:SAP?
check the data communication.
Response: 1 (error)
data communication failed.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 314

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:VERSion?
Queries the CPRI L1 inband protocol version.
Return values:
<ver> string
Example: EBOX:CPRI:L1:VERS?
Response: 2
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Protocol Version" on page 165
9.4.5 CPRI Main Control Commands
The main controls commands provide the selection of the "CPRI test mode", and com-
mands as "State" for activating, "Set to Default" for preset and "Save/Recall" for storing
or loading previously defined settings.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:MODE................................................................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRESet..............................................................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:STATe...............................................................................316
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VERSion?..........................................................................316
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:MODE <Mode>
Selects the CPRI test mode. The R&S EX-IQ-BOX simulates either the baseband module
or the RF module to test the appropriate counterpart.
Parameters:
<Mode> RETest | RECTest
RETest
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX works as RF module for testing the base-
band module (Radio Equipment).
RECTest
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX emulates the baseband module for testing
the RF module (Radio Equipment Control).
*RST: RETest
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:MODE RECT
activate CPRI REC test mode.
Manual operation: See "Mode" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRESet
Sets all parameters to default. Refer to chapter A.3.2, "CPRI Default Settings",
on page 372, with an overview of the most important default settings.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:PRES
set to CPRI default.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 315

Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Set To Default / Preset" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:STATe <State>
Activates the CPRI standardized protocol. The corresponding FPGA (Field Programma-
ble Array) is loaded automatically into the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:STAT ON
activates CPRI protocol transmission.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VERSion?
Queries the version of currently used CPRI standard protocol version.
Return values:
<Version> V4_2 | V5_0
Example: EBOX:CPRI:VERS?
Response: 'V5_0'
Usage: Query only
9.4.6 CPRI Recorder Subsystem
The CPRI:RECorder subsystem contains all remote-control commands that are rele-
vant for recording an I/Q signal and storing the recorded data in a waveform file.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:ABORt.........................................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce.............................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce:CATalog?.............................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SRATe?.............................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:EXECute......................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:CREate................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:SELect.................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RLENgth......................................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RTIMe?.......................................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATe?.......................................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATus?.....................................................320
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:POSition.........................................320
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:SOURce.........................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:VIEW...........................................................321
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 316

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:ABORt
Stops and cancels the recording. You can abort the recording at any time and restart
again.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:ABOR
stops recording.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Abort / Discard" on page 211
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce <Source>
Selects the signal source of the signal to be recorded. All RX signals are available. In
order to record a signal, the signal must be selected in the respective RX dialog. Either
the uplink signal in CPRI RE test mode, or the downlink signal of the CPRI REC testmode
are possible. Assign the signal "DIG OUT 2 IQ / Recorder" or "Recorder" under [:
SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGNal<ch>:OUTPut on page 331. Switch on signal
state, see [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STATe on page 352.
Parameters:
<Source> string
String parameter to specify the I/Q data source of the signal to be
recorded.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:DATA:SOUR "signal_1"
select the signal_1 for recording.
Manual operation: See "Data Source" on page 209
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce:CATalog?
Returns a list of data sources, i.e. output signals in the current, or specified directory.
Return values:
<Srcs> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:DATA:SOUR:CAT?
read out all waveform files of the current directory.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Data Source" on page 209
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SRATe?
Queries the sample rate of the recorded signal.
Return values:
<Srate> float
*RST: 3840000
Default unit: Hz
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 317

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:DATA:SRAT?
query the sample rate value of the selected signal.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Sample Rate" on page 210
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:EXECute
Starts the recording.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:EXEC
starts recording of the currently selected signal.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Record" on page 211
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:CREate
This command creates a file and stores the recorded data.
Note:R&S DigIConf stores the recorded data in the waveform file format with the prede-
fined file extension *.wv. By default, waveform files are stored in the directory %Pro-
gram Files%/Rohde-Schwarz/DigIConf/Settings, unless another directory is selected.
File name and the directory are user-selectable.
Parameters:
<path>, <filename> String parameter to specify directory, path and filename.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:FILE:CRE
save the recorded data in a file
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Save to File" on page 211
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:SELect <Select>
Saves the the recorded data in a file. Filename and directory are specified within the
command.
If no file of the specified name exists, it is created. The file extension may be omitted.
R&S DigIConf stores the recorded I/Q data streams in the R&S WinIQSim2 waveform
file format with the predefined file extension *.wv.
Setting parameters:
<Select> <path>, <file_name>
String parameter to select directory, path and file name.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:FILE:SEL "D:
\3GPP_CPRIRE.wv"
select the recorded file 3GPP_CPRIRE.wv from D:\ directory.
Usage: Setting only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 318

Manual operation: See "Save" on page 211
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RLENgth <Length>
Sets the data length to be recorded in samples.
Parameters:
<Length> integer
Specifies the number of samples to be recorded.
Range: 1 to 128000000
Increment: 1
*RST: 100 Samples
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:RLENgth 1024
record 1024 samples of the signal.
Manual operation: See "Recording Length" on page 209
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RTIMe?
Queries the recording time. The recording time results from the recording length and the
sample rate.
Return values:
<Duration> float
Range: 0 to 2147483647 s
Increment: 0.000001
*RST: 0
Default unit: s
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:RTIM?
returns the time needed for recording.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Recording Time" on page 210
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATe?
This command queries whether the selected data source signal is active or not. If inactive,
the recorder cannot be started.
Return values:
<State> 0|1
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:STAT?
Response: 0 (inactive)
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 319

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATus?
Return values:
<Status> IDLE | FRUN | READy | WTRigger | TRIGgered | DONE
Returns the state of the recording process.
IDLE
Recording is inactive. Configure the recorder in that state.
The recorder remains in "Idle" state until you start with Execute.
FRUN
The recorder records the signal continuously in a ring memory.
These data are required for pre-trigger analyzes.
READy
Recording has passed through the ring memory once at least, i.e.
it has described the memory completely. At this point the data is
valid and R&S DigIConf activates the trigger signal automatically.
WTRigger
The recorder continues recording until the trigger event occurs.
Then the process switches to the next state.
If trigger source "Software" is used, the trigger event occurs imme-
diately.
TRIGgered
After the trigger event, only the remaining samples after the trigger
position are recorded (post-trigger data).
DONE
If all post-trigger data are recorded, the recording is completed and
the recorder stops. The data is available in the memory.
*RST: IDLE
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:STAT?
Response: WTR, i.e. the process is waiting for a trigger event.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See " Recorder Status Diagram" on page 210
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:POSition <Position>
Determine the position of the trigger event on the waveform. The position provides to
realize a pre-trigger recording, as well as a post-trigger recording. The value is set in the
samples from 0 to Recording Length-1.
● Post-trigger, i.e. position 0 at the beginning of the waveform enables to evaluate the
signal after the trigger event.
● Pre Trigger, with the trigger position at the end of the waveform, provides the evalu-
ation of the signal before the trigger event.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 320

Parameters:
<Position> integer
Specify a numeric value.
Range: 0 to 99
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:TRIG:POS 2
set trigger position 2.
Manual operation: See "Trigger Position" on page 209
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:SOURce <Source>
Select the trigger source for starting the recording. A trigger event can be initiated by the
software itself or by hardware events.
Parameters:
<Source> SOFTware | EXT1 | EXT2 | EXT3 | TXBF | TXHF | TXNF | RXBF |
RXHF | RXNF | SYNC
SOFTware
Software trigger starts the recording immediately after the record
is switched on. No other event is necessary.
EXT1...3
Starts recording with an external trigger event.
External trigger events are generated by the hardware and fed at
the GENERAL PURPUSE IO interface.
TXBF|TXHF|TXNF|RXBF|RXHF|RXNF
Starts recording with an external trigger event. These trigger
events come within the CPRI communication link.
Available trigger evens are:
CPRI DL/UL Basic Frame: TXBF | RXBF
CPRI DL/UL Hyper Frame: TXHF | RXHF
CPRI DL/UL NodeB Frame: TXNF | RXNF
SYNC
Starts recording after a specific dync pattern is received.
*RST: SOFTware
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:REC:TRIG:SOUR EXT2
start recording with an external trigger event, fed at the 2nd GPIO
interface.
Manual operation: See " Trigger Source" on page 209
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:VIEW
Calls the viewer program ARB toolbox, to view the currently loaded IQ data stream.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 321

Example: EBOX:CPRI:REC:VIEW "d:

\user\temp\qpsk_dirac_3_84Hz"
calls the ARB toolbox to view the IQ content of the file.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "View" on page 212
9.4.7 CPRI Settings Subsystem
With the commands of the SETTing subsystem, you can save settings of a CPRI appli-
cation, or recall previously saved configurations. It covers all commands for file handling.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:CATalog?.............................................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:DELete.................................................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:LOAD...................................................................323
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:STORe.................................................................323
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:CATalog?
The command queries the available settings files in the specified directory. Settings files
are used to store current application settings. Only files with the file extension *.cpri will
be listed.
Access to the files via remote is possible using the commands of the MEMM subsystem.
Return values:
<Catalog> string
String parameter to select the directory where settings files are
stored.
Example: MEMM:CDIR "d:\DigIConf\Settings\CPRI"
Set the default directory and path to
d:\DigIConf\Settings\CPRI.
SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:SETT:CAT?
read out all settings files of the \DigIConf\Settings\CPRI
directory on drive d:
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Save / Recall" on page 152
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:DELete <Delete>
The command removes a settings file from the specified directory.
Setting parameters:
<Delete> <directory>, <file_name>, <ext>
Determine the file to be deleted by adding directory, file name and
the file extension (*.cpri).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 322

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:SETT:DEL "d:

\DigIConf\Settings\CPRI\RETest.cpri"
delete the file RETest.cpri.
Usage: Setting only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:LOAD <Load>
The command loads a previously saved CPRI configuration. Define directory and file
name, R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the file extension *.cpri.
Setting parameters:
<Load> <directory>, <file_name>
name for loading the settings file.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:SETT:LOAD "D:
/USER/CPRISettings/RETest"
load the CPRI settings file RETest.cpri from the directory
d:\USER\CPRISettings.
Usage: Setting only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:STORe <Store>
Saves the current CPRI signal configuration. Specify the directory and file name.
R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the file extension *.cpri to CPRI configuration
files.
Setting parameters:
<Store> <directory>, <file_name>
name for storing the settings file.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:SETT:STOR "D:
/USER/CPRISettings/RETest"
save the currently defined CPRI settings in the file
RETest.cpri in the directory d:\USER\CPRISettings.
Usage: Setting only
9.4.8 CPRI Test & Diagnostics Subsystem
The TEST: & Diagnostics subsystem contains the remote-control commands to get
information on the SFP transceiver connection and RX alarms. You also find the com-
mands for executing a low level BER test in this panel.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 323

The numeric suffix to SFP<st> distinguishes the SFP interfaces (SFP1,SFP2).

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:RATE?.........................................................324
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:STATe.........................................................324
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:WORDs?......................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:TX:STATe..........................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRBS:RST.........................................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOF?...................................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOS?...................................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RAI?....................................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RESet?................................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:SDI?....................................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:INFO?.........................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:LOS?..........................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:DISabled?...............................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:FAULt?...................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:REReset..............................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:SDI......................................................................329
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:RATE?
The command queries the number of bit errors. This function consecutively counts the
number of discrepancies that occur during the test. The BER result is the ratio, which is
calculated by dividing the number of error bits by the total number of bits.
Return values:
<Rate> float
Range: 0 to 1.000
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:RATE?
query the number of bit errors.
Response: 2
2 bit errors occured during low level BER test.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Rx BER" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:STATe <State>
Switches on the test receiver.
Parameters:
<State> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:STAT ON
switch on test receiver.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 324

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:WORDs?
The command queries the number of received IQ words during low level BER RX test.
Low level BER test consecutively counts the number of received words in order to com-
pare them with the sent data and to determine the error rate.
Return values:
<Words> integer
Increment: 1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:WORD?
query the number of received IQ words.
Response: 10005
R&S DigIConf received 10005 words during low level BER test.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Rx Received Bits" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:TX:STATe <Execute>
The command starts the transmission of the test data.
Parameters:
<Execute> ON | OFF
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:TX:STAT ON
start PRBS TX test.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRBS:RST
Resets the PRBS test.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Reset" on page 193
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOF?
Queries whether the received signal is synchronized correctly, i.e. LOF (Loss of Frame).
Return values:
<Lof> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOF?
check if received data is synchronized.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Flags" on page 166
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 325

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOS?
The command queries a Loss of Signal (LOS).
Return values:
<Los> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOS?
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RAI?
The command queries the RAI (Remote Arm Indication) state, i.e. if any remote part of
the end-to-end link has failed.
Return values:
<Rai> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RAI?
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RESet?
Checks the reset state of the DUT.
Return values:
<Reset> 0|1
1
CPRI RE test mode: Confirms that a reset was performed.
CPRI REC test mode: Confirms a reset request.
0
CPRI RE test mode: No reset was performed.
CPRI REC test mode: No reset is requested.
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RES?
check the reset state of the DUT.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 326

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:SDI?
The command queries if the data communication failed (SDI Service Access Point Defect
Indication).
Return values:
<Sdi> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:SDI?
check the data communication.
Response: 1 (error)
data communication failed.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:INFO?
The command provides information on all SFP module parameters.
Return values:
<Info> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP:INFO?
query all parameters of the SFP1 module.
Response: 'Vendor:R&S, Part number:
90567, 'Connector:LC, 'Bit Rate:
2400kbit/s, 'Wave Length:1024,...'.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "SFP Diagnostics" on page 204
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:LOS?
Queries whether data communication via the SFP module failed and the signal was lost.
Return values:
<Sloss> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP1:LOS?
check whether the data was transferred correctly through the
SFP1 module, or whether the signal was lost.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "SFP LEDs" on page 204
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 327

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:DISabled?
Queries whether the interface of the breakout board and the SFP transmission line are
disabled.
Return values:
<Disabled> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP:TX:DIS?
check the interface between the breakout board and the SFP
transmission line.
Response: 1 if active 0 if inactive.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:FAULt?
Queries the error states at the SFP interfaces. If a SFP is disconnected, R&S DigIConf
responses with 0 (error).
Return values:
<Fault> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP:TX:FAUL?
check if a transmission error occured.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:REReset <Rereset>
The command sets or clears the bit on the downlink connection which requests the RE
to reset.
Note: This function applies to CPRI RE test mode. In this mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Parameters:
<Rereset> ON | OFF
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:RER ON
request the RE to reset.
Manual operation: See "RE Reset" on page 170
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 328

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:SDI <Sdi>
Activates the SDI (Service Access Point Defect Indication) defect indicator. This function
intentionally provokes an SDI event, in order to examine whether the DUT evaluates it.
In realtime applications, the function detects whether an SAP (Service Access Point) is
defective or not working properly.
Note: The command applies to CPRI RE test mode. In this mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Parameters:
<Sdi> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:SDI ON
activate transmitter SAP Defect Indication.
Manual operation: See "SDI" on page 169
9.4.9 CPRI TX/RX - Downlink/Uplink Subsystem
The {TX|RX} subsystem comprises the remote control commands related to the CPRI
Uplink and Downlink.
Depending on the CPRI test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works either as a transmitter
(TX) or receiver (RX), as shown in the following diagrams.
Terms used in the description and familiar synonyms

UL (Uplink): The UL defines the direction from a mobile device to a base station. A
synonym to UL is RL (Reverse Link).
DL (Downlink): The DL defines the direction from the base station to the mobile device.
A synonym to DL is FL (Forward Link).
● In CPRI RE test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works in the DL (downlink) as a trans-
mitter (TX) and in the UL (uplink) as a receiver (RX).
TX Downlink
EXBOX DUT
EX-IQ-BOX
B85 CPRI RE
RX Uplink
Fig. 9-5: CPRI RE test - schematic representation
● In CPRI REC test mode, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX works in the DL as a receiver (RX) and
in the UL as a transmitter (TX).
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 329

Downlink RX
DUT EXBOX
EX-IQ-BOX
CPRI REC B85
Uplink TX
Fig. 9-6: CPRI REC test - schematic representation
The downlink and uplink settings are similar; they both define the signals I/Q data and
their distribution inside the CPRI basic frame container (AxC allocation).
The following description of a remote-command applies to both directions of transmis-
sion. {TX|RX} depicted in curly brackets in the command syntax, distinguishes the
transmission direction.
The numeric suffix <ch> to SIGNal distinguishes the selected signal. Up to 24 signals
can be addressed. The signals are indexed in ascending order according to their position
in the list.
<ch> exclusively addresses the position of the signal in the list. It does not select a signal
with an index in the signal name.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGNal<ch>:OUTPut......................................................331
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:ARM...........................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:SOURce.....................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SFRame<st>:DATA.............................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGNal<ch>:SOURce.....................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:APPLy.....................................................................333
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC:COUNt?...........................................................333
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:BADDress...............................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:CONFlict?................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:PSRC?....................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SIZE?.....................................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SOURce?................................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:WADDress..............................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXCStatus?.............................................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:ASSigned?...................................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:AVAilable?....................................................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:INTerleaving.............................................................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:APPend........................................................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:COUNt?.......................................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:CONFlict?......................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:FILE?............................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:ALLocation.....................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:ASSign?.............................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:NEEDed?...........................340
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:ASSigned?.........................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:NEEDed?...........................341
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 330

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:STATus?............................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:LIST?............................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:COPY...................................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:CRESt...................................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:DELete..................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:GAIN.....................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:GROup<user0>:PATTern..........................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce:GROup:CALC.............................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup:COUNt....................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:REPetition...................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:STATe........................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:IQResolution..........................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NAME...................................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NFORmat..............................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:OSAMpling............................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:PLENgth................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:RMS?...................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:SRATe..................................................349
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STANdard.............................................350
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STATe..................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:WARNing?...............................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGNal<ch>:OUTPut <Output>
Determines the output interface, to transmit the received baseband signal from the DUT
to an R&S instrument and/or to the built-in I/Q recorder. That is, if you work in the RE
Test Uplink or the REC Test Downlink mode.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX extracts the I/Q baseband signal of the CPRI protocol, and forwards
it to an R&S instrument. Simultaneously, you can also record the signal with the I/Q
recorder.
Parameters:
<Output> IQOutput | RECorder | SYNC | PRBS
IQOutput
Selects the DIG IQ IN 2 interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX for signal
output.
RECorder
Selects the built-in I/Q recorder as the destination for the received
signal.
SYNC
Checks one AxC inside the CPRI frame against a static synchro-
nization pattern.
PRBS
Activates the BER test to measure the bit error rate of the CPRI
link.
*RST: IQO
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGN:OUTP IQO
assigns the digital interface to signal output.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 331

Manual operation: See "Signal Output" on page 174
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:ARM
Stops the current signal transmission. It continues either automatically or synchronized,
according to the used start condition.
Manual operation: See "Run" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:SOURce <Trigger>
Defines the start condition for the scheduler, for data transmission and analysis.
Parameters:
<Trigger> SOFTware | EXT1 | EXT2 | EXT3 | TXBF | TXHF | TXNF | RXBF |
RXHF | RXNF | SYNC
Manual operation: See "Start Condition" on page 188
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SFRame<st>:DATA <StaticFrameData>
Fills the complete CPRI frame with a static pattern for debugging purposes. This pattern
is transmitted as it is, without scaling, rounding or interleaving.
Parameters:
<StaticFrameData> integer
Example: [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SFRame<st>:DATA
"102010110000"
Manual operation: See "Frame Data" on page 176
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGNal<ch>:SOURce <Source>
Determines the signal source for signal transmission to the DUT. That is, if you work in
the RE Test Downlink or the REC Test Uplink mode.
The signal comes either from an R&S instrument via the Digital I/Q Interface of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX, or the signal is generated internally or by means of the waveform
memory in the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
The R&S EX-IQ-BOX converts the I/Q format of the signal into the CPRI protocol format.
Embedded with additional control information, the link transfers the data to the DUT.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 332

Parameters:
<Source> PATTern | IQIN | ARB1 | ARB2 | ARB3 | ARB4 | STATic | PRBS
PATTern
Uses the internal pattern generator as signal source.
IQIN
An R&S instrument applies a digital baseband signal at DIQ IQ IN
1 connector of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX.
ARB1...4
Selects one of the waveform memories with a loaded I/Q signal.
Notes:
This feature requires, that the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is equipped with
the appropriate waveform memory option.
A conflict arises, if no signal is loaded in the memory, or is not
activated.
The Multi Waveform options support simultaneous playback of up
to four signals. For information on the available options refer to
chapter 3.2.2.3, "Waveform Memory, Multi Waveform Playback
and Recording Memory ", on page 23.
STATic
Fills the complete CPRI frame with a static pattern for debugging
purposes. This pattern is transmitted as it is, without scaling,
rounding or interleaving.
PRBS
Generates a PRBS pattern.
*RST: IQIN
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:SOUR ARB1
selects the signal of the first waveform memory as signal source.
Manual operation: See "Physical Source" on page 173
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:APPLy
Assigns the downlink/uplink settings in order to become effective.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:APPL
accept the settings.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Arm" on page 189
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC:COUNt?
Queries the number of used AxCs.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 333

Return values:
<Count> integer
Range: 1 to 24
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC0:SOUR?
check the number of used AxCs.
Response: 18
18 AxCs are currently in use.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:BADDress <Baddress>
The position of the AxC within the CPRI basic frame is defined by word address and bit
address. This command queries or defines the bit address, i.e. the starting bit inside the
word, see [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:WADDress
on page 336.
Parameters:
<Baddress> float
Range: 0 to 38
Increment: 2
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC0:BADD 0
set the starting bit to "0".
Manual operation: See "AxC Table" on page 188
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:CONFlict?
A conflict arises, when AxCs overlap. The command queries the status of overlapping.
Return values:
<Conflict> OFF | ON
No overlapping occurred.
AxCs overlapped.
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC3:CONF?
check if AxC3 overlaps with a previous one.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:PSRC?
Queries the physical signal source.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 334

Return values:
<src> PATTern | IQIN | IQOutput | ARB1 | ARB2 | ARB3 | ARB4 |
RECorder | STATic | SYNC | PRBS
Example: EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC0:PSRC?
Response: "PATT"
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SIZE?
Queries the size of the AxC in bits. The size depends on the selected signal source.
With the exception of signals from the signal source Sync Pattern, the size is calculated
using the following formula:
AxC _ sizeaxc bit  I / Q Re solutionsignal  2
For Sync Pattern signals, calculate the source with the formula:
AxC _ sizeaxc bit  Pattern Lengthsignal
Return values:
<Size> integer
Range: 2 to 40
Increment: 1
*RST: 32
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC1:SIZE?
check the AxC size.
Response: 32
the length of AxC1 is 32 bit.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SOURce?
Queries the signal name the AxC is assigned to.
Note: This command applies to downlink.
Return values:
<Source> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC0:SOUR?
check the signal allocated in AxC 0.
Response: signal_1
signal_1 is assigned to the first AxC.
Usage: Query only
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 335

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:WADDress <Waddress>
The position of the AxC within the CPRI basic frame is defined by word address and bit
address. This command queries or defines the word address, i.e. with which word the
AxC starts, while the bit address specifies the bit index inside the word, see [:
SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:BADDress on page 334.
Parameters:
<Waddress> integer
Range: 0 to 38
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:AXC0:WADD 15
start at word address 20 with the signal in the first AxC.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXCStatus?
The command queries the status of all AxCs.
Return values:
<Axcstatus> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:RX:AXCS?
check the staus of all AxCs in receiver mode.
Response: 1 if active 0 if not active.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:ASSigned?
Queries the assigned I/Q data rate of all active signals. This parameter depends on the
size of each assigned AxC and is calculated with the formula:
Data Rateassigned Mbit / s   AxC _ sizeaxc  3.84MHz 
Return values:
<Assigned> float
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:DRAT:ASS?
query the data rate of all active signals.
Response: 491.52 Mbit/s
the entire data rate of the active signals is 491.52' Mbit/s.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 336

Usage: Query only

Manual operation: See "Assigned Data Rate (AxC)" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:AVAilable?
Queries the available data rate for the I/Q data in the AxC container.
Data RateavaliableMbit / s   DataWord Count  Word Lengthbit  3.84MHz

 15  Word Lengthbit  3.84MHz
Note: The word length depends on the line bit rate, refer also to "CPRI Basic Frame
Graph" on page 186.
Return values:
<Available> float
Increment: 1000
*RST: 921600000
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:DRAT:AVA?
query the available I/Q data rate.
the CPRI basic frame provides a data rate of 921.6 Mbit/s for I/Q.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Available Data Rate (I/Q)" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:INTerleaving <Interleaving>
Activates I/Q data interleaving.
Parameters:
<Interleaving> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: EBOX:CPRI:TX:INT ON
activates interleaving.
Manual operation: See "I/Q Data Interleaving" on page 187
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:APPend
Adds a new signal to the list. R&S DigIConf attaches a signal with default parameter
values, a predetermined name and a name index following the last list entry.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:APP
adds a new signal as second list item to the signal list.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Append" on page 173
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 337

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:COUNt?
This command queries the number of active signals.
Return values:
<Count> integer
Range: 1 to 24
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:COUNt?
check the number of used signals.
Response: 3
3 signals are currently in use.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:CONFlict?
The command queries the status of a signal loaded from a waveform memory. A conflict
arises, if a waveform memory is selected as signal source and no signal is loaded in the
memory, or is not activated.
Return values:
<Conflict> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:ARB:CONF?
check if the signal in the waveform memory is loaded and activa-
ted.
Response: 1 if active 0 if ARB is off.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:FILE?
Queries the loaded waveform file from a waveform memory signal source.
Notes:
This parameter is relevant when operating with ARB. I.e., if you load a file and select the
signal source ARB, R&S DigIConf indicates the file name. For standard communication
signals, the field is hidden.
R&S DigIConf loads waveforms calculated by simulation software such as Matlab or R&S
WinIQSIM2 into the memory of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. With the aid of the CPRI breakout
board, the R&S EX-IQ-BOX then embeds the signal into the CPRI protocol.
Return values:
<File> string
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 338

Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:ARB:FILE?
query the currently loaded wave file.
Response: p4DQPSK7_68M_OV4_2016Samples.wv
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Wave file" on page 176
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:ALLocation <Allocation>
Defines how to allocate the AxCs to the signal. R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the
AxCs to a signal, and this parameter specifies the method.
Parameters:
<Allocation> PACKed | FLEXible
PACKed
The AxCs allocate a continuous area inside the CPRI basic frame.
Word address and offset address of the first AxC define the start-
ing position. If possible, the following AxCs are placed succes-
sively. The signal AxCs are automatically laid in a free area of the
CPRI frame. If there is not enough free space, the signal AxCs are
placed at the beginning of the base frame, i.e. at the position of
word 1.
FLEXible
Manually assign the position of the AxCs by word address and
offset address.
Tip: Use this setting, to embed each sample of a signal individually
within the CPRI basic frame.
Range: 1 to 4
*RST: PACKed
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:AXC:ALL FLEX
selects flexible to manually assign the AxC position.
Manual operation: See "AxC Allocation" on page 180
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:ASSign?
Queries the assigned number of AxCs and the assigned data rate. The assigned data
rate depends on the signal group settings, i.e. on the repetition rate and the number of
active AxCs per group.
Data Rateassigned [Mbit/s] = 3.84 [MHz] x 2 x I/Q Resolution (∑(AxC_on_countgrp x Repe-
titiongrp) / ∑(Repetitiongrp))
Note: In case of "Sync Pattern" signals, the assigned data rate depends on the pattern
length and the sample rate. It is calculated by the sample rate as shown:
Data Rateassigned = Sample Rate x Pattern Length
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 339

Return values:
<Assign> integer
Range: 1 to 24
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:AXC:COUN:ASS?
check the data rate and the AxCs assigned to the second signal.
Response: 3 / 368.40 Mbit/s
this signal requires 3 AxCs and a data rate of 368.4 Mbit/s.
To checkup, ask whether the allocated values fit to the required
values:
SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:AXC:DRAT:STAT?
Refer also to [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:
SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:STATus? on page 341.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "(Assigned)" on page 181
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:NEEDed?
Queries the needed number of AxCs and the required data rate.
Depending on the sample rate, a signal needs one or more AxCs to carry its I/Q data. If
possible, R&S DigIConf automatically assigns the number of needed AxCs to the signal.
Note: The maximum number of AxCs for all signals is 24.
The needed number of AxCs is calculated with the formula:
AxCsneeded = ceil (Sample Rate x Oversampling / 3.84 [MHz])

Data Rateneeded [Mbit/s] = Sample Rate x Oversampling x 2 x I/Q Resolution
Note: For signal source "Pattern" the needed number of AxCs is 1.

Return values:
<Needed> integer
Range: 1 to 24
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:AXC:COUN:NEED?
check the data rate and the AxCs needed from the second signal.
Response: 3 / 358.40 Mbit/s
this signal requires '3' AxCs and a data rate of '358.4' Mbit/s'.
To checkup, ask whether the needed values fit to the assigned
values:
SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:AXC:DRAT:STAT?
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 340

Usage: Query only

Manual operation: See "AxC(s) / Data Rate" on page 180
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:ASSigned?
Queries the data rate assigned to the signal.
The assigned data rate depends on the signal group settings, i.e. on the repetition rate
and the number of active AxCs per group.
Data Rateassigned [Mbit/s] = 3.84 [MHz] x 2 x I/Q Resolution (∑(AxC_on_countgrp x Repe-
titiongrp) / ∑(Repetitiongrp))
Note:
In case of "Sync Pattern" signals, the assigned data rate depends on the pattern length
and the sample rate. It is calculated by the sample rate as shown:
Return values:
<Assigned> float
Increment: 10000
*RST: 122880000
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:AXC:DRAT:ASS?
check the data rate of the first signal.
this signal is transmitted with 122.88 Mbit/s data rate.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:NEEDed?
Queries the data rate required from the signal.
This command applies to downlink.
Return values:
<Needed> float
Increment: 10000
*RST: 122880000
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:AXC:DRAT:NEED?
check the data rate the first signal needs.
this signal uses 122.88 Mbit/s data rate.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:STATus?
Queries whether the assigned data rate fits to the required data rate.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 341

Deviations in data rates! Refer to the example under "Example to CPRI Groups Con-
cept" on page 189, on what to do if the values do not fit.
Return values:
<Status> OFF | ON
The needed and the assigned data rates values are the same. No
error occurs.
The needed and the assigned data rate values differ. Signal trans-
mission cannot be performed. To fix the problem, proceed as
described in "Example to CPRI Groups Concept" on page 189.
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:AXC:DRAT:STAT?
checks if the assigned values fit to the values required from the
signal.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Status LED" on page 181
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:LIST?
Return values:
<List> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:AXC:LIST?
query the AxCs assigned to the second signal.
Response: AXC3, AXC4, AXC5 this signal uses 3 AxCs.
Usage: Query only
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:COPY
Creates a copy of a signal selected with the index <ch>. The function copies the param-
eter values and assigns the same name with suffix for distinction. The new signal is added
at the end of the list, i.e. the index of the copied signal is incremented by 1 after the last
signal.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN3:COPY
copies the third signal from the list of downlink signals.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Copy + Append" on page 173
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:CRESt <Crest>
Sets the crest factor. This parameter is required for the correct indication of the RMS
Level value, see [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:RMS?
on page 348.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 342


The crest factor must correspond to the input signal. Enter the value, e.g. a connected
baseband generator provides.
Note: Crest factor applies to external signals, i.e. to digital standards or to user defined
Parameters:
<Crest> float
Range: 0 to 30
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:CRES 10dB
set the 10 dB crest factor.
Manual operation: See "Crest Factor" on page 180
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:DELete
Removes a signal from the list. The function removes the corresponding AxCs from the
list of used AxCs. The signal is selected by the index <ch>.
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:DEL
removes the second signal from the list of downlink signals.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Delete" on page 173
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:GAIN <Gain>
Sets a gain value for the I/Q signal. Positive values lead to a digital signal amplification,
and negative values correspond to a digital signal attenuation. A gain value of 0 dB results
in an unchanged level of the I/Q signal. By default, the value is set to 0 dB.
Parameters:
<Gain> float
Range: -40 to 6
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Default unit: dB
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:GAIN -20
set -20 dB gain.
Manual operation: See "Gain" on page 179
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 343

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:GROup<user0>:PATTern <pattern>
Queries the binary data pattern of an AxC and responses in binary format.
Enter the required pattern with the command, respecting the syntax as follows:
"#B0101010101010101,16"
#B = binary representation
0101010101010101 = pattern
16 = pattern length
See also the example below for a complete command.
By default, all data pattern is set to zero. You can basically set up to 40 bits, but the
currently possible number depends on the signal length that is specified in "Pattern
Length" on page 177.
Parameters:
<pattern> integer
Example: EBOX:CPRI:TX:GRO:PATT "#B0101010101010101,16"
insert the pattern for the first signal, and assign the signal to AxC1
in the first group of the AxC allocation table,
Manual operation: See "Groups Table" on page 183
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce:GROup:CALC
Calculates the scheduling sequences of the groups.
Usage: Event
Manual operation: See "Auto" on page 182
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup:COUNt <Count>
Determines the number of groups for a signal. The grouping enables to achieve arbitrary
sample rates that are not necessarily integer multiples of the CPRI basic frame rate. Each
group defines an AxC configuration for a certain time, i.e. repetitions. Thus you can
change the AxC assignment over time by using more than one group with different set-
tings.
Parameters:
<Count> integer
Range: 1 to 4
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: EBOX:CPRI:TX:SOUR:GRO:COUN 2
specify 2 groups for distribution of the first signal in the CPRI
frame.
Manual operation: See "Number of Groups" on page 182
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 344

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:REPetition
<Repetition>
Selects the AxC group and specifies the number of repetitions of the signal, that menas
how many CPRI basic frames follow the current group setting.
The numeric suffix GROUP<user0> distinguishes the selected group. Up to 4 groups can
be specified. These are "G #0" to "G #3".
Note: AxC status and AxC pattern depend on the used signal sources. Status refers to
externally used sources and pattern indicates the coding of the AxCs with internal signal
source.
Parameters:
<Repetition> integer
Range: 1 to 20000
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: EBOX:CPRI:TX:SOUR:GRO:REP 3
repeats the signal of Group1 3 times.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:STATe <state>
Activates the respective AxC. By default, all AxCs are activated.
Parameters:
<state> 0 | 1 | OFF | ON
*RST: ON
Example: EBOX:CPRI:TX:SOUR:GRO:STAT ON
activates AxC1 in the first group of the AxC allocation table.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:IQResolution <Iqresolution>
Sets the I/Q resolution in bits. The resolution is valid for both, the I and the Q values. I.e,
if you set the resolution to 16 bits, the sample rate is 32 bits wide, composed of 16-bit I
and 16-bit Q.
Parameters:
<Iqresolution> float
Range: 4 to 18
Increment: 1
*RST: 16
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:IQR 16
sets 16 bits I/Q resolution.
Manual operation: See "I/Q Resolution" on page 179
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 345

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NAME <Name>
This command enters or changes the signal name.
Parameters:
<Name> string
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN4:NAME "sig_3gpp"
assign the signal name sig_3gpp to the fourth signal of the list in
transmitter mode.
Manual operation: See "Signal Name" on page 173
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NFORmat <Nformat>
Selects a numeric representation for data transmission.
-2n-1 ≤ n ≤ +2n+1
-8 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-7 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
-6 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
-5 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
-4 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
-3 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
-2 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0
-1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
2 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
3 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1
4 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
5 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
6 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0
7 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
9E2 encoding format is used in mobile base stations to extend the dynamic range of I
and Q, while reducing the needed amount of bits.
The coding is 9E2 with 9 bits mantissa and 2 bits exponent, that are shared from I and
Q, as shown in the figure.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 346

I mantissa
I0 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9
Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8 Q9
Common Q mantissa
exponent
Fig. 9-7: 2's complement 9E2
The I and Q samples of the 2's complement 9E2 are calculated with the formulas:
I sample 10 bits = 9 bits mantissa + 1 bit, i.e. bit_0 exponent
 7  
I     2i  I i 1   28  I 9   22Q0 I 0 
  
  i 0  
Q sample 10 bits: 9 bits Q mantissa + 1 bit, i.e. bit_1 exponent
 7  
Q     2i Qi 1   28 Q 9   22Q0 I 0 
  
  i 0  
Parameters:
<Nformat> COMPlement | C9E2 | BOFFset
COMPlement
Formats the signal in two's-complement.
The most significant bit has a value of -2n-1, the bits of lesser sig-
nificance follow as:
+2n-2...+20
C9E2
Formats the signal in two's-complement variant 9E2.
BOFFset
Formats the signal in binary offset.
positive.
Example
positive.
*RST: COMPlement
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN2:NFOR COMP
set the numeric format of the second signal to 2's complement 2.
Manual operation: See "Numeric format" on page 177
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 347

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:OSAMpling <Osampling>
Determine the oversampling factor.
Note: Oversampling appliers to external signals, i.e. to digital standards or to user defined
pattern or a waveform file, the parameter is already considered and therefore not relevant.
Parameters:
<Osampling> integer
Range: 1 to 4
Increment: 1
*RST: 1
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:OSAM 2
sets oversampling factor 2.
Manual operation: See "Oversampling" on page 177
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:PLENgth <Plength>
Defines the length of the pattern used by the internal pattern generator.
Note: The parameter applies to the physical source PATTern.
Parameters:
<Plength> float
Range: 2 to 40
Increment: 2
*RST: 16
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:PLEN 4
sets the pattern length 4.
Manual operation: See "Pattern Length" on page 177
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:RMS?
Queries the rms level of the signal. The signal level is expressed in terms of an rms value.
It always refers to both signal components (SQR(I2+Q2)).
In order to get the RMS value correctly, the crest factor of the signal must be specified,
see [:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:CRESt on page 342.
Note: The RMS level refers to external signals, i.e. to digital standards or to user defined
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 348

Return values:
<Rms> float
Range: -40 to 6
Increment: 0.01
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:RMS?
query the crest factor.
Response: -10 dbFS
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "RMS Level" on page 180
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:SRATe <Srate>
Queries the sample rate. If you process user defined signals, you can set the value.
Consider that the sampling rate of the R&S signal generator fits to the sampling rate of
R&S DigIConf, as well as to the sampling rate of the R&S signal analyzer.
The table shows the predefined sample rates of the available signals. The sample rate
of a digital standard varies corresponding to the frequency.
Table 9-5: Sample rate values, depending on the signal type
GSM/EDGE 270.8333 kHz
3GPP FDD 3.84 MHz
CDMA 2000 1.228 MHz
LTE 1.4 MHz 1.92 MHz
3.0 MHz 3.84 MHz
5.0 MHz 7.68 MHz
10.0 MHz 15.36 MHz
15.0 MHz 23.04 MHz
20.0 MHz 30.72 MHz
WiMAX 3.5 MHz 4.0 MHz
5.0 MHz 5.6 MHz
7.0 MHz 8.0 MHz
8.75 MHz 10.0 MHz
10.0 MHz 11.2 MHz
Sync Pattern 3.84 MHz
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 349

Parameters:
<Srate> float
Range: 1000 to 100000000
*RST: 3840000
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:SRATe?
query the sample rate of the first signal in transmitter mode.
Manual operation: See "Sample Rate" on page 176
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STANdard <Standard>
This command selects a communication standard. R&S DigIConf provides the selection
of a standard signal with automatically assigned sample rate. Alternatively, select a signal
from a waveform file, the ARB function, or assign user-specific values.
R&S DigIConf supports all current standards and their variants. When selecting a stand-
ard signal, the program automatically sets the relevant parameters and values.
For example, a loaded digital standard automatically adjusts the needed AxCs, assigns
the sample rate, and sets up several other relevant parameters.
Note: The digital standard signals, or user defined signals refer to external signal input
or output, i.e. the physical signal sources DIG IQ IN or DIG IQ OUT.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 350

Parameters:
<Standard> USER | W3GPP | LTE_1M4 | LTE_3M | LTE_5M | LTE_10M |
LTE_15M | LTE_20M | WIMAX_3M5 | WIMAX_5M | WIMAX_7M |
WIMAX_8M75 | WIMAX_10M | CDMA2K | WIMAX_20M | GSM
USER
Specifies a user defined signal for transmission, define a signal
with arbitrary parameters.
W3GPP
Selects the parameters of the W-CDMA standard 3GPP FDD.
W-CDMA (Wideband Code Division Multiple Access) covers the
radio technology UMTS (Universal Mopbile Telecommunications
System). 3GPP (3rd Generation Partnership Project) is a collab-
oration between groups of telecommunication associations, which
define a globally applicable third generation mobile phone system
specification. 3GPP standardization comprises all GSM and W-
CDMA specifications.
LTE_1M4|LTE_3M|LTE_5M|LTE_10M|LTE_15M|LTE_20M
Selects an LTE (Long Term Evolution) signal. Based on UMTS,
LTE provides a wireless broadband internet system with voice and
other services built on top, e.g. authentication.
LTE bandwidths: 1.4 | 3.0 | 5.0 | 10.0 | 15.0 | 20.0 MHz
WIMAX_3M5|WIMAX_5M|WIMAX_7M|WIMAX_8M75|
WIMAX_10M|WIMAX_20M
Selects the digital standard IEEE 802.16 WiMAX (Worldwide Inter-
operability for Microwave Access). WiMAX provides wireless
transmission of data using a variety of transmission modes, as e.g.
point-to-multipoint links or mobile internet access.
WiMAX bandwidths: 3.5 | 5.0 | 7.0 | 8.75 | 10.0 | 20.0 MHz
CDMA2K
Selects a signal that follows the CDMA standard.
CDMA2000 (Code Division Multiple Access) uses a multiple
access scheme for digital radio, to send voice, data, and signaling
data (such as a dialed telephone number) between mobile phones
and cell sites.
GSM
Selects a signal that follows te GSM/EDGE standard.
GSM/EDGE (Global System for Mobile Communications/
Enhanced Data Rates for GSM Evolution) covers the 2nd gener-
ation mobile radio technology. Selecting this signal standard, the
sample rate is set to 270,833333 kSps. This sample rate does not
fit well into the CPRI basic frame rate. Therefore, the sampling rate
of GSM/EDGE is only achieved by using a rather complicated
group setup, the AxC settings over time.
*RST: W3GPP
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGN:STAN LTE_20M
select an LTE signal with 20 MHz bandwidth.
Manual operation: See "Standard" on page 175
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 351

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STATe <State>
The command activates a signal for transmission selected with <ch>.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGN:STAT ON
activates the fist signal for transmission in reciever mode.
Manual operation: See "Signal State" on page 173
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:WARNing?
The command asks if settings have been changed, but not accepted.
Return values:
<Warning> 0|1
*RST: 0
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:TX:WARN?
check if changed settings have been accepted.
Response: 1 if settings are not yet accepted, 0 if OK.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Apply Setup" on page 189
9.4.10 CPRI Vendor Data Subsystem
The VENDor:DATA command subsystem provides input of user-specific information via

remote control commands.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DATA<ch>.............................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DIRection..............................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:STATe...................................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:WWIDth?...............................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DATA<ch> <Data>
Queries or determines vendor-specific data for transmission, depending on the trans-
mission mode.
Parameters:
<Data> integer
The value range depends on the word width.
Range: "depends on other settings" to "depends on other
settings"
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:VEND:DATA 16,#H2A
determine vendor-specific data for transmission.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 352

Manual operation: See "Vendor Data Table" on page 203
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DIRection <Direction>
The command selects the data direction for vendor data exchange.
Parameters:
<Direction> DOWN | UP
DOWN
CPRI RE test mode (TX): User data entered in the table is embed-
ded in the CPRI link for transmission to the DUT.
CPRI REC test mode (RX): Vendor data is extracted from the
CPRI link and displayed in the table.
UP
CPRI RE test mode (RX): Vendor data is extracted from the CPRI
link and displayed in the table.
CPRI REC test mode (TX): User data entered in the table is
embedded in the CPRI link for transmission to the DUT.
*RST: DOWN
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:VEND:DIR DLIN
determine the direction for vendor data transmission.
Manual operation: See "Direction" on page 201
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:STATe <State>
The command starts and stops vendor data exchange.
Parameters:
<State> OFF | ON
*RST: OFF
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:VEND:STAT ON
start vendor data exchange.
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:WWIDth?
The command queries the word width. The word width depends on the CPRI line bit rate.
The following table shows the word width related to the line bit rate
Table 9-6: Word width related to the line bit rate.
Line bit rate Word width
[Mbit/s] [bits]
2x (1228.8) 16
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 353

Line bit rate Word width
4x (2457.6) 32
5x (3072.0) 40
Note: By determining the line bit rate, the DUT also defines the word width. See also
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBRate on page 305.
Return values:
<Wwidth> float
Range: 1 to 18
Increment: 1
*RST: 16
Example: SOUR1:EBOX:CPRI:VEND:WWID?
query the word width.
Usage: Query only
Manual operation: See "Word Width" on page 202
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 354

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Interfaces
User Interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
10 Interfaces
The following chapters describe the characteristics of the user interface and the available
breakout boards.
10.1 User Interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX

The user interface depends on the selected protocol, i.e. the functions of the pins change
depending on the standard.
The pin description and pinout table in the following chapters refer to the user interface
of User Defined protocols, i.e. for single ended or differential applications. For these
applications the user interface provides the transmission of serial or parallel I/Q data,
data clock and control signals.
10.1.1 Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector
Type: Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector
Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics
Part number: 6367557-1
10.1.2 Pin Description
The user interface consists of a specific and a common part. In the specific part the pins
are assigned individually for each breakout board. They are located on the left and the
right side of the connector. The common part with fixed pin assignment is located in the
middle of the connector.
The pin assignment of the specific part is defined by designing the layout of the breakout
boards.
The common pin assignment is shown in Pinout Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector (User
Interface). Additionally, the specific pin assignments of the user interface are shown in
the respective drawings of the breakout boards, which are attached to the operating
manual.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 355

User Interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX
Information on Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector

The described pin assignment applies to applications with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX controlled
by R&S DigIConf. If an R&S Instrument controls the R&S EX-IQ-BOX directly, the pinout
varies. For information on the differences, refer to chapter 10.1.3, "Advanced pinout with
R&S DigIConf", on page 357.
Find detailed information on the PC Board Footprint, the Housing and the Block Diagram
Mating Face Configuration in the customer drawing C-6367557, attached to the operating
manual.
Table 10-1: Pinout Z-DOK-Adapter Board Connector (User Interface)
Signal Name Pin Dir Description
BO_TYPE0 A2 I breakout board identification or

EEPROM
BO_TYPE1 A1 I
BO_SENS Z3, X3, Y3, W3 breakout board sense
UI_I_N/P0 ... UI_I_N/P17 F1/F2 ... C9/C10 I/O I data (real part)
UI_Q_N/P0 ... UI_Q_N/P17 C13/C14 ... D23/D24 I/O Q data (imaginary part)
UI_VALID_N/P F13/F14 I/O indicates valid data blocks

Note: This signal must be active in
receiver mode.
D_CLK_UIN_N/P F25/F26 I interface clock input.

Note: This clock signal is required as
a reference for PLL. Therefore, it
must be active continuously.
D_CLK_UOUT_N/P A13/A14 O interface clock output
UI_GP_N/P0 ... UI_GP_N/P5 [1] F11/F12 ... A25/26 I/O additional protocol dependent con-
trol / signaling. If not needed the sig-
nal can be unconnected.
UI_AUXIO_N/P0 ... UI_AUXIO_N/P3 A23/A24 ... D11/D12 I/O additional auxiliary signals
TX_N_A/TX_P_A A27/A28 O high speed serial transmitter output.

These signals are used by standar-
TX_N_B/TX_P_B F27/F28 O dized protocols.
TX_N_C/TX_P_C D2/D1 O
RX_N_A/RX_P_A D28/D27 I high speed serial receiver input.

These signals are used by standar-
RX_N_B/RX_P_B C28/C27 I dized protocols.
RX_N_C/RX_P_C C26/C25 I
[1]
GP0 ... GP5 correspond to the General Purpose signals 0...5 as they are named in
other R&S instruments and R&S devices.
The N/P notation applies to differential interface standards (LVDS). For single ended
standards (e.g. LVTTL) only the P signals are used.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 356

LAN Connector
10.1.3 Advanced pinout with R&S DigIConf
The configurator software R&S DigIConf supports additional signals at the user interface,
compared to direct control of the R&S DigIConf by an R&S instrument. The advanced pin
assignment applies only to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX 1409.5502.02.
As a result, the pin configuration changed:
● reduction of word length 20 to 18 bits for additional AUX IO signals
● renaming of UI_MARKER_ / UI_TRIGGER_/ UI_RESERVE to general purpose sig-
nals UI_GP...
The following table points out the differences in pin assignment depending on the control
of R&S DigIConf or R&S Instruments:
Table 10-2: User Interface > pinout when the R&S EX-IQ-BOX is controlled by ...
Pin ... R&S DigIConf ... R&S Instruments
Signal Name Dir. Description Signal Name Dir. Description
D11/D12 UI_AUXIO_N/P0 I/O additional auxili- UI_I_N/P18 I/O I data (real part)
ary signals
A11/A12 UI_AUXIO_N/P1 I/O UI_I_N/P19 I/O
A23/A24 UI_AUXIO_N/P2 I/O UI_Q_N/P18 I/O Q data (imaginary

part)
F23/F24 UI_AUXIO_N/P3 I/O UI_Q_N/P19 I/O
F11/F12 UI_GP_N/P0 I/O additional proto- UI_MARKER_N/P0 I/O additional protocol

col dependent dependent con-
C11/C12 UI_GP_N/P2 control / signaling. UI_TRIGGER_N/P0 I/O trol / signaling
If not needed the
D25/D26 UI_GP_N/P3 signal can be UI_TRIGGER_N/P1 I/O
unconnected.
C23/C24 UI_GP_N/P4 UI_MARKER_N/P1 I/O
D13/D14 UI_GP_N/P1 UI_RESERVE_N/P0 I/O
A25/A26 UI_GP_N/P5 UI_RESERVE_N/P1 I/O
10.2 LAN Connector
Fig. 10-1: 10/100/1000 LAN
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 357

Breakout Boards
Table 10-3: LAN connector > pinout
Pin Num- Signal Description

ber
1 TXP
2 TXN
3 RXP
4 Not used
5 Not used
6 RXN
7 Not used
8 Not used
10.3 Breakout Boards

The digital interface module R&S EX-IQ-BOX communicates with the aid of a breakout
board directly with the DUT. A variety of available breakout boards provide convenient
customization of digital signal formats, since they are all connected at the same interface
(user interface) of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX. Thus with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX and the appro-
priate breakout board you can easily perform applications of user-defined or standardized
transmission protocols.
The following chapters provide information on the interfaces, connectors and pinouts of
the available breakout boards:
● chapter 10.1, "User Interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 355
– chapter 10.3.1.1, "Breakout Board Single Ended 3585.7280.00", on page 359
– chapter 10.3.1.2, "Breakout Board Differential 3585.7296.00", on page 361
– chapter 10.3.1.3, "Breakout Board Cadence Palladium 090002-24x",
on page 364
● chapter 10.3.3, "CPRI - Option R&S EXBOX-B85", on page 367
10.3.1 User Defined
Various interchangeable breakout boards are available for adjusting customer specific
signal formats to the common R&S digital signal format.
A breakout board is connected directly to the user interface on the front panel of the
R&S EX-IQ-BOX without using a cable. The pin assignment for each breakout board is
defined by the layout.
Two breakout boards for User Defined protocols are included in delivery of the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX:
● single ended 090002-22x, type II, see Breakout Board Single Ended 3585.7280.00
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 358

Breakout Boards
● differential 090002-23x, type III, as described in Breakout Board Differential

3585.7296.00
For the Cadence emulation as a specific application of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX with the
Protocol Tester R&S CMW, a Cadence breakout board is also provided, see chap-
ter 10.3.1.3, "Breakout Board Cadence Palladium 090002-24x", on page 364. You find
the description to this test case in the internet under http://www.rohde-schwarz.com/
appnote/1CM75.
10.3.1.1 Breakout Board Single Ended 3585.7280.00
This breakout board contains the counterpart to the user interfaceof the R&S EX-IQ-BOX,
i.e. a Z-DOK-Adapter board connector (X1), and two connectors for adjusting the external
user signals.
The breakout board is intended for testing single ended signals. The signals are assigned
to two 25-pole connectors.
Connector Type X2, X3 - Single Ended
Type: 2x25-pole connector
Manufacturer: Harting
Part number: 0919 550 6324
Connector Locations - Single Ended
Fig. 10-2: Connector locations on Single Ended breakout board
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 359

Breakout Boards
Pin Description - Single Ended

Table 10-4: Pinout 2 x 50-pin connectors (BreakOut-Board 2, 3585.7280.00)
Pin Signal Name Comment Pin Signal Name Comment

Number Number
X2.1 UI_I_P0 I component (single X3.1 UI_Q_P0 Q component (sin-

ended) gle ended)
X2.3 UI_I_P1 X3.3 UI_Q_P1
X2.11 UI_I_P5 X3.11 UI_Q_P5
X2.13 UI_I_P6 X3.13 UI_Q_P6
X2.15 UI_I_P7 X3.15 UI_Q_P7
X2.17 UI_I_P8 X3.17 UI_Q_P8
X2.19 UI_I_P9 X3.19 UI_Q_P9
X2.21 UI_I_P10 X3.21 UI_Q_P10
X2.23 UI_I_P11 X3.23 UI_Q_P11
X2.25 UI_I_P12 X3.25 UI_Q_P12
X2.27 UI_I_P13 X3.27 UI_Q_P13
X2.29 UI_I_P14 X3.29 UI_Q_P14
X2.31 UI_I_P15 X3.31 UI_Q_P15
X2.33 UI_I_P16 X3.33 UI_Q_P16
X2.35 UI_I_P17 X3.35 UI_Q_P17
X2.37 AUX_IO_P0 auxiliary signals X3.37 AUX_IO_P2 auxiliary signals
X2.39 AUX_IO_P1 X3.39 AUX_IO_P3
X2.41 GP_GP0 additional protocol X3.41 GP_GP4 additional protocol

dependent control / dependent control /
X2.43 GP_GP1 signaling X3.43 GP_GP5 signaling
X2.45 GP_GP2 X3.45 GP_GP3
X2.47 D_CLK_UOUT_P interface clock out- X3.47 D_CLK_UIN_P interface clock input
put
X2.49 UI_VALID_P indicates valid data X3.49 n.c.

blocks
even GND even GND

num- num-
bered bered
pins pins
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 360

Breakout Boards
In receiver mode, the signal UI_VALID_P/N must be operated and continuously active,
since this clock signal is required as a reference for the PLL.
Information on the pinouts of the connectors - Single Ended Breakout Board

Find a detailed pin assignment to this breakout board in the appendix of the operating
manual, drawing number 3585.7280.00. The drawing covers the user interface, connec-
tor X1 as well as the connectors X2 an X3.
10.3.1.2 Breakout Board Differential 3585.7296.00
The breakout board supports test cases with differential signals. It contains the Z-DOK-
Adapter board connector (X1), for connection to the user interface of the R&S EX-IQ-
BOX, and two 50-pole SMD connectors for assigning the differential signals.
Connector Type X2, X3 - Differential
Type: 2x50-pole connector
Manufacturer: Samtec
Part number: ASP-65067-01
Connector Locations - Differential
Fig. 10-3: Connector locations on Differential breakout board
Pin Description - Differential

Table 10-5: Pinout 2 x 100-pin Samtec Connectors (Breakout-Board 3, 3585.7296.00)
Pin Number Signal Name Comment Pin Number Signal Name Comment
X2.1, X2.2 GND I component X3.1, X3.2 GND Q component

(differential) (differential)
X2.3 UI_I_N0 X3.3 UI_Q_N0
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 361

Breakout Boards
X2.5, X2.6 GND X3.5, X3.6 GND
X2.7 UI_I_N1 X3.7 UI_Q_N1
X2.9, X2.10 GND X3.9, X3.10 GND
X2.11 UI_I_N2 X3.11 UI_Q_N2
X2.12 UI_I_P2 X3.12 UI_Q_P2
X2.13, X2.14 GND X3.13, X3.14 GND
X2.15 UI_I_N3 X3.15 UI_Q_N3
X2.16 UI_I_P3 X3.16 UI_Q_P3
X2.17, X2.18 GND X3.17, X3.18 GND
X2.19 UI_I_N4 X3.19 UI_Q_N4
X2.20 UI_I_P4 X3.20 UI_Q_P4
X2.21, X2.22 GND X3.21, X3.22 GND
X2.23 UI_I_N5 X3.23 UI_Q_N5
X2.24 UI_I_P5 X3.24 UI_Q_P5
X2.25, X2.26 GND X3.25, X3.26 GND
X2.27 UI_I_N6 X3.27 UI_Q_N6
X2.28 UI_I_P6 X3.28 UI_Q_P6
X2.29, X2.30 GND X3.29, X3.30 GND
X2.31 UI_I_N7 X3.31 UI_Q_N7
X2.32 UI_I_P7 X3.32 UI_Q_P7
X2.33, X2.34 GND X3.33, X3.34 GND
X2.35 UI_I_N8 X3.35 UI_Q_N8
X2.36 UI_I_P8 X3.36 UI_Q_P8
X2.37, X2.38 GND X3.37, X3.38 GND
X2.39 UI_I_N9 X3.39 UI_Q_N9
X2.40 UI_I_P9 X3.40 UI_Q_P9
X2.41, X2.42 GND X3.41, X3.42 GND
X2.43 UI_I_N10 X3.43 UI_Q_N10
X2.44 UI_I_P10 X3.44 UI_Q_P10
X2.45, X2.46 GND X3.45, X3.46 GND
X2.47 UI_I_N11 X3.47 UI_Q_N11
X2.48 UI_I_P11 X3.48 UI_Q_P11
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 362

Breakout Boards
X2.49, X2.50 GND X3.49, X3.50 GND
X2.51 UI_I_N12 X3.51 UI_Q_N12
X2.52 UI_I_P12 X3.52 UI_Q_P12
X2.53, X2.54 GND X3.53, X3.54 GND
X2.55 UI_I_N13 X3.55 UI_Q_N13
X2.56 UI_I_P13 X3.56 UI_Q_P13
X2.57, X2.58 GND X3.57, X3.58 GND
X2.59 UI_I_N14 X3.59 UI_Q_N14
X2.60 UI_I_P14 X3.60 UI_Q_P14
X2.61, X2.62 GND X3.61, X3.62 GND
X2.63 UI_I_N15 X3.63 UI_Q_N15
X2.64 UI_I_P15 X3.64 UI_Q_P15
X2.65, X2.66 GND X3.65, X3.66 GND
X2.67 UI_I_N16 X3.67 UI_Q_N16
X2.68 UI_I_P16 X3.68 UI_Q_P16
X2.69,X2.70 GND X3.69,X3.70 GND
X2.71 UI_I_N17 X3.71 UI_Q_N17
X2.72 UI_I_P17 X3.72 UI_Q_P17
X2.73, X2.74 GND auxiliary signals X3.73, X3.74 GND auxiliary signals
X2.75 AUX_IO_N0 X3.75 AUX_IO_N2
X2.77, X2.78 GND X3.77, X3.78 GND
X2.79 AUX_IO_N1 X3.79 AUX_IO_N3
X2.81, X2.82 GND additional proto- X3.81, X3.82 GND additional proto-
col dependent col dependent
X2.83 GP_N0 control / signal- X3.83 GP_N4 control / signal-
ing ing
X2.84 GP_P0 X3.84 GP_P4
X2.85, X2.86 GND X3.85, X3.86 GND
X2.87 GP_N2 X3.87 GP_N3
X2.88 GP_P2 X3.88 GP_P3
X2.89, X2.90 GND X3.89, X3.90 GND
X2.91 GP_N1 X3.91 GP_N5
X2.92 GP_P1 X3.92 GP_P5
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 363

Breakout Boards
X2.93, X2.94 GND interface clock X3.93, X3.94 GND interface clock
output input
X2.95 D_CLK_UOUT X3.95 D_CLK_UIN_N
_N
X2.96 D_CLK_UOUT X3.96 D_CLK_UIN_P

_P
X2.97, X2.98 GND indicates valid X3.97, X3.98 GND

data blocks
X2.99 UI_VALID_N X3.99 n.c.
X2.100 UI_VALID_P X3.100 n.c.
The signal UI_VALID_P/N must be active in receiver mode. This clock signal is required
as a reference for PLL. Therefore, it must be active continuously.
Information on the pinouts of the connectors - Differential breakout board

Find a detailed pin assignment to this breakout board in the appendix of the operating
manual, drawing number 3585.7296.00. The drawing covers the user interface, connec-
tor X1 as well as the connectors X2 and X3.
10.3.1.3 Breakout Board Cadence Palladium 090002-24x
This breakout board, option R&S EXBOX-Z3 consists of the connector to the R&S EX-
IQ-BOX and one connector for adjusting the external user signals.
The breakout board is used for signal transmission between a cadence palladium emu-
lator and R&S measurement equipment. The signals are assigned to a 68-pole SCSI
connector.
Type: 68-pole D Subminiatur SCSI connector
Manufacturer: Tyco Electronics
Part number: 787170-7
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 364

Breakout Boards
Connector Locations
Fig. 10-4: Connector locations on Cadence Palladium breakout board
Pin Description
Table 10-6: Pinout 1 x 68-pin connector

Num- Num-
ber ber
X2.1 UI_I_P0 I component X2.35 GND
X2.2 UI_I_P1 X2.36 GND
X2.10 UI_I_P9 X2.44 GND
X2.11 UI_I_P10 X2.45 GND
X2.12 UI_I_P11 X2.46 GND
X2.13 UI_I_P12 X2.47 GND
X2.14 UI_I_P13 X2.48 GND
X2.15 UI_I_P14 X2.49 GND
X2.16 UI_I_P15 X2.50 GND
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 365

Breakout Boards

Num- Num-
ber ber
X2.17 UI_Q_P0 Q component X2.51 GND
X2.18 UI_Q_P1 X2.52 GND
X2.19 UI_Q_P2 X2.53 GND
X2.20 UI_Q_P3 X2.54 GND
X2.21 UI_Q_P4 X2.55 GND
X2.22 UI_Q_P5 X2.56 GND
X2.23 UI_Q_P6 X2.57 GND
X2.24 UI_Q_P7 X2.58 GND
X2.25 UI_Q_P8 X2.59 GND
X2.26 UI_Q_P9 X2.60 GND
X2.27 UI_Q_P10 X2.61 GND
X2.28 UI_Q_P11 X2.62 GND
X2.29 UI_Q_P12 X2.63 GND
X2.30 UI_Q_P13 X2.64 GND
X2.31 UI_Q_P14 X2.65 GND
X2.32 UI_Q_P15 X2.66 n.c.
X2.33 D_CLK_UOUT_P interface clock output X2.67 D_CLK_UIN_P interface clock input
X2.34 D_CLK_UOUT_N X2.68 UI_VALID_P indicates valid data

blocks
Information on the pinouts of the connectors - Cadence Palladium breakout board

Find the pin assignments of this breakout board in the appendix of the operating manual,
drawing number 090101-331-25AEZ00. The drawing covers the user interface, connec-
tor X1 and the SCSI connector X2.
10.3.2 Other Customer Breakout Boards
Other connected Customer Breakout Boards always run in "User defined" mode. This
mode will only work properly if the beakout board is recognized as a "customer board".
In order for the breakout board to be recognized as a "Customer Breakout Board", the
following conditions must be met:
The signals BO_TYPE0, BO_TYPE1 and BOB_SENSE
must be set to LOW.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 366

Breakout Boards
Information on the pinouts of the connectors

Find the pin assignments of the connector X1 in the appendix of the operating manual,
drawing number 3585.7280.00.
10.3.3 CPRI - Option R&S EXBOX-B85
The CPRI breakout board performs tests directly at the CPRI interface between the REC
(base station radio equipment control) and the RE (base station radio equipment).
The board contains the user interface to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, two different interfaces for
data exchange with the DUT, two interfaces for additional control & management infor-
mation exchange, and three general purpose interfaces.
On the front panel, two SFP cages support the optical link. The breakout board addition-
ally contains a differential electrical interface, realized by four SMA connectors.
The front panel also provides the connectors for C&M data exchange. For fast C&M, use
the Ethernet interface, and for slow C&M, the RS-232-C interface.
Three BNC connectors for general purposes, input or output, enable controlling the DUT,
or reading the signals from the DUT, such as for user-specific purposes. These connec-
tors are located on top of the breakout board.
Connect the breakout board directly at the user interface with the R&S EX-IQ-BOX, i.e.
without using a cable. Use in all other interfaces the suitable cables and modules to make
sure that data transmission works properly.
10.3.3.1 Connector Locations - CPRI Breakout Board
The schematic view shows the location of the connectors of the CPRI breakout board,
which are briefly listed after the graphic.
Find detailed information about the specification and properties of the interfaces in the
CPRI data sheet.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 367

Breakout Boards
Fig. 10-5: Connector locations on CPRI breakout board
X1 User interface
This plug is the counterpart of the user interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX,
i.e. a TYCO Z-Dok adapter board connector with 56 differential pairs.
X2/X3 SFP interface

The type of these SFP modules depends on the used equipment
Note: These modules must fit to the transmission characteristics of the DUT.
X4, X5, X6, X7 SMA Differential Tx/Rx Interfaces

The interface consists of four SMA coaxial connectors.
X8 Fast C&M Interface

type Ethernet.
X9 Slow C&M Interface

connector type RS-232-C.
X10, X11, X12 GPIO Marker & Clock Outputs

BNC connectors.
H1 ... H4 Multicolor LEDs

indicating the status of the CPRI link.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 368

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Annex
Abbreviations
A Annex
The annex contains a list of abbreviations, an overview of automatically assigned file
extensions and tables of preset values to the respective transmission protocols.
A.1 Abbreviations
The following lists contain some common abbreviations used in this manual. For more
abbreviations that relate to CPRI, see the CPRI specification at http://www.cpri.info/
spec.html.
Table 1-1: Abbreviations and acronyms used in the CRPI protocol
Abbreviation Term
ACP Adjacent Channel Power
AGC Automatic Gain Control
AxC Antenna-carrier
BBMUS BBM Unspecified
BPNC Backplane Not Connected
C&M Control and Management
ceil ceiling function
CML Current Mode Logic
CPRI Common Public Radio Interface
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check)
DL Downlink
DUT Device Under Test
ESD End-of-Stream Delimiter
EVM Error Vector Magnitude
FCS Frame Check Sequence
FL Forward Link, synonym to downlink
FP Fabric Port
FPGA Field Programmable Array
GBps Giga Byte per second [GB/s]
GND Ground Digital Ground
HDLC High-level Data Link Control
Iub Interface between Radio Network Controller and UMTS radio base station
(Node B)
IP Internet Protocol
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 369

Extensions for User Files
Abbreviation Term
LAN Local Area Network
LOF Loss of Frame
LOS Loss of Signal
LVDS Low Voltage Differential Signal
MA Module Address
MBps Mega Byte per second [MB/s]
MGT Multi-Gigabit Transceiver
MNC Module Not Connected
RAI Remote Alarm Indication
RCLK Reference Clock
RE Radio Equipment
REC Radio Equipment Control
RL Reverse Link, synonym to uplink
RP3L Reference Point 3 Link
Rx Receive
SA Shelf Address
SAP Service Acces Point
SCLK System Clock
SDI SAP Defect Indication
SFP Small Form-factor Pluggable
SMA SubMiniatur version A
SYNC Synchronization Signal
Tc CPRI basic frame length = UTRA FDD Chip period = 1/3.84MHz
Tx Transmit
UE User Equipment
UL Uplink
Uu Interface between the radio equipment of the UMTS radio base station (Node
B) and the user equipment (UE)
XAUI X Attachment Unit Interface (10 Gigabit)
A.2 Extensions for User Files

The following table list all available file extensions for user files. The currently available
files on the instrument depend on the installed options.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 370

Preset
Table 1-2: List of the automatically assigned file extensions in R&S DigIConf
Function/Digital List type Contents File suffix

Standard
CPRI Settings CPRI configuration, vendor data included *.cpri

Instrument settings
Waveform Waveforms and multi segment waveforms *.wv
User Defined Settings User Defined Protocol configuration *.iqbox
Configuration Soft- Settings R&S DigIConf settings *.savrcl

ware
A.3 Preset
The following lists give an overview of the key preset values of the corresponding proto-
cols.
A.3.1 User Defined Default Settings
This section contains the default settings of the parameters for user defined protocols,
sorted by the tabs in R&S DigIConf.
Main Controls
Parameter Default value
State Off
Logic Type 3.3 V CMOS
Direction Transmitter
Protocol
Format Parallel
Data Rate SDR
Interleaving Not Interleaved
Data
Word Size 16 Bit
Word Alignment LSB
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 371

Preset
Bit Order LSB
Numeric Format 2's Complement
Clock
Clock Rate 10 MHz
Clock Source Internal (BNC REF IN)
Clock Phase 0 deg
Clock Skew 0 ns
Sample/Clock Rate Ratio 1
Source REF IN
Frequency 10 MHz
Test
Tx Test Off
Test Signal PRBS
IQ Words (Rec) 0
Rx BER (Rec) 0.00 E+00
Wave File (ARB) None
Sample Rate (ARB) 0
Number of Samples (ARB) 0
A.3.2 CPRI Default Settings
This section contains the default settings of the parameters for CPRI, sorted by the tabs
in R&S DigIConf.
Main Controls
State Off
Mode CPRI RE Test
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 372

Preset
Hardware
CPRI Line Bit Rate 2x (1228.8 Mbit/s)
FPGA Internal Loopback None
Input SFP1
Output SFP1
Differential Output Swing 0.800 Vpp
Equalizer 0 dB
Downlink / Uplink
Signal table/ - name signal_1
Signal State Off
Standard 3GPP FDD
Physical Source (downlink) DIG IQ IN 1
Signal Output (uplink) DIG IQ OUT 2
Sample Rate 3,84 MHz
Pattern Length 16
Oversampling 1 (Downllink), 2 (Uplink)
I/Q Resolution 16
Downscale 0
AxC Allocation Packed
AxC(s) / Data Rate 1 / 122.88 Mbit/s
(Assigned) 1 / 122.88 Mbit/s
Number of Groups 1
Groups Table Repetition 1
Groups Table AxC<index> State On
Groups Table AxC<index> Pattern 0x0000
Available Data Rate (I/Q) 921.30 MBit/s
Assigned Data Rate (AxC) 0.00 MBit/s
AxC Table Source signal_1
AxC Table Word Address 1
AxC Table Bit Address 0
AxC Table Size / bits 32
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 373

Preset
Control & Management
State - Slow C&M (HDLC ) Off
Bit Rate 240 kbit/s
Source Terminal
Mode HDLC EN/DE Coding
State - Fast C&M (Ethernet) Off
Ethernet Pointer 20
Pref. Eth. Pointer 20
Bit Rate (Ethernet) 42.l24 MBit/s
Vendor Data
State Off
Line Bit Rate 2x (1228.8 Mbit/s)
Direction Downlink
Word Width 16
Ethernet Pointer 20
Z.aa.0,1/Z.bb.0,1/Z.cc.0,1/Z.dd.0,1 0
Test and Diagnostic
GPIO Direction (1...3) Off
GPIO Signal (1...3) Constant Low
SDI Off
RE Reset Off
PRBX Test Tx/Rx Off
ARB
File (ARB 1 ... ARB 4) None
Option(s)
Sample Rate/Samples 0
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 374

Drawings
State Off
Total Samples 0.00 / 128 MSamples
Recorder
Data Source (signal_1)
Recording Length 100 Samples
State Off
Trigger Source Software
Trigger Position 0 Samples
A.4 Drawings
The following appendix contains the customer drawings of the user defined breakout
boards, where you can find the location of the connectors and the corresponding pin
assignments. See chapter 10, "Interfaces", on page 355 for description on the interfaces
and breakout boards.
Included drawings:
● C-6367557
Tyco Z-Dok Adapter Board Connector, (56 differential pairs), see also chapter 10.1,
"User Interface of the R&S EX-IQ-BOX", on page 355.
● 3585.7280.00
Single Ended Breakout Board with connector X1, the User Interface, and the con-
nectors X2 and X3 (2x25 pole), see chapter 10.3.1.1, "Breakout Board Single Ended
3585.7280.00", on page 359.
● 3585.7296.00
Differential Breakout Board, with connector X1, the User Interface, and the connec-
tors X2 and X3 (2x50 pole), see chapter 10.3.1.2, "Breakout Board Differential
3585.7296.00", on page 361.
● 090101-331-25AEZ00
Cadence Palladium Breakout Board with connector X1, the User Interface, and the
connector X2 (1x68 pole SCSI), see chapter 10.3.1.3, "Breakout Board Cadence
Palladium 090002-24x", on page 364.
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 375

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X1
FRONT VIEW
A C28 F28 X1 A
B28 E28
MGT_NC MGT_NC
1367557-1
C27 F27
A28 D28
B27 E27
W1
X1
Y1
Z1
W2
X2
Y2
Z2
W3
X3
Y3
Z3
W4
X4
Y4
Z4
W5
X5
Y5
Z5
W6
X6
Y6
Z6
A27 D27
OPTIONAL2 D_CLK_UIN_N
C26 F26
B26 E26 BOB_SENS
OPTIONAL1 D_CLK_UIN_P
C25 F25 AGND
GP_P5 GP_P3 M
A26 D26 M M
GP_N5 B25 E25

GP_N3
R1
A25 D25 1K
GP_P4 AUX_IO_P3 VCCIO_1
C24 F24 M
GP_N4 B24 E24 AUX_IO_N3

AUX_IO_P2 C23 F23 UI_Q_P17
A24 D24
AUX_IO_N2 B23 E23 UI_Q_N17

UI_Q_P16 A23 D23 UI_Q_P15 R2 X4 VCCIO_1 X6
OPTIONAL1 BO_TYPE0 1 2 1 2
TP1
B C22
B22
F22
E22
0R
B
UI_Q_N16 UI_Q_N15 M M M
OPTIONAL2 BO_TYPE1
R3
UI_Q_P14 C21 F21 UI_Q_P13 TP2 0R
A22 D22
X5 VCCIO_1 X7
UI_Q_N14 B21 E21 UI_Q_N13 1 2 1 2
OPTIONAL3 R4
A21 D21 TP3 BO_TYPE2
UI_Q_P12 UI_Q_P11 0R
C20 F20 M M M
M
UI_Q_N12 B20 E20 UI_Q_N11
UI_Q_P10 C19 F19 UI_Q_P9
A20 D20
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor

UI_Q_P8 A19 D19 UI_Q_P7
C18 F18
A18 D18
X3
A17 D17
For this document all rights are reserved
UI_Q_P4 UI_Q_P3
C16 F16
C UI_Q_N4 B16 E16 UI_Q_N3 C
A16 D16 2 1
UI_Q_P0 A15 D15 UI_VALID_P
C14 F14
X2 X3
UI_Q_N0 B14 E14 UI_VALID_N
C13 F13 UI_VALID_P NC
X1
D_CLK_UOUT_P GP_P1 50 49 50 49
A14 D14 D_CLK_UOUT_P D_CLK_UIN_P
48 47 48 47
B13 E13 GP_P2 GP_P3
D_CLK_UOUT_N GP_N1 46 45 46 45
A13 D13 GP_P1 GP_P5
GP_P2 GP_P0 44 43 44 43
C12 F12 GP_P0 GP_P4
42 41 42 41
B12 E12 GP_N0 AUX_IO_P1 AUX_IO_P3
GP_N2 40 39 40 39
C11 F11 AUX_IO_P0 AUX_IO_P2
AUX_IO_P1 AUX_IO_P0 38 37 38 37
A12 D12 UI_I_P17 UI_Q_P17
36 35 36 35
B11 E11 AUX_IO_N0 UI_I_P16 UI_Q_P16
AUX_IO_N1 34 33 34 33
X2
UI_I_P17 UI_I_P16
32 31 32 31
C10 F10 UI_I_P14 UI_Q_P14
30 29 30 29
UI_I_P13 UI_Q_P13
D UI_I_N17
UI_I_P15
B10
C9
E10
F9
UI_I_N16
UI_I_P14
28 27
UI_I_P12
28 27
UI_Q_P12 D
26 25 26 25
24 23 24 23
UI_I_N15 B9 E9 UI_I_N14 UI_I_P10 UI_Q_P10
22 21 22 21
UI_I_P13 A9 D9 UI_I_P12 20 19
UI_I_P9
20 19
UI_Q_P9 A1 2 1
18 17 18 17
B8 E8 UI_I_P7 UI_Q_P7
UI_I_N13 UI_I_N12 16 15 16 15
UI_I_P11 UI_I_P10 14 13 14 13
12 11 12 11
10 9 10 9
UI_I_P9 UI_I_P8 8 7 8 7
6 5 6 5
4 3 4 3
UI_I_P7 C5 F5 UI_I_P6 UI_I_P0 UI_Q_P0
2 1 2 1
A6 D6
UI_I_N7 B5 E5 UI_I_N6 M M
UI_I_P5 A5 D5 UI_I_P4
C4 F4
UI_I_N5 B4 E4 UI_I_N4
E UI_I_P3 C3
A4
F3
D4
UI_I_P2 E
C2 F2
C1 F1
BO_TYPE0 BO_TYPE2
A2 D2
B1 E1
BO_TYPE1 OPTIONAL3
A1 D1
1367557-1
M M
Bindende Angaben ueber Varianten,

Trimmwerte, Bauteile und
nicht bestueckte Bauteile siehe ST.
ACHTUNG: ESD! Benennung / Designat.: Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.: Blatt:/Sh.:
F
For binding information on models, de en 01.00 1- F
trimming and components values and
nonfitted components see parts list.
Electrostatic sensitiv devices
ROHDE&SCHWARZ BreakOut-Board Single Ended
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
require a special handling.
Elektrostatisch gefaehrdete ATTENTION: ESD! 3585.7280.00
Bauelemente erfordern eine
Datum: Abteilung: Name:
besondere Handhabung.
Date: 29.07.2007 Dept.: Name: 090002-222-25(SP)(3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
A X1
FRONT VI EW A
X1
C28 F28
1367557- 1
1
X2
1
B28 E28
MGT_NC C27 F27
MGT_NC X3
A28 D28
W1
X1
Y1
Z1
W2
X2
Y2
Z2
W3
X3
Y3
Z3
W4
X4
Y4
Z4
W5
X5
Y5
Z5
W6
X6
Y6
Z6
2
B27 E27
A27 D27
OPTI ONAL2 D_CLK_UI N_N
C26 F26 BOB_SENS
B26 E26 AGND
OPTI ONAL1 D_CLK_UI N_P M
C25 F25 M M
GP_P5 GP_P3
A26 D26 R1
1K
B25 E25
GP_N5 GP_N3 VCCI O_1
A25 D25 M
GP_P4 AUX_IO_P3
C24
B24
F24
E24
X1
GP_N4 AUX_IO_N3
A1
AUX_IO_P2 C23 F23 UI _Q_P17
A24 D24
B23 E23 UI _Q_N17 R2 X4 VCCI O_1 X6
AUX_IO_N2 OPTI ONAL1 BO_TYPE0 1 2 1 2
B UI _Q_P16 A23
C22
D23
F22
UI _Q_P15
TP1 0R
B
R3 M M M
B22 E22 OPTI ONAL2 BO_TYPE1
UI _Q_N16 UI _Q_N15 TP2 0R
UI _Q_P14 C21 F21 UI _Q_P13 X5 VCCI O_1 X7
A22 D22 1 2 1 2
OPTI ONAL3 R4
B21 E21 TP3 BO_TYPE2
UI _Q_N14 UI _Q_N13 0R
UI _Q_P12 A21 D21 UI _Q_P11 M M M
M
C20 F20
UI _Q_N12 B20 E20 UI _Q_N11
UI _Q_P10 C19 F19 UI _Q_P9
A20 D20
Fuer dieses Dokument behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor
UI _Q_N10 B19 E19 UI _Q_N9 X3

X2
UI _Q_P8 A19 D19 UI _Q_P7
C18 F18
UI _Q_N8 B18 E18 UI _Q_N7 UI _VALI D_P 100 99 UI _VALI D_N 100 99
UI _Q_P6 C17 F17 UI _Q_P5 100 99 100 99
98 97 98 97
A18 D18 98 97 98 97
D_CLK_UOUT_P D_CLK_UOUT_N D_CLK_UI N_P D_CLK_UI N_N
B17 E17 96 96 95 95 96 96 95 95
UI _Q_N6 UI _Q_N5
94 93 94 93
For this document all rights are reserved
UI _Q_P4 A17 D17 UI _Q_P3 94 93 GP_N1 94 93

GP_P1 GP_P5 GP_N5
92 91 92 91
C16 F16 92 91 92 91
C UI _Q_N4 B16 E16 UI _Q_N3 GP_P2
90
90 89
89 GP_N2 GP_P3 90
90 89
89
GP_N3
C
88 87 88 87
UI _Q_P2 C15 F15 UI _Q_P1 88 87 88 87
A16 D16 86 86 85 85 86 86 85 85
GP_P0 GP_N0 GP_P4 GP_N4
84 83 84 83
UI _Q_N2 B15 E15 UI _Q_N1 84 83 84 83
82 81 82 81
UI _Q_P0 A15 D15 82 81 AUX_IO_P3 82 81 AUX_IO_N3
UI_VALID_P AUX_IO_P1 AUX_IO_N1
80 79 80 79
C14 F14 80 79 80 79
78 77 78 77
UI _Q_N0 B14 E14 AUX_IO_P0 78 77 AUX_IO_N0 AUX_IO_P2 78 77 AUX_IO_N2
UI_VALID_N
C13 F13 76 76 75 75 76 76 75 75
D_CLK_UOUT_P GP_P1 74 73 74 73
A14 D14 74 73 74 73
UI _I _P17 UI _I _N17 UI _Q_P17 UI _Q_N17
72 71 72 71
B13 E13 GP_N1 72 71 72 71
D_CLK_UOUT_N
70 69 70 69
A13 D13 70 69 70 69
GP_P2 GP_P0 UI _I _P16 68 67 UI _I _N16 UI _Q_P16 68 67 UI _Q_N16
C12 F12 68 67 68 67
B12 E12 66 66 65 65 66 66 65 65
GP_N2 GP_N0 UI _I _P15 64 63 UI _I _N15 UI _Q_P15 64 63 UI _Q_N15
C11 F11 AUX_IO_P0 64 63 64 63
AUX_IO_P1 62 61 62 61
A12 D12 62 61 62 61
UI _I _P14 60 59 UI _I _N14 UI _Q_P14 60 59 UI _Q_N14
B11 E11 60 59 60 59
AUX_IO_N1 AUX_IO_N0
58 57 58 57
UI _I _P17 A11 D11 UI _I _P16 58 57 58 57
UI _I _P13 UI _I _N13 UI _Q_P13 UI _Q_N13
C10 F10 56 56 55 55 56 56 55 55
54 54 53 53 54 54 53 53
UI _I _N17 B10 E10 UI _I _N16 UI _I _P12 52 51 UI _I _N12 UI _Q_P12 52 51 UI _Q_N12
D UI _I _P15 C9
A10
F9
D10
UI _I _P14 52
50
50 49
51
49
52
50
50 49
51
49
D
UI _I _N15 B9 E9 UI _I _N14 48 47 48 47
46 45 46 45
UI _I _P13 A9 D9 UI _I _P12 46 45 46 45
C8 F8 44 43 44 43
42 41 42 41
UI _I _N13 B8 E8 UI _I _N12 42 41 42 41
UI _I _P11 C7 F7 UI _I _P10 40 39 40 39
38 37 38 37
A8 D8 38 37 38 37
UI _I _N11 B7 E7 UI _I _N10 36 35 36 35
A7 D7 34 34 33 33 34 34 33 33
UI _I _P9 UI _I _P8 UI _I _P7 UI _I _N7 UI _Q_P7 UI _Q_N7
32 31 32 31
C6 F6 32 31 32 31
30 29 30 29
UI _I _N9 B6 E6 UI _I _N8 30 29 30 29
UI _I _P7 C5 F5 UI _I _P6 28 27 28 27
26 25 26 25
A6 D6 26 25 26 25
UI _I _N7 B5 E5 UI _I _N6 24 23 24 23
22 21 22 21
UI _I _P5 A5 D5 UI _I _P4 22 21 22 21
C4 F4 20 19 20 19
18 17 18 17
UI _I _N5 B4 E4 UI _I _N4 18 17 18 17
UI _I _P3 C3 F3 UI _I _P2 16 15 16 15
A4 D4 14 14 13 13 14 14 13 13
E UI _I _N3 B3 E3 UI _I _N2
UI _I _P2
12
12
10
11
9
11
UI _I _N2 UI _Q_P2
12
12
10
11
9
11
UI _Q_N2
E
UI _I _P1 A3 D3 UI _I _P0 10 9 10 9
C2 F2 8 7 8 7
6 5 6 5
UI _I _N1 B2 E2 UI _I _N0 6 5 6 5
C1 F1 4 3 4 3
BO_TYPE0 BO_TYPE2
2 1 2 1
A2 D2 2 1 2 1
B1 E1
BO_TYPE1 OPTI ONAL3
A1 D1 ASP- 65067- 01 ASP- 65067- 01
1367557- 1
M M M M
M M
Bindende Angaben ueber Varianten,

Trimmwerte, Bauteile und
nicht bestueckte Bauteile siehe ST.
ACHTUNG: ESD! Benennung / Designat.: Spr.:/Lang.: Aei:/C.I.: Blatt:/Sh.:
F
For binding information on models, de en 01.00 1- F
trimming and components values and
nonfitted components see parts list.
Electrostatic sensitiv devices
ROHDE&SCHWARZ BreakOut-Board Differential
Zeichn.Nr.:/Drawing No.:
require a special handling.
Elektrostatisch gefaehrdete ATTENTION: ESD! 3585.7296.00
Bauelemente erfordern eine
Datum: Abteilung: Name:
besondere Handhabung.
Date: 22.11.2005 Dept.: Name: 090002-231-25(SP)(3)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X1
FRONT VIEW
X1
C28 F28
1367557-1
B28 E28
A A
MGT_NC C27 F27 MGT_NC
A28 D28
W1
X1
Y1
Z1
W2
X2
Y2
Z2
W3
X3
Y3
Z3
W4
X4
Y4
Z4
W5
X5
Y5
Z5
W6
X6
Y6
Z6
B27 E27
A27 D27
OPTIONAL2 C26 F26 D_CLK_UIN_N
BOB_SENS
B26 E26
AGND
OPTIONAL1 C25 F25 D_CLK_UIN_P M
M M
A26 D26
R1
B25 E25 1K
A25 D25 VCCIO_1
M
C24 F24
B24 E24
C23 F23
A24 D24
B23 E23
R2 X4 VCCIO_1 X6
A23 D23 OPTIONAL1 BO_TYPE0 1 2 1 2
TP1 0R
C22 F22 UI_Q_P15
B
B22 E22 R3 M M M
OPTIONAL2 BO_TYPE1 B
C21 F21 TP2 0R
UI_Q_P14 A22 D22 UI_Q_P13 X5 VCCIO_1 X7
1 2 1 2
B21 E21 OPTIONAL3 R4
TP3 BO_TYPE2
A21 D21 0R
M M M
UI_Q_P12 C20 F20 UI_Q_P11 M
B20 E20
C19 F19
B19 E19
A19 D19
B18 E18
C17 F17
B17 E17
A17 D17 R5
C UI_Q_P4 C16 F16 UI_Q_P3 0R
C
B16 E16
69 M
C15 F15
UI_I_P0 1 35
B15 E15
UI_I_P1 2 36
A15 D15
UI_I_P2 3 37
UI_Q_P0 C14 F14 UI_VALID_P
UI_I_P3 4 38
B14 E14
UI_I_P4 5 39
C13 F13
UI_I_P5 6 40
D_CLK_UOUT_P A14 D14
UI_I_P6 7 41
B13 E13
UI_I_P7 8 42
D_CLK_UOUT_N A13 D13
UI_I_P8 9 43
C12 F12
B12 E12
UI_I_P9 10 44 68 34
UI_I_P10 11 45
C11 F11
UI_I_P11 12 46
A12 D12
UI_I_P12 13 47
B11 E11
UI_I_P13 14 48
D A11 D11 D
UI_I_P14 15 49
C10 F10
UI_I_P15 16 50
B10 E10
X2
UI_Q_P0 17 51
X1
C9 F9
UI_Q_P1 18 52
UI_Q_P2 19 53
B9 E9
UI_Q_P3 20 54
A9 D9
UI_Q_P4 21 55
UI_I_P13 C8 F8 UI_I_P12
UI_Q_P5 22 56
B8 E8
C7 F7
UI_Q_P6 23 57 35 1
UI_Q_P7 24 58
UI_Q_P8 25 59
B7 E7
UI_Q_P9 26 60
A7 D7
UI_I_P9 UI_I_P8 UI_Q_P10 27 61
C6 F6
UI_Q_P11 28 62
B6 E6
UI_Q_P12 29 63
C5 F5
UI_I_P7 UI_I_P6 UI_Q_P13 30 64
A6 D6
UI_Q_P14 31 65
E B5 E5 A1
UI_Q_P15 32 66 NC E
A5 D5
D_CLK_UOUT_P 33 67
R7 D_CLK_UIN_P
UI_I_P5 C4 F4 UI_I_P4 0R
D_CLK_UOUT_N 34 68
B4 E4 R8 D_CLK_UIN_N
C3 F3 0R
70 Not fitted
UI_I_P3 A4 D4 UI_I_P2 M
B3 E3
X2 UI_VALID_P
R6
A3 D3 0R
UI_I_P1 C2 F2 UI_I_P0
B2 E2 M
C1 F1
BO_TYPE0 A2 D2 BO_TYPE2
B1 E1
BO_TYPE1 A1 D1 OPTIONAL3
1367557-1
M M
F
11-22-2005_10:51 =
090101-331-25AEZ00
DATUM cg211 1
DATEINAME: +
BEARB.
GEPR.
Mattasch
ZEICHNUNGSNUMMER
MAZeT BreakeOut-Board SCSI
Ex-Box
BLATT
ANZ. NR.
ZUSTAND AENDERUNG DATUM NAME NORM URSPR./ERS.F./ERS.D. BENENNUNG 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R&S®EX-IQ-BOX List of Commands
List of Commands
*CLS...............................................................................................................................................................236
*IDN?.............................................................................................................................................................237
*OPC..............................................................................................................................................................237
*OPT?............................................................................................................................................................237
*RCL..............................................................................................................................................................238
*RST..............................................................................................................................................................238
*SAV..............................................................................................................................................................238
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CATalog?........................................................................................................................244
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:EXECute...............................................................................................................245
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:STORe........................................................................................................245
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:CPRI:TEST?...................................................................................................................245
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:BER?....................................................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:DCM?...................................................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:ERRors?...............................................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:NDATa?................................................................................................................246
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:PLL?.....................................................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RCV?....................................................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RX|TX:SOURce....................................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:LVDS:RX|TX:STATe.......................................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:POINt..............................................................................................................................247
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:POINt:VALue?................................................................................................................248
:DIAGnostic:EBOX:SELect............................................................................................................................248
ERR?.............................................................................................................................................................238
MMEMory:CATalog?......................................................................................................................................254
MMEMory:CDIRectory...................................................................................................................................255
MMEMory:DELete..........................................................................................................................................255
MMEMory:LOAD:STATe................................................................................................................................255
MMEMory:MDIRectory...................................................................................................................................256
MMEMory:RDIRectory...................................................................................................................................256
MMEMory:STORe:STATe.............................................................................................................................256
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:PHASe...............................................................................................................267
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:POLarity.............................................................................................................267
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:RATE.................................................................................................................268
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SKEW:IN...........................................................................................................269
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT.......................................................................................................270
SOURce:RECeiver:CLOCk:SOURce............................................................................................................270
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:ALIGnment...........................................................................................................272
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:BORDer...............................................................................................................273
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:NFORmat.............................................................................................................273
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:POLarity:IQ..........................................................................................................275
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SIZE.....................................................................................................................275
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SPOLarity............................................................................................................275
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:SPOSition............................................................................................................276
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:STYPe.................................................................................................................276
SOURce:RECeiver:DATA:TYPe....................................................................................................................277
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 376

SOURce:RECeiver:DRATe............................................................................................................................263
SOURce:RECeiver:FORMat..........................................................................................................................264
SOURce:RECeiver:ILEaving.........................................................................................................................265
SOURce:RECeiver:LOGictype......................................................................................................................259
SOURce:RECeiver:SCRatio..........................................................................................................................271
SOURce:RECeiver:SRATe............................................................................................................................265
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:PHASe..........................................................................................................267
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:POLarity.......................................................................................................267
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:RATE............................................................................................................267
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SKEW:IN......................................................................................................269
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT..................................................................................................270
SOURce:TRANsmitter:CLOCk:SOURce.......................................................................................................270
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:ALIGnment.....................................................................................................272
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:BORDer..........................................................................................................273
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:NFORmat.......................................................................................................273
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:POLarity:IQ.....................................................................................................275
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SIZE................................................................................................................275
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SPOLarity.......................................................................................................275
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:SPOSition.......................................................................................................276
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:STYPe............................................................................................................276
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DATA:TYPe...............................................................................................................277
SOURce:TRANsmitter:DRATe......................................................................................................................263
SOURce:TRANsmitter:FORMat.....................................................................................................................264
SOURce:TRANsmitter:ILEaving....................................................................................................................264
SOURce:TRANsmitter:LOGictype.................................................................................................................259
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SCRatio.....................................................................................................................271
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SENDto.....................................................................................................................260
SOURce:TRANsmitter:SRATe.......................................................................................................................265
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:CATalog?.........................................................................................................249
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ARB:DELete.............................................................................................................249
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CATalog?.................................................................................................................249
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:COUNt.....................................................................................................................250
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:OPTion?.................................................................................................287
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PEAK?...................................................................................................287
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:PRESet..................................................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RELoad..................................................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:RMS?.....................................................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB:SAMPles:TOTal?...................................................................................288
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:CONFlict?......................................................................................289
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:FILE...............................................................................................289
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SAMPles?......................................................................................289
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:SRATe?.........................................................................................290
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:ARB<ch>:STATe............................................................................................290
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:ACTive?...........................................................................................291
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:BRATe?...........................................................................................291
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:COMMand.......................................................................................292
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:EXECute..........................................................................................292
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PPTR...............................................................................................292
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 377

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:PTR?...............................................................................................293
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:ETH:STATe.............................................................................................293
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:ACTive?........................................................................................293
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BAUDrate......................................................................................291
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:BRATe..........................................................................................294
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:COMMand.....................................................................................294
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:EXECute.......................................................................................295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:MODE...........................................................................................295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RFRames?....................................................................................295
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RST...............................................................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:RX?...............................................................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SFRames?....................................................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:SOURce........................................................................................296
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:CM:HDLC:STATe...........................................................................................297
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:ALARm?..................................................................................................298
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:BBRevision?............................................................................................298
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CMODe?.................................................................................................299
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:CORE?....................................................................................................299
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:EBRevision?............................................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FBVersion?..............................................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:FCVersion?.............................................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:BFRame.........................................................................300
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:HFRame.........................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO:MFWidth:NFRame.........................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:DIRection...............................................................................301
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:GPIO<ch>:SIGnal...................................................................................302
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:INPut.............................................................................................303
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP1[:STATe]................................................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SFP2[:STATe]................................................................304
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:HSSS:OUTPut:SMA[:STATe]..................................................................305
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LBRate....................................................................................................305
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOF?.......................................................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:LOS?.......................................................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:PROTocol................................................................................................306
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:R21T?......................................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CRLocked?................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:CSLocked?................................................................................307
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:ROLocked?................................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:RCLock:SOURce....................................................................................308
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:RECeived?...................................................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SEED:SCRambling.................................................................................309
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:DOSWing........................................................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:SMA:RXEGain.........................................................................................310
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:T14T........................................................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TIMing?...................................................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:HW:TOFFset..................................................................................................311
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:HDLC:BRATe?..........................................................................................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOF?........................................................................................312
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 378

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:LOS?........................................................................................312
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:LOCal:RAI?.........................................................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOF?.....................................................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:LOS?.....................................................................................313
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RAI?......................................................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:RESet?..................................................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:RX:REMote:SAP?.....................................................................................314
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:L1:VERSion?..................................................................................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:MODE.............................................................................................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRBS:RST.....................................................................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:PRESet...........................................................................................................315
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:ABORt...................................................................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce......................................................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SOURce:CATalog?.....................................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:DATA:SRATe?......................................................................317
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:EXECute................................................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:CREate.........................................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:FILE:SELect..........................................................................318
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RLENgth................................................................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:RTIMe?..................................................................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATe?.................................................................................319
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:STATus?...............................................................................320
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:POSition.................................................................320
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:TRIGger:SOURce.................................................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RECorder<ch>:VIEW.....................................................................................321
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:RX:SIGNal<ch>:OUTPut................................................................................331
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:CATalog?........................................................................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:DELete............................................................................................322
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:LOAD...............................................................................................323
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SETTing:STORe............................................................................................323
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:SFRame<st>:DATA........................................................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:STATe............................................................................................................316
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:RATE?...................................................................................324
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:STATe....................................................................................324
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:RX:WORDs?................................................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:BER:TX:STATe....................................................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOF?..............................................................................................325
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:LOS?..............................................................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RAI?...............................................................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:RESet?...........................................................................................326
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:RX:SDI?...............................................................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:INFO?....................................................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:LOS?.....................................................................................327
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:DISabled?........................................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:SFP<st>:TX:FAULt?............................................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:REReset.........................................................................................328
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TEST:TX:SDI..................................................................................................329
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX:SIGNal<ch>:SOURce...............................................................................332
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 379

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:APPLy.................................................................................................333
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC:COUNt?......................................................................................333
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:BADDress.........................................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:CONFlict?.........................................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:PSRC?.............................................................................334
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SIZE?...............................................................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:SOURce?.........................................................................335
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXC<ch0>:WADDress........................................................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:AXCStatus?........................................................................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:ASSigned?.............................................................................336
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:DRATe:AVAilable?.............................................................................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:GROup<user0>:PATTern...................................................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:INTerleaving.......................................................................................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:APPend..................................................................................337
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal:COUNt?..................................................................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:CONFlict?..............................................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:ARB:FILE?.....................................................................338
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:ALLocation.............................................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:ASSign?....................................................339
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:COUNt:NEEDed?..................................................340
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:ASSigned?................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:NEEDed?..................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:DRATe:STATus?...................................................341
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:AXC:LIST?.....................................................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:COPY.............................................................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:CRESt............................................................................342
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:DELete...........................................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:GAIN..............................................................................343
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:IQResolution..................................................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NAME.............................................................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:NFORmat.......................................................................346
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:OSAMpling.....................................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:PLENgth.........................................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:RMS?.............................................................................348
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:SRATe............................................................................349
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STANdard......................................................................350
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SIGNal<ch>:STATe............................................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce:GROup:CALC......................................................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup:COUNt............................................................344
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:REPetition.........................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:SOURce<ch>:GROup<user0>:STATe...............................................345
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:ARM.....................................................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:TRIGger:SOURce...............................................................................332
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:TX|RX:WARNing?..........................................................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DATA<ch>........................................................................................352
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:DIRection.........................................................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:STATe..............................................................................................353
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VENDor:WWIDth?..........................................................................................353
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 380

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:CPRI:VERSion?.......................................................................................................316
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:PART?...........................................................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:REVision?......................................................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOARd:SERial?..........................................................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:REVision?...........................................................................................242
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:SERial?..............................................................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:BOB:TYPE?................................................................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CATalog?....................................................................................................239
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CONTroller?................................................................................................240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:CPLD?........................................................................................................240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FIRMware:SUPPorted?..............................................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BASe?................................................................................................240
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:BOB?..................................................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:FPG:DIGio?................................................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PART..........................................................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:PPCVersion?..............................................................................................241
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SELect........................................................................................................244
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:DEVice:SERial.........................................................................................................244
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:ID?...........................................................................................................................250
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:NAME?...................................................................................................251
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:PORT?....................................................................................................252
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:SERial?...................................................................................................252
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:INST<ch>:TYPE?....................................................................................................252
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:OPT..........................................................................................................................250
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:SELect.....................................................................................................................251
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:STATe?....................................................................................................................251
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:PHASe.............................................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:POLarity...........................................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:RATE................................................................................................268
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:FREQuency..................................................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:REFerence:VALue?.........................................................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:IN..........................................................................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT......................................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:CLOCk:SOURce...........................................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:ALIGnment.........................................................................................272
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:BORDer..............................................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:NFORmat...........................................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:POLarity:IQ.........................................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SIZE...................................................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOLarity...........................................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:SPOSition...........................................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:STYPe................................................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DATA:TYPE..................................................................................................277
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DIRection......................................................................................................258
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:DRATe..........................................................................................................263
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FIRMware:SUPPorted?................................................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:FORMat........................................................................................................264
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:ILEaving........................................................................................................265
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 381

[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:LOGic[:TYPE]...............................................................................................259
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:PRESet.........................................................................................................260
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SCRatio.........................................................................................................271
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:CATalog?.......................................................................................261
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:DELete...........................................................................................262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:LOAD.............................................................................................262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SETTing:STORe...........................................................................................262
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SRATe?........................................................................................................265
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMData:RX|TX......................................................................................283
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:CMSize...................................................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:FSELect........................................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:GAIN:STATe..........................................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:LFSYnc..................................................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SIZE.......................................................................................................284
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:FREQuency........................................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CLOCk:PHASe................................................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:CSELect..........................................................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:FSELect...........................................................................................285
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:RBYTe?...........................................................................................286
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:SSI:SPI:WBYTe............................................................................................286
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:STATe...........................................................................................................261
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:BER?............................................................................................277
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:SIGNal..........................................................................................278
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:STATe...........................................................................................278
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:RX:WORDs?.......................................................................................279
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SIGNal...........................................................................................279
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:AMPLitude...........................................................................280
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:SINE:FREQuency.........................................................................281
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TEST:TX:STATe...........................................................................................281
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:ARM...............................................................................................281
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:CSTat?...........................................................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:DELay............................................................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:RESTart.........................................................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:SOURce.........................................................................................282
[:SOURce<hw>]:EBOX:USER:TRIGger:STATe?..........................................................................................283
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:PHASe.................................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:POLarity..............................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:RATE...................................................................................267
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:IN.............................................................................269
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT.........................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:CLOCk:SOURce..............................................................................270
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:ALIGnment............................................................................272
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:BORDer.................................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:NFORmat..............................................................................273
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:POLarity:IQ............................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SIZE.......................................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SPOLarity..............................................................................275
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:SPOSition..............................................................................276
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 382

[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:STYPe...................................................................................276
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DATA:TYPE.....................................................................................277
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DIRection.........................................................................................258
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:DRATe.............................................................................................263
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:FIRMware:SUPPorted?....................................................................243
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:FORMat............................................................................................264
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:ILEaving...........................................................................................264
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE]...................................................................................259
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:SCRatio............................................................................................271
[:SOURce<hw>]:IQ:OUTPut:EXTernal:SRATe?............................................................................................265
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:PHASe...................................................................................................267
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:POLarity.................................................................................................267
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:RATE.....................................................................................................267
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:IN...............................................................................................269
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SKEW:OUT...........................................................................................270
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:CLOCk:SOURce................................................................................................270
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:ALIGnment...............................................................................................272
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:BORDer...................................................................................................273
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:NFORmat.................................................................................................273
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:POLarity:IQ..............................................................................................275
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SIZE.........................................................................................................275
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SPOLarity................................................................................................275
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:SPOSition................................................................................................276
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:STYPe.....................................................................................................276
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DATA:TYPE.......................................................................................................277
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DIRection............................................................................................................258
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:DRATe................................................................................................................263
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:FIRMware:SUPPorted?......................................................................................243
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:FORMat..............................................................................................................264
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:ILEaving.............................................................................................................264
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:LOGic[:TYPE].....................................................................................................259
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:SCRatio..............................................................................................................271
[:SOURce]:BBIN:EXTernal:SRATe?..............................................................................................................265
[:SOURce]:RECeiver:SENDto.......................................................................................................................260
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 383

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX Index
Index
Symbols ARB settings
CPRI ........................................................................ 205
2's complement ARB signal conflict
CPRI ................................................................ 177, 346 CPRI ................................................................ 173, 338
2's complement 9E2 ARB subsystem
CPRI ................................................................ 177, 346 CPRI ........................................................................ 287
3GPP FDD ARB toolbox
CPRI standard ................................................ 175, 350 CPRI recorder .......................................................... 212
10 MHz reference clock Architecture of R&S DigIConf .......................................... 56
CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302 Arm
Software trigger CPRI .............................................. 189
A trigger - user defined ...................................... 120, 281
Assigned data rate AxC(s)
Abort CPRI ................................................................ 187, 336
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 211 Auto
Accessories ...................................................................... 24 Number of groups (CPRI) ........................................ 182
Tyco Z-Dok connector .............................................. 24 Available data rate I/Q
Z2 demo breakout board .......................................... 24 CPRI ................................................................ 187, 337
Z6 LVDS cable .......................................................... 24 AxC(s) / data rate assigned
Activate trigger CPRI ........................................................................ 339
CPRI ........................................................................ 189 AxC(s) / data rate available
Alarm CPRI ................................................................ 187, 337
CPRI hardware status ............................................ 298 AxC(s) / data rate needed
CPRI L1 analysis ............................................ 152, 167 CPRI ................................................................ 180, 340
Amplitude AxC(s) / data rate status
TX test - user defined ...................................... 123, 280 CPRI ................................................................ 181, 341
Append AxC(s) signal assigned
CPRI ................................................................ 173, 337 CPRI ........................................................................ 181
Application directory ........................................................ 35 AxC allocation
Application examples ...................................................... 47 CPRI ................................................................ 180, 339
BB receiver chip test .................................................. 47 AxC Container Definition
CPRI REC test setup ................................................ 49 CPRI ........................................................................ 186
CPRI RE test setup .................................................. 48 AxC group pattern
Apply CPRI ........................................................................ 183
CPRI ........................................................................ 333 AxC group state
Apply warning CPRI ........................................................................ 183
CPRI ................................................................ 189, 352 AxC list
ARB CPRI ........................................................................ 342
catalog .................................................................... 249 AxC size (AxC table)
CPRI ................................................................ 173, 205 CPRI ................................................................ 188, 335
delete ...................................................................... 249 AxCs used
File (CPRI) .............................................................. 205 CPRI ........................................................................ 333
Options (CPRI) ........................................................ 206 AxC table
Options conflict (CPRI) ............................................ 207 CPRI ........................................................................ 188
PEP dBFS (CPRI) .................................................. 207
Reload (CPRI) ........................................................ 207 B
Reset (CPRI) .......................................................... 207
Sample rate (CPRI) ................................................ 206 Baseband Input Settings .................................................. 87
Samples (CPRI) ...................................................... 206 Base Settings
State (CPRI) ............................................................ 207 Logic Type .............................................................. 259
Total samples (CPRI) .............................................. 207 Basic
ARB catalog CPRI Output marker frame width ............................ 163
CPRI ........................................................................ 249 Basic frame
ARB file CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302
CPRI ................................................................ 205, 289 Baudrate
ARB options conflict RS232 (CPRI) .......................................................... 197
CPRI ........................................................................ 289 Binary offset
ARB preset CPRI ................................................................ 177, 346
CPRI ........................................................................ 288 Bit address (AxC table)
ARB reload CPRI ................................................................ 188, 334
CPRI ........................................................................ 288 Bit order ................................................................ 110, 273
ARB samples total DigIConf .......................................................... 110, 273
CPRI ........................................................................ 288
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 384

Bit order LSB clock skew .............................................................. 118

parallel .................................................................... 110 clock source .................................................... 116, 270
Bit Order LSB Counter .................................................................... 119
parallel .................................................................... 273 reference frequency ........................................ 118, 269
serial ................................................................ 110, 273 sample/clock rate ratio ............................................ 107
Bit order MSB sample rate .............................................................. 265
parallel .................................................................... 110 Clock settings display .................................................... 107
serial ........................................................................ 110 DigIConf .................................................................. 107
Bit Order MSB Clock setup .................................................................... 115
parallel .................................................................... 273 clock in skew .......................................................... 118
serial ........................................................................ 273 clock phase .............................................................. 118
Bit rate clock polarity ............................................................ 267
CPRI Ethernet ................................................ 199, 291 clock rate ........................................................ 115, 268
CPRI HDLC .................................................... 195, 294 clock skew .............................................................. 118
CPRI xxx kbit/s (HDLC) .......................................... 195 clock source .................................................... 116, 270
Breakout board .............................................................. 358 reference frequency ................................................ 269
Cadence palladium .................................................. 364 sample/clock rate ratio .................................... 107, 271
CPRI ........................................................................ 367 samplerate .............................................................. 265
Customer ................................................................ 366 Clock Setup
Breakout Board Clock phase ............................................................ 267
Differential .............................................................. 361 Clock skew .................................................................... 118
single ended ............................................................ 359 DigIConf .................................................................. 118
Breakout board revision Clock source .......................................................... 116, 270
CPRI ................................................................ 155, 298 DigIConf .......................................................... 116, 270
external ............................................................ 116, 270
C internal ............................................................ 116, 270
Clock subsystem
C&M Data ...................................................................... 125 User defined ............................................................ 266
C&M Size ...................................................................... 124 Clock synthesis locked
C&M subsystem CPRI reference clock .............................................. 307
CPRI ........................................................................ 290 CPRI status ............................................................ 155
Catalog CML output voltage swing
CPRI ........................................................................ 322 CPRI ................................................................ 159, 310
EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 239 Command
user defined ............................................................ 261 CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 292
CCDF diagram ................................................................ 77 CPRI HDLC ............................................................ 197
CDMA 2000 Command line
CPRI standard ................................................ 175, 350 CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 200
Change directory ............................................................ 255 Components
Clear accessories ................................................................ 24
CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 200 differential breakout board ........................................ 21
CPRI HDLC .................................................... 197, 200 DigIConf .................................................................... 23
Clock frequency digital standards with WinIQSIM2 .............................. 23
SPI .......................................................................... 125 Digital standards with WinIQSIM2 .......................... 206
Clock in skew R&S EX-IQ-BOX ........................................................ 21
DigIConf .................................................................. 118 R&S instruments ........................................................ 25
Clock In skew ................................................................ 118 single ended breakout board .................................... 21
Clock phase .......................................................... 118, 267 standardized protocols .............................................. 22
DigIConf .......................................................... 118, 267 Tyco Z-Dok connector .............................................. 24
Clock polarity user defined breakout boards .................................... 21
DigIConf .................................................................. 267 user defined protocol options .................................... 22
negative .................................................................. 267 Waveform memory, multi waveform playback and record-
positive .................................................................... 267 ing memory ................................................................ 23
Clock Polarity ................................................................ 267 Z2 demo breakout board .......................................... 24
Clock rate .............................................................. 115, 268 Z3 SCSI II / Palladium .............................................. 22
DigIConf .......................................................... 115, 268 Z4 MDR (Mini DeltaRibbon) ...................................... 22
Clock Rate/Sample Rate ................................................ 108 Z6 LVDS cable .......................................................... 24
DigIConf .................................................................. 108 Config
Clock recovery transient recorder ...................................................... 71
CPRI ................................................................ 155, 308 Configure instrument ........................................................ 70
Clock recovery locked Conflict (AxC table)
CPRI reference clock ...................................... 155, 307 CPRI ........................................................................ 334
Clock settings ................................................................ 115 Connecting ...................................................................... 42
clock in skew .......................................................... 118 breakout board .......................................................... 42
clock phase .............................................................. 118 CPRI breakout board .............................................. 144
clock rate ................................................................ 115 DIG I/Q IN/OUT ........................................................ 42
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 385

DUT .......................................................................... 42 AxC(s) assigned ...................................................... 339

power supply .................................................... 42, 144 AxC(s) signal assigned ............................................ 181
REF IN ...................................................................... 42 AxC allocation .................................................. 180, 339
USB .......................................................................... 42 AxC Container Definition ........................................ 186
Connector AxC group pattern .................................................. 183
CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 143 AxC group state ...................................................... 183
CPRI RS-232-C ...................................................... 142 AxC list .................................................................... 342
CPRI SFP ................................................................ 142 AxC Size (AxC table) ...................................... 188, 335
CPRI TX/RX ............................................................ 142 AxCs used .............................................................. 333
I/Q IN/OUT ................................................................ 32 AxC table ................................................................ 188
LAN ............................................................................ 33 basic frame .............................................................. 133
reference signal ........................................................ 32 Basic frame graph .................................................. 186
TYCO Z-DOK .......................................................... 355 binary offset ............................................................ 346
Connector type Binary offset ............................................................ 177
Cadence palladium .................................................. 364 bit address (AxC table) ............................................ 334
Differential .............................................................. 361 Bit address (AxC table) ............................................ 188
single ended ............................................................ 359 bit rate (Ethernet) .................................................... 291
user interface .......................................................... 355 Bit rate (Ethernet) .................................................... 199
Contents .......................................................................... 60 bit rate (HDLC) ........................................................ 294
Control elements and connectors Bit rate (HDLC) ........................................................ 195
CPRI ................................................................ 138, 367 Bit rate xxx kbit/s (HDLC) ........................................ 195
front panel view ........................................................ 30 BOB FPGA version .................................................. 154
rear panel view .......................................................... 32 breakout board revision .......................................... 298
Copy and append Breakout board revision .......................................... 155
CPRI ................................................................ 173, 342 C&M ........................................................................ 193
Core mode C&M subsystem ...................................................... 290
CPRI ................................................................ 168, 299 catalog .................................................................... 322
Counter .......................................................................... 119 Clear (fast C&M ) .................................................... 200
DigIConf .................................................................. 119 Clear (HDLC) .................................................. 197, 200
CPRI .............................................................................. 207 clock recovery .......................................................... 308
2's complement ................................................ 177, 346 Clock recovery ........................................................ 155
2's complement 9E2 ........................................ 177, 346 clock recovery locked .............................................. 307
Abort ........................................................................ 211 Clock recovery locked ............................................ 155
alarm ........................................................................ 298 clock synthesis locked ............................................ 307
Alarm .............................................................. 152, 167 Clock synthesis locked ............................................ 155
append a signal ...................................................... 337 CML output voltage swing .............................. 159, 310
Append a signal ...................................................... 173 command (Ethernet) ................................................ 292
apply ........................................................................ 333 Command line (fast C&M ) ...................................... 200
Apply ........................................................................ 189 Command line (HDLC) ............................................ 197
Apply warning .......................................................... 189 conflict (AxC table) .................................................. 334
apply warning) ........................................................ 352 Connect fast C&M .................................................. 200
ARB ........................................................................ 173 control word ............................................................ 133
ARB file ............................................................ 205, 289 Copy and append .................................................... 173
ARB level dbFS ...................................................... 207 copy and append a signal ........................................ 342
ARBl PEP dBFS ...................................................... 207 core mode ................................................................ 299
ARB options ............................................................ 206 Core mode .............................................................. 168
ARB options conflict ........................................ 207, 289 crest factor .............................................................. 342
ARB preset .............................................................. 288 Crest factor .............................................................. 180
ARB reload ...................................................... 207, 288 Current Rx alarms .................................................. 166
ARB reset ................................................................ 207 Data source ............................................................ 209
ARB sample rate ............................................ 206, 290 delete ...................................................................... 322
ARB samples .................................................. 206, 289 delete a signal ........................................................ 343
ARB samples total .................................................. 288 Delete a signal ........................................................ 173
ARB Settings .......................................................... 205 Diagnostics .............................................................. 203
ARB signal conflict .......................................... 173, 338 differential output swing .................................. 159, 310
ARB state ................................................................ 207 DIG IQ IN ................................................................ 173
ARB subsystem ...................................................... 287 DIG IQ OUT ............................................................ 174
ARB total samples .................................................. 207 direction GPIO ........................................................ 301
assigned data rate AxC .......................................... 336 Direction GPIO ........................................................ 162
Assigned data rate AxC .......................................... 187 Disconnect fast C&M .............................................. 200
available data rate I/Q ............................................ 337 Downlink .......................................................... 170, 329
Available data rate I/Q ............................................ 187 equalizer gain .......................................................... 310
AxC(s) / available data rate .................................... 187 Equalizer gain .......................................................... 159
AxC(s) / avalaible data rate .................................... 337 Ethernet .................................................................. 197
AxC(s) / data rate assigned .................................... 339 Ethernet active fast C&M ................................ 199, 291
AxC(s) / data rate needed .............................. 180, 340 Ethernet bit rate .............................................. 199, 291
AxC(s) / data rate status .................................. 181, 341 Ethernet command .................................................. 292
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 386

Ethernet execute .................................................... 292 HDLC rate ................................................................ 166

Ethernet pointer fast C&M .............. 167, 199, 202, 293 HDLC RS232 .......................................................... 195
Ethernet pointer L1 Analysis .................... 167, 199, 202 HDLC source .................................................. 195, 296
Ethernet pointer vendor data .................. 167, 199, 202 HDLC state ...................................................... 195, 297
Ethernet preferred pointer ...................................... 292 HDLC Terminal ........................................................ 195
Events ...................................................................... 169 High speed serial switch .......................................... 159
execute (Ethernet) .................................................. 292 Host fast C&M ........................................................ 199
EX-IQ-BOX board revision .............................. 154, 300 hyper frame ............................................................ 133
Fast C&M ................................................................ 197 I/Q data interleaving ................................................ 187
Fast C&M clear ........................................................ 200 I/Q recorder ............................................................ 150
Fast C&M command line ........................................ 200 I/Q resolution .................................................. 179, 345
Fast C&M connect .................................................. 200 input ........................................................................ 303
Fast C&M disconnect .............................................. 200 Input ................................................................ 160, 161
fast C&M Ethernet active ........................................ 291 Input/Output ............................................................ 161
Fast C&M Ethernet active ........................................ 199 Input window (fast C&M ) ........................................ 200
fast C&M Ethernet pointer ...................................... 293 Input window (HDLC) .............................................. 197
Fast C&M Ethernet pointer ...................... 167, 199, 202 internal loopback .................................................... 303
Fast C&M execute .................................................. 200 Internal loopback ............................................ 160, 161
Fast C&M host ........................................................ 199 internal reference clock .......................................... 308
Fast C&M input window .......................................... 200 Internal reference clock .......................................... 155
Fast C&M login/logout ............................................ 200 L1 analysis .............................................................. 163
Fast C&M logout ...................................................... 200 L1 Analysis Ethernet pointer .................... 167, 199, 202
Fast C&M password ................................................ 200 L1 analysis subsystem ............................................ 312
Fast C&M port ........................................................ 199 L1 inband protocol .................................................. 164
Fast C&M pref. Ethernet pointer .............................. 198 L1 inband protocol version ...................................... 165
fast C&M state ........................................................ 293 Line bit rate .............................................. 157, 186, 201
Fast C&M state ........................................................ 198 Link settings ............................................................ 157
File manager ............................................................ 152 List of signals .......................................................... 172
FPGA base version ........................................ 154, 300 load .......................................................................... 323
FPGA version .................................................. 154, 300 load waveform ........................................................ 289
Frame data .............................................................. 176 Load waveform ........................................................ 205
frames received (HDLC) .......................................... 295 Local LOF ................................................................ 168
Frames received (HDLC) ........................................ 197 Local LOS ................................................................ 168
frames sent (HDLC) ................................................ 296 Local RAI ................................................................ 168
Frames sent (HDLC) .............................................. 196 LOF .................................................................. 168, 306
frame structure ........................................................ 133 Login/logout fast C&M ............................................ 200
gain .......................................................................... 343 Logout (fast C&M ) .................................................. 200
Gain ........................................................................ 179 Logout (HDLC) ........................................................ 200
General purpose I/O ................................................ 161 LOS ................................................................ 168, 306
General purpose input/output .................................. 140 low level BER IQ words .......................................... 325
GPIO ........................................................................ 140 Low level BER received bits .................................... 193
GPIO 10MHz reference clock .......................... 162, 302 Low level BER test .................................................. 191
GPIO basic frame ............................................ 162, 302 low level BER test state .......................... 290, 324, 325
GPIO direction ................................................ 162, 301 Main configuration dialog ........................................ 150
GPIO hyper frame .......................................... 162, 302 Main controls .......................................................... 152
GPIO node B frame ........................................ 162, 302 main settings subsystem ........................................ 315
GPIO signal .................................................... 162, 302 mode ........................................................................ 315
GPIO signal low .............................................. 162, 302 Mode ........................................................................ 152
GPIO timing measurement clock .................... 162, 302 mode (HDLC) .......................................................... 295
GPIO trigger .................................................... 162, 302 Mode (HDLC) .......................................................... 195
Group pattern .......................................................... 183 mode master/slave .................................................. 299
Group repetition ...................................................... 183 Mode master/slave .................................................. 168
Group table ...................................................... 183, 186 Node B frame .......................................................... 133
Hardware ........................................................ 153, 154 Number of groups .................................................... 182
Hardware subsystem .............................................. 297 Number of groups (Auto) ........................................ 182
HDLC active .................................................... 196, 293 numeric format ........................................................ 346
HDLC bit rate .................................................. 195, 294 Numeric format ........................................................ 177
HDLC clear ...................................................... 197, 200 output .............................................................. 304, 305
HDLC command ...................................................... 197 Output .............................................................. 160, 161
HDLC execute ........................................................ 295 Output marker frame width ...................................... 163
HDLC frames received .................................... 197, 295 oversampling .......................................................... 348
HDLC frames sent .......................................... 196, 296 Oversampling .......................................................... 177
HDLC input window ................................................ 197 parameter overview ................................................ 138
HDLC logout ............................................................ 200 Password fast C&M ................................................ 200
HDLC mode .................................................... 195, 295 Pattern .................................................................... 173
HDLC mode direct .......................................... 195, 295 Pattern length .......................................................... 177
HDLC mode EN/DE coding ............................ 195, 295 Physical source ...................................................... 173
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 387

PLL status LED ........................................................ 141 Set to default .......................................................... 152

Port fast C&M .......................................................... 199 SFP1 output ............................................................ 304
PRBS ...................................................................... 173 SFP2 output ............................................................ 304
PRBS RX state ........................................................ 324 SFP bit rate .............................................................. 204
PRBS Tx state ........................................................ 290 SFP connector type ................................................ 204
PRBS TX state ........................................................ 325 SFP diagnostics .............................................. 204, 323
Pref. Ethernet pointer fast C&M .............................. 198 SFP info .......................................................... 204, 327
preferred pointer (Ethernet) .................................... 292 SFP input ................................................ 160, 161, 303
preset ...................................................................... 315 SFP LOS ........................................................ 204, 327
Preset ...................................................................... 152 SFP module alarms ................................................ 204
Protocol version ...................................................... 158 SFP module temperature ........................................ 204
R21 .......................................................................... 157 SFP module warnings ............................................ 204
recall ........................................................................ 323 SFP output ...................................................... 160, 161
Recall ...................................................................... 152 SFP part number .................................................... 204
Received seed ........................................................ 158 SFP Tx/Rx power .................................................... 204
Record .................................................................... 211 SFP Tx disabled ...................................................... 204
Recorder .................................................................. 174 SFP TX disabled ...................................................... 328
Recorder settings ............................................ 207, 316 SFP Tx fault ............................................................ 204
recording length ...................................................... 209 SFP TX fault ............................................................ 328
Recording status ...................................................... 210 SFP Vcc .................................................................. 204
Recording time ........................................................ 210 SFP vendor .............................................................. 204
REC test .......................................................... 152, 315 SFP wavelength ...................................................... 204
Reference clock ...................................................... 155 Show/Hide group details .......................................... 181
reference clock source ............................................ 308 Show/Hide signal details ........................................ 177
Reference clock source .......................................... 155 signal data rate assigned ........................................ 341
reference output locked .......................................... 308 signal data rate needed .......................................... 341
Reference output locked .......................................... 155 Signal definition ...................................................... 172
REF IN ............................................................ 155, 308 signal GPIO ............................................................ 302
Remote control commands ...................................... 286 Signal GPIO ............................................................ 162
Remote LOF ............................................................ 169 signal name ............................................................ 346
Remote LOS ............................................................ 169 Signal name ............................................................ 173
Remote RAI ............................................................ 169 Signal output ............................................................ 174
Remote Reset .......................................................... 169 signals active .......................................................... 338
Remote SDI ............................................................ 169 signal state .............................................................. 352
RE reset .......................................................... 170, 328 Signal state .............................................................. 173
Reset Rx BER ........................................................ 193 SMA input ................................................ 160, 161, 303
RE test ............................................................ 152, 315 SMA output .............................................. 160, 161, 305
rms level .................................................................. 348 SMA settings .......................................................... 158
Rms level ................................................................ 180 Software trigger armed ............................................ 189
RS232 baudrate ...................................................... 197 Software trigger run ................................................ 189
RS232 data bits ...................................................... 197 Source (AxC table) .................................................. 188
RS232 parity ............................................................ 197 source (HDLC) ........................................................ 296
RS232 stop bit ........................................................ 197 Source (HDLC) ........................................................ 195
Rx alarm LOS .......................................................... 166 standard digital signal .............................................. 350
RX alarm LOS ........................................................ 326 Standard digital signal ............................................ 175
Rx alarms LOF ........................................................ 166 Start condition .......................................................... 188
RX alarms LOF ........................................................ 325 State ........................................................................ 152
Rx alarms RAI ........................................................ 166 state fast C&M ........................................................ 293
RX alarms RAI ................................................ 326, 327 State fast C&M ........................................................ 198
Rx alarms reset ...................................................... 166 state HDLC .............................................................. 297
RX alarms reset ...................................................... 326 State HDLC ............................................................ 195
Rx alarms SDI ........................................................ 166 state vendor data .................................................... 353
Rx BER .................................................................... 193 State vendor data .................................................... 201
RX BER .................................................................. 324 Static frame ............................................................ 173
Rx equalizer ............................................................ 159 status all AxCs) ........................................................ 336
RX equalizer ............................................................ 310 status LEDs ............................................................ 140
sample rate .............................................................. 349 subchannel .............................................................. 133
Sample rate .................................................... 176, 210 Sync pattern ............................................................ 173
save ........................................................................ 323 T14 .......................................................................... 157
Save ................................................................ 152, 211 Target file ................................................................ 211
Scrambling seed ...................................................... 158 timing valid .............................................................. 311
SDI (SAP defect indication) ............................ 169, 329 TOffset .................................................................... 157
select receiver ........................................................ 303 top view .................................................................. 140
Select receiver ................................................ 160, 161 transmission protocol overview .............................. 129
select tansmitter .............................................. 304, 305 Trigger position ........................................................ 209
Select transmitter ............................................ 160, 161 Tx level adjustment .................................................. 159
set to default ............................................................ 315
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 388

TX level adjustment ................................................ 310 CPRI SFP ...................................................................... 142

Uplink .............................................................. 170, 329 connector ................................................................ 142
Vendor data ............................................ 200, 203, 352 interface .................................................................. 142
vendor data downlink CPRI RE .............................. 353 CPRI standard
Vendor data downlink CPRI RE .............................. 201 3GPP FDD ...................................................... 175, 350
vendor data downlink CPRI REC ............................ 353 CDMA 2000 .................................................... 175, 350
Vendor data downlink CPRI REC ............................ 201 GSM/EDGE .................................................... 175, 350
Vendor data Ethernet pointer .................. 167, 199, 202 LTE .................................................................. 175, 350
vendor data state .................................................... 353 sync pattern ............................................................ 350
Vendor data state .................................................... 201 user defined ............................................................ 350
Vendor data table .................................................... 203 User defined ............................................................ 175
vendor data uplink CPRI RE .................................... 353 WiMAX ............................................................ 175, 350
Vendor data uplink CPRI RE .................................. 201 CPRI test
vendor data uplink CPRI REC ................................ 353 diagnostic ................................................................ 245
Vendor data uplink CPRI REC ................................ 201 CPRI Test& Diagnostics
vendor word width .................................................. 353 SFP diagnostics ...................................................... 323
Vendor word width .................................................. 202 CPRI top view
View ........................................................................ 212 gerneral purpose IO connectors .............................. 140
wave file .................................................................. 338 PLL LED .................................................................. 141
Wave file .................................................................. 176 POWER LED .......................................................... 141
Waveform memory .................................................. 150 RX LED .................................................................... 141
word address (AxC table) ........................................ 336 TX LED .................................................................... 141
Word address (AxC table) ...................................... 188 CPRI TX/RX .................................................................. 142
Word length ............................................................ 186 connector ................................................................ 142
CPRI breakout board .................................................... 367 interface .................................................................. 142
CPRI communication link CPRI Viewer
status ...................................................................... 140 CPRI recorder .......................................................... 212
CPRI connectors Create directory ............................................................ 256
GPIO ........................................................................ 140 Crest factor
CPRI connector type CPRI ................................................................ 180, 342
Ethernet .................................................................. 367 Current Rx alarms
RS-232-C ................................................................ 367 CPRI ........................................................................ 166
SFP .......................................................................... 367
SMA ........................................................................ 367 D
User interface .......................................................... 367
CPRI control elements and connectors ................ 138, 367 Data bits
front panel ................................................................ 141 RS232 (CPRI) .......................................................... 197
rear panel ................................................................ 141 Data rate ................................................................ 102, 263
top view .................................................................. 140 DigIConf .......................................................... 102, 263
CPRI Diagnostics double .............................................................. 102, 263
SFP diagnostics ...................................................... 204 Data Rate
CPRI Ethernet ................................................................ 143 Single ...................................................................... 258
connector ................................................................ 143 Data settings .......................................................... 107, 108
interface .................................................................. 143 DigIConf .................................................................. 107
CPRI front view signal type .............................................................. 108
CPRI Ethernet connector ........................................ 143 word size ........................................................ 109, 275
CPRI RS-232-C connector ...................................... 142 Data Settings
CPRI SFP modules ................................................ 142 I/Q Polarity .............................................................. 275
CPRI TX/RX connector ............................................ 142 Data setup ...................................................................... 108
CPRI Output marker frame width bit order .......................................................... 110, 273
Basic ........................................................................ 163 data type .................................................................. 277
Hyper ...................................................................... 163 numeric format ................................................ 112, 273
Node B .................................................................... 163 signal type .............................................................. 276
CPRI protocol version strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275
CPRI L1 inband analysis ........................................ 165 strobe position ................................................ 114, 276
CPRI rear panel word alignment ................................................ 109, 272
user interface .......................................................... 141 word size ................................................................ 275
CPRI recorder ................................................................ 316 Data Setup
Discard .................................................................... 211 I/Q Polarity .............................................................. 275
Trigger source ........................................................ 209 numeric format ........................................................ 273
CPRI reference signal Data source
input ........................................................................ 140 CPRI recorder .......................................................... 209
CPRI RS-232-C ............................................................ 142 Data subsystem
connector ................................................................ 142 user defined ............................................................ 271
interface .................................................................. 142 Data tab ........................................................................ 108
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 389

Data type ........................................................................ 277 load .......................................................................... 100

DigIConf .................................................................. 277 logic type .......................................................... 99, 259
PFSAMPles ............................................................ 277 numeric format ................................................ 112, 273
SAMPles .................................................................. 277 preset ...................................................................... 260
DDR ...................................................................... 102, 263 reference frequency ........................................ 118, 269
Delay sample/clock rate ratio ............................................ 107
trigger - user defined ...................................... 120, 282 Sample/Clock rate ratio .......................................... 271
Delete ............................................................................ 255 sample rate ............................................................ 265
ARB ........................................................................ 249 save ........................................................................ 100
CPRI ........................................................................ 322 set to default ............................................................ 260
user defined ............................................................ 262 signal type ...................................................... 108, 276
Delete a seignal Simulation mode ........................................................ 23
CPRI ........................................................................ 343 strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275
Delete a signal strobe position ................................................ 114, 276
CPRI ........................................................................ 173 user defined state .................................................... 261
Delivery list ...................................................................... 29 winbar ........................................................................ 57
Device word alignment ................................................ 109, 272
Subsystem .............................................................. 239 word size ........................................................ 109, 275
Device driver .................................................................... 42 DIG IQ IN
Device ID CPRI ........................................................................ 173
Device manager ........................................................ 67 DIG IQ OUT
Device manager .............................................................. 65 CPRI ........................................................................ 174
Device ID .................................................................. 67 Digital baseband input .................................................... 32
Enter license key ...................................................... 68 Digital baseband output .................................................. 32
EX-IQ-BOX device .................................................... 66 Digital interface
Export license key .................................................... 68 I/Q IN ........................................................................ 32
Hardware .................................................................. 66 I/Q OUT .................................................................... 32
Import license key ...................................................... 68 status LEDs .............................................................. 30
Installed options ........................................................ 68 Direction .......................................................................... 99
Options ...................................................................... 67 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 301
Status information ...................................................... 68 DigIConf ............................................................ 99, 258
Update firmware ........................................................ 68 receiver .............................................................. 99, 258
Diagnostic transmitter .......................................................... 99, 258
CPRI test ................................................................ 245 Directory ........................................................................ 255
EX-IQ-BOX catalog ................................................ 244 Discard
save CPRI test report .............................................. 245 CPRI recorder .......................................................... 211
select EX-IQ-BOX .................................................... 248 Downlink
Subsystem .............................................................. 244 CPRI ................................................................ 170, 329
Diagnostics
CPRI ........................................................................ 203 E
CPRI SFP ................................................................ 323
Dialogs ............................................................................ 57 EBOX
Differential output swing Device subsystem .................................................. 239
CPRI ................................................................ 159, 310 Diagnostic subsystem .............................................. 244
DigIConf .......................................................................... 23 instrument subsystem .............................................. 251
Application window .................................................... 36 subsystem .............................................................. 248
bit order .......................................................... 110, 273 Enable automatic gain .................................................. 125
Block diagram ............................................................ 62 Enter license key
clock in skew .......................................................... 118 Device manager ........................................................ 68
clock phase ...................................................... 118, 267 Equalizer gain
clock polarity ............................................................ 267 CPRI ................................................................ 159, 310
clock rate ........................................................ 115, 268 Error indication ................................................................ 31
clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108 Error LED ........................................................................ 31
clock settings display .............................................. 107 Error queue query .......................................................... 238
clock skew .............................................................. 118 Ethernet active
clock source .................................................... 116, 270 CPRI fast C&M ................................................ 199, 291
Counter .................................................................... 119 Ethernet pointer
data rate .......................................................... 102, 263 CPRI fast C&M ................................ 167, 199, 202, 293
data settings ............................................................ 107 CPRI L1 Analysis .................................... 167, 199, 202
data type .................................................................. 277 CPRI vendor data .................................... 167, 199, 202
direction ............................................................ 99, 258 Ethernet pointer pref.
display ...................................................................... 54 CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 198
Download ............................................................ 23, 53 Events
format .............................................................. 101, 264 CPRI ........................................................................ 169
I/Q polarity .............................................................. 275 Execute
interleaving ...................................................... 104, 265 CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 292
CPRI HDLC ............................................................ 295
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 390

EXIQ TX test - sine frequency .................................. 123, 281

general commands .................................................. 239 TX test - state .................................................. 121, 281
EX-IQ-BOX word alignment ........................................................ 109
ARB file dialog ................................................ 205, 289 word size ........................................................ 109, 275
catalog .................................................................... 239 Word size (SSI) ...................................................... 124
diagnostic ................................................................ 244 Write byte ................................................................ 126
instrument name ...................................................... 251 EX-IQ-Box BBOUT
instrument port ........................................................ 252 bit order .................................................................. 273
instrument serial number ........................................ 252 Clock phase ............................................................ 267
instrument type ........................................................ 252 clock polarity ............................................................ 267
options .................................................................... 250 clock rate ................................................................ 268
select device .................................................... 244, 251 clock source ............................................................ 270
state ........................................................................ 251 data type .................................................................. 277
EX-IQ-Box BBIN I/Q Polarity .............................................................. 275
bit order .................................................................. 273 Logic Type .............................................................. 259
Clock phase ............................................................ 267 numeric format ........................................................ 273
clock polarity ............................................................ 267 sample/clock rate ratio ............................................ 271
clock rate ................................................................ 268 signal type .............................................................. 276
clock source ............................................................ 270 word alignment ........................................................ 272
data type .................................................................. 277 EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT ................................................ 99, 258
I/Q Polarity .............................................................. 275 bit order .................................................................. 110
Logic Type .............................................................. 259 C&M data ................................................................ 125
numeric format ........................................................ 273 C&M size ................................................................ 124
sample/clock rate ratio ............................................ 271 Chip select .............................................................. 126
signal type .............................................................. 276 Clock frequency ...................................................... 125
word alignment ........................................................ 272 clock in skew .......................................................... 118
EX-IQ-BOX BBIN .................................................... 99, 258 clock phase .............................................................. 118
bit order .................................................................. 110 Clock phase ............................................................ 125
C&M data ................................................................ 125 clock rate ................................................................ 115
C&M size ................................................................ 124 clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108
Chip select .............................................................. 126 clock settings display .............................................. 107
Clock frequency ...................................................... 125 clock setup .............................................................. 115
clock in skew .......................................................... 118 clock skew .............................................................. 118
clock phase .............................................................. 118 clock source ............................................................ 116
Clock phase ............................................................ 125 data rate .......................................................... 102, 263
clock rate ................................................................ 115 data settings ............................................................ 107
clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108 data tab .................................................................... 108
clock settings display .............................................. 107 data type .................................................................. 277
clock setup .............................................................. 115 direction .................................................................... 99
clock skew .............................................................. 118 format .............................................................. 101, 264
clock source ............................................................ 116 interleaving ...................................................... 104, 265
data rate .......................................................... 102, 263 Late frame sync ...................................................... 125
data settings ............................................................ 107 logic type .................................................................. 99
data tab .................................................................... 108 numeric format ........................................................ 112
direction .................................................................... 99 protocol tab .............................................................. 100
Enable automatic gain ............................................ 125 RX test - IQ words .......................................... 124, 279
format .............................................................. 101, 264 RX test - Rx BER ............................................ 124, 277
Gain file .................................................................. 125 RX test - signal ................................................ 123, 278
interleaving ...................................................... 104, 265 RX test - state .......................................................... 278
Late frame sync ...................................................... 125 RX test- state .......................................................... 123
logic type .................................................................. 99 sample/clock rate ratio ............................................ 107
numeric format ........................................................ 112 sample rate .............................................................. 265
protocol tab .............................................................. 100 signal type ...................................................... 108, 276
RX test - IQ words .......................................... 124, 279 SPI setup ................................................................ 125
RX test - Rx BER ............................................ 124, 277 SSI setup ................................................................ 124
RX test - signal ................................................ 123, 278 strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275
RX test - state .................................................. 123, 278 strobe position ................................................ 114, 276
sample/clock rate ratio ............................................ 107 TX test - signal ................................................ 121, 279
sample rate ............................................................ 265 TX test - sine amplitude .................................. 123, 280
signal type .............................................................. 108 TX test - sine frequency .................................. 123, 281
SPI setup ................................................................ 125 TX test - state .......................................................... 281
SSI setup ................................................................ 124 TX test- state .......................................................... 121
strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275 word alignment ........................................................ 109
strobe position ................................................ 114, 276 word size ........................................................ 109, 275
TX test - signal ................................................ 121, 279 Word size ................................................................ 124
TX test - sine amplitude .................................. 123, 280 Write byte ................................................................ 126
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 391

EX-IQ-BOX board revision F

CPRI ................................................................ 154, 300
EX-IQ-BOX device FFT diagram .................................................................... 78
Device manager ........................................................ 66 File ............................................................................ 55, 58
EX-IQ-Box Receiver CPRI ARB ........................................................ 205, 289
Clock Phase ............................................................ 267 exit ............................................................................ 58
clock polarity ............................................................ 267 menu .......................................................................... 58
clock source ............................................................ 270 new ............................................................................ 58
EX-IQ-Box RECeiver open .......................................................................... 58
bit order .................................................................. 273 save .......................................................................... 58
I/Q Polarity .............................................................. 275 save as ...................................................................... 58
Logic Type .............................................................. 259 File list ............................................................................ 254
numeric format ................................................ 112, 273 File management
Send to .................................................................... 260 CPRI ARB ........................................................ 205, 289
word alignment ...................................................... 272 File manager .................................................................. 152
EX-IQ-BOX receiver CPRI ........................................................................ 152
Enable automatic gain ............................................ 125 File menu ........................................................................ 55
EX-IQ-BOX Receiver Firmware update
Gain file .................................................................. 125 Device manager ........................................................ 68
EX-IQ-BOX RECeiver Format .................................................................... 101, 264
bit order .................................................................. 110 DigIConf .......................................................... 101, 264
clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108 parallel ............................................................ 101, 264
clock settings display .............................................. 107 serial ................................................................ 101, 264
data rate .......................................................... 102, 263 FPGA base version
data settings ............................................................ 107 CPRI ................................................................ 154, 300
data type .................................................................. 277 FPGA version
format .............................................................. 101, 264 CPRI ................................................................ 154, 300
interleaving ...................................................... 104, 265 Frame data
logic type .................................................................. 99 CPRI ........................................................................ 176
Send to ...................................................................... 94 Frames received
signal type ...................................................... 108, 276 CPRI HDLC .................................................... 197, 295
strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275 Frames sent
strobe position ................................................ 114, 276 CPRI HDLC .................................................... 196, 296
word alignment ........................................................ 109 Free run
word size ........................................................ 109, 275 CPRI recording status ............................................ 210
EXIQ-Box Settings .......................................................... 92 Frequency ...................................................................... 118
EX-IQ-Box Transmitter TX test - user defined ...................................... 123, 281
Clock Phase ............................................................ 267 Front panel ...................................................................... 30
clock polarity ............................................................ 267 breakout board .......................................................... 30
clock source ............................................................ 270 CPRI breakout board .............................................. 141
EX-IQ-Box TRANsmitter DIG I/Q IN/OUT 1 ...................................................... 30
bit order .................................................................. 273 DIG I/Q IN/OUT 2 ...................................................... 30
I/Q Polarity .............................................................. 275 ERROR LED .............................................................. 31
Logic Type .............................................................. 259 MODE LED ................................................................ 31
numeric format ................................................ 112, 273 PLL ............................................................................ 30
Send to .................................................................... 260 status LEDs .............................................................. 30
word alignment ...................................................... 272 user interface ............................................................ 31
EX-IQ-BOX TRANsmitter
bit order .................................................................. 110 G
clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108
clock settings display .............................................. 107 Gain
data rate .......................................................... 102, 263 CPRI ................................................................ 179, 343
data settings ............................................................ 107 Gain file .......................................................................... 125
data type .................................................................. 277 General commands
format .............................................................. 101, 264 EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 239
interleaving ...................................................... 104, 265 General information
logic type .................................................................. 99 CPRI ........................................................................ 154
Send to ...................................................................... 94 General Purpose I/O
signal type ...................................................... 108, 276 CPRI ........................................................................ 161
strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275 General purpose input/output
strobe position ................................................ 114, 276 CPRI ........................................................................ 140
word alignment ........................................................ 109 Getting started ................................................................ 26
word size ........................................................ 109, 275 connecting the EX-IQ-BOX ........................................ 42
Export license key control elements and connectors .............................. 29
Device manager ........................................................ 68 Installing DigIConf .................................................... 34
Installing EX-IQ-BOX options .................................... 44
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 392

safety instructions ...................................................... 26 I/Q resolution

Unpacking .................................................................. 29 CPRI ................................................................ 179, 345
GPIO Idle
CPRI ........................................................................ 140 CPRI recording status ............................................ 210
GPIO Direction Import license key
CPRI ................................................................ 162, 301 Device manager ........................................................ 68
GPIO Signal Index ................................................................................ 60
CPRI ................................................................ 162, 302 Indication
Group pattern Connected Device .................................................... 85
CPRI ........................................................................ 183 DIG I/Q IN labeled symbol, generator ...................... 85
Group repetition DIG I/Q OUT labeled symbol, generator .................. 85
CPRI ........................................................................ 183 ExBox status parameters, analyzer .......................... 90
Group table EX-IQ-BOX labeled symbol, generator ...................... 85
CPRI ................................................................ 183, 186 EX-IQ-Box Setttings, generator ................................ 85
GSM/EDGE EXIQ hotkey .............................................................. 90
CPRI standard ................................................ 175, 350 R&S signal analyzer´s diagram ................................ 90
R&S signal generator´s block diagram ...................... 85
H R&S signal generator´s settings dialogs .................... 85
Info
Hardware Hardware device manager ........................................ 66
CPRI ........................................................................ 153 Input
CPRI GPIO .............................................................. 161 CPRI ........................................................ 160, 161, 303
CPRI high speed serial switch ................................ 159 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 301
CPRI Input/Output .................................................. 161 I/Q IN ........................................................................ 32
CPRI link settings .................................................... 157 REF IN ...................................................................... 32
CPRI Output marker frame width ............................ 163 Input/Output
CPRI reference clock .............................................. 155 CPRI ........................................................................ 161
CPRI SMA settings .................................................. 158 Input window
Device manager ........................................................ 66 CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 200
General information (CPRI) .................................... 154 CPRI HDLC ............................................................ 197
Hardware components .............................................. 24, 25 Installed Options
Hardware subsystem Device manager ........................................................ 68
CPRI ........................................................................ 297 Installing DigIConf
HDLC active Destination location .................................................. 35
CPRI ................................................................ 196, 293 Hardware requirements ............................................ 34
HDLC command Installing .................................................................... 35
CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 197 Setup file .................................................................... 35
HDLC execute Software requirements .............................................. 34
CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 295 uninstall .................................................................... 38
Help .................................................................................. 60 Installing options
contents .................................................................... 60 Enter key code .......................................................... 44
index .......................................................................... 60 Indicate installed options .......................................... 44
menu .......................................................................... 60 Installing .................................................................... 44
Hide taskbar .................................................................... 70 Installing several options .......................................... 44
High speed serial switch Prerequisites ........................................................ 34, 44
CPRI ........................................................................ 159 Start DigIConf ...................................................... 34, 44
Host Instrument ........................................................................ 70
CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 199 subsystem .............................................................. 251
Hyper Instrument name
CPRI Output marker frame width ............................ 163 EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 251
Instrument port
I EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 252
Instrument serial number
I/Q data interleaving EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 252
CPRI ........................................................................ 187 Instrument settings
I/Q diagram ...................................................................... 75 change directory ...................................................... 255
I/Q IN ................................................................................ 32 create directory ........................................................ 256
I/Q IN/OUT delete ...................................................................... 255
connector .................................................................. 32 recall ........................................................................ 255
LED ............................................................................ 32 remove directory ...................................................... 256
I/Q OUT ............................................................................ 32 save ................................................................ 238, 256
I/Q Output Settings .......................................................... 87 Instrument type
I/Q polarity EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 252
DigIConf .................................................................. 275 Interface
I/Q Polarity .................................................................... 275 CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 143
Negative .................................................................. 275 CPRI RS-232-C ...................................................... 142
Positive .................................................................... 275 CPRI SFP ................................................................ 142
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 393

CPRI TX/RX ............................................................ 142 Logic type

LAN ............................................................................ 33 CMOS ........................................................................ 99
Interfaces ...................................................................... 355 DigIConf ............................................................ 99, 259
Interleaving ............................................................ 104, 265 LVDS ........................................................................ 99
DigIConf .......................................................... 104, 265 LVTTL ........................................................................ 99
I/Q Interleaved ................................................ 104, 265 SSI ............................................................................ 99
Not Interleaved ................................................ 104, 265 Logic Type .................................................................... 259
Q/I Interleaved ................................................ 104, 265 1.5V CMOS ............................................................ 259
Internal loopback 1.5V SSI .................................................................. 259
CPRI input .............................................. 160, 161, 303 1.8V CMOS ............................................................ 259
Internal reference clock 1.8V SSI .................................................................. 259
CPRI ................................................................ 155, 308 2.5V CMOS ............................................................ 259
IQ words 3.3V CMOS ............................................................ 259
RX test - user defined ...................................... 124, 279 LVDS ...................................................................... 259
LVTTL ...................................................................... 259
L Login/logout
CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 200
L1 analysis Logout
CPRI ........................................................................ 163 CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 200
HDLC rate (CPRI) .................................................... 166 CPRI HDLC ............................................................ 200
L1 analysis subsystem LOS
CPRI ........................................................................ 312 CPRI Rx alarms ...................................................... 166
L1 inband protocol CPRI RX alarms ...................................................... 326
CPRI ........................................................................ 164 CPRI status .................................................... 168, 306
CPRI protocol version .............................................. 165 Local ........................................................................ 168
HDLC rate (CPRI) .................................................... 166 Remote .................................................................... 169
LAN .................................................................................. 33 Low level BER test
connector .................................................................. 33 CPRI ........................................................................ 191
interface .................................................................... 33 Low level BER test IQ words
Pin assignment ........................................................ 357 CPRI ........................................................................ 325
Late frame sync ............................................................ 125 Low level BER test received bits
LED CPRI ........................................................................ 193
CPRI status ............................................................ 140 Low level BER test RX state
error .......................................................................... 31 CPRI ........................................................................ 324
I/Q IN/OUT ................................................................ 32 Low level BER test TX state
mode .......................................................................... 31 CPRI ........................................................................ 325
Power .................................................................. 34, 42 LTE
status ........................................................................ 30 CPRI standard ................................................ 175, 350
Level dBFS
CPRI ARB ................................................................ 207 M
Line bit rate
CPRI ........................................................................ 157 Main application window
CPRI 2x 1228.8 Mbit/s ............................................ 157 toolbar ........................................................................ 55
CPRI 4x 2457.6 Mbit/s ............................................ 157 Main controls
CPRI 5x 3072.0 Mbit/s ............................................ 157 CPRI ........................................................................ 152
CPRI vendor data .................................................... 201 user defined ............................................................ 258
Link settings Main settings
CPRI ........................................................................ 157 clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108
Link status ...................................................................... 167 clock settings display .............................................. 107
List of signals data rate .......................................................... 102, 263
CPRI DL/UL ............................................................ 172 data settings ............................................................ 107
Load ...................................................................... 262, 323 format .............................................................. 101, 264
CPRI ........................................................................ 323 interleaving ...................................................... 104, 265
DigIConf .................................................................. 100 logic type .................................................................. 99
user defined ............................................................ 262 Main settings subsystem
Load instrument settings ................................................ 255 CPRI ........................................................................ 315
Local Master
LOF (CPRI) .............................................................. 168 CPRI mode ...................................................... 168, 299
LOS (CPRI) ............................................................ 168 Menu ................................................................................ 55
RAI (CPRI) .............................................................. 168 Menu bar .......................................................................... 55
LOF Menus
CPRI Rx alarms ...................................................... 166 file .............................................................................. 58
CPRI RX alarms ...................................................... 325 File ............................................................................ 55
CPRI status .................................................... 168, 306 help ............................................................................ 60
Local ........................................................................ 168 tools .......................................................................... 59
Remote .................................................................... 169 MMEmory
subsystem .............................................................. 253
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 394

Mode Options conflict

CPRI ................................................................ 152, 315 CPRI ARB settings .................................................. 207
CPRI HDLC .................................................... 195, 295 Output
CPRI status .................................................... 168, 299 CPRI ................................................ 160, 161, 304, 305
Mode indication ................................................................ 31 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 301
Mode LED ........................................................................ 31 I/Q OUT .................................................................... 32
Multi waveform playback .................................................. 19 Output marker frame width
CPRI ........................................................................ 163
N Oversampling
CPRI ................................................................ 177, 348
Node B
CPRI Output marker frame width ............................ 163 P
Node B frame
CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302 Parity
Number of groups RS232 (CPRI) .......................................................... 197
CPRI ........................................................................ 182 Password
Numeric format .............................................................. 273 CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 200
2´s complement ...................................................... 273 Pattern
2´s Complement ...................................................... 112 CPRI ........................................................................ 173
binary offset ............................................................ 273 Pattern length
Binary Offset ............................................................ 112 CPRI ........................................................................ 177
CPRI ................................................................ 177, 346 PEP dBFS
DigIConf .......................................................... 112, 273 CPRI ARB ................................................................ 207
user defined ............................................................ 112 Physical source
CPRI ........................................................................ 173
O Pin assignments
Cadence palladium breakout board ........................ 364
Open file .......................................................................... 58 Differential breakout board ...................................... 361
look in ........................................................................ 58 single ended breakout board .................................. 359
Operation complete PLL
remote .................................................................... 237 status LED ................................................................ 30
Option Port
Check the installed .................................................... 46 CPRI fast C&M ........................................................ 199
CPRI ARB settings .................................................. 206 Power LED ................................................................ 34, 42
Option identification Power Spectrum diagram ................................................ 78
remote .................................................................... 237 Power supply .................................................................. 26
Options ............................................................................ 22 Power Supply .......................................................... 42, 144
1xEV-DO REV.A ........................................................ 23 PRBS
3GPP FDD ................................................................ 23 CPRI ........................................................................ 173
3GPP FDD Enhanced .............................................. 23 TX test signal - user ........................................ 121, 279
3GPP FDD HSUPA .................................................. 23 Preference ...................................................................... 69
CDMA 2000 incl. 1xEV-DV ........................................ 23 Default settings directory .......................................... 69
CPRI .......................................................................... 22 Info server port .......................................................... 70
CPRI RE .................................................................... 22 SCPI server port ........................................................ 70
CPRI REC ................................................................ 22 Preferred pointer
Device manager ........................................................ 67 CPRI Ethernet ........................................................ 292
differential breakout board ........................................ 21 Preset ............................................................................ 100
EDGE Evolution ........................................................ 23 CPRI ................................................................ 152, 315
EUTRA/LTE .............................................................. 23 DigIConf .................................................................. 260
EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 250 Protocol commands
GSM/EDGE .............................................................. 23 user defined ............................................................ 263
HSPA+ ...................................................................... 23 Protocol settings ............................................................ 100
IEEE 802.11n (WLAN-N) .......................................... 23 Protocol setup ................................................................ 100
IEEE 802.16 (WiMAX) .............................................. 23 Protocol tab .................................................................... 100
multi waveform playback .......................................... 23 clock rate/sample rate ............................................ 108
recording memory ...................................................... 23 clock settings display .............................................. 107
single ended breakout board .................................... 21 data settings display ................................................ 107
TD-SCDMA ................................................................ 23
TD-SCDMA Enhanced .............................................. 23 R
Tyco Z-Dok connector .............................................. 24
user defined protocols .............................................. 22 R&S instruments
waveform memory 64 MS .......................................... 23 PC .............................................................................. 34
Z2 demo breakout board .......................................... 24 signal analyzers ........................................................ 25
Z3 SCSI II / Palladium .............................................. 22 signal generators ...................................................... 25
Z4 MDR (Mini DeltaRibbon) ...................................... 22 wideband radio communication tester ...................... 25
Z6 LVDS cable .......................................................... 24 R21
CPRI ........................................................................ 157
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 395

Radio Equipment Control .............................................. 152 Reset (CPRI) .......................................................... 169

Radio Equipment Control test ........................................ 315 SDI (CPRI) .............................................................. 169
Radio Equipment test ............................................ 152, 315 Remote control .......................................................... 16, 18
RAI R&S DigIConf ............................................................ 16
CPRI Rx alarms ...................................................... 166 R&S instrument ........................................................ 18
CPRI RX alarms .............................................. 326, 327 SCPI .......................................................................... 16
Local ........................................................................ 168 Remote control commands
Remote .................................................................... 169 CPRI ........................................................................ 286
Ready User defined ............................................................ 257
CPRI recording status ............................................ 210 Remove directory .......................................................... 256
Rear panel ...................................................................... 32 RE reset
CPRI breakout board .............................................. 141 CPRI ................................................................ 170, 328
DIG I/Q IN/OUT2,1 connectors .................................. 32 Reset
IN/OUT LED .............................................................. 32 CPRI Rx alarms ...................................................... 166
LAN connector .......................................................... 33 CPRI RX alarms ...................................................... 326
LAN interface ............................................................ 33 remote .................................................................... 238
power supply ............................................................ 34 Remote .................................................................... 169
REF IN connector ...................................................... 32 Rx BER (CPRI) ........................................................ 193
USB connector .......................................................... 33 Restart
USB interface ............................................................ 33 trigger - user defined .............................................. 282
Recall ............................................................................ 152 Rms level
CPRI ................................................................ 152, 323 CPRI ................................................................ 180, 348
user defined ............................................................ 262 RS232
Recall instrument settings ...................................... 238, 255 Baudrate (CPRI) ...................................................... 197
Recall intermediate ........................................................ 238 CPRI HDLC ............................................................ 195
Received seed Data bits (CPRI) ...................................................... 197
CPRI ........................................................................ 158 Parity (CPRI) .......................................................... 197
Receiver .................................................................. 99, 258 Stop bits (CPRI) ...................................................... 197
CPRI ........................................................ 160, 161, 303 RS-232-C
Record CPRI HDLC ............................................................ 296
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 211 Run
Record done Software trigger CPRI .............................................. 189
CPRI recording status ............................................ 210 Rx BER
Recorder CPRI ........................................................................ 193
CPRI ................................................................ 174, 207 RX test - user defined ...................................... 124, 277
CPRI ARB toolbox .................................................. 212 RX BER
CPRI viewer ............................................................ 212 CPRI ........................................................................ 324
Recorder settings Rx equalizer
CPRI ........................................................................ 316 CPRI ........................................................................ 159
Recording RX equalizer
trigger source ............................................................ 74 CPRI ........................................................................ 310
Recording length RX test
CPRI ........................................................................ 209 EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - IQ words .......................... 124, 279
Recording memory .......................................................... 19 EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - Rx BER ............................ 124, 277
Recording status EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - signal ................................ 123, 278
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 210 EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - state .................................. 123, 278
Recording time EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - IQ words ...................... 124, 279
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 210 EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT -Rx BER .......................... 124, 277
Reference clock EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - signal ............................ 123, 278
CPRI ........................................................................ 155 EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - state .............................. 123, 278
CPRI clock recovery locked ............................ 155, 307 IQ words - user defined .................................. 124, 279
CPRI clock synthesis locked .......................... 155, 307 Rx BER - user defined .................................... 124, 277
CPRI reference output locked ........................ 155, 308 signal - user defined ........................................ 123, 278
CPRI source .................................................... 155, 308 state - user defined .......................................... 123, 278
Reference frequency ...................................................... 269
DigIConf .......................................................... 118, 269 S
Reference output locked
CPRI reference clock ...................................... 155, 308 Safety instructions ............................................................ 26
Reference signal connector overload .................................................... 26
input .......................................................................... 32 EMI suppression ........................................................ 26
REF IN ............................................................................ 32 LVDS levels .............................................................. 26
CPRI ................................................................ 155, 308 power supply ............................................................ 26
Remote risk of device damage ................................................ 26
LOF (CPRI) .............................................................. 169 risk of electrostatic discharge .................................... 26
LOS (CPRI) ............................................................ 169 shock hazard ............................................................ 26
RAI (CPRI) .............................................................. 169 Sample/clock rate ratio .................................................. 107
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 396

Sample/Clock rate ratio .................................................. 271 SFP part number

DigIConf .......................................................... 107, 271 CPRI ........................................................................ 204
Sample rate .................................................................... 265 SFP Tx/Rx power
CPRI ................................................................ 176, 349 CPRI ........................................................................ 204
CPRI ARB settings .......................................... 206, 290 SFP Tx disabled
CPRI recorder ........................................................ 210 CPRI ........................................................................ 204
DigIConf .................................................................. 265 SFP TX disabled
Samples CPRI ........................................................................ 328
CPRI ARB settings .......................................... 206, 289 SFP Tx fault
SAP defect indication CPRI ................................................................ 204, 328
CPRI ................................................................ 169, 329 SFP Vcc
Save ...................................................... 100, 152, 262, 323 CPRI ........................................................................ 204
CPRI ................................................................ 152, 323 SFP vendor
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 211 CPRI ........................................................................ 204
DigIConf .................................................................. 100 SFP wave length
user defined .................................................... 100, 262 CPRI ........................................................................ 204
Save/Recall Show/Hide group details
load .................................................................. 262, 323 CPRI ........................................................................ 181
Recall ...................................................................... 152 Show/Hide signal details
save ........................................................ 100, 262, 323 CPRI ........................................................................ 177
Save ........................................................................ 152 Show taskbar .................................................................. 70
Save CPRI test report Signal
diagnostic ................................................................ 245 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302
Save instrument settings ........................................ 238, 256 Signal data rate assigned
Save intermediate .......................................................... 238 CPRI ........................................................................ 341
SCPI ................................................................................ 16 Signal data rate needed
Scrambling seed CPRI ........................................................................ 341
CPRI ........................................................................ 158 Signal definition
SDI CPRI ........................................................................ 172
CPRI ................................................................ 169, 329 Signal high
CPRI Rx alarms ...................................................... 166 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302
Remote .................................................................... 169 Signal low
SDR .............................................................................. 258 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302
Select EX-IQ-BOX ................................................ 244, 251 Signal name
diagnostic ................................................................ 248 CPRI ................................................................ 173, 346
Select type Signal output
receiver .............................................................. 99, 258 CPRI ........................................................................ 174
transmitter .......................................................... 99, 258 Signals active
Select Type ...................................................................... 99 CPRI ........................................................................ 338
Send to .................................................................... 94, 260 Signal state
Settings subsystem CPRI ................................................................ 173, 352
user defined ............................................................ 261 Signal type ............................................................ 108, 276
Set to default .................................................................. 100 DigIConf .......................................................... 108, 276
SFP IF ............................................................................ 108
CPRI input .............................................. 160, 161, 303 IQ ............................................................................ 108
CPRI output .................................................... 160, 161 Signal Type
SFP1 IF ............................................................................ 276
CPRI output ............................................................ 304 IQ ............................................................................ 276
SFP2 Slave
CPRI output ............................................................ 304 CPRI mode ...................................................... 168, 299
SFP bit rate SMA
CPRI ........................................................................ 204 CPRI input .............................................. 160, 161, 303
SFP connector type CPRI output ............................................ 160, 161, 305
CPRI ........................................................................ 204 SMA settings
SFP Diagnostics CPRI ........................................................................ 158
CPRI ........................................................................ 204 Source
SFP info CPRI HDLC .................................................... 195, 296
CPRI ................................................................ 204, 327 trigger - user defined ...................................... 119, 282
SFP LOS Source (AxC table)
CPRI ................................................................ 204, 327 CPRI ........................................................................ 188
SFP module alarms SPI settings .................................................................... 125
CPRI ........................................................................ 204 Chip select .............................................................. 126
SFP module temperature Clock frequency ...................................................... 125
CPRI ........................................................................ 204 Clock phase ............................................................ 125
SFP module warnings Write byte ................................................................ 126
CPRI ........................................................................ 204
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 397

SPI setup ...................................................................... 125 Stobe position

Chip select .............................................................. 126 DigIConf .......................................................... 114, 276
Clock frequency ...................................................... 125 Stop bits
Clock phase ............................................................ 125 RS232 (CPRI) .......................................................... 197
Write byte ................................................................ 126 Strobe polarity ........................................................ 113, 275
SPI subsystem DigIConf .......................................................... 113, 275
User defined ............................................................ 283 negative .......................................................... 113, 275
SSI positive ............................................................ 113, 275
SPI settings ............................................................ 125 Strobe position ...................................................... 114, 276
SPI setup ................................................................ 125 Strobe settings
SSI general .................................................................... 124 strobe polarity .................................................. 113, 275
SSI settings .................................................................... 124 strobe position ................................................ 114, 276
C&M data ................................................................ 125 sync pattern
C&M size ................................................................ 124 CPRI standard ........................................................ 350
Enable automatic gain ............................................ 125 Sync pattern
Gain file .................................................................. 125 CPRI ........................................................................ 173
Late frame sync ...................................................... 125 System overview .............................................................. 14
Word size ................................................................ 124 accessories ................................................................ 24
SSI setup components .............................................................. 21
C&M data ................................................................ 125 Configuration software .............................................. 23
C&M size ................................................................ 124 DigIConf controlling the EX-IQ-BOX .......................... 14
Enable automatic gain ............................................ 125 hardware components .............................................. 25
Gain file .................................................................. 125 R&S instrument controlling the EX-IQ-BOX .............. 16
Late frame sync ...................................................... 125 receiver mode ............................................................ 14
Word size ................................................................ 124 transmitter mode .................................................. 14, 16
SSI subsystem
User defined ............................................................ 283 T
Standardized protocols
options ...................................................................... 22 T14
Start condition CPRI ........................................................................ 157
CPRI ........................................................................ 188 Target File
Starting R&S DigIConf .................................................... 36 CPRI recorder .......................................................... 211
State TCPIP address .............................................................. 214
CPRI ........................................................................ 152 Terminal
CPRI ARB settings .................................................. 207 CPRI HDLC .................................................... 195, 296
CPRI fast C&M ................................................ 198, 293 Test signal
CPRI HDLC .................................................... 195, 297 RX test - user defined ...................................... 123, 278
CPRI vendor data ............................................ 201, 353 TX test - user .................................................. 121, 279
EX-IQ-BOX .............................................................. 251 TX test - user defined ...................................... 121, 279
RX test - user defined ...................................... 123, 278 Test sine amplitude
TX test - user defined ...................................... 121, 281 TX test - user .................................................. 123, 280
user defined ...................................................... 99, 261 Test sine frequency
Static frame TX test - user .................................................. 123, 281
CPRI ........................................................................ 173 Test subsystem
Status user defined ............................................................ 277
CPRI communication link ........................................ 140 The card requires drivers.... ............................................ 39
CPRI core mode .............................................. 168, 299 Timing
CPRI hardware status alarm .................................. 298 CPRI status ............................................................ 311
CPRI l1 analysis .............................................. 152, 167 Timing measurement clock
CPRI LOF ........................................................ 168, 306 CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302
CPRI LOS ........................................................ 168, 306 Timing measurements .................................................. 156
CPRI master/slave .......................................... 168, 299 Tirgger subsystem
CPRI PLL LED ........................................................ 141 User defined ............................................................ 281
CPRI timing ............................................................ 311 TOffset
digital interface .......................................................... 30 CPRI ........................................................................ 157
PLL ............................................................................ 30 Toolbar ............................................................................ 55
trigger - user defined ...................................... 120, 283 Tool bar ............................................................................ 55
user interface ............................................................ 30 Tools ................................................................................ 59
Status all AxCs EX-IQ-BOX Device Manager .................................... 59
CPRI ........................................................................ 336 menu .......................................................................... 59
Status information Preferences .............................................................. 59
Device manager ........................................................ 68 Protection .................................................................. 59
Status LED ...................................................................... 30 Top view
CPRI clock recovery locked ............................ 155, 307 CPRI breakout board .............................................. 140
Status reporting system Transient recorder ............................................................ 71
common commands ................................................ 236 Transmitter .............................................................. 99, 258
CPRI ................................................ 160, 161, 304, 305
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 398

Trigger load .......................................................................... 262

arm - user defined .......................................... 120, 281 main controls .......................................................... 258
CPRI GPIO ...................................................... 162, 302 protocol commands ................................................ 263
delay - user defined ........................................ 120, 282 recall ........................................................................ 262
DigIConf - user defined ............................................ 119 Remote control commands ...................................... 257
restart - user defined .............................................. 282 save ........................................................................ 262
source - user defined ...................................... 119, 282 settings subsystem .................................................. 261
status - user defined ........................................ 120, 283 SPI subsystem ........................................................ 283
user defined ............................................................ 119 SSI subsystem ........................................................ 283
Triggered state ........................................................................ 261
CPRI recording status ............................................ 210 test subsystem ........................................................ 277
Trigger GP_1 (Marker 1) .................................................. 74 trigger ...................................................................... 119
Trigger mode .................................................................... 74 Trigger subsystem .................................................. 281
continuous ................................................................ 74 User defined:save .......................................................... 100
single ........................................................................ 74 User defined:state ............................................................ 99
Trigger position User defined state
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 209 DigIConf .................................................................. 261
Trigger source User interface .................................................................. 31
CPRI recorder .......................................................... 209 CPRI breakout board .............................................. 141
data valid .................................................................. 74 Pin assignment ........................................................ 355
External CPRI recorder .......................................... 209 Pin description ........................................................ 355
GP_0 (Marker 0) ........................................................ 74 User Interface ................................................................ 355
software .................................................................... 74 Connector ................................................................ 355
Software CPRI recorder .......................................... 209
Trigger type ...................................................................... 74 V
falling edge ................................................................ 74
high level .................................................................. 74 Vector diagram ................................................................ 76
low level .................................................................... 74 Vendor
rising edge ................................................................ 74 CPRI word width .................................................... 202
TX test Vendor data
DigIConf user .......................................................... 120 CPRI ........................................................ 200, 203, 352
EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - signal ................................ 121, 279 CPRI REC downlink ........................................ 201, 353
EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - sine amplitude ................ 123, 280 CPRI REC uplink ............................................ 201, 353
EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - sine frequency ................ 123, 281 CPRI RE downlink .......................................... 201, 353
EX-IQ-BOX BBIN - state .................................. 121, 281 CPRI RE uplink ................................................ 201, 353
EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - signal ............................ 121, 279 Vendor data table
EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - sine amplitude ............ 123, 280 CPRI ........................................................................ 203
EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - sine frequency ............ 123, 281 Vendor word width
EX-IQ-BOX BBOUT - state .............................. 121, 281 CPRI ........................................................................ 353
PRBS test signal - user .................................. 121, 279 View
signal - user defined ........................................ 121, 279 CPRI recorder .......................................................... 212
sine amplitude - user defined .......................... 123, 280 Visa resource string ...................................................... 214
sine frequency - user defined .......................... 123, 281
state - user defined .......................................... 121, 281 W
test signal - user .............................................. 121, 279
user defined ............................................................ 120 Wait for trigger
TYCO Z-DOK ................................................................ 355 CPRI recording status ............................................ 210
TYCO Z-Dok adapter board connector ............................ 31 Wave file
CPRI ................................................................ 176, 338
U Waveform file
CPRI ................................................................ 205, 289
Uninstalling ...................................................................... 38 Waveform memory .......................................................... 19
Update firmware .............................................................. 68 WiMAX
Uplink CPRI standard ................................................ 175, 350
CPRI ................................................................ 170, 329 Word address (AxC table)
USB CPRI ................................................................ 188, 336
Slave .......................................................................... 33 Word alignment .............................................................. 109
type B ........................................................................ 33 DigIConf .......................................................... 109, 272
USB IN ............................................................................ 33 Word Alignment ............................................................ 272
USB interface .................................................................. 33 LSB .................................................................. 109, 272
user defined MSB ................................................................ 109, 272
CPRI standard ................................................ 175, 350 word Size ...................................................................... 275
User defined Word size .............................................................. 109, 275
catalog .................................................................... 261 DigIConf .......................................................... 109, 275
Clock subsystem .................................................... 266 SSI .......................................................................... 124
data subsystem ...................................................... 271 Word width
delete ...................................................................... 262 CPRI vendor data ............................................ 202, 353
User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 399

EX-IQ-BOXK04 OperatingManual en 06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EX-IQ-BOXK04 OperatingManual en 06

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

EX-IQ-BOXK04 OperatingManual en 06

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R&S®EX-IQ-BOX

Digital Interface Module

and the R&S®DigIConf (Digital Interface Configurator) software.

© 2017 Rohde & Schwarz GmbH & Co. KG

Safety labels on products

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Notice, general danger location ON/OFF Power

Observe product documentation

Caution when handling heavy equipment Standby indication

Danger of electric shock Direct current (DC)

Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning

Caution ! Hot surface Alternating current (AC)

Protective conductor terminal Direct/alternating current (DC/AC)

Earth (Ground) Class II Equipment

Frame or chassis Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators

For additional information, see section "Waste

For additional information, see section "Waste

Warning! Laser radiation

For additional information, see section

Signal words and their meaning

Operating states and operating positions

Repair and service

Batteries and rechargeable batteries/cells

Waste disposal/Environmental protection

Instrucciones de seguridad elementales

Señalización de seguridad de los productos

Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado

Aviso: punto de peligro general Tensión de alimentación de PUESTA EN

Atención en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Indicación de estado de espera (standby)

Peligro de choque eléctrico Corriente continua (DC)

Advertencia: superficie caliente Corriente alterna (AC)

Conexión a conductor de protección Corriente continua / Corriente alterna (DC/AC)

Símbolo Significado Símbolo Significado

Conexión a tierra El aparato está protegido en su totalidad por un

Conexión a masa Distintivo de la UE para baterías y

Más información en la sección

Aviso: Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminación por

Más información en la sección

Advertencia: rayo láser

Más información en la sección

Palabras de señal y su significado

Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento

integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones, se deberá colocar el interruptor en el

pueden causar perturbaciones radioeléctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles

Baterías y acumuladores o celdas

Eliminación/protección del medio ambiente

Up-to-date information and upgrades

Europe, Africa, Middle East Phone +49 89 4129 12345

North America Phone 1-888-TEST-RSA (1-888-837-8772)

Latin America Phone +1-410-910-7988

Asia/Pacific Phone +65 65 13 04 88

China Phone +86-800-810-8228 /

2 Welcome to the R&S EX-IQ-BOX........................................................11

6 R&S EX-IQ-BOX Configuration...........................................................53

8 Remote Control Basics......................................................................213

User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 3

9 Remote Control Commands..............................................................236

User Manual 1409.5570.32 ─ 05 4

1.1 Documentation Overview